ICT501 Foundations of IT Report Sample

Assessment Details:

Choose one of the following areas to focus on for the consultation report. Assuming that you have received a request for consultation from an organization regarding one of these areas, you will conduct thorough research by consulting pertinent scholarly sources, including journal articles, conference papers, and textbooks. In this report you are required to review the developments, trends, opportunities and barriers for a chosen technological implementation or the concept, and then develop a consultation report with the recommendations and best practices.

Select one of these focus areas:

1. Machine Learning Applications in Healthcare

2. Quantum Computing and its Practical Applications

3. Cybersecurity in Internet of Things (IoT) Devices

4. Blockchain Technology for Secure Transactions

5. Augmented Reality (AR) and Virtual Reality (VR) in Education and Training

6. Data Privacy and Compliance in the Age of Big Data

7. Edge Computing and its Role in IoT and 5G Networks

8. Natural Language Processing (NLP) for Conversational Interfaces and Chatbots

9. Autonomous Vehicles and Intelligent Transportation Systems

10. Sustainable Computing and Green IT Practices

11. Wearable Technology and its Impact on Health and Wellness

12. 5G Networks and the Future of Wireless Communication

13. Smart Cities and Urban Informatics

14. Cloud Computing Security and Privacy Issues

15. Human-Computer Interaction (HCI) for Enhanced User Experience

Identify at least 10 recent scholarly articles related to your chosen focus area.

Assignment is of two parts. First section comprises of reviewing the findings and develop the consultation report. The second section requires to present a summary of your findings in a 3 min presentation.

Consultation report structure should be as follows:

1. Introduction (5 Mark)

In this section, you need to indicate a brief description of your chosen focus area. Discuss the objective of the consultation report and provide an outline of the structure of your document. Introduce the terminologies and definitions associated.

2. Technological Analysis (10 Mark)

Discuss the chosen technological implementation and its relevance to the modern Industry. Elaborate key features and capabilities of the technology you are analyzing. Further, document a comparison with alternative technologies.

3. Recent developments and trends (5 Marks)

Discuss the recent technological advancements, market trends and consumer preferences.

4. Opportunities and Challenges (5 Marks)

Discuss how the technology area of your choice creates opportunities to formulate effective business solutions for organizations. Also identify the challenges associated.

5. Ethical, privacy and governance concerns (5 Marks)

Discuss how the chosen technology impacts the ethical, privacy and governance concerns of the stakeholders.

6. Recommendations and best practices (5 Marks)

Summarize the recommendations and propose the best practices.

7. Documentation and References (5 Marks)

Provide all the in text citations and references in APA 7 format.

Solution

Introduction

With the rise of 5G networks, everyone has been informed that wireless communication technology will change in an unprecedented manner to offer high speeds, high reliability as well as efficiency. The purpose of this report is to establish an understanding of 5G and its impact on 5G including SME and recommend on strategies to be implemented in the same. This report for the Assignment Helpline adopted the following structure: overview and foundation of 5G technology, technological report, recent development and trends, opportunities, challenges, ethical, privacy, and governance issues, conclusion and recommendations, and best practices.

Technological Analysis

1.1 Technology implementation and its relevance to the modern Industry

5G Networks, the fifth generation of mobile network technology, are revolutionizing wireless communication by offering unprecedented speed, reduced latency, and enhanced connectivity. These advancements are pivotal in an era where the demand for seamless and rapid data transmission is escalating across industries. Unlike its predecessors, 5G provides significantly higher bandwidth, enabling faster data transfer rates that can reach up to 10 Gbps. This transformative capability is not just about speed; it also supports a massive number of devices, paving the way for the Internet of Things (IoT) to flourish (Salih et al., 2020).

In the modern industry, 5G is particularly relevant as it underpins the digital transformation initiatives essential for competitiveness and innovation. For instance, in the production sector, 5G enables the formation of such connected smart factories wherein machines can effectively communicate in real-time, and optimize production line, managing time for repairs, and increasing production efficiency. In the field of healthcare 5G allows for remote surgeries and detailed teleconferencing through services such as high definition video conferencing that requires low latency and dependable connections to be useful in important cases. The automotive industry too gains from 5G, for example, the implementation of self-driving cars : autonomous vehicles requires nearly real-time exchange of data with infrastructure and other vehicles (Vaigandla & Venu, 2021).

Moreover, 5G also possesses the merits of low latency and high reliability for the applications of next-generation immersive media technologies like Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality, which demands real-time processing of data to provide continuous user experience. These technologies are gradually implemented in different sectors depending on their needs in education, entertainment, or real estate by providing new concepts of perceiving digital content (Torres et al., 2020).

1.2 Key features and capabilities of the technology

The key features are-

- Enhanced Speed and Bandwidth: For the 5G networks and wireless communication, the data transfer speed is at least one order of magnitude higher and can reach up to 10 Gbps. This increased velocity includes increased streaming capability, fast downloading, and in general, affords better connectivity.

- Ultra-Low Latency Another area where 5G representatives do not propose communication speeds above certain numbers, but note that 5G networks stand out for their values of 1 ms or less. This is especially relevant for the context of demand-response systems, like self-driving cars, robotic operations performed remotely on the human body, internet video games (Fruehe, 2024).

- Massive Device Connectivity: 5G can support up to a million devices per square kilometer, facilitating the growth of the Internet of Things (IoT). This capability is essential for smart cities, where numerous sensors and connected devices operate simultaneously.

- Energy Efficiency: 5G technology is designed to be more energy-efficient, ensuring longer battery life for connected devices, which is particularly beneficial for IoT applications.

- Network Slicing: This feature allows the creation of virtual networks tailored to specific applications or industries. Network slicing ensures optimal performance and reliability for various use cases, from emergency services to entertainment.

- Improved Reliability and Security: Enhanced encryption and advanced security protocols in 5G ensure more secure data transmission, crucial for sensitive applications in finance, healthcare, and defense (Intel, 2024).

Figure 1: Key features and capabilities of the technology
(Source: ISRMAG, 2022)

1.3 Comparison with alternative technologies

Table 1: Comparison with alternative technologies

2 Recent developments and trends

2.1 Technological Advancements

- Enhanced Infrastructure and Deployment: Some of the latest innovations in 5G technology adoption include the fast progressing miniature cellular structures known as small cell networks which are additional to the extended macro cell stations. Small cells enhance spectrum density optimality, particularly in cities, so as to offer reliable high-speed data connection (Kaur et al., 2020). Also, pertaining to beamforming that has marked developments in amplifying the signal power and dependability, intensify 5G performance especially within crowded areas.

- Integration with Edge Computing: Thus, extending the integration of 5G with edge computing is a crucial advancement. An edge computing involves the processing of data closer to the source of the data collecting it allowing for faster rates of response. This is important for applications that need real time data processing for instance; self-driving automobile, the augmented reality, and the virtual reality.

- AI and Machine Learning: AI and machine learning are adopted in 5G network to enhance efficiency in networks, throughput, self-organizing networks, traffic control, and self-healing and self-organizing networks to avoid network challenges (Dangi et al., 2021). It also improves the quality and effectiveness of the 5G services through these technologies in transmitting information.

2.2 Market Trends

- 5G Infrastructure Investment: Operators continuing aggressive buildouts of 5G radio hardware and core network upgrades.

- Fixed Wireless Access (FWA): 5G FWA broadband is an alternative to cable/fiber, with Verizon, T-Mobile launching widespread residential/business offerings.

- Private 5G Networks: Enterprises deploying dedicated on-premises 5G for secure IIoT, robotics manufacturing use cases.

- Telco Cloud Platforms: Telecoms launching cloud platforms (e.g. AWS Wavelength, Azure for Operators) to monetize 5G+edge capabilities (Custom Market Insights, 2024).

2.3 Consumer Preferences

- 5G Mobile Data Demand: Rising mobile data usage (video, AR, cloud gaming) driving consumer demand for faster, low-latency 5G connections.

- 5G Phones: Over 1 billion 5G smartphone subscriptions globally in 2022 with continued growth as users upgrade devices.

- 5G Home Broadband: In underserved areas, 5G FWA seen as an affordable alternative to cable/fiber for fast home internet (Fact.MR, 2024).

Opportunities and Challenges

Opportunities

- Enhanced Connectivity and Productivity: This will be through providing organizations with a much-improved networking connectivity something that 5G technology and Wireless communication can bring to the business world today. For instance, the manufacturing firms can employ smart production lines through the help of the 5G technology to enhance the efficiency of the machines and the systems used by interconnecting them to perform the required actions in real time, for purposes of monitoring and maintaining the machines, as well as making production line enhancements. They increase efficiency and slice viable periods, boosting operation (Gustavsson et al., 2021).

- Innovative Business Models: 5G brings in high speed and low latency that can unlock new business models in organization. For example, a company in the telecommunication sector will be able to provide new services, such as streaming and cloud-based gaming, of even more enhanced and significantly higher quality with the particular frequency band. By using augmented reality (AR) technology and applications, the physical shops’ retailers can create engaging shopping experiences for consumers, and the extending of telemedicine services such as surgeries and constant patient tracking means reaching out for audiences that cannot be addressed across traditional manners at this point.

- Data-Driven Decision Making: Thus, throughputs of 5G, businesses can gather and process enormous amounts of data almost simultaneously. This capability enables business insight and data-driven decision-making through analytical and AI tools. For instance, logistics companies can leverage it to real-time analyzing to find the best strategies, cuts down expenses on logistics, and enhance customer satisfaction levels on their deliveries and fleet management (Mourtiz et al., 2021).

- Support for IoT and Smart Applications: It also underlines how 5G is an enabler of the Internet of Things and smart solutions. Cities can apply sophisticated physical structures such as bean network of traffic lights, smart networks, and leaders for environmental tracking, which improves urban life. E-commerce companies and original equipment manufacturers can leverage the IoT to develop better monitoring programs for assets, supply chains, and security systems to gain a competitive advantage in the market on the basis of efficiency of operations.

- Remote Work and Collaboration: Remote work proceeds due to the COVID-19 pandemics but will continue to develop even in the future. The implementation of 5G makes it convenient for organizations to conduct business remotely through high-quality video conferencing, virtual collaboration as well as high encrypted remote business applications (Rodriguez et al., 2021).

Figure 2: Opportunities of 5G Networks and the Future of Wireless Communication
(Source: Author, 2024)

Challenges

- High Deployment Costs: 5G deployment entails significant initial expenses as costs are incurred to install the necessary 5G infrastructure. The networks required for small cells, the upgrade of current infrastructure, and purchasing licenses for spectrum may result in high capital expenses, a challenge in particular for SMEs.

- Security Concerns: In combination with the integration of 5G technology, the opportunity for certain threatening cyber-attacks also do the same. While the multitude of interconnected devices helps security personnel to have more opportunities to penetrate the series of connected devices, it opens gates to dangerous threats also. It is imperative to establish strong security protocols but it is a daunting task as seen with the various and worsening attacks (Banker, 2024).

- Technological Integration: It’s relatively easy to apply new technologies to 5G on the existing foundations. Organizations have to check how suitable their existing systems and devices are with 5G networks. This may require create increases or replacements, the process of which may sometimes take a lot of time and money.

- Regulatory and Compliance Issues: The 5G technology is faced with some legal and compliance risks for its deployment is confined to specific regulations in different regions. Such regulations can be complex for organization to manage, especially those operating in two or more countries, each with different regulatory requirements and legal frameworks.

- Spectrum Availability: it can also state that it is one more factor that has to be taken into consideration. In some zones, spectrum availability is scant or closely contested, and this will hamper the rollout of 5G networks and adversely affect the pp prices that businesses would have to pay in order to adopt the new technology.

- Public Health and Environmental Concerns: There are ongoing public debates and concerns about the potential health effects of 5G radiation and its environmental impact. Addressing these concerns requires transparent communication and rigorous scientific research to reassure the public and policymakers (Banker, 2024).

Figure 3: Challenges of 5G Networks
(Source: Author, 2024)

3 Ethical, privacy and governance concern

3.1 Mitigating Concerns

To address these ethical, privacy, and governance issues, stakeholders must adopt a multi-faceted approach:

- Equitable Deployment: Ensure that 5G infrastructure development is inclusive, providing access to underserved and rural communities to bridge the digital divide.

- Data Protection: Implement robust data protection policies and technologies to safeguard user privacy, including encryption and secure data storage.

- Regulatory Compliance: Maintain compliance with regional and international data protection and cybersecurity regulations, regularly updating practices to align with evolving laws.

- Public Engagement: Engage with the public to address health and environmental concerns transparently, providing clear communication and evidence-based information.

- Support for Workers: Develop programs to support workers displaced by automation, offering retraining and education opportunities to transition into new roles.

Figure 4: Mitigation strategies
(Source: Author, 2024)

Recommendations and best practices

3.2 Recommendations

- Inclusive Deployment: Invest in expanding 5G infrastructure to rural and underserved areas to bridge the digital divide and ensure equitable access to advanced technology.

- Regulatory Compliance: Ensure compliance with all relevant data protection and cybersecurity regulations across different regions, regularly updating practices to stay aligned with evolving laws.

- Workforce Transition Support: It also needs to develop training and education programs that will help workforce that has been rendered obsolete by automation and new technologies made possible by 5G to transition to new career paths (Aranda et al., 2021).

- Public Communication: Communicate with the public clearly regarding health and environmental risks and privacy issues associated with 5G to reduce misinformation.

3.3 Best Practices

- Collaborative Partnerships: Popular partnerships with local governments, businesses, and communities to promote inclusive 5G connectivity and respond to the region’s essential issues (Mourtzis et al., 2021).

- Proactive Risk Management: Carry out frequent risk analysis and take appropriate prevention steps to tackle possible cybersecurity and data privacy issues.

- Continuous Innovation: Equip 5G for the long-term competition and innovation by investing on research and development of enhanced technology and services.

- User Education: Engage the consumers and the businesses on the benefits, uses as well as the measures to be taken to prevent the misuse of 5G.

- Sustainable Practices: Assure the environment friendly deployment and functioning of 5G infrastructure to reduce the ecological footprint (Rodriguez et al., 2021).

4 References

 

IFN552 System Analysis and Design Assignment 1 Sample

In this Assignment, you will take what you have learnt in weeks 1, 2 and 3 and apply this to a case. You will develop a list of questions that you would ask key stakeholders to elicit requirements, distil stakeholder needs into functional requirements in a Requirements Matrix, draw a Use Case Diagram and Activity Diagram. You will also justify your designs in short descriptions accompanying each of these outputs.

1. Read the Criterion-Referenced Assessment Rubric at the end of this document.

2. Read Case 1 (below) which pertains to all elements of this assignment.

3. Develop and document a list of questions for two of the key stakeholders to specifically gather functional requirements. Aim for approximately 10 key questions for each stakeholder type (you can also choose to add follow-up sub-questions if necessary).

4. Try out your questions on the Grower, Customer and Business chatbots (available by the end of Week 1) on Slack by entering a conversation with each under the “Apps” dropdown in the IFN552 Slack channel. Note the chatbots are there to provide you with an opportunity to practice asking stakeholder questions and to provide additional ‘bonus’ information about the case; they will not be able to answer all of your questions, but can help you explore and brainstorm some of the needs for the stakeholders. Please do not rely solely on these to develop your list of requirements.

5. Develop a Requirements Matrix to show the functional requirements of the new system. Aim for:

a) 15 Essential Functional Requirements

b) 5 Desirable Functional Requirements

c) 1 Optional Functional Requirement

You should include the suggested number for each priority of requirements, totalling around 21 Functional Requirements in your matrix. A small amount less or more may be ok depending on the quality of the ones you include, but you will need to stay around the number stated above. Whilst each will have certain priority, and the list may not be comprehensive, you need to ensure that all are relevant to the case and are concise, specific, measurable and actionable.

6. In 250 words or less, justify your choices (i.e. How/why did you decide to split the system into the modules you chose? How did you decide on priorities? Is there a particularly novel or unusual requirement that you have identified – if so, how does it meet the needs of your stakeholders? etc.).

7. Draw 1 (one) Use Case Diagram representing the new integrated system described in the case.

a) Aim to include around 15-20 Use Cases in your diagram (no more than 23). Ensure that the use cases you do include are important and relevant to the process being represented.

8. In 250 words or less also introduce your use case diagram (i.e. what is it describing? At which points do users interface with the system? What is outside the scope of your diagram? Etc.).

9. Draw an Activity Diagram, representing how a grower would order a kit on the website, monitor the growth of their produce, organize a swap for their grown produce with replenishment seeds/cuttings and

a customer eventually ordering some of that produce via the website.

You can start with the following assumptions:

a) Assume that the grower and customer are already in logged in states at the beginning of their processes (i.e., no need to include activities involved in login/register)

b) The delivery process is handled by an external company. There is therefore no need to include any activities associated with the delivery process other than those that involve the system being designed and/or other actors in the process

Remember to balance detail with clarity in your diagram. Take note of the following guidelines regarding scope:

a) Use around 2-3 swimlanes to differentiate system activities initiated by different actors. For activities performed by a subsystem with no interaction with an actor, you may use a separate “system” swimlane, however, ensure all other activities performed in actor swimlanes describe system interactions.

b) Use up to 60 shapes – ideally around 50 shapes – (shapes include boxes, decision nodes, fork and join, arrows, etc.) to show the process of user activities.

c) Use decision nodes two or three times and fork and join two or three times in your model.

d) Preferably, your activity diagram will be vertical, rather than horizontal (this will make it easier when merging it into the submission PDF).

10. Write a short description of your Activity Diagram in 250 words or less. Imagine you are presenting it to a set of stakeholders and you need to introduce concisely what it is showing (~1-2 sentences) and mention a few interesting/important activities or flows, as well as parts where you have made assumptions (~3-4 sentences).
Note that it’s important to practice this skill, as you will need to contextualise designs/diagrams when you create reports/presentations.

Solution

List of questions

Stakeholder #1: Growers

1. How frequently would you like to receive updates on the growth of your plants?

2. What kind of data would you like to see about the plants' growth? (e.g. temperature, humidity, light levels)

3. How would you prefer to receive updates on the growth of your plants? (e.g. email, SMS, app notifications)

4. What information would be helpful for you to know about the exchange process with delivery personnel?

5. Would you prefer to have the option to customize the seeds/cuttings you receive in your kit?

6. What would be your preferred method for providing feedback on the Grow Kit and the plants' growth?

7. How would you like to be paid for the produce you grow? (e.g. bank transfer, PayPal)

8. What kind of support would be helpful for you during the growing process? (e.g. online tutorials, live chat support)

9. How frequently would you like to receive new seeds/cuttings?

10. Would you be willing to provide additional information about your location and growing conditions to help improve the Grow Kit and plant growth?

Stakeholder #2: Website Users

1. What kind of user account management features would you like to see on the website?

2. How would you like to receive notifications about inventory levels and forecasts?

3. What kind of analytics would be helpful for you to have access to about plant growth and inventory management?

4. What kind of user data would be helpful for the website to collect to improve the user experience?

5. How would you like to be able to communicate with growers through the website? (e.g. messaging, chat)

6. What kind of security measures would you like to see implemented on the website?

7. What kind of payment processing system would be most convenient for you to use?

8. What kind of customer service features would be helpful for you to have access to on the website?

9. What kind of reporting features would be helpful for you to have access to on the website?

10. How frequently would you like to receive updates about the website's functionality and new features?

Requirement matrix

Requirements Matrix for Micro-Farming Start-Up

(Rodriguez et al., 2022)

The essential functional requirements are necessary for the system to function as intended. Without the sensor data collection, display, and algorithm integration, the business cannot accurately forecast produce availability and manage inventory levels. Produce collection and replenishment, along with the delivery driver booking system, are required to manage the exchange of produce and replenishment kits between the business and Growers. The integration of Grow Predict with the online store inventory management is essential to ensure accurate stock levels and provide customers with available produce. Lastly, Growers require the ability to select grow kit size and type of produce to grow, and to receive starter kits with all necessary components (Wang et al., 2020).

The desirable functional requirements, while not critical to the system, provide additional benefits to the stakeholders. Allowing customers to customize produce boxes and providing subscription-based discounts can increase sales and customer loyalty. Nutritional information can appeal to health-conscious customers, and feedback from Growers can improve the quality of the products. Alerts to Growers can help ensure healthy plant growth. The optional functional requirement enables Growers to sell excess produce to the online store, providing an additional revenue stream for Growers and increasing the variety of available produce for customers. However, this functionality is not essential to the system and may require additional resources to implement (Rodriguez et al., 2022).

The functional requirements for the assignment help have been prioritized based on the impact on the business and the needs of the stakeholders. The system has been divided into modules to ensure efficient development and management of each aspect.
Use case diagram

Figure 1 Use case Diagram.

The use case diagram describes the interactions between the actors and the system at the various touchpoints. Growers interact with the system through the Grower Portal, where they manage their Grow Kits and sell their produce. Customers interact with the system through the Online Store, where they browse and purchase produce boxes. The GrowPredict Algorithm interacts with the system to provide inventory forecasting based on the sensor data from the Grow Kits (AL-Msie'deen et al., 2022). Outside the scope of this diagram are the technical details of the system, such as the database and server infrastructure, and the specifics of the sensor data collection and analysis. The diagram shows the relationships between the actors and the system components and illustrates the flow of data and actions between them. It is important to note that the scope of the diagram does not include specific details about the sensors or the algorithm, but rather focuses on the high-level interactions between the actors and the system components (Arifin & Siahaan, 2020).
Activity diagram

Figure 2 Activity diagram.

The Activity Diagram is a visual representation of the steps involved in the Grower portal, from purchasing a kit to harvesting produce and replenishing it with new seeds/cuttings. The diagram shows the flow of activities, including the monitoring of plant growth, the notification system for harvest, and the scheduling of pickup/delivery times. It also includes assumptions, such as the delivery driver being booked automatically and the company paying for the products based on the weight of usable produce. An interesting flow is the integration of GrowPredict, which forecasts when certain products will be available and in what numbers, and how it helps connect the online store and the Grower portal (Bakar et al., 2020).

References

Introduction To Cyber Safety Report Sample

Scenario 1

Assume you and your group members are the owners of a small consultancy company located in Sydney. There are 20 employees working to support you and the external clients. Due to the COVID -19 pandemic, you have decided to allow the staff members to work from their home. They can take the work laptops to home or use their own devices instead. The staff members are required to use computer/laptop/mobile, smart board, Smart TV, and Multi-Functional Devices (e.g., printer, scanner). Often you organize the staff meeting using zoom or similar meeting tool e.g., MS Teams. The daily activities of the staff require them to use the computing devices for accessing and storing their files securely in their folders (individual works) and a shared folder (files required for all), as well as all the regular digital activities e.g., reading, writing, and sending emails, prepare reports using MS Office software and several other software applications, (for some, make financial transactions for the clients).

You are required to guide your staff members to follow the cyber safety practices while connecting to the internet from home using either their work or personal devices. To do so, you need to prepare safety instructions so that they are minimizing the risks.

Please prepare the guidelines for the staff members which may include but not limited to:

1. Identification of the digital assets of the organization.

2. How to secure the devices which connect to the internet.

3. Identify the risks and vulnerabilities they may face.

4. Safety practice measures to protect and safeguard devices and digital information etc.

Scenario 2

Investigate security and privacy features of 2 – 3 popular social media (e.g., Facebook, LinkedIn) platforms and make a recommendation of the preferred platform based on comparison of the security and privacy features available for their users. Furthermore, include a

- recommendation on strategies for protecting users on digital platforms

- guideline for young people to follow to keep themselves safe in their digital lives

Solution

Scenario – 1

There is a growing need to keep up with cybersecurity precautions to safeguard sensitive data as more workers choose to do their jobs from home. These are some precautions staff members may take to keep your electronics and data secure:

- Always make use of robust passwords when logging into any of the connected devices or software. All of these factors—upper- and lower-case letters, numbers, and symbols—make for a password that is both secure and easy to remember. Common terms, phrases, or information about the employee themselves should be avoided in passwords (Freedman 2023).

- Turn on two-factor authentication everywhere it is supported. By requiring a second authentication element, such a code given to the employee's mobile phone, two-factor authentication increases security (Freedman 2023).

- Always use the most recent updates for your programs. Old versions of programmes and software are a common target for hackers because of security holes they introduce. So, it is crucial to apply patches and updates to close the security holes (Kaspersky 2022).

- Make sure that the anti-virus software is up to date and in use. Devices protected by anti-virus software check for and prevent the installation of harmful software. Keeping it updated means it will be able to identify the latest dangers (Kaspersky 2022).

- Protect the data on the gadget by encrypting it. To prevent unauthorised access to private data, it may be encrypted and then decrypted using a special key. If the device is lost or stolen, the data will still be safe because of this precaution (Kaspersky 2022).

- Only connect to private Wi-Fi hotspots. In most cases, hackers may easily get access to and steal information from public Wi-Fi networks. Workers should connect only via a virtual private network (VPN) or their own private networks at home (Freedman 2023).

- Employees may reduce their exposure to cyber dangers when working from home by adhering to these safety procedures. Staff members must be taught to spot any unusual behaviour and notify the IT department promptly.

Scenario – 2

1.

LinkedIn and Facebook are two of the most popular social networking platforms globally. Both platforms for the assignment help have security and privacy features to safeguard their users' data. However, there are significant differences in the features offered by both platforms (Scroxton 2022).
LinkedIn primarily focuses on professional networking, and hence, it prioritizes the security and privacy of its users (Scroxton 2022). Some of the essential security and privacy features available on LinkedIn are:

- Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) - LinkedIn allows users to enable 2FA for their accounts, adding an extra layer of security.

- Privacy Settings - Users can control their privacy settings and determine who can see their profile and the information on it.

- Encrypted Communication - LinkedIn uses HTTPS to encrypt communication between the user's device and the server.

- Endorsement Control - Users can choose to accept or decline endorsements from other users.

- Data Download - Users can download their data, including their connections, messages, and other information, for backup purposes.

Facebook, on the other hand, is a platform for social networking, which means that users share personal information and data with their friends and family (Germain 2022). Some of the essential security and privacy features available on Facebook are:

- Two-Factor Authentication (2FA) - Facebook allows users to enable 2FA for their accounts, adding an extra layer of security.

- Privacy Settings - Users can control their privacy settings and determine who can see their profile and the information on it.

- Encrypted Communication - Facebook uses HTTPS to encrypt communication between the user's device and the server.

- Ad Preferences - Users can control the ads they see and the information used to show them.

- Data Download - Users can download their data, including their posts, messages, and other information, for backup purposes.

Based on the above security and privacy features, LinkedIn is the preferred platform for professional networking, while Facebook is suitable for social networking. However, users must also take additional measures, such as using strong passwords, avoiding clicking on suspicious links, and reporting any suspicious activities to the respective platform's support team (Germain 2022).

2.

It is vital to adhere to several techniques in order to secure users on LinkedIn and Facebook. Some of these strategies include:

• Using robust passwords and enabling two-factor authentication for all online accounts (Gerber 2019).
• When it comes to exchanging personal information and data online, use extreme caution (Gorton 2021).
• Make use of privacy settings to regulate who may see their profiles and information by restricting access to certain users or groups (Gorton 2021).
• Always use the most recent versions of your software and apps, and make sure you have anti-virus software installed (Gorton 2021).
• Immediately report any activities that you believe may be suspicious to the support personnel for the platform (Gerber 2019).

3.

Young people may protect themselves from potential dangers in their digital life by adhering to the following guidelines (Atamaniuk 2021):

- Users should not divulge any personal information online, including their complete name, address, phone number, or the name of your school (Atamaniuk 2021).

- Remember to use caution with any material that is to be uploaded online, such as images, videos, or comments (Atamaniuk 2021).

- Use extreme caution if interacting with unknown individuals online, particularly on social media sites (Newberry 2023).

- Make use of the privacy options so that users have control over who may see their profile and information (Newberry 2023).

- Users are required to report any instances of bullying, harassment, or suspicious actions to a responsible adult or a member of the support staff for the platform (Newberry 2023).

By adhering to these principles, young people may shield themselves from the dangers posed by the internet, including cyberbullying, harassment, identity theft, and other hazards. In addition, parents, individual and teachers have an important part to play in the process of teaching young people about online safety and monitoring the digital activities that their children engage in (Atamaniuk 2021).
 
References

ICTCYS608 Perform cyber security risk Assignment 1 Sample

Assessment information

Information about how you should complete this assessment can be found in Appendix

A of the IT Works Student User Guide. Refer to the appendix for information on:

- Where this task should be completed

- The maximum time allowed for completing this assessment task

- Whether or not this task is open-book.

Note: You must complete and submit an assessment cover sheet with your work. A template is provided in Appendix C of the Student User Guide. However, if your RTO has provided you with an assessment cover sheet, please ensure that you use that.

Questions

Provide answers to all of the questions below:

1. Explain why it is important for an organisation to conduct a cyber security risk assessment.

2. List typical steps that would be followed to conduct and report on a cyber security risk assessment.

3. List three ways that could be used to measure risk culture and risk appetite in relation to cyber security.

4. Identify two sources of information that that could be used to find out about cyber security legislation.

Solution

1. Importance of Conducting a Cyber Security Risk Assessment for an Organization

Cyber security risk assessment identifies and assesses the probability and severity of potential threats to an organization's information assets (Ganin et al. 2020). It is a critical part of a comprehensive security program, as it allows organizations to anticipate and plan for possible risks and to develop appropriate countermeasures. Risk assessments provide the foundation for an effective security strategy by helping organizations identify, assess and reduce their vulnerabilities. Cyber security risk assessments allow organizations to understand the risk level, the potential consequences of an attack and the necessary steps to mitigate the threat. Organizations can ensure they adequately protect their digital assets and minimize risk exposure by regularly conducting cyber security risk assessments.

Organizations need to conduct a cyber security risk assessment because it enables them to identify vulnerabilities within their systems and provides them with a comprehensive picture of the threats posed by cybercriminals (Fraser, Quail, & Simkins, 2021). By conducting a risk assessment, organizations can understand their current cyber security posture and identify areas where they may need to invest in additional measures. It also helps organizations to identify and respond to potential cyber threats, allowing them to remain one step ahead of the hackers. Furthermore, it provides a framework for developing and implementing effective policies and procedures for mitigating risks associated with cyber security threats. This helps organizations protect their valuable data, networks, and systems from malicious actors. Any organization's cyber security risk assessment is essential to protect its sensitive data, networks, and systems.

2. The procedures for Performing and Documenting a Cyber Security Risk Evaluation

The process of finding, analyzing, and evaluating risk concerning cyber security is carried out step by step. Choosing cyber security measures compatible with the risks one encounter is always beneficial. Choosing the best cyber security without the risk assessment method would be a waste of time, effort, and resources. Information assets that a cyber-attack might impact are always identified in a cyber security risk evaluation. Typically, a risk calculation and analysis are done, and then controls are chosen to address the risks that have been found.

Determining the area of responsibility of the risk assessment: The risk assessment process for the assignment help always begins with choosing the assessment's scope (Pukala, Sira, & Vavrek, 2018). It is typically a significant and difficult procedure. Additionally, it is crucial to have the full backing of all parties whose actions fall under the purview of the assessment because understanding will depend on their contributions.

Identifying the risks - The second step in the risk assessment procedure is to identify the risks. There are three sections again in this place. It must first determine the properties. The next step is to determine the threats. Threats can be tactics, techniques, or even ways. The final step is to determine which portion of the risk is incorrect.

Analyzing the risks - The third stage is to correctly analyze the risks and determine the potential effects of the threats after they have been identified. The risk potential and possibility always provide a danger that is capable of leveraging a weakness in a cybersecurity risk assessment process (Eckhart, Brenner, Ekelhart, & Weippl, 2019).

Determining and prioritizing risks - Identifying and prioritizing the risks is the fourth stage in cyber security risk assessment. It might be accomplished using a risk grid. Eliminating a task might be the optimal course for proceeding if it means not being exposed to it if the risk exceeds the benefits.
Documentation of all risks - It is crucial to record all risks related to cyber security after analysis and determination. For management to remain informed of the risks associated with cybersecurity, it must also be reviewed and updated.

3. Three Ways That Could Be Used to Measure Risk Culture and Risk Appetite Concerning Cyber Security

When assessing the risk culture and risk appetite concerning cyber security, organizations can measure and understand the risks they face in three ways.

The first is to conduct a formal risk assessment, which can provide detailed information about the company’s current level of risk and identify areas for improvement. Conducting a formal risk assessment is a vital part of ensuring the security of a business (Bayar, Sezgin, Ozturk, & Sasmaz, 2020). It should be done systematically and thoroughly to provide detailed information about the current level of risk, identify areas of weakness and potential threats, and make recommendations for improvement. It can help the business evaluate its risk management strategies, assess the adequacy of its controls, identify areas where additional controls should be implemented, and identify potential opportunities to reduce its overall risk exposure.

The second is to survey employees and stakeholders to understand their attitudes and behaviours around cyber security. Surveying employees and stakeholders is a powerful tool for understanding how they perceive and interact with cyber security in their day to day activities. Through surveys, organizations can gain insight into the attitudes, behaviours and understanding of cyber security among their staff and stakeholders, allowing them to better assess their current cyber security stance and identify improvements.

Finally, organizations should review existing policies and procedures to align with industry best practices and organizational goals (Hubbard, 2020). Doing so will help organizations keep up with the changing needs of their industry, remain competitive, and achieve their desired outcomes. By implementing this process, organizations can identify any potential risks or opportunities to be capitalized on, allowing them to stay ahead of their competitors.

4. The Resources for Learning About Cyber Security Laws

The Security of Critical Infrastructure Act 2018 is the first piece of law about cyber security. This act generally imposes obligations on particular entities concerning communications and electricity (CISC AU, 2023). Financial services, stock markets, and data handling or storage are also included. The main goals of this SOCI Act amendment were to strengthen the security and resilience of the critical infrastructure by extending the range of industries and asset classes to which it applies and by introducing new responsibilities.

The Telecommunications (Interception and Access) Act 1979 is the second source of law about cyber security. In Australia, the TIA act is a broad regulatory framework for all Internet access, including data access (Home Affairs AU, 2023). The TIA act also allows access to communications to look into the process of requesting a warrant from a judge or tribunal. Applications for warrants must consistently adhere to all stringent Act requirements. When certain conditions arise, such as a crisis, the Agencies may also view the communications despite a warrant.

References

DATA4100 Data Visualisation Software Report 4 Sample

Your Task

This written report with a dashboard is to be created individually.

- Given a business problem and data, finalise visualisations and prepare a report for the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

- On Tuesday of week 13 at or before 23:55 AEST submit your written report as a Microsoft Word file with a snapshot of your dashboard via Turnitin.

This assessment covers Learning outcomes: LO2, LO3

Business Background:

Germany, Japan, South Korea, United States, France and China are amongst the main exporters of cars. Suppose that the Australian government is particularly interested in the products exported from Germany, as well as Australian products exported to Germany, in considering the possibility of a free trade agreement.

Suppose that you have been asked, as an analyst for the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, to report on exports from Germany, and in particular, the types of products Germany exports to Australia. Likewise, analyse the products that Australia exports to Germany currently, based on your own research into available data sets.

Your written report (to be prepared in this assessment - in Assessment 4) will ultimately end up in the hands of the minister for trade and investment, so any final decisions made should be supported by data

In Assessment 4, you are to finish designing your visualisations, then prepare a report by interpreting the visualisations and integrating with theory from this subject.

Data set

- Use the data given to you in week 11

Assessment Instructions

- As an individual, finish the visualisations for your report.

- Write a structured report with appropriate sections, as follows:

- Introduce the business problem and content of your report.

- Interpret your charts, summaries, clustering and any other analyses you have done in the process of creating your visualisations, and link it back to the business problem of whether Australia should enter a free trade agreement with Germany?

- Justify the design of your visualisations in terms of what you have learnt about cognitive load and pre-attentive attributes and Tufte’s principles.

Solution

Introduction of Business Problem

The business problem is to gather information and analyse the trade between Germany and Australia in order to consider the possibility of (FTA) free trade agreement. Specifically, the Australian government taking interest in the products exported from Germany to Australia and the products exported from Australia to Germany. The analyst is tasked with collecting data and reporting on the current trade relationship between the two countries. So that decision can be made by the government based on visualization and analysis.

The analyst is working for Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade and is expected to provide a comprehensive report on the trade relationship between Germany and Australia. The report should include information on the types of products that Germany exports to Australia and the types of products that Australia exports to Germany. The report will help the government in making informed decisions regarding a potential free trade agreement between the two countries.

Visualizations and Summary

This is an important issue for the Australian government because a free trade agreement with Germany could potentially bring economic benefits to both countries. By eliminating tariffs and other trade barriers, both Germany and Australia could increase their exports and grow their economies. However, the government must first understand the current trade relationship and the types of products being exchanged in order to determine if a free trade agreement is feasible and would be in the best interest of both countries.

This is the line and clustered column chart that represents the trade value of the sections and products. The highest product is available in section 6 and the highest trade value is in section 16.

Based on the line and clustered column chart showing the sum of trade value between Australia and Germany along with the count of products, several key insights and interpretations can be drawn:

Trade Value: The line chart shows the sum of trade value between Australia and Germany over time. This allows us to see the overall trend in the trade relationship between the two countries. If the line is trending upwards, it indicates an increase in the total trade value between the two countries. If the line is trending downwards, it indicates a decrease in the total trade value.

Product Count: The clustered column chart shows the count of products being traded between Australia and Germany. This allows us to see the variety of products being traded between the two countries and understand the composition of the trade relationship. If the count of products is increasing over time, it indicates a diversifying trade relationship. If the count of products is decreasing, it may indicate a more focused or specialized trade relationship.

This is the scatter chart that is divided into three clusters by using the auto clustering of power BI. the trade value per HS2 ID is represented in this chart.

This is the waterfall chart that represents the trade value per product and section. The products are divided into sections and that is shown in this chart. The car's trade value is highest that is up to 70bn.

This is the bar chart that represents the sum of a trade by using the section cluster that is done in the scatter chart. This will make the data and chart easier to understand.

Draft Dashboard

A visualization dashboard for the assignment help is an important tool for solving the business problem because it allows for a clear and concise representation of the trade data. Visualization dashboards provide a visual representation of the data, which can help the government quickly understand the key trends and patterns in the trade relationship between Germany and Australia. This can include visualizations such as bar charts, pie charts, and line graphs that clearly show the types and amounts of products being exported between the two countries.

Moreover, visualization dashboards can provide real-time updates to the data, allowing the government to track changes in the trade relationship over time. This can help the government identify any potential trade imbalances or changes in the trade relationship that may impact the feasibility of a free trade agreement.
Additionally, visualization dashboards can provide an interactive experience for the user, allowing them to explore the data in greater detail and uncover insights that may not be immediately apparent from a static report. This can help the government make more informed decisions based on a deeper understanding of the data.

Overall, a visualization dashboard is an important tool for solving the business problem of understanding the trade relationship between Germany and Australia because it provides a clear, concise, and interactive representation of the data that can help the government make informed decisions.

List of Dot Points

The visual information is provided in small chunks in the bar and scatter chart which is done by using the cognitive load. By putting much more information into each significant chunk of data and reducing the amount of them for a viewer to observe, one objective when developing visualization is to lessen the cognitive load.
The dot points for pre-attentive attributes

Color – Different colors are used in the charts to represent the different data which helps to understand the insights from the data.

Form – The type, shape, and size of the chart are selected to represent the meaningful information and the chart is clearly showing all the information (Nordlinder 2021).

An analysis and visualization report can help solve the business problem by providing a clear and concise representation of the trade relationship between Germany and Australia. The report can include visualizations such as bar charts, pie charts, and line graphs to clearly show the types and amounts of products being exported between the two countries. This information can help the government understand the current trade relationship and identify any potential trade imbalances.

Additionally, the report can use data analysis techniques such as trend analysis and regression analysis to identify any trends or patterns in the trade data over time. This information can help the government predict the potential impact of a free trade agreement and make informed decisions.

Finally, the report can highlight key insights and recommendations based on the data analysis. This information can be used by the government to make informed decisions regarding a potential free trade agreement with Germany. Overall, an analysis and visualization report can help the government make informed decisions by providing a comprehensive and clear understanding of the trade relationship between Germany and Australia.

Analysis of the trade relationship between Australia and Germany can provide valuable insights to inform decision making in several ways:

- Trade Opportunity: The analysis can reveal opportunities for expanding the trade relationship between Australia and Germany. For example, if there is a high demand for a particular type of product in Germany that is not being produced in Australia, this could provide an opportunity for Australian businesses to enter the German market.

- Market Trends: The analysis can also reveal trends in the trade relationship between Australia and Germany, such as changes in the demand for certain products or shifts in the composition of the trade relationship over time. This information can help businesses and government organizations make informed decisions about their trade strategies.

- Competitive Advantage: The analysis can reveal areas where Australia has a competitive advantage in the trade relationship with Germany. For example, if Australia is exporting a product that is in high demand in Germany, this could provide an opportunity for Australian businesses to increase their exports and gain a competitive advantage in the German market.

- Free Trade Agreement: The analysis can also provide valuable information to support the negotiation of a free trade agreement between Australia and Germany. For example, if the analysis reveals that there is significant potential for increased trade between the two countries, this could be used as a negotiating point to support the implementation of a free trade agreement.

Justification of Design

The visualizations is based on the principles of cognitive load and pre-attentive attributes and Tufte's principles of data visualization. These principles ensure that the visualizations are easily readable and provide the user with the most important information in an efficient manner.

In terms of cognitive load, the visualizations are designed to be simple and intuitive, with a minimal amount of clutter or distractions. This helps to reduce the cognitive load on the user, allowing them to quickly and easily understand the data. The use of colors and shapes that are easily distinguishable, as well as the use of clear and concise labels, help to make the data easily readable and reduce the cognitive load on the user.

In terms of pre-attentive attributes, the visualizations are designed to take advantage of the user's natural ability to quickly process visual information. This includes the use of colors to indicate different categories of data, as well as the use of shapes and patterns to quickly distinguish between different data points. These pre-attentive attributes help the user quickly understand the data, even before they have consciously processed it.

Finally, the visualizations are designed following Tufte's principles of data visualization, which emphasize the importance of maximizing the data-ink ratio. This means that the visualizations are designed to show only the most important information, without any unnecessary elements that may distract the user. This ensures that the visualizations are highly effective in conveying the data and providing insights into the trade relationship between Germany and Australia.

In addition, Tufte's principles also emphasize the importance of using clear and concise labelling, providing context to the data, and ensuring that the visualizations accurately represent the data. These principles help to ensure that the visualizations are not only aesthetically pleasing but also provide accurate and meaningful information to the user.

References

SIT763 Cyber Security Management Report Sample

Task 1: Cyber Security Risk Identification

Asset identification: Identify four assets, one of each type: information, knowledge, application, and business process. For each asset, determine is current worth (value), and the security requirements (confidentiality, integrity, and availability). Finally, prioritise the assets based on their level of criticality from highly critical to less critical.

Table I: Asset risk register

Record the name of the asset along its attributes on the table below.

Provide rational for the selection of the assets and their attributes as well as for the priority.

Threats and vulnerabilities identification: For each asset, identify two potential threats capable of causing harm to the asset and the corresponding vulnerabilities. Describe briefly the rational for the selection of the threats and vulnerabilities. Record the information on the table below.

Table II: Threat-vulnerability pair register

Task 2: Cyber Security Risk Assessment

In this section, you will rate the risk. You must justify and support your choice and show step by step your work and include all the formulas required to arrive at your answer.

Ranking vulnerabilities and threats: Rate the vulnerabilities and threats you identified in previous section. Record the result in the Table III.

Table III: Inherent risk register

Compute the risk likelihood: Risk likelihood represents the likelihood that a threat will exploit a vulnerability assuming that there are no security controls in place. Record the result in the Table III.

Compute the risk impact: the risk likelihood represents the likelihood that a threat will exploit a vulnerability assuming that there are no security controls in place. Record the result in the Table III.

Compute the risk level: calculated risk level from the “likelihood” and “impact” and record the result in the Table III.

Task 3: Cyber Security Risk Evaluation

Existing Control: evaluate existing security control effectiveness to reduce the likelihood of a threat exploiting the vulnerability or the potential consequence arising from the vulnerability exploitation or both.

Table IV: Control and risk evaluation

Prioritise the risks: prioritise the risk to the asset based on the risk level. The risks are ordered from highest risk to lowest risk.

Task 4: Cyber Security Risk Treatment

Identify appropriate treatment option for mitigating the risk. Select and assess a range of security controls appropriate to remedy the risk. Provide rational and justification for the selection of the controls, treatment option and assessments.

Table V: Risk treatment

Solution

Introduction

Cybersecurity management is a strategic counterpart of an organization to protect their information resources and maintain a competitive advantage in spite of the evolving threat landscape [1]. It can be done by protecting sensitive data, personally identifiable information and intellectual property rights. This study has shed light on the cybersecurity management of XYZRG board by undertaking a broad cybersecurity risk assessment for The Assignment Help within their corporate setting.

Task 1: Cyber Security Risk Identification

1. Asset identification

Table I: Asset risk register

Table II: Assets and attributes pair register

2. Threats and vulnerabilities identification

Table III: Threat-vulnerability pair register

Task 2: Cyber Security Risk Assessment

Table IV: Inherent risk register

It can be indicated from the cybersecurity risk assessment of XYZ real estate that they have an overall 8 types of risks that might devastate their employee productivity and business profitability. This might be due to the low-risk appetite of the organization in terms of brand reputation and loyalty as they have failed to pursue their long-term goals on the consideration of poor security policy and fraudulent dealing of their own pre-installed laptops to the respective clients [14]. There are four top-most and high risks of the real estate company such as malware attack, operational risks, ransomware attack and distributed denial-of-service attacks. XYZ real estate have failed to cover the warranty of their laptops through negligence including spilling liquids on the devices or dropping. It is due to such consideration that the organization is facing increased challenges of stolen databases as well as theft of laptops. This might instill a risk for the organization around their cybersecurity wall and damage the access control systems. It can be indicated from the likelihood and impact of these four risks that they are concerning XYZ real estate in terms of ensuring smooth connection with the clients due to the increase of unauthorized access to the computer system. It is quite important to get rid of malware attacks in the real estate company to achieve a baseline of cyber security by providing a safe compliance in their certification. This can assure the organization numerous benefits in terms of owning private productivity software and personal messaging apps on the laptop [15]. The benefits include improved customer confidence on investment, reduced insurance premiums and ability to tender their real estate services through a scheme of pre-requisite. Therefore, XYZ real estate needs to ensure strong memorable passwords and password-protected laptops to avoid the malware and DDOs attacks with a frequent check on the cybersecurity wall.

Task 3: Cyber Security Risk Evaluation

Table V: Control and risk evaluation

Task 4: Cyber Security Risk Treatment

Table VI: Risk treatment

Conclusion

It can be concluded from the above that cybersecurity management for XYZRG board is crucial to protect their short-term and long-term resources. This can ensure them to stay safe from third-party attackers like malware, ransomware and DDOs, which might affect their brand reputation rate. Therefore, involving intrusion detection system and other security control measures are effective for the real estate agency to keep aloof their laptop services by improving customer service department and business productivity rate.  

References

DATA4900 Innovation and creativity in business analytics Report 4 Sample

Assessment Description

In this assessment, you will be writing an individual report for the Assignment Helpline that encourages you to be creative with business analytics, whilst also developing a response to the UX, CX and Ethical innovation case study that you have selected.

Background:

In this assessment, you will be developing a response through application of the analytics concepts covered in weeks 10 & 11.

To do so, you will need to demonstrate:

1. How Design Thinking principles were applied in the development of your proposed innovation

2. Application of UX and CX principles during the development process

3. Acknowledgement and management of legal and ethical issues in the creation of your innovation.

4. Alignment to the customer journey for your nominated personas.

5. Utilisation of analytics tools.

Assessment Instructions

Select a case study brief from either Appendix A or Appendix B or a similar one of your own (select only one)

Apply UX and CX Design Thinking principles in delivering an analytics-based solution to this brief, taking into consideration UX, CX and ethical issues in developing this innovation.

Broad UX and CX steps are likely to include:

1. DISCOVER & DEFINE

• Problem statement

• Defining your target audience

• Creating Personas outcomes

• User journey mapping

2. DESIGN

• Lo-fi vs Hi-fi design

• Wireframes & prototypes

3. TEST + ITERATE

• How to capitalise on failure in rapid prototyping and fast loop iterations

In evaluating your proposed innovation from a UX and CX perspective,

- How feasible is the solution for implementation?

- How well does the solution meet the needs of the end-user

Solution

Introduction

This report is based on UK and CX ethical innovation for the case study of coffee machine. The background of this report is to propose innovation for coffee machine in order to create advanced coffee machine design that will provide additional features such as music while making coffee and add flavours. This report includes user persona based on the case study and user journey map based on thinking of the user in respect to the coffee machine application.

Problem Statement and solution

Tea and coffee machine

To make a tea and coffee machine more interesting

1. Music player integration: The machine could be linked to a music streaming service or a user's personal music library to play their favorite songs while making the drink.

2. Flavor customization: Allow customers to add flavors like mint, chili, or caramel to their drinks through the machine's interface or an app.

3. Visual displays: The machine could display different lights or animations while making the drink, or even mimic a game.

4. User app: An app could be created to interact with the beverage maker and improve the customer experience by allowing for easy customization, control, and monitoring of the machine.

5. Ease of use: Adding features to enhance customer ease of use such as a touch-screen interface, voice commands, and pre-set drink options.

Application of UX and CX principles during the development process

To apply UX and CX principles during the development process of the tea and coffee machine with light and music, consider the following steps:

• User research: Conduct user research to gather information on the target audience's needs, pain points, and behavior patterns in regards to making tea and coffee.

• Empathy mapping: Create empathy maps to understand the user's experience and emotions when making tea and coffee.

• Define problems: Identify the problems that users face when making tea and coffee and prioritize them based on their impact.

• Ideation: Generate a range of potential solutions to address the user problems, including the integration of light and music.

• Prototyping and Testing: Create prototypes of the most promising solutions and test them with a sample of users to gather feedback.

• Refinement: Based on the feedback, refine the solution to ensure it addresses the user needs and provides a seamless experience.

• CX Design: Ensure that the solution is designed with a focus on the customer experience, from the ease of use of the machine and app to the visual and sensory elements of the machine. Ensure that the integration of light and music enhances the user experience and adds to the overall enjoyment of making tea and coffee.

• Usability Testing: Test the machine's usability with a sample of users to ensure that it is user-friendly and meets their needs.

By following these steps, you can develop a tea and coffee machine that incorporates light and music in a way that enhances the user experience and provides a positive customer experience.

Acknowledgement and management of legal and ethical issues in the creation of your innovation.
When creating a UX and CX innovation, it is important to consider and manage the legal and ethical issues involved. This includes:

• Data privacy: Ensure that the user data collected through the application is stored securely and only used for the intended purpose, in compliance with relevant privacy laws.

• Intellectual property: Be aware of the intellectual property rights of others and ensure that any music, visual displays, or other content used in the innovation is legally obtained or licensed.

• Accessibility: Ensure that the application is accessible to users with disabilities, in compliance with relevant accessibility laws.

• User consent: Obtain user consent for the collection and use of their data, including clear and concise information on how their data will be used.

• Data security: Implement appropriate security measures to protect user data from unauthorized access, use, or disclosure.

• Responsibility: Ensure that the application is designed and developed in a way that minimizes potential harm to users, and that the company is held accountable for any issues that may arise.

By acknowledging and managing these legal and ethical issues, you can ensure that your UX and CX innovation is created in a responsible and sustainable manner, and that it meets the expectations of users and stakeholders.

User persona
Name: Melanie
Age: 30 years old
- Married/one child/Suburban
- Comfortable with tech
- Loves unusual flavours and trying new things
- Drinks a lot of coffee and various teas
- Leads a busy life

Customer journey map

Design thinking canvas

Utilisation of analytics tools.

Analytics tools can be useful throughout the UX and CX innovation process to gather insights and inform decision-making. Consider the following steps:

• Data collection: Use analytics tools to collect data on user behavior and feedback, including usage patterns, time spent on the application, and customer satisfaction scores.

• Data analysis: Analyze the data to identify patterns and trends that can inform decision-making, such as which features are being used most frequently, which areas of the application are causing the most frustration, and what customers are saying about the experience.

• User Testing: Use analytics tools to gather data on user testing, including how users interact with the application, what they like and dislike, and how they respond to different design elements.

• User Behavior Tracking: Use analytics tools to track user behavior over time, including the frequency and duration of usage, and any changes in behavior.

• Performance metrics: Use analytics tools to monitor the performance of the application, including load times, response times, and error rates, to identify areas for improvement.

By utilizing analytics tools throughout the UX and CX innovation process, you can gain valuable insights into user behaviour and customer experience, and make informed decisions that improve the overall quality of the application.

References

COIT20251 Knowledge Audit for Business Analysis Report Sample

Task Description

In this assessment, you will demonstrate understanding of the core competencies and skills required for a Business Analyst. You will also demonstrate your knowledge in the use of tools and techniques for requirements elicitation and reporting.

The assessment has two parts – Part A: Reflections and Part B: Case Studies.

To construct this part of the assessment, you are required to a write a reflection on each of the three topics mentioned below.

1. The Business Analysis Maturity Model (BAMM)

2. Prototyping

3. Gap Analysis

In each reflection, you will provide a brief introduction of the topic (method/process/model), how the method/process/model works, stakeholders involved, inputs and outputs, how it helps business analysis and its benefits. You also need to include figures, diagrams and illustrations to improve the quality of presentation.
Each portfolio should contain approximately 400 words. You need to include at least three references (including at least two academic references) for each reflection. You also need to make sure that the references are cited in the text and the reflections are free from any grammatical and spelling errors.

Part B: Case Studies

In this part, you will analyse two short case studies and answer questions for The Assignment helpline given with each case study. The case studies will be made available on the Moodle unit website. The answer to each case study question should not contain more than 400 words.

You should include at least four references (including at least two academic references) in this part.

Solution

Part A: Reflections

1. The Business Analysis Maturity Model (BAMM)

The Business Analysis Maturity Model (BAMM) is a framework that helps organizations evaluate and improve their business analysis practices. It is based on the idea that organizations can progress through different levels of maturity in their business analysis practices, and that by understanding where they are currently, they can take steps to improve. BAMM is a process that allows organizations to measure and evaluate their current business analysis practices in order to identify areas for improvement and align their business analysis strategy with their overall organizational goals (Jayapalan, 2020).

Five levels of maturity:

BAMM consists of five levels of maturity: Initial, Managed, Defined, Quantitatively Managed, and Optimizing. Each level describes a different stage in the development of business analysis practices and includes specific characteristics and capabilities that organizations at that level are expected to possess (Nilsson & Dahlgren, 2019).

Figure 1 Characteristics of the maturity levels
(Source: Nilsson & Dahlgren, 2019)

- At the Initial level, business analysis is ad-hoc and reactive, with no clear processes or standards in place.

- At the Managed level, processes and standards are established, but they are not consistently followed.

- At the Defined level, processes and standards are consistently followed and there is a clear understanding of the business analysis role within the organization.

- At the Quantitatively Managed level, metrics are used to measure the effectiveness of business analysis practices.

- At the Optimizing level, business analysis practices are continuously improved (Nilsson & Dahlgren, 2019).

Stakeholders involved in BAMM and input and output to BAMM

The stakeholders involved in BAMM include business analysts, project managers, business leaders, and other stakeholders that are impacted by the business analysis process. The inputs to BAMM include data on the organization's current business analysis practices and the outputs are a report that describes the organization's level of maturity and recommendations for improvement (Terry Ramabulana et al., 2020).

The stakeholders involved in BAMM include business analysts, project managers, business leaders, and other stakeholders that are impacted by the business analysis process. The inputs to BAMM include data on the organization's current business analysis practices and the outputs are a report that describes the organization's level of maturity and recommendations for improvement (Terry Ramabulana et al., 2020).

BAMM process

The BAMM process typically includes the following steps:

• Define the scope of the assessment: Determine which business analysis practices will be evaluated and which stakeholders will be involved.

• Gather data: Collect data on the organization's current business analysis practices through interviews, surveys, and document reviews.

• Analyze data: Review the data and evaluate the organization's level of maturity in each of the five BAMM levels.

• Report results: Prepare a report that describes the organization's level of maturity and provides recommendations for improvement.

• Implement improvements: Develop and implement a plan to address any identified areas for improvement.

BAMM helps business analysis by providing a clear and objective way to assess the organization's current practices and identify areas for improvement. It also helps to align business analysis practices with the organization's overall strategy and goals. By using BAMM, organizations can improve the effectiveness and efficiency of their business analysis practices, which in turn can lead to better decision-making, improved project outcomes, and increased business value.

Benefits of BAMM:

• Provides a clear and objective way to assess the organization's current practices and identify areas for improvement.

• Helps to align business analysis practices with the organization's overall strategy and goals.

• Improves the effectiveness and efficiency of business analysis practices.

• Leads to better decision-making, improved project outcomes and increased business value

2. Prototyping

Prototyping is a process of creating a model or simulation of a system or product, which is used to test and evaluate the design before it is built. Prototyping is an iterative process, which means that the prototype is continually refined and improved until it meets the requirements of the stakeholders.

Prototyping is a process that involves creating a preliminary version of a product or system to test and evaluate its design and functionality. The prototype is typically a simplified version of the final product and is used to gather feedback and make improvements before the final product is developed. The process of prototyping allows stakeholders to test and evaluate the product or system's design and functionality before it is developed, which can help identify any problems or issues early on and ultimately save time and money in the long run.

Different types of prototypes

There are different types of prototypes, such as paper prototypes, wireframes, and functional prototypes. Paper prototypes are simple mockups of the product or system created using paper and pencil, while wireframes are digital mockups that show the layout and functionality of the product or system. Functional prototypes are more advanced and can be used to test the product or system's functionality (BA,2021).

Figure 2 Prototype
(Source: BA,2021)

Stakeholders involved in prototyping and input and output to prototyping

The stakeholders involved in prototyping include project managers, designers, developers, and users. The inputs to prototyping include the product or system's requirements, design, and any constraints. The outputs are the prototype itself, feedback from stakeholders and any improvements that need to be made (Lauff et al.,2020).

Process of prototyping

The process of prototyping typically includes the following steps:

• Define the scope of the prototype: Determine the purpose of the prototype and what features and functionality need to be included.

• Create the prototype: Use various tools and techniques to create a preliminary version of the product or system.

• Test and evaluate the prototype: Gather feedback from stakeholders and use it to make improvements to the prototype.

• Refine and improve the prototype: Make any necessary changes to the prototype based on feedback and testing (BA,2021).

Prototyping in business analysis

Prototyping helps business analysis by allowing stakeholders to test and evaluate the product or system's design and functionality before it is developed. This can help to identify any problems or issues early on, which can save time and money in the long run. It also helps to ensure that the final product or system meets the user's needs and is fit for purpose (Baldassarre et al., 2020).

Benefits of prototyping

• Allows stakeholders to test and evaluate the product or system's design and functionality before it is developed (Lauff et al.,2020).

• Helps to identify problems or issues early on and save time and money in the long run.

• Ensures that the final product or system meets the user's needs and is fit for purpose.

3. Gap analysis

Gap analysis is a process that involves identifying the differences between the current state of an organization and its desired future state. It is used to identify areas where the organization needs to improve in order to achieve its goals and objectives. The process of gap analysis helps organizations to identify areas of weakness and prioritize areas for improvement (Robin, & Robin, 2021).
The process of gap analysis typically includes the following steps:

Figure 4 Gap Analysis Process
(Source: Santhosh & II MBA, n.d.))

• Define the scope of the gap analysis: Determine the goals and objectives of the organization and what areas will be evaluated.

• Collect data on the current state: Gather information on the organization's current processes, systems, and performance metrics.

• Define the desired future state: Identify the goals and objectives of the organization and what the desired state should be.

• Compare the current and desired states: Identify the differences between the current and desired states and document any gaps or areas of weakness.

• Prioritize the gaps: Determine which gaps have the most impact on the organization's goals and objectives and prioritize them for improvement.

• Develop recommendations: Develop a plan to address the identified gaps and improve the organization's processes and systems (Santhosh & II MBA, n.d.).

Stakeholders involved in gap analysis and input and output to gap analysis

The stakeholders involved in gap analysis include business analysts, project managers, business leaders, and other stakeholders that are impacted by the organization's goals and objectives. The inputs to gap analysis include data on the organization's current state, goals and objectives, and any constraints. The outputs are a report that describes the gap between the current and desired state, and recommendations for improvement (Suklan, 2019).

Gap analysis role in business analysis

Gap analysis helps business analysis by providing a clear and objective way to identify areas where the organization needs to improve in order to achieve its goals and objectives. It allows the organization to understand the gap between their current and desired state, and prioritize areas for improvement. By using gap analysis, organizations can improve their performance and achieve their goals more efficiently. It also allows organizations to identify the gap between the current state and desired state in the areas of operations, processes, systems, and performance, in order to make informed decisions about how to improve and move forward (Robin, & Robin, 2021).

Benefits of Gap Analysis:

• Provides a clear and objective way to identify areas where the organization needs to improve

• Helps organizations to understand the gap between their current and desired state

• Prioritize areas for improvement

• Improves the organization's performance and achieve their goals more efficiently.

• Allows to identify the gap between current state and desired state in the area of operations, processes, systems, and performance (Suklan, 2019).

Part-B

Case Study-1: A Manufacturing Company

1. Position of current users of the Case study organisation on the Power/Influence/Interest Diagram.

In the Power/Influence/Interest Diagram, the current users of the Case study organization would likely be located in the lower right quadrant, as they have minimal power and influence within the organization, but a high level of interest in the current system they are using. They are the ones who are directly impacted by the system and have a high level of interest in it, since they have been using it for a long time and are familiar with its capabilities and limitations. They have developed a sense of trust and comfort with the system, have established a workflow that is efficient for them and they don't want to change it (Reed, 2022).

Figure 5 Power/Influence/Interest Diagram
(Source: Paula, 2022)

The users may have some resistance to changing the system they are used to, and they do not want to spend time and effort learning a new system or dealing with the trauma of change that comes with it. They might not see the need for a new system, since the current one is working for them. They are not the problem owners, they are not the ones who have the problem with the old system, they are just the ones who have to work with it.

On the other hand, upper-level management is located in the upper left quadrant. They have the power and influence to make decisions for the organization, but their interest in the current system may not be as high as that of the users. They are concerned about the two people who are maintaining the system, and the potential consequences of not having anyone to maintain it. They are worried that the company will not be able to sell any new products if the system is not updated. They see the need for a new system written in a modern language with more modern technology (Mints & Kamyshnykova, 2019).

The Upper-level management are aware that the technology is outdated and that it is hard to find people who can maintain it. They are aware that the system is not meeting the current regulatory compliance standards, and they are worried that the company will be penalized if the system is not updated. They are the problem owners in this situation, they are the ones who have the problem with the old system and they are the ones who have to find a solution for it. Upper-level management is in a position of power and influence, and they have the responsibility to make decisions that will benefit the organization as a whole. They must weigh the concerns of the users with the needs of the organization, and find a solution that will work for both parties.

2. Strategies to effectively manage the stockholders in an "uncooperative users" situation

• Communicate the urgency and importance of the situation to upper management and gain their support in communicating the need for change to the users: The support of upper management is crucial to overcome resistance from the users. Upper management should be involved in the process of selecting and designing the new system, allowing them to provide input and feedback on how it will impact their work processes. They should be able to communicate the urgency of the situation and the potential risks if the system is not updated (Gupta et al., 2020).

• Involve the users in the process of selecting and designing the new system: By involving the users in the process, they will feel more invested in the new system, and their resistance to change may decrease. It is essential to understand their concerns and address them in the design of the new system. The users should be able to provide feedback on the system design and they should be able to test the new system before it is implemented. The users should be able to provide feedback on the system's ease of use and they should be able to provide feedback on the system's compliance with their workflow.

• Provide training and support for the new system: To mitigate the users' resistance to change, it is essential to provide training and support for the new system. This will help them understand how the new system works and how it will benefit them. The users should be able to attend training sessions and they should be able to receive support from the system's developers. The users should be able to receive support during the transition period and after the new system is implemented (Mints & Kamyshnykova, 2019).

• Communicate the benefits of the new system: It is essential to communicate the benefits of the new system to the users, such as increased efficiency, improved compliance, and better reporting capabilities. This will help the users understand why the new system is necessary and how it will improve their work processes. It is important to show the users how the new system will make their job easier, more efficient and how it will help them to meet the regulatory compliance (Gupta et al., 2020).

• Be flexible and open to feedback: It is essential to be flexible and open to feedback from the users throughout the process. The users should be able to provide feedback on the new system, and the system developers should be able to make changes based on the feedback. The system should be flexible enough to adapt to the users' needs.

• Have a plan in place for the transition: It is essential to have a plan in place for the transition from the old system to the new system. This will help ensure a smooth transition and minimize disruption to the users' work processes. The plan should include a timeline for the transition, a training schedule for the users, and a support plan for the users during and after the transition.

Case Study-2: Smart Solar Systems (3S)

1. Tangible and Intangible costs that would be involved in the business improvement options.

The business improvement options proposed for the 3S company that would involve both tangible and intangible costs.

Tangible costs

• Tangible costs include the cost of implementing cloud-based ERP and KM systems, as well as the cost of training front-line staff to become generalists (Chofreh et al., 2020).

• The cost of purchasing and implementing new software systems can be substantial, as well as the cost of training employees on how to use them.

• Additionally, there may be additional costs such as hardware upgrades or IT support that would need to be considered.

• These costs may include the purchase, installation and maintenance of the software, the cost of data migration, the cost of employee training, the cost of IT support and the cost of hardware upgrades (Velenturf & Jopson, 2019).

Intangible costs

• Intangible costs include the costs of changing the company organizational structure and culture. This may involve significant changes in how the company operates, which can be disruptive to employees and may require significant time and effort to implement.

Additionally, there may be a loss of experienced employees who are not comfortable with the new organizational structure or who may not possess the necessary skills to adapt to new roles. This can lead to a loss of institutional knowledge, which can be difficult to replace, and a loss of employee engagement, which can lead to a decrease in productivity (Andersson et al., 2019).

• Another intangible cost would be the time taken to implement these changes. The change process may take a while and might also face resistance from employees and managers who might be uncomfortable with the new ways of working.

This may lead to a decrease in productivity and may also lead to delays in completion of tasks and projects. This can also lead to a loss of customer trust and business opportunities (Carlsson Wall et al., 2022).

• Finally, the cost of flattening the organization hierarchy would be that managers may lose some of their decision-making power, and that front-line staff may not be prepared to take on more responsibility, which could lead to confusion and mistakes.

This may also lead to a loss of accountability and a lack of direction in the organization, which can lead to a lack of progress in achieving company goals (Andersson et al., 2019).

The business improvement options would involve significant tangible costs such as implementation of new software systems and training of employees, as well as intangible costs such as changes in organizational structure and culture, loss of experienced employees, and resistance from employees. Additionally, it can also lead to a loss of time and delay in achieving company goals

2. Tangible and Intangible benefits that business improvement options deliver once implemented successfully

The business improvement options proposed for the 3S company would deliver both tangible and intangible benefits once implemented successfully.

Tangible benefits

• Tangible benefits include improved efficiency and productivity, as well as cost savings resulting from the streamlined business processes. The implementation of cloud-based ERP and KM systems would allow for better collaboration, communication and sharing of knowledge among the teams, leading to improved workflow, faster decision making and reduced errors. This would lead to faster completion of projects, improved customer service and increased revenue for the company (Chofreh et al., 2020).

Flattening the organizational hierarchy would give front line staff more autonomy in decision making, which can lead to increased job satisfaction, higher employee engagement and improved performance. This can also lead to improved customer service as front line staff would be more empowered to make decisions that are in the best interest of the customer, which would lead to increased customer loyalty and repeat business (Andersson et al., 2019).

• Integrating business units would allow customer service, engineering & design, logistics, installation, marketing, and sales teams to collaborate and share information more easily without needing the approval of their managers. This would allow teams to work more efficiently and effectively, and would lead to faster completion of projects and increased customer satisfaction. This would also lead to increased revenue and improved company reputation (Velenturf & Jopson, 2019).

• Re skilling front line staff to become generalists would make them more versatile and adaptable to different roles, which would allow the company to respond more quickly to changing market conditions. This would also lead to better employee retention, as employees would be more likely to stay with the company if they were given the opportunity to learn new skills and take on new roles. This would lead to reduced recruitment and training costs for the company (Carlsson Wall et al., 2022).

Intangible benefits

Intangible benefits include improved company culture, increased employee engagement and improved customer satisfaction. A more collaborative and communicative culture would improve employee morale, and the ability to adapt to changing market conditions would lead to improved:

• Customer satisfaction

• Brand reputation and Customer loyalty.

• Employee engagement and motivation

• Performance and Productivity (Andersson et al., 2019).

The business improvement options would provide a range of tangible and intangible benefits once implemented successfully. These benefits include improved efficiency, productivity and cost savings, increased employee engagement and satisfaction, improved customer service and satisfaction, improved company culture and brand reputation, and the ability to adapt to changing market conditions. These improvements would ultimately lead to a more successful and profitable company.

The company will have better coordination, collaboration and information sharing among the teams across departments, leading to faster completion of projects and increased customer satisfaction. The company would be able to respond more quickly to changing market conditions, which would lead to increased revenue and improved company reputation. The company will also have reduced recruitment and training costs and improved employee retention, which would lead to improved performance and productivity.

References

TECH5300 Bitcoin Case Study 2 Sample

Your Task

This assessment is to be completed individually. In this assessment, you will evaluate the purpose, structure, and design of base layer 1 of the Bitcoin network, which provides the security layer.

Assessment Description

This assessment aims to evaluate your ability to analyse, evaluate, and critically assess the purpose, structure, and design of the base layer 1 of the Bitcoin network, which serves as the security layer. Additionally, you are required to explore the principles and significance of public-key cryptography in the context of Bitcoin transactions. By completing this assessment, you will demonstrate your proficiency in comprehending complex concepts, conducting in-depth research, and presenting well-structured arguments.

Case Study

Case Study Scenario: You have been appointed as a Bitcoin consultant for a financial institution seeking to explore the potential of utilising Bitcoin as part of their operations. Your task is to evaluate the purpose, structure, and design of the Bitcoin layer 1 network, with a particular focus on its security layer. Furthermore, you are required to analyse the role and impact of public-key cryptography in securing Bitcoin transactions.

Your Task: In this case study, you are required to prepare a detailed report addressing the following aspects:

1. Evaluation of the Purpose, Structure, and Design of Bitcoin Layer 1 Network:

a. Analyse the purpose and significance of the base layer 1 in the Bitcoin network, emphasising its role as the security layer.

b. Evaluate the structural components of the Bitcoin layer 1 network, including its decentralised nature, consensus mechanism, and transaction processing.

c. Assess the design principles and mechanisms employed within the Bitcoin layer 1 network to ensure security, immutability, and transaction verification.

2. Exploration of Public-Key Cryptography in Bitcoin Transactions:

a. Explain the fundamental principles of public-key cryptography and its relevance in securing Bitcoin transactions.

b. Analyse the mechanisms and algorithms used in public-key cryptography to ensure transaction verification, non-repudiation, and confidentiality in the Bitcoin network.

c. Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of public-key cryptography within the context of Bitcoin transactions, considering factors such as key management, quantum resistance, and regulatory implications.

3. Evaluation of Security Challenges and Mitigation Strategies:

a. Identify and analyse the major security challenges and vulnerabilities associated with the Bitcoin layer 1 network, including potential attack vectors, double-spending, and transaction malleability.

b. Evaluate existing mitigation strategies and countermeasures employed to address these security challenges.

4. Future Outlook and Recommendations:

a. Discuss emerging trends, advancements, or potential challenges related to the Bitcoin layer 1 network and public-key cryptography.

b. Provide recommendations to the financial institution regarding the integration of the

Bitcoin layer 1 network and public-key cryptography into their operations, considering the benefits, risks, and potential mitigations.

Solution

Introduction

"The Security, Cryptography, and Future Outlook of the Bitcoin Layer 1 Network. This in depth examination explores the goal, composition, and architecture of the fundamental layer 1 network that underpins Bitcoin. For Assignment Help, It examines the use of public key cryptography for transaction security, assesses security risks, and suggests defences. While offering tactical suggestions for handling the shifting market, the conversation gives insights into new trends and developments.

1. Evaluation of the Purpose, Structure and Design of Bitcoin Layer 1 Network

a. Purpose and significance of the base layer 1 in the Bitcoin network

The network's core architecture, which is primarily concerned with security, is Bitcoin's base layer 1. The Proof of Work (PoW) consensus process, aims to enable safe and decentralised transactions (Akbar et al., 2021). In order to validate transactions and add them to the blockchain, miners compete to solve challenging mathematical puzzles. This creates a tamper resistant database. Due to its enormous processing capacity, this security mechanism has demonstrated resilience against threats, making Bitcoin very resistant to censorship and manipulation. Since its launch in 2009, the basic layer of Bitcoin has experienced uptime of over 99.98%, proving its reliability (Nguyen, 2019). The network's miners' dedication to network security is demonstrated by this astounding increase.

b. Structural components of the Bitcoin layer 1 network

Decentralisation, consensus through Proof of Work (PoW), and transaction processing are all embodied in the Layer 1 network of Bitcoin. Decentralisation is ensured via the dispersion of global nodes, which improves security and resilience. PoW requires miners to validate transactions by solving complex puzzles. Every 10 minutes, blocks are created for transaction processing, placing security over speed (Kenny, 2019). This methodical pace provides immutability while limiting throughput. Layer 2 solutions balance speed, trust, and security at Layer 1. Layer 1 of Bitcoin emphasises decentralisation, PoW consensus, and purposeful processing, reaffirming its leadership position in the cryptocurrency industry (Tatos et al., 2019).

c. Design principles and mechanisms

The layer 1 network for Bitcoin is carefully designed to provide security, immutability, and transaction verification. Decentralisation enhances security and prevents isolated failures. In order to add blocks, Proof of Work (PoW) uses difficult solutions (Jabbar et al., 2020). This collective effort maintains data accuracy by resisting retroactive alterations. The consensus of the nodes prevents unauthorised acts and double spending by verifying transactions before they are included in blocks. These ideas strengthen the first layer of Bitcoin, which is crucial to its function as a reliable store of value and digital money, encapsulating security, historical integrity, and reliable transaction validation (Jacobetty and Orton-Johnson, 2023).

2. Exploration of Public Key Cryptography in Bitcoin Transactions

a. Fundamental principles of public key cryptography

Asymmetric encryption and the generation of a public private key pair are the two underlying tenets of public key cryptography. In this system, a user creates two sets of keys: a public key that is widely disseminated and a private key that is kept secret (Aydar et al., 2019). Secure communication is made possible by the fact that messages encrypted with one key can only be decoded with the other. These concepts are essential for transaction security in the context of Bitcoin. Each user has their own set of keys. A transaction output is encrypted by the sender using the recipient's public key, the output can only be decrypted using the recipient's private key. This makes sure that the money can only be accessed by the legitimate owner. The private key must be kept secret at all times; if it is compromised, the related cash will also be lost (Rezaeighaleh and Zou, 2019).

b. Mechanisms and algorithms used in public key cryptography

The Bitcoin network uses a variety of techniques and algorithms, including public key cryptography, to guarantee transaction verification, non-repudiation, and secrecy.

Transaction Verification: Digital signatures and cryptographic hashes are used in Bitcoin. A transaction is signed with the sender's private key when a user starts it, yielding a distinctive digital signature (Krishnapriya and Sarath, 2020). The sender's public key is then used by nodes in the network to validate the signature. The transaction is regarded as confirmed and can be uploaded to the blockchain if the signature is legitimate.

Non-Repudiation: Non-repudiation is provided through digital signatures (Fang et al., 2020). A transaction can be authenticated using the associated public key once it has been signed with a private key. This improves accountability by preventing senders from downplaying their role in the transaction.

Confidentiality: Public keys used to generate Bitcoin addresses maintain secrecy. The names behind addresses are fictitious, despite the fact that transactions are recorded on a public blockchain (Bernabe et al., 2019). The money linked to an address can only be accessed by individuals possessing the private key, protecting ownership privacy.

c. Strengths and weaknesses of public key cryptography

- Strengths: With public-key cryptography, Bitcoin is more secure and private. It enables secure ownership verification and ensures confidentiality with digital signatures and bogus addresses (Guo and Yu, 2022). Without the need for a competent middleman, peer-to-peer transactions are also made easier. Furthermore, keys' cryptographic nature provides robust defence against brute-force attacks.

- Weaknesses: Key management is difficult because losing a private key means that money is lost forever. Furthermore, the security of public key cryptography depends on the complexity of certain mathematical puzzles, and potential future developments like quantum computers might undermine its security (Fernandez Carames and Fraga Lamas, 2020).

3. Evaluation of Security Challenges and Mitigation Strategies

a. Major security challenges and vulnerabilities

The Bitcoin network's first layer has security flaws and problems. When someone spends the same amount of Bitcoin twice, there is a danger of double-spending. Although the consensus system prevents it, a strong actor may launch a 51% assault, allowing for double spending (Hacken and Bartosz, 2023). Transaction malleability is a problem since it permits changes to IDs prior to confirmation, which might be confusing. It affects ID dependent processes even while security isn't immediately compromised. Attacks called Sybils take advantage of decentralisation by clogging the network with phoney nodes and upsetting stability. Eclipses control transactions and isolate nodes (Salman, Al Janabi and Sagheer, 2023). These difficulties highlight the necessity of constant attack detection, protocol improvements, and a variety of decentralised nodes to maintain the Layer 1 security and integrity of Bitcoin.

b. Existing mitigation strategies

In order to resolve the security issues in the Bitcoin layer 1 network, existing mitigation tactics and remedies are used (Tedeschi, Sciancalepore and Di Pietro, 2022). The decentralised consensus process prevents double spending by making such assaults prohibitively costly and necessitating a majority of honest miners. Furthermore, miners choose to confirm transactions with larger fees, decreasing the appeal of double spending. Segregated witness (SegWit) was introduced to address transaction malleability (Kedziora et al., 2023). SegWit increases block capacity and reduces vulnerability to malleability attacks by separating signature data from transactions.

Strong network topology and peer discovery techniques are used to defend against Sybil assaults, assuring connections with a variety of nodes rather than being dominated by a single party (Madhwal and Pouwelse, 2023). Eclipse attacks may be thwarted by selecting peers carefully, employing multiple points of connection, and monitoring network activity to look for malicious actors. In order to address these security issues, Bitcoin uses a mix of protocol upgrades, financial incentives, and network architecture, assuring the stability and dependability of its layer 1 network (Lin et al., 2022).

4. Future Outlook and Recommendations

a. Emerging trends, advancements, or potential challenges

New developments and trends in public-key cryptography and layer 1 of the Bitcoin network provide both opportunities and difficulties. Layer 2 scaling solutions like the Lightning Network seek to solve Bitcoin's scalability problems by enabling quicker, lower-cost off chain transactions while retaining the layer 1 network's security (Dasaklis and Malamas, 2023). On the other hand, the security of conventional public key cryptography is in danger from quantum computing, which may have an effect on Bitcoin. In order to address this danger and uphold the network's security, researchers are investigating quantum resistant cryptographic methods (Akter, 2023).

b. Recommendations

Opportunities exist for integrating public key cryptography and the Bitcoin layer 1 network into the operations of financial institutions, but this requires careful design. First, consider adopting Bitcoin for cross border payments to take advantage of its efficient and borderless nature. Public key cryptography may be used to improve security by assuring encrypted communication and safe transactions (Dijesh, Babu and Vijayalakshmi, 2020). Uncertain laws, volatile markets, and security concerns like key management are risks, nevertheless. For minimising these risks, use risk management strategies to cope with price changes, give solid key management processes top priority to prevent losing access to money, and do in depth due diligence on compliance requirements.

Consider introducing Bitcoin services gradually to reduce risks and stay current with market movements. Consult with compliance and blockchain experts if there are any issues. Overall, financial institutions may be prepared for success in the changing environment by developing a well thought-out plan that finds a balance between the benefits of Bitcoin, encryption, and risk reduction strategies (Ekstrand and Musial, 2022).  

Conclusion

The study of Bitcoin's Layer 1 network concludes by highlighting the importance of this network for security, decentralisation, and transaction verification. Public key cryptography improves non repudiation and secrecy. Although security issues still exist, the network's integrity is supported by current mitigating techniques including consensus mechanisms and network architecture. Future developments like quantum resistant encryption and Layer 2 solutions present both possibilities and difficulties. Recommendations stress the integration of Bitcoin into financial institutions, led by strategic adoption and risk management, to ensure a strong basis for navigating the changing environment. 

References

TECH5300 Bitcoin Case Study 1 Sample

Your Task

This assessment is to be completed individually. In this assessment, you will evaluate the purpose, structure, and design of base layer 1 of the Bitcoin network, which provides the security layer.

Assessment Description

This assessment aims to evaluate your ability to analyse, evaluate, and critically assess the purpose, structure, and design of the base layer 1 of the Bitcoin network, which serves as the security layer. Additionally, you are required to explore the principles and significance of public-key cryptography in the context of Bitcoin transactions. By completing this assessment, you will demonstrate your proficiency in comprehending complex concepts, conducting in-depth research, and presenting well-structured arguments.

Case Study

Case Study Scenario: You have been appointed as a Bitcoin consultant for a financial institution seeking to explore the potential of utilising Bitcoin as part of their operations. Your task is to evaluate the purpose, structure, and design of the Bitcoin layer 1 network, with a particular focus on its security layer. Furthermore, you are required to analyse the role and impact of public-key cryptography in securing Bitcoin transactions.

Your Task: In this case study, you are required to prepare a detailed report addressing the following aspects:

1. Evaluation of the Purpose, Structure, and Design of Bitcoin Layer 1 Network:

a. Analyse the purpose and significance of the base layer 1 in the Bitcoin network, emphasising its role as the security layer.

b. Evaluate the structural components of the Bitcoin layer 1 network, including its decentralised nature, consensus mechanism, and transaction processing.

c. Assess the design principles and mechanisms employed within the Bitcoin layer 1 network to ensure security, immutability, and transaction verification.

2. Exploration of Public-Key Cryptography in Bitcoin Transactions:

a. Explain the fundamental principles of public-key cryptography and its relevance in securing Bitcoin transactions.

b. Analyse the mechanisms and algorithms used in public-key cryptography to ensure transaction verification, non-repudiation, and confidentiality in the Bitcoin network.

c. Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of public-key cryptography within the context of Bitcoin transactions, considering factors such as key management, quantum resistance, and regulatory implications.

3. Evaluation of Security Challenges and Mitigation Strategies:

a. Identify and analyse the major security challenges and vulnerabilities associated with the Bitcoin layer 1 network, including potential attack vectors, double-spending, and transaction malleability.

b. Evaluate existing mitigation strategies and countermeasures employed to address these security challenges.

4. Future Outlook and Recommendations:

a. Discuss emerging trends, advancements, or potential challenges related to the Bitcoin layer 1 network and public-key cryptography.

b. Provide recommendations to the financial institution regarding the integration of the

Bitcoin layer 1 network and public-key cryptography into their operations, considering the benefits, risks, and potential mitigations.

Solution

Introduction

"The Security, Cryptography, and Future Outlook of the Bitcoin Layer 1 Network. This in-depth examination explores the goal, composition, and architecture of the fundamental layer 1 network that underpins Bitcoin. For Assignment Help, It examines the use of public-key cryptography for transaction security, assesses security risks, and suggests defences. While offering tactical suggestions for handling the shifting market, the conversation gives insights into new trends and developments.

1. Evaluation of the Purpose, Structure and Design of Bitcoin Layer 1 Network

a. Purpose and significance of the base layer 1 in the Bitcoin network

The network's core architecture, which is primarily concerned with security, is Bitcoin's base layer 1. The Proof of Work (PoW) consensus process, aims to enable safe and decentralised transactions (Akbar et al., 2021). In order to validate transactions and add them to the blockchain, miners compete to solve challenging mathematical puzzles. This creates a tamper-resistant database. Due to its enormous processing capacity, this security mechanism has demonstrated resilience against threats, making Bitcoin very resistant to censorship and manipulation. Since its launch in 2009, the basic layer of Bitcoin has experienced uptime of over 99.98%, proving its reliability (Nguyen, 2019). The network's miners' dedication to network security is demonstrated by this astounding increase.

b. Structural components of the Bitcoin layer 1 network

Decentralisation, consensus through Proof of Work (PoW), and transaction processing are all embodied in the Layer 1 network of Bitcoin. Decentralisation is ensured via
the dispersion of global nodes, which improves security and resilience. PoW requires miners to validate transactions by solving complex puzzles. Every 10 minutes, blocks are created for transaction processing, placing security over speed (Kenny, 2019). This methodical pace provides immutability while limiting throughput. Layer 2 solutions balance speed, trust, and security at Layer 1. Layer 1 of Bitcoin emphasises decentralisation, PoW consensus, and purposeful processing, reaffirming its leadership position in the cryptocurrency industry (Tatos et al., 2019).

c. Design principles and mechanisms

The layer 1 network for Bitcoin is carefully designed to provide security, immutability, and transaction verification. Decentralisation enhances security and prevents isolated failures. In order to add blocks, Proof of Work (PoW) uses difficult solutions (Jabbar et al., 2020). This collective effort maintains data accuracy by resisting retroactive alterations. The consensus of the nodes prevents unauthorised acts and double spending by verifying transactions before they are included in blocks. These ideas strengthen the first layer of Bitcoin, which is crucial to its function as a reliable store of value and digital money, encapsulating security, historical integrity, and reliable transaction validation (Jacobetty and Orton-Johnson, 2023).

2. Exploration of Public-Key Cryptography in Bitcoin Transactions

a. Fundamental principles of public-key cryptography

Asymmetric encryption and the generation of a public-private key pair are the two underlying tenets of public-key cryptography. In this system, a user creates two sets of keys: a public key that is widely disseminated and a private key that is kept secret (Aydar et al., 2019). Secure communication is made possible by the fact that messages encrypted with one key can only be decoded with the other. These concepts are essential for transaction security in the context of Bitcoin. Each user has their own set of keys. A transaction output is encrypted by the sender using the recipient's public key, the output can only be decrypted using the recipient's private key. This makes sure that the money can only be accessed by the legitimate owner. The private key must be kept secret at all times; if it is compromised, the related cash will also be lost (Rezaeighaleh and Zou, 2019).

b. Mechanisms and algorithms used in public-key cryptography

The Bitcoin network uses a variety of techniques and algorithms, including public key cryptography, to guarantee transaction verification, non-repudiation, and secrecy.

Transaction Verification: Digital signatures and cryptographic hashes are used in Bitcoin. A transaction is signed with the sender's private key when a user starts it, yielding a distinctive digital signature (Krishnapriya and Sarath, 2020). The sender's public key is then used by nodes in the network to validate the signature. The transaction is regarded as confirmed and can be uploaded to the blockchain if the signature is legitimate.

Non-Repudiation: Non-repudiation is provided through digital signatures (Fang et al., 2020). A transaction can be authenticated using the associated public key once it has been signed with a private key. This improves accountability by preventing senders from downplaying their role in the transaction.

Confidentiality: Public keys used to generate Bitcoin addresses maintain secrecy. The names behind addresses are fictitious, despite the fact that transactions are recorded on a public blockchain (Bernabe et al., 2019). The money linked to an address can only be accessed by individuals possessing the private key, protecting ownership privacy.

c. Strengths and weaknesses of public-key cryptography

- Strengths: With public-key cryptography, Bitcoin is more secure and private. It enables secure ownership verification and ensures confidentiality with digital signatures and bogus addresses (Guo and Yu, 2022). Without the need for a competent middleman, peer-to-peer transactions are also made easier. Furthermore, keys' cryptographic nature provides robust defence against brute-force attacks.

- Weaknesses: Key management is difficult because losing a private key means that money is lost forever. Furthermore, the security of public key cryptography depends on the complexity of certain mathematical puzzles, and potential future developments like quantum computers might undermine its security (Fernandez Carames and Fraga Lamas, 2020).

3. Evaluation of Security Challenges and Mitigation Strategies

a. Major security challenges and vulnerabilities

The Bitcoin network's first layer has security flaws and problems. When someone spends the same amount of Bitcoin twice, there is a danger of double-spending. Although the consensus system prevents it, a strong actor may launch a 51% assault, allowing for double spending (Hacken and Bartosz, 2023). Transaction malleability is a problem since it permits changes to IDs prior to confirmation, which might be confusing. It affects ID-dependent processes even while security isn't immediately compromised. Attacks called Sybils take advantage of decentralisation by clogging the network with phoney nodes and upsetting stability. Eclipses control transactions and isolate nodes (Salman, Al Janabi and Sagheer, 2023). These difficulties highlight the necessity of constant attack detection, protocol improvements, and a variety of decentralised nodes to maintain the Layer 1 security and integrity of Bitcoin.

b. Existing mitigation strategies

In order to resolve the security issues in the Bitcoin layer 1 network, existing mitigation tactics and remedies are used (Tedeschi, Sciancalepore and Di Pietro, 2022). The decentralised consensus process prevents double spending by making such assaults prohibitively costly and necessitating a majority of honest miners. Furthermore, miners choose to confirm transactions with larger fees, decreasing the appeal of double-spending. Segregated witness (SegWit) was introduced to address transaction malleability (Kedziora et al., 2023). SegWit increases block capacity and reduces vulnerability to malleability attacks by separating signature data from transactions.

Strong network topology and peer discovery techniques are used to defend against Sybil assaults, assuring connections with a variety of nodes rather than being dominated by a single party (Madhwal and Pouwelse, 2023). Eclipse attacks may be thwarted by selecting peers carefully, employing multiple points of connection, and monitoring network activity to look for malicious actors. In order to address these security issues, Bitcoin uses a mix of protocol upgrades, financial incentives, and network architecture, assuring the stability and dependability of its layer 1 network (Lin et al., 2022).

4. Future Outlook and Recommendations

a. Emerging trends, advancements, or potential challenges

New developments and trends in public-key cryptography and layer 1 of the Bitcoin network provide both opportunities and difficulties. Layer 2 scaling solutions like the Lightning Network seek to solve Bitcoin's scalability problems by enabling quicker, lower cost off-chain transactions while retaining the layer 1 network's security (Dasaklis and Malamas, 2023). On the other hand, the security of conventional public key cryptography is in danger from quantum computing, which may have an effect on Bitcoin. In order to address this danger and uphold the network's security, researchers are investigating quantum-resistant cryptographic methods (Akter, 2023).

b. Recommendations

Opportunities exist for integrating public-key cryptography and the Bitcoin layer 1 network into the operations of financial institutions, but this requires careful design. First, consider adopting Bitcoin for cross-border payments to take advantage of its efficient and borderless nature. Public key cryptography may be used to improve security by assuring encrypted communication and safe transactions (Dijesh, Babu and Vijayalakshmi, 2020). Uncertain laws, volatile markets, and security concerns like key management are risks, nevertheless. For minimising these risks, use risk management strategies to cope with price changes, give solid key management processes top priority to prevent losing access to money, and do in-depth due diligence on compliance requirements.

Consider introducing Bitcoin services gradually to reduce risks and stay current with market movements. Consult with compliance and blockchain experts if there are any issues. Overall, financial institutions may be prepared for success in the changing environment by developing a well-thought-out plan that finds a balance between the benefits of Bitcoin, encryption, and risk-reduction strategies (Ekstrand and Musial, 2022).  

Conclusion

The study of Bitcoin's Layer 1 network concludes by highlighting the importance of this network for security, decentralisation, and transaction verification. Public-key cryptography improves non-repudiation and secrecy. Although security issues still exist, the network's integrity is supported by current mitigating techniques including consensus mechanisms and network architecture. Future developments like quantum-resistant encryption and Layer 2 solutions present both possibilities and difficulties. Recommendations stress the integration of Bitcoin into financial institutions, led by strategic adoption and risk management, to ensure a strong basis for navigating the changing environment. 

References

ICC104 Introduction to Cloud Computing Case Study 2 Sample

Context:

This assessment assesses student’s capabilities to identify key cloud characteristics, service models and deployment models.

During this assessment, students should go through the four case studies identified below and prepare a short report (250 words each) around the case studies as per the instructions.

Case Study 1: ExxonMobil moves to Cloud

“XTO Energy is a subsidiary of ExxonMobil and has major holdings in the Permian Basin, one of the world’s most important oil-producing regions. To overcome the challenges of monitoring and optimizing a vast number of widely dispersed field assets, XTO Energy has been digitalizing its Permian operations. By using Microsoft Azure IoT technologies to electronically collect data and then using Azure solutions to store and analyse it, XTO Energy gains new insights into good operations and future drilling possibilities”. (Microsoft, 2018)

Read the full Case study: https://customers.microsoft.com/en-us/story/exxonmobil-mining-oil-gasazure

Case Study 2: Autodesk Builds Unified Log Analytics Solution on AWS to Gain New Insights

“Autodesk, a leading provider of 3D design and engineering software, wants to do more than create and deliver software. It also wants to ensure its millions of global users have the best experience running that software. To make that happen, Autodesk needs to monitor and fix software problems as quickly as possible. Doing this was challenging, however, because the company’s previous application-data log solution struggled to keep up with the growing volume of data needing to be analyzed and stored.” (Amazon Web Services, n.d)

Read the full Case Study at https://aws.amazon.com/solutions/case-studies/autodesk-log analytics/

Case Study 3: ‘Pay by the Drink’ Flexibility Creates Major Efficiencies and Revenue for Coca-Cola’s

International Bottling Investments Group (BIG)

“BIG’s stated goal is to drive efficiencies, higher revenue, greater transparency and higher standards across all of its bottlers. But, the bottlers within BIG each faced very unique challenges inherent to their business and markets. Thus the challenge for the business was how to address the unique complexities and requirements of a very diverse group of bottlers with efficient infrastructure and standardized processes.” (Virtual Stream, n.d)
Read the full Case Study at https://www.virtustream.com/solutions/case-studies/coca-cola

Case Study 4: Rocketbots improves its systems availability in difficult regions while optimizing the cost.

“Since Rocketbots in its essence is a software solution built on the cloud, they needed the availability to give their customers their high-end solution at any time. For other providers giving Rocketbots the availability, they needed in Southeast Asia proved difficult. By leveraging Alibaba Cloud’s many data centers throughout Asia, Rocketbots was able to give their customers an optimized solution that would work well and more importantly was available when they needed it.“ (Alibaba Group, n.d)

Read the Complete Case Study: https://www.alibabacloud.com/customers/rocketbots

Instructions:

The assessment requires you to prepare a report based on the case studies mentioned above.

Report Instructions:

Start off with a short introduction (approximately 250 words) stating what the report is about and some basic information relevant to the case study. For example, you can provide background information including some context related to cloud computing. This section will be written in complete sentences and paragraphs. No tables, graphs, diagrams or dot points should be included.

The main body of the report should comprise of four different sections of 250 words each (one
section for each of the above mentioned case studies). With each section specifically addressing the following questions about the case study.

• Introduction of the case

• What was the challenge?

• How the challenge was solved?

• What were the different service models each utilized?

• What are the different deployment models each utilized?

• What services of public cloud providers each case study used?

• Reflection

Finally, write a conclusion (approximately 250 words) as a summary of your analysis of the case. This section brings together all of the information that you have presented in your report and should link to the purpose of the assessment as mentioned in the introduction. You can also discuss any areas which have been identified as requiring further investigation and how this will work to improve or change our understanding of the topic. This section does not introduce or discuss any new information specifically, and like the introduction, will be written in complete sentences and paragraphs. No tables, graphs, diagrams or dot points should be included. 

Solutions

Introduction:

This report explores the transformative power of cloud computing through a compilation of four diverse case studies. Cloud computing has emerged as a technological game-changer, offering businesses access to scalable, flexible, and cost-effective solutions to various challenges. For Assignment Help, Public cloud providers, including Amazon Web Services (AWS), Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud, and Alibaba Cloud, have risen as industry leaders, offering various services to cater to businesses of all sizes and industries.

In the digital age, organisations face ever-increasing pressure to adapt and innovate to remain competitive. Cloud computing has driven this transformation, enabling businesses to modernise their IT infrastructure, improve operational efficiency, enhance data management and analytics, and deliver superior customer experiences.

Throughout the case studies, we will examine each company's unique challenges and how they utilised cloud solutions to overcome these obstacles. We will also explore each organisation's different service and deployment models and the specific cloud services provided by public cloud providers in each instance.

As we delve into the intricacies of each case, we will witness the diverse applications of cloud computing, from optimising mining operations and enhancing software development to modernising IT Infrastructure and streamlining customer engagement. These real-world examples will provide valuable insights into the potential of cloud technologies to drive innovation and shape the future of businesses across various sectors. In an ever-changing digital landscape, cloud computing is a strategic imperative for organisations seeking to thrive in the modern era.

Case Study 1:

• Introduction: ExxonMobil, a global oil and gas industry leader, faced a significant challenge in optimising its mining operations for increased efficiency and productivity. To tackle this issue, they sought a cutting-edge solution that could leverage modern technologies to streamline their processes and enhance their overall performance.

• Challenge: ExxonMobil's complex mining operations involved extensive data processing, analysis, and management. The vast amounts of data generated from their mining sites made it imperative to find a solution that could handle the volume, velocity, and variety of data while ensuring data security and compliance (Microsoft. 2018).

• Solution: Azure's advanced data analytics and machine learning tools enabled them to gain valuable insights from the data, facilitating better decision-making and predictive maintenance strategies.

• Service Models: ExxonMobil utilised various service models provided by Microsoft Azure to address different aspects of its mining operations. They leveraged Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) for scalable and flexible computing resources to efficiently manage their mining data and applications. Platform as a Service (PaaS) was used to build and seamlessly deploy custom data analytics and machine learning solutions.

• Deployment Models: ExxonMobil employed a hybrid deployment model to ensure the best utilisation of resources and meet specific operational requirements.

• Public Cloud Services: In their collaboration with Microsoft Azure, ExxonMobil utilised various services, including Azure Virtual Machines, Azure Machine Learning, Azure Data Factory, and Azure Kubernetes Service.

• Reflection: ExxonMobil's adoption of Microsoft Azure's cloud services exemplifies how cutting-edge technologies can revolutionise traditional industries. By leveraging Azure's advanced tools and service models, ExxonMobil successfully tackled their challenges, improving operational efficiency and increasing its competitive advantage in the oil and gas sector.

Case Study 2:

• Introduction: Autodesk, a renowned software company specialising in 3D design, engineering, and entertainment software, faced a critical challenge in efficiently managing and analysing their vast amounts of log data.

• Challenge: Autodesk's diverse suite of software products generated a massive volume of log data from various sources. The challenge lay in processing, storing, and analysing this data in real time to identify and resolve issues, monitor application performance, and optimise software development.

• Solution: AWS provided Autodesk with an efficient and cost-effective solution to address its log analytics challenge. Autodesk could centralise and streamline its log data management by adopting AWS Cloud services. AWS offered highly scalable storage options and powerful data processing tools that allowed Autodesk to easily handle large volumes of log data (Amazon Web Services).

• Service Models: Autodesk utilised multiple service models provided by AWS to optimise their log analytics. They leveraged Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) for scalable computing resources, enabling them to deploy log processing applications without managing underlying hardware.

• Deployment Models: To meet their specific requirements and ensure seamless integration, Autodesk employed a hybrid deployment model. They retained critical on-premises Infrastructure for certain sensitive data while migrating non-sensitive log data and analytics to the AWS cloud.

• Public Cloud Services: In their collaboration with AWS, Autodesk utilised a range of services, including Amazon S3 for cost-effective and scalable object storage, Amazon EC2 for resizable compute capacity, and Amazon CloudWatch for real-time monitoring and alerting of log data.

• Reflection: Autodesk's successful integration of AWS cloud services for log analytics exemplifies how public cloud solutions can revolutionise business data management and analysis. By adopting AWS's versatile service and deployment models, Autodesk overcame the challenges posed by the massive scale of log data and transformed its log analytics process. This case study illustrates the power of cloud-based solutions in enabling companies to harness the full potential of their data, make informed decisions, and enhance overall business performance.

Case Study 3:

• Introduction: Coca-Cola, the world-renowned beverage company, embarked on a transformative journey to migrate its IT Infrastructure to the cloud. To achieve this, they partnered with Amazon Web Services (AWS), a leading public cloud provider known for its robust and scalable solutions.

• Challenge: Coca-Cola faced the challenge of modernising its IT infrastructure to keep pace with rapidly evolving business needs. Their existing on-premises systems struggled to handle the increasing demands of data processing, storage, and global accessibility.

• Solution: AWS offered Coca-Cola a comprehensive cloud solution that addressed its challenges. By migrating to AWS Cloud, Coca-Cola could leverage various services to modernise its applications, streamline data management, and enhance overall agility.

• Service Models: Coca-Cola utilised various service models provided by AWS to meet its diverse requirements. They leveraged Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) to flexibly manage their computing resources and storage needs (Atchison, 2020).

• Deployment Models: To ensure a smooth and secure migration, Coca-Cola adopted a hybrid deployment model. They moved some of their applications and workloads to the AWS cloud while retaining sensitive data and critical operations in their on-premises Infrastructure (AWS., 2014).

• Public Cloud Services: In their collaboration with AWS, Coca-Cola used a wide array of cloud services. These included Amazon EC2 for resizable compute capacity, Amazon S3 for secure and scalable object storage, Amazon RDS for managed relational databases, and Amazon Redshift for advanced data analytics.

• Reflection: Coca-Cola's successful migration to AWS Cloud showcases the potential of public cloud solutions in addressing modern business challenges. By embracing AWS's service and deployment models, Coca-Cola effectively modernised their IT infrastructure, gaining improved scalability, flexibility, and cost-efficiency. This case study is an excellent example of how cloud migration can empower businesses to stay competitive, foster innovation, and adapt to the ever-changing technological landscape.

Case Study 4:

• Introduction: Rocketbots, a leading customer engagement platform, faced a significant challenge in managing and analysing vast customer data while ensuring seamless interactions across various messaging channels.

• Challenge: Rocketbots needed to efficiently handle large volumes of customer data generated through multiple messaging platforms like WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, and more.

• Solution: Alibaba Cloud provided Rocketbots with a powerful and scalable cloud infrastructure to address customer engagement needs. By leveraging Alibaba Cloud's robust computing resources and AI capabilities, Rocketbots could process and analyse customer data in real-time (Alibaba Group).

• Service Models: Rocketbots utilised various service models offered by Alibaba Cloud to bolster their customer engagement platform. They leveraged Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) for scalable computing resources to efficiently handle data processing and analytics.

• Deployment Models: Rocketbots adopted a hybrid deployment model to cater to their specific requirements. They integrated Alibaba Cloud's services with their Infrastructure to maintain data privacy and compliance.

• Public Cloud Services: In their collaboration with Alibaba Cloud, Rocketbots utilised various services. These included Alibaba Cloud Elastic Compute Service (ECS) for flexible computing resources, Alibaba Cloud Machine Learning Platform for AI-driven insights, and Alibaba Cloud Object Storage Service (OSS) for secure and scalable data storage (Artificial Intelligence and Cloud Computing Conference 2018).

• Reflection: Rocketbots' successful partnership with Alibaba Cloud demonstrates the power of public cloud solutions in optimising customer engagement and data management. By embracing Alibaba Cloud's service and deployment models, Rocketbots achieved enhanced scalability, real-time data analytics, and personalised customer interactions.

Conclusion:

The case studies presented in this report highlight the significant impact of cloud computing on businesses across diverse industries. The transformative potential of cloud solutions is evident in the successful outcomes of ExxonMobil, Autodesk, Coca-Cola, and Rocketbots. By adopting cloud services, these companies improved operational efficiency, optimised data management, and enhanced customer engagement. The versatility and scalability of public cloud providers, such as AWS, Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud, and Alibaba Cloud, played a pivotal role in driving innovation and delivering exceptional results. As cloud computing continues to evolve, businesses must recognise its strategic importance and embrace this technology to stay competitive and thrive in the digital era. In the rapidly evolving digital landscape, cloud computing has emerged as a catalyst for business transformation. The case studies of ExxonMobil, Autodesk, Coca-Cola, and Rocketbots provide compelling evidence of how cloud solutions can revolutionize operations, data management, and customer engagement. These real-world examples demonstrate that cloud computing is no longer just a technological trend but a fundamental enabler of innovation and growth.

The scalability, flexibility, and cost-effectiveness offered by public cloud providers have empowered companies to modernize their IT infrastructure and optimize processes. The ability to harness massive amounts of data in real-time through cloud-based analytics and machine learning has allowed businesses to make data-driven decisions and gain a competitive edge. Moreover, the adoption of hybrid cloud models has enabled organizations to strike a balance between maintaining critical operations on-premises and leveraging the cloud's agility and scalability.

References

SRM751 Principles of Building Information Modelling Report 1 Sample

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. This document is to be read in conjunction with the Unit Guide for this unit.

2. It is the responsibility of each student to confirm submission requirements including dates, time, and format.

3. Extension or Special Consideration may be considered for late submission. It is the responsibility of eachstudent to understand Deakin regulations regarding late submission and Special Consideration for assessment.

4. You will be required to complete Assignments 1 and 2 individually, but Assignment 3 will be completed as a group. Further information regarding how groups are allocated is provided below.

5. All assignments, unless otherwise noted, must be submitted electronically through CloudDeakin. Assignments submitted in any other way will not be marked.

6. You may refer to publications, but you must write in your own “voice” and cite the references using the Author-Date (Harvard) system. It is essential for you to fully understand what you write and to be able to verify your source if you are requested to do so. The library and study support team provide workshops and advice on citations and referencing.

7. The University regards plagiarism as an extremely serious academic offence. Submission through CloudDeakin includes your declaration that the work submitted is entirely your own.

Please make full useof the ‘Check Your Work’ folder in the Dropbox tab on CloudDeakin. You can find all you need to know about citations, referencing and academic integrity at
https://www.deakin.edu.au/students/studying/study-support/referencing

8. Before starting your assignment, please read the University document, Study Support at
http://www.deakin.edu.au/students/study-support.

9. To prepare for your assignments, you should carefully read the references introduced in teaching sessions and on CloudDeakin, as well as consult websites and other relevant documents (for example, through searching databases).

10. Further details of assignments, including presentations will be provided in classes, seminars and through CloudDeakin.

PURPOSE OF ASSESSMENT TASK 1

The purpose of this assignment is to enable you to apply your knowledge of information management systems in the construction industry to provide a response to a real question. This assessment task addresses the following unit learning outcomes for this unit:

ULO1: Apply available methodologies for data and information creation, usage and sharing using innovative tools in the construction industry.

ASSESSMENT TASK 1 REQUIREMENTS

Each student must produce an individual report that demonstrates their understanding of the principles of BIM and the basic use of leading applications.

Solution

Reflection on the key lessons learned during the development process

During the BIM development process, I learned several valuable lessons that have helped me better understand the principles of BIM and its application in the construction industry. One of the key lessons I learned is the importance of collaboration and communication. BIM requires the involvement of various stakeholders, and effective communication is essential to ensure that everyone understands their roles and responsibilities. For Assignment Help, During the Revit Training, I realized that working collaboratively with other team members helped to improve the overall quality of the BIM model. Sharing ideas and feedback helped us to identify issues early in the process and find creative solutions. Collaboration and communication are crucial in the BIM development process (Tang et al., 2019). BIM requires collaboration between various stakeholders, and effective communication is essential to ensure that everyone understands their roles and responsibilities. Communication is essential in all phases of the BIM development process, from conceptualization to construction and maintenance. Collaborative and open communication channels enable project team members to share critical information, identify and address issues, and establish clear project goals and objectives.

Another lesson I learned during the BIM development process is the importance of data management. BIM models are data-rich, and it's essential to ensure that the data is accurate, complete, and consistent. During the Revit Training, I learned that data management involves data collection, verification, and validation. Effective data management ensures that all project team members have access to the most up-to-date and accurate data, which is crucial for making informed decisions (Hosseini and Taleai, 2021). Additionally, I learned the importance of organizing data in a standardized format to enable easy sharing and analysis across different stakeholders. BIM models are data-rich, and it's essential to ensure that the data is accurate, complete, and consistent. This requires a robust data management strategy that includes data collection, verification, and validation (Hardin and McCool, 2015). The data must be standardized and organized to enable easy sharing and analysis across different stakeholders. Effective data management processes help to ensure that all project team members have access to the most up-to-date and accurate data, which is crucial for making informed decisions.

Quality control and assurance are also crucial in the BIM development process. BIM models must be checked and verified regularly to ensure that they meet the required standards and specifications. I learned that quality control and assurance processes help to identify errors and omissions early in the process, reducing the risk of rework and increasing project efficiency. By using quality control and assurance processes, we were able to ensure that the BIM model was accurate, complete, and consistent. BIM models must be checked and verified regularly to ensure that they meet the required standards and specifications (Costin et al., 2018). This requires the use of quality control and assurance processes that ensure that the models are accurate, complete, and consistent. Quality control and assurance processes help to identify errors and omissions, thereby ensuring that issues are addressed early in the process. This, in turn, reduces the risk of rework and increases project efficiency.

Finally, I learned the importance of continuous improvement during the BIM development process. BIM models are continually evolving, and there is always room for improvement. During the Revit Training, I realized that incorporating feedback from stakeholders can help to enhance the overall quality of the BIM model and improve project outcomes. By using data analytics and performance metrics, we were able to identify areas for improvement and make changes that enhanced the BIM model. BIM models are continually evolving, and there is always room for improvement. Stakeholders must be open to feedback and willing to incorporate changes that improve the overall quality of the model and enhance project outcomes (Lu et al., 2017). Continuous improvement involves the use of data analytics and performance metrics to identify areas for improvement. It also involves stakeholder engagement to gather feedback and suggestions on how to enhance the BIM development process continually.

In conclusion, the BIM development process is a complex and iterative process that involves various stakeholders. Through the Revit Training, I learned several key lessons, including the importance of collaboration and communication, data management, quality control and assurance, and continuous improvement. Effective BIM development processes require a commitment to open and collaborative communication, effective data management, rigorous quality control and assurance, and a culture of continuous improvement. These principles are essential for stakeholders looking to use BIM models to optimize project outcomes, reduce risk, and increase efficiency. Incorporating these lessons into the BIM development process can help to improve the overall quality of BIM models and enhance project outcomes. As a future professional in the construction industry, I am now better equipped to apply these principles and achieve successful project outcomes through the use of BIM.

Report comparing the advantages and shortfalls of different BIM tools/tasks

Introduction

Building Information Modeling (BIM) is a digital representation of the physical and functional characteristics of a building (Lu et al., 2017). BIM software tools play a crucial role in the development and implementation of BIM processes (Bryde et al., 2013). This report aims to compare the advantages and shortfalls of different BIM tools and tasks.

BIM Tools

Autodesk Revit

Autodesk Revit is a popular BIM tool that provides architects, engineers, and construction professionals with a comprehensive platform for designing and managing building projects (Lu et al., 2017). The advantages of using Revit include its ability to integrate with other Autodesk software tools, such as AutoCAD, and its ability to support a wide range of file formats. The tool also allows for the creation of parametric models, which can be modified and updated easily (Bryde et al., 2013). However, Revit is known for its steep learning curve, which can be a shortcoming for new users. Additionally, Revit's file sizes can become quite large, which may cause performance issues on lower-end computers or when working on larger projects. Another potential shortcoming of Revit is its lack of flexibility in terms of customization, as users are limited to the features and tools provided by the software (Sacks et al., 2018). Furthermore, Revit's licensing can be expensive, which may be a barrier to smaller firms or individuals. The software also requires a powerful computer to run efficiently, which may add to the cost of adoption. Despite these potential drawbacks, Revit remains a popular BIM tool in the construction industry due to its robust features and integration capabilities.

SketchUp

SketchUp is a 3D modeling software tool that allows designers to create models quickly and efficiently. The tool has a user-friendly interface and allows for easy integration with other BIM software tools. SketchUp is also known for its extensive library of pre-built 3D models, which can be easily incorporated into designs. However, SketchUp is not suitable for large-scale projects and lacks some of the advanced features that other BIM tools offer. Furthermore, SketchUp's parametric modeling capabilities are limited, which can make it difficult to make complex changes to designs (Bryde et al., 2013). The tool also has limited capabilities when it comes to collaboration, which can be a drawback for teams working on large projects. Additionally, SketchUp's output capabilities are not as robust as other BIM tools, which may limit its usefulness for construction documentation and other project management tasks. Despite these limitations, SketchUp is a popular BIM tool for smaller-scale projects and for quick conceptual designs.

Navisworks

Navisworks is a BIM coordination tool that allows for the integration of multiple models and the detection of clashes between them. The tool provides users with real-time visualization of models and allows for the creation of detailed reports. Navisworks is also known for its ability to integrate with other BIM software tools, such as Revit and AutoCAD (Costin et al., 2018). However, Navisworks is not a comprehensive design tool and lacks some of the advanced features that other BIM tools offer.

BIM Tasks

Data Management

Data management is a critical task in the BIM process. The advantages of effective data management include accurate, complete, and consistent data, which is crucial for making informed decisions. Data management also enables easy sharing and analysis of data across different stakeholders (Lu et al., 2017). The shortfalls of poor data management include errors and omissions, which can lead to rework and increased project costs.

Collaboration and Communication

Collaboration and communication are essential tasks in the BIM process. The advantages of effective collaboration and communication include improved overall quality of the BIM model and enhanced project outcomes. Collaboration and communication also help to identify issues early in the process and find creative solutions. The shortfalls of poor collaboration and communication include misunderstandings, delays, and increased project costs.

Quality Control and Assurance

Quality control and assurance are critical tasks in the BIM process. The advantages of quality control and assurance processes include the identification of errors and omissions early in the process, reducing the risk of rework and increasing project efficiency (Eastman et al., 2011). Quality control and assurance also ensure that the BIM model is accurate, complete, and consistent (Lu et al., 2017). The shortfalls of poor quality control and assurance include errors and omissions, which can lead to rework and increased project costs.

Conclusion

In conclusion, BIM tools and tasks play a crucial role in the development and implementation of BIM processes. Different BIM tools have their advantages and shortfalls, and it is essential to select the appropriate tools for each project. Similarly, different BIM tasks have their advantages and shortfalls, and it is essential to prioritize tasks based on their impact on project outcomes. By effectively selecting and prioritizing BIM tools and tasks, stakeholders can improve the overall quality of BIM models and enhance project outcomes.

References

TECH1100 Professional Practice and Communication Report 1 Sample

Your Task

Your first assessment in this subject requires you to write an email which determines the factors of success for IT professionals that align with the expectations of diverse stakeholders, with an emphasis on stakeholder engagement.

Assessment Description

In this assessment task, you are required to demonstrate your understanding of the factors contributing to the success of IT professionals in stakeholder engagement, particularly those that align with the expectations of diverse stakeholders. You will write an email to your manager, summarising your research findings and providing recommendations for effective stakeholder engagement. The purpose of this email is to communicate your knowledge, insights, and recommendations in a professional context. This assessment aims to achieve the following subject learning outcomes:

LO1 - Determine the factors of success for IT professionals that align with the expectations of diverse stakeholders.

Assessment Instructions

For this assessment, you will need to submit a Word Document that emulates an email, with the following items that need to be covered in the assessment:

• Imagine you are an IT professional assigned to lead a project with diverse stakeholders.

• Write an email to your manager, summarising your research findings on the factors of success for IT professionals in stakeholder engagement.

• Provide a clear and concise overview of the key factors that contribute to successful stakeholder engagement, emphasizing their alignment with diverse stakeholder expectations.

• Include examples or case studies to support your points and illustrate the practical application of the identified success factors.

• Present well-supported recommendations for effective stakeholder engagement strategies that IT professionals can implement to meet diverse stakeholder expectations.

• Address any potential challenges or considerations associated with stakeholder engagement in the email.

• Use a professional and respectful tone throughout the email, ensuring clarity and coherence in your writing.

Solution

To

The Manager,

Date: 24/11/2023

Subject: Effective stakeholder engagements

As per the research undertaken to identify the key success factors for an IT professional in terms of the stakeholder's engagement. Three main factors have been identified: stakeholder management laden with social responsibilities, assessment of the stakeholders' expectations from the given project and an effective communication channel for the stakeholders. It has been found that ethics plays a crucial role in the management of the stakeholders with social responsibilities. Stakeholder management enhances the aspects of trust associated with the particular project. In other words, relational management significantly involves trust factors, which can be established with the help of an effective communication process. For Assignment Help, Societal stakeholders are the stakeholders who are engaged through different socio dynamic aspects. The examples of such stakeholders for the present IT project are the immediate communities, common masses, environment, NGOs (Non governmental organisations), media, trade unions and industry associations. The IT professionals must consider the impact of their actions on the social environment, which should not be adverse in the long run or with immediate effect (de Oliveira and Rabechini Jr, 2019, p. 132). It has been found that the Australian Computer Society provides effective guidelines regarding the ethical guidelines to be followed by a successful IT professional. The PMBOK (Project Management Body of Knowledge) can be used to understand project management and its associated processes and practices (Strous et al., 2020). The stakeholders' expectations from the project can be identified by implementing a few steps of processes by the IT professional. Transparency related to the various aspects of the undertaken project needs to be stated with utmost clarity, such as the proposed timeline for the project completion, the financial budget plan, and the risks and challenges associated with the project. After that, a successful assessment of the stakeholders can be conducted with the help of the knowledge gathered through suitable communication processes.
The main stakeholders identified for the present IT project include internal stakeholders such as employees, policymakers and investors. In contrast, the external stakeholders include customers, suppliers, and associated social or legal bodies. The adaptation of disruptive technologies in the IT field has necessitated the development of invisible interactions with the potential to deliver enhanced productivity. In the digitalised era, the disruptors include Blockchain, Digital Reality, and Cognitive technology. It is important for the IT professional to efficiently communicate the uses and resultant advantages of the disruptors to earn positive support from the stakeholders in the project. The stakeholders' major expectation is to complete the project within the proposed timeline while utilising the financial resources judiciously (Frizzo Barker et al., 2020, p. 54). The utility of quantum computing needs to be addressed in regular meetings to review the necessary decisions made regarding the given project. Therefore, the stakeholders can derive satisfaction by getting involved in the decision-making process for the particular project. Effective integrity settings are necessary to address the professional environment for an IT project. The aforementioned setting helps in encouraging the professional to gain more skill based activities, thereby increasing their expertise. On the other hand, professional societies help determine the professional level of professional aspiration by the individual employees (Tavani, 2015). The recognition for better performance is also suitably carried out by the aforementioned professional environment. It is stated that stakeholder mapping can be used to address the expectations of the individual stakeholders. It has been noted that factors such as impact, interest and influence are involved in the mapping process to address the diverse expectations of the various stakeholders suitably. Segmentation of the stakeholders can be utilised to make individual communications, which can help the professional understand each stakeholder's feedback related to a particular process of business (Tristancho, 2023). The data can help rectify and change the project's decisions with suitable strategies. The internal stakeholders, such as the employees, benefited from appropriate remunerations as per the evaluation of their work. The involvement of the external stakeholders has been identified as being instrumental in addressing the valuation of the project in terms of its functionality. The investors are focused on gaining profitability regarding the invested financial resources for the project's development. Effective planning and regular communication can deal with the diverse expectations of the stakeholders with ease and convenience.

The Apple iPhone development project and the Ford Pinto Design project have addressed the issues of stakeholder engagement suitably with the help of adequate success factors of project management (Dubey and Tiwari, 2020, p. 381). An effective communication channel was ensured to run parallelly with the project so that no miscommunication could hinder the development of the projects. Secrecy of the data was maintained up to the extent that the stakeholders did not feel left behind in the process.

The main challenge in stakeholder management is associated with effective decision making for a particular project. The stakeholders are of different opinion regarding a single task which shall be employed for the project. The different perspectives and expertise of the stakeholders make room for complex decision making processes within the project in the IT industry. The varying differences in the stakeholders' expectations can form considerable conflict in the priorities for the particular project. The stakeholders will use the resources to decide on the priorities to be addressed by the present project so that their expectations are suitably addressed. The differences in the priorities make the conflicting decisions involved in the project (Anicic and Buselic, 2020, p. 250). The ongoing project might face some considerable constraints regarding the available financial resources. The expertise in the technological aspect can also act as a constraint for an IT project development. Eventually, the limited resources fail to address all the expectations bestowed on the given project by various stakeholders. The accessibility to real time data regarding the ongoing project can make room for more chaos in the feedback and evaluation process. It is highly case for the IT project that most critical stakeholders are unaware of the technological knowledge involved. The resultant evaluative feedback from such stakeholders makes the project suffer adversely.
Enhancement of the collaboration and engagement values can be suitably addressed for effective stakeholder engagement in the IT project. The collaboration value will help enhance the actual valuation of the project for internal and external stakeholders. The adequate implementation of innovative and lucrative collaboration features for individual stakeholders will help motivate them to perform better in favour of the project. An example of an effective collaborative feature might be the opportunity to access the technological knowledge required to implement the project. Therefore, The knowledge can be utilised for more such projects so that the stakeholders are drawn towards the collaboration process. Value creation for the stakeholders can be addressed by identifying the necessary interest domains of the individual stakeholders. The announcement that the best employee will be provided with a salary hike effectively addresses the issue of engagement while enhancing the entire team's performance.

The concept of a Big Room can enhance the rapport between the internal and external stakeholders for an IT project. The Big Room can help enhance the community cohesiveness, which signifies the engagement of the stakeholders at a greater level. In other words, the Big Room can be regarded as a combined workplace for all the representatives of the identified stakeholders. The representatives can be physically present or remotely work on the project via appropriate digital mediums (Coates, 2019). The Big Room can help effectively communicate the issues faced while working on the project with the natural time effect. The overall impact of the introduction of the aforementioned concept can enhance the stakeholder's engagement effectively for an IT project. The IT project can be made to address all the relevant expectations of the stakeholders along with prioritising the need to reach its ultimate goal with the help of an efficient stakeholder’s management program. The aforementioned policies and strategies can be effectively implemented to meet the demands of the stakeholders both at the internal and external levels.

The SFIA can be used to develop the skills needed for an IT professional's successful career. Skill assessment is one of the different functions for which the public and private organisations extensively use the framework. Sourcing, supply management, relationship management, contract management and customer service support have been the framework's main features. Goal directed communication with the stakeholders can be learned with the help of the framework by the IT professionals to help communicate in the formal environment (Lehtinen and Aaltonen, 2020, p. 87). Risk management is also addressed with the help of the framework.

Emotional intelligence and effective communication strategies can ultimately act as instruments to manage stakeholders' engagement in the IT project. The temporal flexibility allowed for the different stakeholder's activities for the project to make room for enhanced performance and engagement. The nature of tasks undertaken by the different stakeholders is aptly technologically advanced; therefore, adequate rest on the part of the different stakeholders is necessary. In other words, creativity and intellectual capacity can be reflected as the mind is calm while a particular task is performed (Reynolds, 2018). The recommended temporal flexibility can be suitable for enhancing stakeholders' engagement.

Thanking you.

Regards and wishes,

Reference List:

INFS5023 Information Systems for Business Assignment 2 Sample

OBJECTIVE

The objective of Part B of the assignment is to produce a written report addressing the question of how enterprises in the industry segment are using information and communication technologies (ICTs) to support business strategies, to seek competitive advantage (CA) or sustainable competitive advantage (SCA) and to identify opportunities for further use of these technologies by businesses in this industry segment to change or improve their businesses, or to gain CA and which of the strategies might be sustainable.

REQUIREMENT

Each group is required to:

Prepare and submit a written report on the group’s investigation to Learnonline. See below for details of the report requirements.

The report will have an executive summary.

An executive summary is a summary of a report made so that readers can rapidly become acquainted with a large body of material without having to read it all. It will usually contain a brief statement of the background information, concise analysis and main conclusions. The executive summary will be on a separate page directly before the main report and should be around half a page in length. The executive summary is in addition to the ten pages (maximum) of the main report. The report will have a title page and a contents page.

The report questions

The main written report will address the following questions/issues:

5. This part of your investigation focuses on business responses to the major forces identified in 4. (i.e. how they compete). Identify a range of the strategies that businesses have adopted to provide them with competitive advantage (CA) and which of these are sustainable competitive advantages (SCA) in response to these forces.
Your analysis should also consider issues such as cost leadership, innovation, differentiation, niche market and other strategies.

6. This part focuses on the internal arrangements within the individual businesses you have investigated — how they organise their businesses to implement their business strategies. Use Porter’s Value Chain Analysis Model to analyse organisations in the industry. The aim here is to explain how different businesses organise their processes to achieve their organisational objectives. You should choose to concentrate on at least two contrasting organisations in your segment to illustrate competitive responses. Justify your choice.

As this question requires some knowledge of internal processes, you may find it difficult to obtain specific information. Use whatever information is available to you to address this question as best you can.

7. Use Business Process Approach/ Model to identify how businesses in your industry segment are categorised as internal and external processes and how they enhance the organisation’s efficiency and effectiveness.

10. Explore the Internet and other sources to identify new and “trending” information and communication technologies, systems and applications that are becoming available or that will soon be available to businesses in this industry to assist them to gain a CA or SCA. Describe these new technologies, systems and applications..

11. Explain how the new information and communication technologies, systems, and applications identified in #10 above might be used to create a CA or SCA.

Your explanation should be in terms of some or all of the following:

effects on existing business models,

creating new business models,

supporting existing strategies,

creating new business strategies,

specific additions to a portfolio of information systems

improving the ability to compete in terms of the five forces analysis,

improving/creating new processes in terms of the value chain analysis,

improving customer relations.

12. How might these ICTs or applications create a competitive disadvantage?

13 Provide a critique of two of the analysis tools you have used. Evaluate how effective they are for exploring competitive advantage in the industry. Use a separate section with headings in your report for each analysis tool. Provide a supporting argument for your criticisms.

You are required to comment on how well they fulfil the purpose for which they were designed, not to just point to areas for which they were not designed.

Solution

Question no. 5

In response to the competitive forces in the milk segment of the dairy industry, businesses have adopted various strategies to attain a competitive advantage (CA) and sustainable competitive advantage (SCA). For Assignment Help -

1. Cost Leadership

Competitive Advantage (CA): Some companies seek to offer milk products at lower prices than their competitors to achieve economies of scale and operational efficiency (Kimiti, 2020). This can be a source of attraction for price-sensitive consumers.

Sustainable Competitive Advantage (SCA): If companies continue to invest in current technology, effective supply chain management, and maintain a robust cost control system, it may be possible to sustain the leadership of costs.

2. Product Differentiation

CA: Companies such as Nestle and Amul, aiming to create a distinct market presence and appeal to specific consumer segments, emphasize the different product characteristics of lactose-free or fortified milk.

SCA: Sustainable if the company continues to invest in research and development, introducing innovative milk products that meet changing consumer preferences and needs (Guiné et al., 2020).

3. Niche Market Focus

CA: Some companies are focused on particular niche markets, for example, organic or unique milk products that cater to a narrower but devoted customer base which will pay an additional premium in order to offer specialized services.

SCA: Sustainable if the company effectively meets the unique needs of the niche market and establishes strong brand loyalty within that segment.

4. Innovation and New Product Development

CA: Businesses invest in research and development to introduce novel dairy products or production methods, staying ahead of market trends and offering products that competitors do not.

SCA: Sustainable if the company maintains a culture of innovation, continually introduces successful new products, and adapts to changing consumer preferences.

5. Vertical Integration

CA: Vertical integration is a feature of companies like Amul, who own both dairy farms and processing facilities. This results in complete supply chain control, ensuring quality and cost advantages.

SCA: Sustainable if the company effectively manages and optimizes the integrated operations, achieving consistent quality and cost advantages over the long term.

6. Brand Equity and Recognition

CA: With solid brand recognition and consumer confidence, established brands such as Amul and Nestle can gain consumers' loyalty and market presence (Pandey et al., 2021).

SCA: Sustainable as long as the company maintains its brand reputation through consistent quality, marketing efforts, and customer satisfaction.
Question no. 6

The Porter value chain analysis model gives an overview of the internal activities that support a company's competitiveness. In the industry of dairy, firms like Amul, Nestle, and Saputo implement their business-related strategies through distinctive arrangements of value chains.

Amul

Amul, an Indian cooperative dairy firm, has a distinct value chain structure firmly ingrained in its collaborative concept (Pandey and Sahay, 2022). The joint venture includes millions of smaller milk manufacturers who share and control the company. In addition, these partnerships assist the Amul in getting the milk from the farmers directly and also ensure a steady supply of very high-quality raw materials.

Inbound Logistics: The tender procedure of Amul is exceptionally significant. They set up networks of collection points in remote areas, intending to ensure the availability of milk at a timely manner.

Operations: Amul maintains several processing factories around India. These facilities are focused on product diversification, with products ranging from milk to cheese, butter, yoghurt, and ice cream (JACKSON and JAYAPRAKASH, 2023). The cooperative concept promotes the ongoing advancement of processing technologies and procedures.

Outbound Logistics: Amul has a substantial distribution network, ensuring that its products efficiently extend urban and rural markets. However, this broad distribution extension permits them to cater towards a diverse base of customers.

Marketing and Sales: Amul is well-known for its aggressive marketing activities and has established a significant brand presence in India (Bapat, 2020). Their advertising frequently emphasises their goods' outstanding quality, low cost, and nutritious benefits.

Service: Amul places significant emphasis on customer satisfaction. They have established a robust customer service network that effectively handles inquiries, feedback, and complaints.

Figure 1: Value chain analysis model
(Source: Bruin, 2021)

Saputo

Compared to Amul, Saputo is a Canadian dairy corporation with a more centralised model. They have a global footprint with activities in many countries.

Inbound Logistics: Saputo's inbound logistics focus on procuring milk from various sources, including farms and external suppliers (Fernandes, 2021). They have established strong relationships with farmers and utilise advanced technology for milk collection.

Operations: Saputo maintains cutting-edge processing facilities outfitted with advanced technologies. In their manufacturing operations, they premium efficiency and quality control.

Outbound Logistics: Saputo has a well-organized logistics network for distributing dairy products across diverse markets. They leverage economies of scale to optimise distribution costs.

Marketing and Sales: Saputo employs a market-driven approach, tailoring their products to meet local preferences. They also engage in strategic acquisitions to expand their product portfolio and market reach.

Service: Saputo emphasises after-sales service by actively seeking customer feedback and adapting their products accordingly (Bonesteve, 2021).

Justification

A meaningful comparison in value chain strategies is provided with the analysis of Amul and Saputo. Amul's Cooperative Model also highlights the benefits of the centralised approach, and Saputo's worldwide operations show the importance of decentralised supply chains. The examination is intended to provide a detailed understanding of how different organisations organise processes to meet their objectives within the dairy sector.

Question no. 7

In the Dairy industry, businesses like Amul, Saputo, and Nestle utilise a Business Process Approach to enhance their efficiency and effectiveness through internal and external processes.

Internal Processes

Production and Processing: Amul, with over 70 processing plants in India, processes a staggering 38 million litres of milk daily (Singh, 2023). This internal operation transforms raw milk into a diverse range of dairy products.

Saputo operates 60+ manufacturing facilities globally, producing millions of pounds of dairy products yearly.

Quality Control: These companies implement rigorous quality control measures. For instance, Nestle conducts over 700,000 quality tests annually on their dairy products.

Product Development and Innovation: Amul and Nestle invest significantly in research and development. Amul's dedicated R&D centre and Nestle's global research network drive innovation and product diversification.

Figure 2: Business model of Amul
(Source: Ernie, 2019)

External Processes

Supply Chain Management: Amul's extensive network includes millions of farmers, ensuring a constant raw milk supply. Saputo balances procurement from owned farms and external sources, maintaining a flexible supply chain.

Distribution and Logistics: Amul's distribution network reaches over 3 million retail outlets in India. Saputo employs advanced logistics technology to distribute products globally (Gulati and Juneja, 2023).

Supplier Relationships: Amul's cooperative model establishes a direct and mutually beneficial connection with farmers. Nestle collaborates with a vast network of suppliers globally, ensuring a reliable supply of raw materials.

Efficiency and Effectiveness

Amul's cooperative approach reduces intermediate expenses, resulting in more cost-effective purchasing and a stronger position as India's largest dairy cooperative.

Saputo's global network and superior processing methods result in economies of scale, making it one of the world's top dairy processors.

Nestle's emphasis on innovation and product variety has enabled the company to create a significant position in the global dairy industry, boosting its overall efficacy (Kalyani and Shukla, 2022).

Question no. 10

In the dairy industry, several emerging technologies are poised to revolutionize operations and offer opportunities for competitive advantage (CA) and sustainable competitive advantage (SCA). Some significant trends are the following:

1. Internet of Things (IoT) in Dairy Farming: The Internet of Things refers to the incorporation of sensors and devices into dairy farms to monitor the health, behavioUr, and milk output of cows.

2. Block chain Technology for Traceability: The traceability of dairy products from farm to table is ensured through block chain technology (Khanna et al., 2022). Providing real-time information on the provenance and quality of dairy products will help to increase transparency and build consumer confidence.

3. Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Machine Learning for Data Analysis: In the dairy industry, AI and machine learning algorithms are used to analyze enormous data sets. They consider several facets of the dairy industry, including as milk quality, yield prediction, and resource allocation. It allows for data-driven decisions, which leads to improved product quality, resource management, and cost effectiveness.

4. Precision Agriculture for Feed Production: Precision agriculture makes use of data and technology to enhance dairy cow feed output (Monteiro, Santos and Gonçalves, 2021).

This technology has the potential to offer significant competitive advantages for enterprises like Amul, Saputo, or Nestle in the dairy sector. These companies may improve their efficiency, product quality, and sustainability through the use of these technologies within their operations to deliver both competitive advantage and long-term competitiveness.

Figure 3: Internet of Things (IoT) in Dairy Farming
(Source: Libelium, 2022)

Question no. 11

The identified information and communication technologies (ICTs) in the dairy industry can significantly impact a company's competitive advantage (CA) and sustainable competitive advantage (SCA) through various avenues:

1. Effects on Existing Business Models: ICTs like Block chain and IoT can transform existing business models by enhancing transparency and traceability. For example, Block chain can enable real-time tracking of dairy products, providing consumers with detailed information about their origin and quality (Casino et al., 2021).

2. Creating New Business Models: Robotic milking systems represent a potential shift in the dairy industry's business model. Automating milking processes increases efficiency and introduces a new paradigm in dairy farming, potentially leading to more sustainable practices.

3. Supporting Existing Strategies: AI and Machine Learning can augment existing data analysis strategies. For instance, they can optimize production schedules based on predictive analytics, aligning with cost leadership or efficiency strategies that companies may already have.

4. Creating New Business Strategies: Precision agriculture presents a new approach to feed production. This can lead to strategies focused on sustainable and efficient resource allocation, potentially reducing costs and enhancing product quality.

5. Specific Additions to Information Systems Portfolio: Implementing Blockchain and IoT systems require a specific addition to a company's information systems portfolio (Viriyasitavat et al., 2019). These technologies facilitate data collection, storage, and analysis, ensuring traceability and real-time monitoring.

6. Improving Ability to Compete (Five Forces Analysis): ICTs bolster a company's ability to compete in the five forces analysis. For instance, Block chain and IoT mitigate the threat of new entrants by establishing high barriers to entry through advanced technology adoption.

By incorporating these emerging information and communication technologies into their operation, dairy businesses can not only improve their efficiency but also distinguish themselves from the market to achieve a competitive advantage and a potential sustainable competitive advantage.

Question no. 12

Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) and applications can potentially create a competitive disadvantage for businesses in the dairy industry if not implemented or managed effectively. In some cases, information and communication technologies may give rise to disadvantages:

1. Inadequate Data Security: If a dairy company fails to implement robust cybersecurity measures for its ICT systems, it becomes vulnerable to data breaches and cyberattacks. This may put at risk valuable confidential information, undermine customers' trust and have a significant economic and reputational impact.

2. Obsolete Technology: If the dairy business is not kept on top of technological developments, it will have a competitive disadvantage. Unupdated systems may result in inefficiencies, slow processes and an inability to satisfy customers' expectations of convenience and speed.

3. Poor Integration of Systems: ICT systems not seamlessly integrated across various departments and functions can result in data silos and inefficient workflows (Das, Gupta and Pal, 2023). This could lead to delays in decisions, reduced mobility and a lack of coherent customer experience.

4. Lack of Employee Training and Adoption: Productivity can be reduced, and available technology would be underutilised if employees do not receive adequate training on the practical application of ICT tools. This could lead to a lack of opportunities for automated processes, process optimisation and data-driven decision-making.

5. High Implementation and Maintenance Costs: Poorly planned or executed ICT projects can lead to budget overruns, tying up financial resources that could be better allocated elsewhere (Welde and Klakegg, 2022). It may result in financial strain, limiting the company's capacity to invest in others of its business.

Question no. 13

Critique of Porter’s Value Chain Analysis Model

Effectiveness for Exploring Competitive Advantage: Porter's Value Chain Analysis is an important tool to examine the internal business of a business to understand how different activities add value to its products and services (Dubey et al., 2020). It also gives information on the cost drivers and differentiators important to achieve a competitive advantage.

Strengths

Comprehensive Assessment: The model gives a formal framework for examining a company's core and support operations. This all-encompassing approach creates a clear grasp of how diverse functions contribute to the value-creation process.

Clear differentiation: It distinguishes between main activities and support activities. This distinction aids in identifying areas where a firm may have a competitive advantage or face obstacles.

Criticism

Static nature: Porter's approach is based on a static view of operations. Industries are continually changing due to technical advances, market developments, and shifting customer tastes. This approach may not represent dynamic changes in the industry landscape efficiently.

Limited Focus on External Factors: It generally focuses on internal procedures and may not sufficiently address external issues such as market developments, regulatory changes, or geopolitical effects. External variables can have a considerable influence on a company's competitive standing.
Critique of Business Process Approach/Model

Effectiveness for Exploring Competitive Advantage: The Business Process Approach takes a comprehensive look at a company's operations, focusing on the interaction of internal and external processes (Harmon, 2019). It helps find areas for efficiency and effectiveness improvement.

Strengths

Dynamic and adaptable: This strategy recognises the changing nature of industries and enterprises. It understands the necessity for processes to develop to meet shifting market needs and technology improvements.

Internal and external Process Integration: It successfully emphasises the relevance of both internal operations and exterior interactions (such as supply chain management and customer engagement) in gaining a competitive edge.

Criticism

Implementation Complexity: Implementing and administering a Business Process Approach may be time-consuming and difficult, especially for big firms (Fischer et al., 2020). It necessitates a thorough awareness of the entire value chain and practical cooperation between departments.

Data-Intensive Characteristics: This method is based on data-driven insights. Companies may struggle to obtain appropriate data or lack the requisite data management tools to effectively apply this method for competitive advantage. 

References

MITS4002 Object-Oriented Software Development Report Sample

You will be marked based on your submitted zipped file on Moodle. You are most welcome to check your file with your lab tutor before your submission. No excuse will be accepted due to file corruption, absence from lecture or lab classes where details of lab requirements may be given. Please make sure that you attend Lecture EVERY WEEK as low attendance may result in academic penalty or failure of this unit.

This assessment item relates to the unit learning outcomes as in the unit descriptors.

This checks your understanding about object-oriented software development.

This assessment covers the following LOs.

LO1 Demonstrate understanding of classes, constructors, objects, data types and instantiation; Convert data types using wrapper methods and objects.

LO2 Independently analyse customer requirements and design object-oriented programs using scope, inheritance, and other design techniques; Create classes and objects that access variables and modifier keywords. Develop methods using parameters and return values.

LO3 Demonstrate adaptability in building control and loop structures in an object-oriented environment; Demonstrate use of user defined data structures and array manipulation.

Tank Circuit Program

Print your Student Name and Student Number.

1. Calculate the Capacitor with the input E, permittivity, A, cross-sectional area, d, separated distance.

2. Calculate the resonant frequency, f, of a tank circuit with the above C and input L.

C = EA and f= 1
d 2π√LC

Typical

Area = 5mm2 values: E =8.85×10−12F/m. (hardcode)

L = 1 μH Separated distances ~ 1mm (or less)

Round the Resonant frequency to two decimal places.

Here is a sample run:

Sample 1:

John Smith JS00001

Enter Capacitor Area (mm^2): 5

Enter Capacitor separated distance (mm): 0.5

Enter Inductance of the inductor (uH): 1

John Smith’s LC Tank Circuit Resonate Frequency: 16.92 MHz

Questions:

1. Did you store temporary values? Where and why?

2. How did you deal with errors? (Refer to the code/code snippet in your answer)

3. If the value E, permittivity was changed regularly, how would you change your code?

Submit the following items:

1. Submit this Word document with the following:

a. Copy of your code (screenshot – includes comments in your code)

b. Screenshot of the output of your code (3 times with expected values, 2 times with non-expected values – such as a zero as an input)

c. Your written response to the questions (Q1-3)

Solution

For Assignment Help

Screenshot of the Code as required:

Output 1:

Output 2:

Output 3:

Output 4:

Output 5:

Questions and Answers:

1. Did you store temporary values? Where and why?

Temporary values are utilised in the provided Java code to store the computed capacitance (C) and resonant frequency (f). C and f are these ad hoc values. This is why they are employed:

The computed capacitance, which is an intermediate outcome obtained from user inputs and a formula (C = EA/d), is stored in the variable C.

The computed resonant frequency is another intermediate result obtained from user inputs and the formula (f = 1 / (2 * * sqrt(L * C)) and is stored in the variable f.

The storage of intermediate results for further processing and the user-friendly presentation of final results depend on these temporary variables (Chimanga et al., 2021).

2. How did you deal with errors? (Refer to the code/code snippet in your answer)

Error handling in the code is simple, and it is assumed that the user will input accurate numerical numbers. The code doesn't do much in the way of validation or error management. The user is implicitly expected to provide accurate values for the inputs (capacitor area, separation distance, and inductance), albeit this is not stated explicitly.

You can add extra validation tests to make sure the input values fall within acceptable ranges and are of the right data types in order to improve error handling and robustness. For instance, you can verify that the values are non-negative and fall within the acceptable ranges for this particular application.

3. If the value E, permittivity was changed regularly, how would you change your code?
 
You can adjust the code to accept this number as an input from the user if the permittivity (E) value is prone to frequent changes. The code currently has a hardcoded value for E:

We can request the user to enter the permittivity value at runtime, exactly like other input values, rather than hardcoding this number. Here's an illustration of how we may change the code to accomplish that:

This update allows for flexibility when E needs to be modified frequently because the user can now input the permittivity value each time the programme is run (Saleh et al., 2021).

References:

ICT500 Emerging Technologies Report 3 Sample

Assessment Description and Instructions

Title: Explore emerging technologies in the field of AI and their potential impact on various industries

Background:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is transforming the world at an unprecedented pace, impacting various fields, including healthcare, finance, education, and manufacturing, among others. Emerging technologies such as machine learning, natural language processing, computer vision, and robotics have significantly advanced the capabilities of AI systems. As these technologies continue to evolve, it is essential to explore the potential benefits and risks that come with their integration into various industries. Privacy and security are two critical aspects that must be considered as AI continues to shape our future.

Objectives:

• Explore emerging technologies in the field of AI and their potential impact on various industries.

• Investigate the ethical and legal implications of AI systems in terms of privacy and security.

• Analyse the potential benefits and risks of integrating AI systems in various industries from a privacy and security perspective.

• Develop recommendations on how organizations can manage the privacy and security risks associated with AI systems.

Tasks:

1. Choose one of these industries:
a. Healthcare
b. Finance
c. Education
d. Manufacturing

2. Provide an overview of emerging technologies in the field of AI, including machine learning, natural language processing, computer vision, and robotics. Discuss their potential impact on one of the above industries.

3. Investigate the ethical and legal implications of AI systems in terms of privacy and security. Consider aspects such as data protection, consent, transparency, and accountability. Analyze the current state of privacy and security regulations in your country or region and identify any gaps that need to be addressed.

4. Analyze the potential benefits and risks of integrating AI systems in various industries from a privacy and security perspective. Consider aspects such as data privacy, data security, cyber threats, and potential biases in AI systems. Provide examples of organizations that have successfully integrated AI systems while managing privacy and security risks.

5. Develop recommendations on how organizations can manage the privacy and security risks associated with AI systems. Consider aspects such as risk assessment, privacy by design, cybersecurity measures, and ethical considerations. Provide examples of best practices for organizations to follow.
Format:

• Introduction: Provide an overview of the topic and the objectives of the assignment.

• Literature Review: Discuss the emerging technologies in the field of AI and their potential impact on the chosen industry. Investigate the ethical and legal implications of AI systems in terms of privacy and security.

• Analysis: Analyse the potential benefits and risks of integrating AI systems in the chosen industry from a privacy and security perspective. Develop recommendations on how organizations can manage the privacy and security risks associated with AI systems.

• Conclusion: Summarize the key findings and provide recommendations for future research.

Solution

1. Abstract

This research began an exploratory trip into the emerging world of artificial intelligence (AI) technologies and its ethical and legal repercussions, with a strong emphasis on privacy and security, after AI's revolutionary influence on healthcare. For Assignment Help, A new era of healthcare opportunities has been brought about by the incorporation of AI technologies, such as robots, natural language processing, computer vision, and machine learning. It offers improved outcomes for patients and resource optimization via early illness identification, customized therapies, operational efficiency, and expedited medical research. But these incredible possibilities are matched with very difficult obstacles. Due to the importance and sheer quantity of information about patients involved, privacy and security considerations take on a significant amount of weight. Conscientious consent and openness are two ethical requirements that highlight the need for responsible AI implementation. Because AI algorithms are mysterious and often referred to as "black boxes," creative ways to ensure accountability and explicability are required. An analysis of the privacy and security legislation that is in place highlights the need for ongoing harmonization and adaptation by exposing a fragmented environment. The core of the study is its steadfast dedication to identifying these issues and making recommendations for fixes. It is morally required in the field of healthcare to consider privacy and security concerns while integrating AI. The suggestions made, which include strict security of information, informed approval, algorithm transparency, and compliance with regulations, set the path for a reliable AI ecosystem in the healthcare industry and guarantee improved care for patients and healthcare delivery going forward. 

2. Introduction and objectives

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is a game-changing force that is transforming many different sectors. Its significant influence on the healthcare sector is especially remarkable. The impact of artificial intelligence (AI) is enormous in a society where technology is becoming more and more important. These technologies—which include robots, computer vision, natural language processing, and machine learning—have created previously unheard-of opportunities to improve patient outcomes, healthcare delivery, and medical research. In the end, it might bring in a new age of better medical care and more effective resource allocation by streamlining intricate diagnostic processes, treatment plans, and administrative duties. The use of AI in healthcare is now required; it is no longer an optional step. The need for quick, informed choices has never been higher as the demand for superior healthcare services keeps rising and health information becomes more complex. However, entering this AI-driven healthcare space requires careful consideration of cutting-edge AI technology. The critical analysis of the legal and moral ramifications that AI systems bring, especially with security and privacy, is equally important. It is essential, in this regard, to thoroughly evaluate these new technologies and any ethical and legal implications that may arise.

Objectives of the report:

• To Explore the emerging technology in the AI field and its potential effects on the healthcare industry

• To investigate the ethical and legal implications of the AI system in terms of privacy and safety.

• To analyze the potential advantages and risks of integration of AI systems in the healthcare industry from a privacy and security perspective

• To develop recommendations on how the organization can handle the privacy and safety risks associated with AI systems.

3. Background/Literature review

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is a disruptive force that has permanently changed a broad range of sectors [1]. Its widespread impact redefines how operations are carried out and cuts across all industries. With a special emphasis on its enormous influence on healthcare, this section explores the complex role that artificial intelligence plays across a range of sectors. In this case, the dynamic field of developing artificial intelligence technologies—which includes robots, computer vision, machine learning, and natural language processing—takes center stage. This investigation helps to clarify the significant changes that these breakthroughs bring to the field of healthcare. Additionally, this part provides insightful information on the possible advantages and associated hazards associated with the smooth integration of AI in the healthcare industry. AI's widespread use in current sectors shows its flexibility and innovative potential. Its impact on healthcare goes beyond augmentation to transformation. As AI advances, the provision of healthcare, outcomes for patients, and research in medicine will change. Benefits include better diagnosis and treatment, faster administrative procedures, resource allocation, and medical research. These exciting advancements have dangers including security, confidentiality, morality, and regulatory compliance [2]. This part prepares for a detailed discussion of AI's position in healthcare and its legal, moral, and practical ramifications.

AI's Pervasive Impact

Artificial Intelligence has a genuinely global influence, transforming a wide range of industries, including industry, banking, education, and more. Artificial Intelligence (AI) has shown its potency in enhancing productivity, enhancing decision-making procedures, and raising overall operational excellence in several sectors. However, the area of healthcare is where artificial intelligence is most noticeable. This industry is characterized by the confluence of three key factors: the need for precision medicine, an ever-growing pool of complicated medical data, and rising healthcare needs. Incorporation with artificial intelligence has become a necessary paradigm change in answer to these complex difficulties. Through improving diagnostic precision, refining treatment plans, simplifying administrative procedures, and accelerating medical research, it has the potential to completely transform the healthcare industry. The importance of AI in healthcare is highlighted in this context since it not only meets the industry's present demands but also opens the door to more efficient and patient-centered healthcare delivery in the future [3].

Emerge AI technology in healthcare

Healthcare and Machine Learning: With its invaluable skills, machine learning has emerged as a key component of healthcare. Clinical practice is changing as a result of its competence in tasks including medical picture interpretation, patient outcome prediction, and optimum treatment choice identification. Algorithms for machine learning adapt to the changing healthcare environment by continually learning from large datasets. This allows them to provide insightful information, support doctors in making data-driven choices, and enhance patient care. The capacity to identify nuanced patterns and trends in medical data gives medical personnel an invaluable tool for illness diagnosis and treatment, which in turn improves patient outcomes and streamlines healthcare delivery [4].

Healthcare and Natural Language Processing (NLP): When it comes to healthcare, Natural Language Processing (NLP) is revolutionary because it makes it possible for computers to understand and extract information from uncontrolled medical text data. With the use of this innovative technology, healthcare facilities can now automate clinical recording procedures, glean insightful information from large volumes of medical records, and quickly retrieve vital data. NLP's capacity to decipher intricate medical narratives improves administrative efficiency while also revealing important information concealed in healthcare data. This helps medical professionals give more accurate and knowledgeable treatment, which eventually improves patient outcomes [5].

Computer Vision's Role in Medical Imaging: By using AI-driven algorithms, computer vision is driving an upsurge in medical imaging. These advanced tools can identify abnormalities in medical pictures with an unprecedented level of precision. This revolutionary technology, especially in radiology and pathology, speeds up diagnostic and treatment choices. Computer vision algorithms help medical personnel identify anomalies quickly by quickly analyzing large datasets of pictures. This improves diagnostic accuracy and speeds up the beginning of suitable treatment procedures. Combining artificial intelligence with medical imaging allows for earlier detection and better results, which is a major advancement in patient care [6].

Healthcare Robotics: Robotics is becoming more versatile as a medical tool, moving beyond its traditional use in surgery. Robots with artificial intelligence (AI) capabilities are doing medical care, drug administration, and even precision surgery. These robots raise overall healthcare effectiveness, reduce the likelihood of human error, and enhance precision. It improves the quality of life for individuals with limited mobility by offering critical help to doctors during surgery with unparalleled accuracy. One excellent illustration of how AI may complement human abilities to deliver safer, more efficient, and patient-centered care is the integration of robotics into healthcare [7].

Potential benefits in healthcare industry

Numerous benefits arise from the use of AI in healthcare:

Better Early Diagnosis: Artificial Intelligence is used to detect diseases at an early stage, which enables timely interventions and personalized treatment plans.

Prediction: Via the identification of illness risk factors, AI systems allow humans to take preventive measures. Customized treatment plans based on each patient's unique genetic and health profile are possible because of AI-enabled precision medicine.

Streamlined Administrative Tasks: Artificial Intelligence (AI) lowers paperwork and boosts operational performance by automating administrative processes.
Resources allocating optimization: AI assists in ensuring that hospitals have the right resources accessible when they're required via resource allocation optimization.

Cost reduction: AI reduces healthcare expenses by increasing operational efficiency, which raises treatment accessibility and affordability.

Drug research is accelerated by artificial intelligence (AI), which analyses large datasets and may hasten the release of novel treatments.

Improved Clinical Trials: Artificial Intelligence (AI) enables clinical trials to be more precise and efficient, which accelerates the discovery of new therapies.

Patient Engagement: By providing individuals with tailored health information, AI-powered solutions enable patients to take an active role in their treatment.

Proactive Healthcare Management: By using AI-powered applications and gadgets to track their health, patients may improve their overall health and get early intervention.

Inherent risks and challenges

AI has a lot of potential for the healthcare industry, but integrating it also comes with a lot of dangers and difficulties that need to be carefully considered. The crucial concerns of security and privacy come first. To secure patient privacy and preserve data integrity, strict data protection mechanisms must be put in place for AI systems that handle enormous amounts of sensitive medical data. The ethical issues underlying AI-driven decision-making are also quite significant, particularly in situations where human lives are involved. It is crucial to guarantee AI algorithms' accountability, justice, and transparency to establish and preserve user confidence in these systems. Fair AI model development and bias correction are necessary for equal healthcare delivery. In addition, the constantly changing field of healthcare legislation demands careful adherence to standards to stay out of trouble legally and maintain moral principles. To move forward, the remainder of the report will provide a thorough analysis of the legal and moral ramifications of artificial intelligence (AI) in healthcare. It will do this by looking at the technology's possible advantages and inherent hazards through the lenses of security and confidentiality, as well as offer advice on how to responsibly navigate these complex issues [8].

4. Discussion /Analysis

Ethical and legal implications of AI in healthcare

The incorporation of AI systems in the constantly changing healthcare scene raises a complicated web of legal and moral problems, with a special emphasis on security and privacy. Strong patient data protection is essential to the moral use of AI in healthcare. To ensure confidentiality, integrity, and availability, strict data protection procedures are necessary due to the significant amounts of sensitive information handled. Respecting relevant data protection laws, such as the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) in the European Union or the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) in the United States, becomes essential to protecting patient privacy. Informed patient permission is another area where ethical considerations are relevant. Here, openness in the use of data is emphasized, and patients are given the freedom to agree or disagree based on a thorough knowledge of how their information is gathered, processed, and used. Furthermore, the opaque character of certain AI algorithms—often referred to as "black boxes"—presents a problem for accountability and transparency. Therefore, it is essential to build procedures that inform patients and healthcare professionals about AI-driven judgments. This will foster confidence in technology and ensure accountability, particularly when AI systems have an impact on important medical decisions. Given the disparities in privacy and security laws throughout nations and areas, it is essential to evaluate the current legal environment in the context of the particular application. To guarantee that AI in healthcare complies with the strictest ethical guidelines and legal requirements, any holes and inconsistencies in the legal framework must be found. This discernment makes this possible.

Analysis of privacy and security Risks in the integration of AI:

Although the use of artificial intelligence in healthcare has enormous promise, certain privacy and security concerns should be carefully considered.

• Data privacy: There is a greater chance of data breaches, unauthorized access, or abuse due to the large volume of patient data that AI systems gather and analyze. It is critical to protect patient information via data anonymization, access limits, and encryption.

• Data Security: Maintaining patient confidentiality and preventing data breaches need to ensure the safety of healthcare data. AI integration requires strong cybersecurity protocols, such as frequent safety inspections and threat assessments.

• Cyberthreats: Malware and hacking assaults are two examples of cyber threats that AI systems are susceptible to. Because medical data has such value, fraudsters see the healthcare industry as a priority target. Strong cybersecurity defense and incident response procedures need to be invested in by organizations.

• Prejudices in AI Systems: When AI systems are trained on data that contains prejudices, they may unintentionally reinforce such biases. In particular, when AI impacts medical choices, healthcare organizations need to be very careful to identify and reduce biases to guarantee fair healthcare delivery.

• Effective Integrating Examples: Despite the difficulties, a large number of healthcare institutions have efficiently incorporated AI while controlling security and privacy issues. These illustrations highlight the best practices for implementing ethical AI, safeguarding data, and maintaining cybersecurity. They provide insightful case studies for anyone attempting to negotiate the challenging landscape of integrating artificial intelligence in healthcare.

Figure 1:Ethical and privacy issues in healthcare
Source: [9]

Figure 2:Success factors of implantation of AI in healthcare
Source: [10]
 

5. Conclusion

As a result, this thorough analysis has clarified the revolutionary possibilities for artificial intelligence (AI) in the healthcare sector, highlighting the critical role of cutting-edge AI technologies and thoughtfully tackling ethical and legal issues, especially those about security and privacy. The main conclusions highlight how artificial intelligence (AI), furled by innovations in robotics, computer vision, natural language processing, and machine learning, has brought about a period of unparalleled potential for the healthcare industry. It facilitates early illness detection, tailored therapy, operational effectiveness, and rapid medical research, which leads to improved patient outcomes and resource efficiency. It is abundantly obvious, nevertheless, that there are significant obstacles in the way of this potential trajectory. Considering the sensitivity and sheer amount of patient data at risk, security and privacy worries are major issues. Transparency and informed consent are two essential ethical requirements. Moreover, the 'black box' character of AI algorithms demands creative solutions for accountability and explainability. An analysis of the state of privacy and security laws today shows a disjointed environment, underscoring the need for constant adaptation and harmonization to keep up with the rapid advancement of artificial intelligence. This report's importance stems from its steadfast dedication to identifying these issues and outlining a solution. In healthcare, resolving privacy and security issues with AI adoption is not a choice; it is a moral must. A trustworthy artificial intelligence ecosystem in healthcare can only be shaped by implementing the principles made here, which include strict security of information, consent that is informed, computational transparency, and a dedication to regulatory compliance.

6. References

ICT102 Networking Report 3 Sample

Assessment Objective

The objective of this assessment is to evaluate student’s ability to design and configure a network using a network simulator for a given scenario and configuring routers, switches, firewalls, and other network components based on specific requirements.

ASSESSMENT DESCRIPTION:

This assignment is group-based. Each group will have 3-4 students. You can continue with the same group as for the previous assessment. In this assignment you will be designing and configuring a network for a university that has a Class B IP address of 148.23.0.0/16. There are two faculties and each faculty requires two separate subnets: one for staff and another for students. The faculty names and the number of hosts in each subnet are given below:

• Faculty of Arts: 400 students and 200 staff members

• Faculty of IT: 600 students and 300 staff members

Part 0

Declare team members contributions in the table below:

Part 1

Divide the allocated address space between department subnets as per requirements. Summarize the IP subnets and masks in a table like this:

Part 2

Construct the following network topology in GNS3 or Packet Tracer simulator. Ensure that all the hostnames and network addresses are well labelled.

Part 3

Configure the router using the assigned hostnames and IP address.

Part 4

Setup Virtual PC (VPC) in each of the four subnets as shown above. The virtual PC’s provide lightweight PC environment to execute tools such as ping, and trace route. For each faculty create two VPCs for students and two VPCs for staff. Each VPC should be able to ping the other VPC in the same subnet.

Part 5

Configure the access control list (ACL) on Router01 such that any traffic from Students’ subnets are blocked from entering the staff subnet. Traffic to and from other subnets should pass through. Pinging staff VPCs (in both faculties) from students’ VPCs should fail. In other words, student in each faculty should not be able to ping any staff computer in any faculty. Students can only ping students VPCs in any faculty. Staff members can ping any VPC (staff and students in any faculty).

Part 6

Configure DHCP services on Router01 such that all VPCs can get IP addresses dynamically assigned.

Part 7

Use the following checklist to ensure you network is configured correctly.

For each of your routers make sure to save your running configuration using the command write mem For the VPCs use the save filename command to save the configurations to a file.

Finally save the GNS3 (or Packet Tracer) project, i.e., the topology together with the startup configs. Zip the GNS3 (or Packet Tracer) project folder and submit it on Moodle with your report. Make sure your submission is complete and has all the necessary files to run the simulation.

Solution

Introduction

Dynamic host configuration protocol is the client-server protocol providing an internet protocol host with an IP address and other configuration information. DHCP protocol is applied in an open networking system to transfer information from one PC to another by using the stated IP address. For Assignment Help, This protocol applies to openly communicating with nodes but there needs permission from the local host. Using DGCP protocol, this is applicable to configure automatically configure all networking components by suppressing errors that occur in the network. This report will implement the application of the DHCP protocol in the university networking system The goal of the report is to implement the DHCP protocol to communicate between two departments Arts and IT.

Network configuration and Ping status

The network of the university is a three-layer network consisting of routers, switches, and virtual PCs. There is the configuration of routers as the host of the networks situated in the first layer of the network. The second layer consists of four different switches. The third layer consists of eight different PCs for connecting the people. There are the consists of the different IP addresses of the different devices. The condition of the networking is that IT students can not communicate with the staff of any of the departments. Overall network configurations are looking the same.

Figure 1: Network topology
(Source: Self-Created)

This is a three-layer network configuration containing the IP address of each of the component. The router provides internet connectivity to all of the respective nodes. Router C3725 has been placed in the system due to the availability of 10 different ethernet ports. The characteristics of this router are stated below.

Figure 2: Proposed router configuration
(Source: Self-created)

The router contains a MiB size of 128 and NVRAM contains 256 KiB. This also contains the size of the I/O memory is 5 % of the RAM. Input and output memory is liable for storing all of the IP addresses inside the router. The next layer contains four switches that provide the connectivity of the 8 different computers. There is the connectivity of the 8 computers to the four different departments. IT students, IT staff, Arts students and Arts staff are using two different computers each. The DNS of each of the systems is the same which is 255.255.255.0. There are four different branches containing four different subnet masks148.23.0.1, 148.23.2.1, 148.23.4.1, and148.23.8.1. There is the connectivity of eight different computers that contain IP addresses of the same domains. IT students are using the IP addresses of 0,1,2,3 domains respectively. The ping status is getting successful in the internal communication. Interestingly, the ping status has been damaged while communicating with the staff of IT. The overall ping status is looking like the same.

Figures: Successful ping status
(Source: Self-created)

Figures: Unsuccessful ping status
(Source: Self-created)

Conclusion

This report concludes that the DHCP network protocol is widely accepted in automatic configurations. Applying the DHCP protocol the entire network traffic can be prohibited in a particular domain. The report has seen that using PC 1 one can send all the required information in nodes excluding IT staff.

Reference list

MITS5501 Software Quality, Change Management and Testing Report 2 Sample

This assessment related to the following Unit Learning Outcomes:

ULO1 Adopt specialized quality engineering and assurance procedures to improve the implementation quality and efficiency of software engineering projects using the advanced concepts and principles learnt throughout the unit.

ULO2 Independently develop clearly defined internal quality management approaches by addressing the quality factors and risks that may affect the resulting software development.

ULO3 Evolve peer review process using tools and techniques taught in the unit as well as carry out research on emerging techniques published in literature to further improve the peer review communication process

INSTRUCTIONS:

In this assessment students will work individually to develop Software Quality Assurance plan document. Carefully read the associated CASE STUDY for this assessment contained in the document MITS5501_CaseStudy_2023.pdf. From this Case Study you are to prepare the following:

1. Given the details in the Case Study, what are the software standards, practices, conventions, and metrics need to be used to improve the quality of the final product. You also need to identify the techniques to monitor the compliance of these standards.

2. Identify the tools and techniques used to perform peer reviews and the methods to reduce the risk of failure.

3. Develop a complete software quality assurance plan document based on the given case study. The document should have the following sections. However, you could add other topics based on your assumptions.

Quality Assurance Plan Document

a. Executive Summary

b. System Description

c. Management Section

d. Documentation Section

e. Standards, Practices, Conventions and Metrics

f. Peer reviews plan

g. Testing Methodology

h. Problem Reporting and Corrective action

i. QA Supporting Tools, Techniques and Methods

j. Software configuration management plan.

k. References

l. Appendices

Your report must include a Title Page with the title of the assessment and your name and ID number. A contents page showing page numbers and titles of all major sections of the report. All Figures included must have captions and Figure numbers and be referenced within the document. Captions for figures placed below the figure, captions for tables placed above the table. Include a footer with the page number. Your report should use 1.5 spacing with a 12-point Times New Roman font. Include references where appropriate. Citation of sources is mandatory and must be in the IEEE style. 

Solution

Introduction

This study identifies the issues in the library management system and also help in proposing a solution through a digital library management system that can be created, implemented, and managed to fulfill the requirement of both staff and customers. For Assignment Help, This study includes different sections like the management section, documentation section, standard, practices, convention, and metrics section, review and inspection section, software configuration management plan, Quality Assurance, and testing.

Purpose Section

This section describes what software is included in the package and how it will be used, among other things. It also outlines the phases of each software product's life cycle that the SQA plan will cover. This section provides simple guidance for making sure the SQA strategy is appropriate for the program in question and its development and implementation stages [6].

Reference Document Section

All sources used to create the SQA plan are listed in detail in the Reference Documents section. This compiled document makes it simple to find resources that enhance and elaborate on the plan's primary text. Industry standards, project guidelines, process documentation, and other sources may be cited here to aid in the creation, execution, and assessment of the Software Quality Assurance strategy.

System Description

The Library Management System is an automation tool made for libraries of various sizes. This computerized system allows librarians to keep tabs on book sales, organize student information, and analyze collection depth. The system's central repository for books and member data helps avoid the kinds of problems that plague non-digital archives. In addition to improving library administration efficiency, the reporting module helps administrators with things like student enrolment, book lists, and issue/return data [5].

Figure 1 Entity Relationship Diagram of Library Management System

Management Section

There is a clear chain of command within the project's organizational structure. The Project Manager is responsible for directing the project and making sure it is completed on time, within scope, and budget. System design, coding, and database administration all fall under the purview of the development team, which consists of software developers and database administrators. The system's reliability and effectiveness are monitored by the Quality Assurance group. Feedback and user testing are provided by administrative and library employees.

Documentation Section

The software's governing documentation covers its whole lifespan, from development to maintenance. The Software Requirements Specification (SRS) is the document that first defines the parameters of the project. The project staff and interested parties check this document to make sure it covers everything. The SDD is a document that specifies the system's architecture, algorithms, and interfaces before, during, and after development. The SDD is evaluated by the development staff and domain specialists. The Test Plan and Test Cases papers outline the goals, methods, and anticipated results of the verification and validation processes. Peer evaluations and test execution outcomes are used to determine the level of sufficiency. The dependability and usefulness of the program rely on these papers, which are kept up-to-date by regular reviews, audits, and user feedback channels [1].

Standards, Practices, Conventions and Metrics Section

- Standards: This study will use conventional coding practices, such as those for file naming and commenting, as well as database best practices. Data encryption and privacy shall meet or exceed all applicable global requirements.

- Practices: Scrum, daily stand-ups, and continuous integration are just a few of the Agile development practices that will be used. Git will be used for version management, which will facilitate teamwork throughout development and help in tracking bugs.

- Conventions: We will require that all variables, functions, and database tables adhere to standard, human-readable names. Usability and accessibility guidelines will be taken into account throughout the UI design process.

- Metrics: Important performance indicators, such as system response times, error rates, and user satisfaction surveys, will be outlined. The quality of the code will be evaluated with the help of static analysis software [3].

Reviews and Inspections Section

At essential points in the planning and execution of the project, it will be reviewed and inspected by both technical and management personnel. Code quality and compliance with coding standards will be monitored by technical reviews, while project progress and resource allocation will be evaluated by management reviews. Reviews, walkthroughs, and inspections will be followed up with action items to remedy identified concerns, and approvals will be issued based on their successful completion to guarantee that the project continues to meet its quality goals and remains on schedule.

Software Configuration Management Section

Software configuration management (SCM) is an integral part of software development since it allows for the centralized management of all software and documentation revisions throughout a project's lifetime [4]. The SCMP focuses on the following topics:

1. Configuration Identification: This part of the SCMP defines how software and documentation configurations will be called and labeled. It details how CIs should be named, how versions should be numbered, and how their structure should look. It specifies who's responsible for what when it comes to creating and maintaining these identifiers.

2. Configuration Control: Software and documentation configuration management is outlined in the SCMP. There is a procedure for handling requests for modifications and putting them into effect.

3. Configuration Status Accounting: This section explains the methodology that will be used to track and report on the current state of setups. Specific sorts of status data, such as versioning, release notes, and baselines, are outlined. It also details how often and how to provide progress reports.

4. Configuration Audits: The SCMP specifies the steps to take while performing a configuration audit, whether it be an internal or external audit. It lays out the goals of an audit, the roles of the auditors conducting it, and the measures that should be taken in response to their findings.

5. Configuration Baselines: Sets the standards and methods for determining what constitutes a "configuration baseline," or a stable and officially sanctioned version of the program and documentation. It specifies how to choose, label, and file baselines.

6. Tools and Environment: The source control management (SCM) tools and environments that will be used throughout the project are covered in this section. Version control, bug tracking, and other configuration management technologies are described in depth.

7. Roles and Responsibilities: The SCMP establishes the tasks and functions of the SCM team members. The SCM manager, developers, testers, and other project participants fall under this category. It clarifies who is responsible for configuration identification, control, status accounting, audits, and baselining.

8. Training and Documentation: This document specifies the documentation and training needs of the SCM team. The SCMP, together with the process guidelines and SCM tool user manuals, are all part of the required paperwork.

9. Security and Access Control: This section deals with the topic of SCM-related security and access control. It specifies the rules for controlling access, encrypting data, and other security procedures to ensure the safety of configurations and associated data.

10. Continuous Improvement: Provisions for continuous process improvement are included in the SCMP. It specifies how the results of audits, reviews, and inspections will be included in the ongoing effort to improve SCM procedures.

Problem Reporting and Corrective Action

The program Configuration Management Plan (SCMP) for the project includes detailed instructions for tracking down and fixing bugs and other problems in the program and supporting documentation. The procedure for recording issues, particularly their severity and effect, as well as tracking and assigning them to be fixed, is outlined. It also details the processes involved in identifying problems, conducting investigations, and applying fixes.

Tools, Techniques, and Methodologies Section

Software tools, methods, and methodologies that aid Software Quality Assurance (SQA) are described in detail in the Tools, methods, and Methodologies section. Tools and processes such as Agile or Waterfall may be used for project management, along with other resources like testing frameworks, version systems of control, automated testing tools, peer review platforms, and more.

Code Control Section

Code Control describes the processes and tools used at each step of development to monitor and maintain the controlled versions of the designated program. Both software configuration management and the use of pre-existing code libraries are viable options. The integrity and traceability of software components are protected throughout the development lifecycle by this section's methodical version management of code.

Media Control Section

The Media Control section describes the processes and resources used to track down, organize, and secure the physical media that corresponds to each computer product and its documentation. This includes outlining how to back up and restore these media assets and taking precautions to prevent them from being stolen, lost, or damaged.

Supplier Control Section

In the Supplier Control section, we detail the procedures used to guarantee that third-party developers' code meets all of our expectations. Methods for ensuring that vendors obtain sufficient and thorough specifications are outlined. It specifies the measures to take to guarantee that previously generated software is compatible with the features addressed in the SQA strategy. If the software in question is still in the prototype phase, the provider in question must create and execute their own SQA plan according to the same criteria.

Records Collection, Maintenance, and Retention Section

In the section under "Records Collection, Maintenance, and Retention," the precise SQA records that will be kept are outlined. It specifies the retention period and details the processes and resources needed to create and maintain this record. Acquiring the necessary permissions and developing a strategy for execution are both key parts of putting the SQA plan into action. After the SQA plan has been implemented, an assessment of its efficacy may be performed, guaranteeing the orderly maintenance and storage of crucial documents throughout the project's lifespan.

Testing Methodology

The Testing Methodology section details the overall strategy, specific methods, and automated resources used during software testing. It specifies the various forms of testing (such as unit, integration, system, and acceptability testing) and the order in which they will be executed. Specific testing methods, such as black-box and white-box testing, as well as automated testing tools and frameworks, are described in this section. It assures that the software's functionality, reliability, and performance are tested in a systematic and well-organized manner [2].

References

CSIT985 Social Media for organization innovation Essay 2 Sample

Task Requirements

- Select a topic from the given list below and write an essay about the selected topic.

- Type of assessment: Individual work

- Word limit: 2000 words (+/- 10% excluding the bibliography)

- Referencing style: choose an appropriate style from here

- Due date and time: by 11 pm on Friday, 8 Sep 2023

- Turnintin check is required to avoid plagiarism. Plagiarism policies can be found from the link.

Essay topics

In both academic and grey literature, there is evidence of numerous ICT (Information and Communication Technology) initiatives that promise to deliver strategic advantage to companies and, sometimes, even countries. From the following list, choose one initiative as the focus of your analysis and define the ways in which this initiative is strategic.

Choose one initiative from the following list:

1) Communication and Collaboration Tools

2) Social media for organisation innovation

3) Software as a Service (SAAS) for corporations

4) Cloud services for corporations

5) Cloud services for developing countries

6) Digital Economy for developing countries

7) Heath Information Systems

8) Telecentres for developing countries

9) Open Source software for government in developing countries

10) Digital transformation for developing countries

11) E-learning and Digital Education for developing countries

12) Cloud services for e-government in developing countries

13) Data Privacy for corporations

14) Cyber Security for corporations

15) Network security for corporations

16) Zero-trust network for corporations

17) Automation in IT systems for corporations

Having established the strategic significance of the initiative goes on to describe the implications this initiative has for network design.

Solution

1. Introduction

Social media platforms have become an opportunity for organisations in order to create and develop online communities. Social media platforms have been significant for engaging customers in collaborative practices while creating value through product reviews, generating innovative ideas and even identifying all possible resources for innovation in an organisation. For Assignment Help, In this context, the role of social media in organisational innovation has been the main focus of this discussion. The implications of innovation for network design have also been a major part of this discussion. Moreover, the influence of communication with customers in turning organisational innovation has been also demonstrated in this essay.

2. Development of ideas

a. Define the way in which the selected initiative is strategic

According to Muninger, Hammedi, & Mahr, (2019), social media for organisational innovation can be referred to as a strategic approach that can transform the way businesses operate as well as compete in the contemporary world. On the contrary, it is opined by Chaffey, and Ellis-Chadwick (2019), that social media has emerged as a powerful tool for fostering collaboration, communication and creativity in organisations. The large number of presence of indvidauls in social media platform enble the orgnisation in the modern business world to use this platform as an strategic initiative. Following is the detailed illustration:

Enhanced communication: Social media platforms render a real-time and dynamic channel for communication in the organisation (Lee et al., 2022). They facilitate the instant sharing of information, feedback, and ideas among employees and help in breaking down traditional hierarchical communication issues. This ultimately fosters a more transparent and inclusive work environment thereby contributing to strategic advantage. One example that can be seen as social media as a great strategic initiative in the organisation is the Slack app. Slack app is utilised as a team communication platform which has transformed communication in the organisation (Montrief et al., 2021). It enables people in the organisation to share ideas, information and other documents easily, breaking down the barrier of hierarchical communication. Some of the organisations that use Slack and increase communication are IBM, shopify, and BuzzFeed (Patalay, 2022). They use the Slack app in social media to facilitate communication among their employees.

Increased creativity: Social media encourages idea-sharing and brainstorming aspects around geographies and departments (Nonthamand, 2020). This is in the form of virtual space. By creating a virtual space for the workforce to collaborate, it appears that the organisation is able to harness the collective creativity of its employees. Innovative thinking due to collaboration results to the development of new products and so social media can be referred to as strategic initiative. In the contemporary world where the evolving working landscape in at its peak, many organisations are able to increase creativity or it can be said due to strategic initiatives aspired by so, the organisation is able to head to innovation or create a new product. One of the initiatives that come under social media is the adobe’ Kickbox program (DEVECIYAN, 2021). It is an innovative initiative which encourages creativity in the organisation. This means employees are given a red box which contains resources involving a prepaid card in order to pursue its innovative ideas. It creates an online community as well as a social media platform for the workforce to share their progress at work, seek advice and collaborate with other departments or colleagues effectively. This kind of virtual space for collaboration contributes to the development of new products.

Improve customer engagement: Social media permits organisations to engage with customers directly and further collect valuable feedback (Manzoor et al., 2020). The real-time interaction provided by social media aids in understanding customer preferences and needs resulting in the development of customer-centric strategies. An organisation with the help of this is able to tailor their products and meet the demands of the customers effectively (Fachrurazi et al., 2022). Different organisations use social media as different means of initiative such as Starbucks which is a famous coffee retail chain and is well known for its active presence on social media channels like Instagram and Facebook (Linkedin.com, 2023). In this process, they encourage customers to share their thoughts, photos and feedback using the hashtag#Starbucks. Further, they respond to the customer's inquiries, understand their feedback and incorporate suggestions of the customers for improving its product according to the needs and tastes of the customers (Linkedin.com, 2023). This kind of direct engagement permits this organisation to maintain a strong connection with its large customer base and improvise its product offering thereby achieving higher profitability. This action can be viewed as a strategic action of Starbucks to sell its product and increase its profitability through social media. Social media is not only strategic to this organisation but it is also strategic for the famous vehicle firm Tesla. Elon Musk who is the CEO of Tesla has an active presence on the social media channel, Twitter (Liberto, 2023). He frequently interacted with enthusiasts to address their concerns and questions. It has been found that this particular firm has implemented software updates on the basis of customer suggestions gathered on the social media platform.

Global reach: Global reach generally means an organisation reaching a large number of people and many countries to sell its products and services. In this process, it cannot be denied that social media cannot be used as a strategic initiative. However, it is one of the effective means that prove or can be said to provide the organisation with the potentiality to reach globally by staying at one location. Social media channels have a vast number of users globally. Leveraging social media for innovation enables organisations to tap into a diverse talent pool and further expand their market reach worldwide (Nayak et al., 2020). This global perspective, therefore, can be regarded as a strategic advantage. One of the examples of the organisation can be viewed for Airbnb which is a lodging and travel experiences platform. It used social media as a strategic initiative to expand globally. The initiative was strategic because Airbnb encourages guests and hosts to share their travel photos, experiences and reviews on channels like Twitter and Instagram. This take of action not only helps in creating brand awareness among large consumers but it is also kind of able to do promotion for its products and services on a large scale. This has created the organisation to have global reach meaning consumers from worldwide would come and have great travel experiences through this organisation.

b. Describe the implications of this initiative for the network design

Analysing the present business's perspective, social media platforms provide an opportunity for all organisations to create an online community where users can engage 24 hours. Organisations adopt social media to generate ideas, product reviews, customer feedback and identify a new source of innovation. Implication for the network design for social media is a complex factor where organisations carefully manage to generate customers and increase revenue.

Increasing security: The online presence has created a threat for the organisation because the lack of cyber security fraudulent activity has created data leaks of customers (Muneer, Alvi & Farrakh 2023). Customer feedback on online orders and transaction processes on social media is needed to maintain the security of the organisation. Implementing proper security measures through network design helps customer engagement, which impacts trust and loyalty. The AI and machine learning algorithms are the preferable network design or the organisation that can protect consumer data.

Content moderation: Implement the social media platform through innovation and the organisation needs to moderate content for the safe data for the customers (Manzoor et al. 2020). The automated process can create threats for the customers and also organisations. In this regard, Google's content moderation approach on a daily basis focuses on effective content moderation strategies in social media to engage customers.

Increase scalability: Implemented network design for organisation innovation through social media the large amount of data needs to be protected in every way. Social media users are increasing on a daily basis and customers can get their preferred products and services. Without scalability, social media innovation strategy can create a lack of major organisations such as Google, Apple and IBM (Susanto et al. 2021).

Using audio-video content: Audio-video content is helpful for customers with new product features. Through audio-video methods, customers can select the right products and services. The audio-video content analysis can bind customers globally. Attractive social media content needs to be evaluated by fashion-based companies such as Zara, H&M and others (Sudirjo 2021). Additionally, through the process, sustainable initiative features can be shown by the organisation, which influence customers purchasing behaviour.

User authentication: During innovation organisations need to ensure effective authorised users to access the network. Organisations need to identify fake users through social media because fake users create confusion and customers' minds. Therefore, effective user authentication implements a strong presence before customers.

Implement training: Organisations need to provide training during the use of social media. Any innovative content is attractive to the customers but training-based employees can easily handle the innovation. Additionally, they can promote the best product strategy using social media, which eliminates risk and cyber threats.

Identify the target audience: Social media works as an ICT for customers (Shahbaznezhad Dolan & Rashidirad 2021). Customers can identify the content product, innovation and features through the medium. As a result, organisations can select existing customers who can prefer the product. However, in analysing customers' behaviour on social media platforms, the right application needs to be focused on influencing audience behaviour. Sometimes low-cost budget products are helpful to organisations. The cost management strategy ensures a proper network diagram for the organisation in innovation.

Social media has played a significant role in terms of allowing graphic design in terms of reaching a much wider customers as compared to ever before. Based on the huge engagement of customers with visual content on social media, the impact of social media initiatives has become profound and far-reaching through graphic design. In addition, social media has helped in building and increasing connections with target customers while creating a platform for sharing feedback and opinions of valuable customers. As per the social network theory, structural as well as cognitive dimensions of social relationships have a positive influence on job performance (Song et al., 2019). On the contrary, as argued by Dzogbenuku Doe & Amoako (2022), cognitive use of social media has a positive influence on employee performance whereas the hedonic implications of social media have a negative impact on organisational performance. Social media users have the opportunity to recommend significant quality to the social media circles about the brand or a particular innovative product. Organisations have utilised significant opportunities such as offering lower costs, ensuring brand recognition and improving brand awareness through social and digital marketing in recent years.

3. Conclusion

From the above discussion, it can be concluded that social media has played a huge role in fostering collaboration, communication and creativity within organisations. Social media has contributed to brainstorming approaches around all departments within an organisation. Virtual space has helped the employees to share their ideas and be collaborative. Innovative thinking has been valued and referred to as strategic initiatives. Product development and implications of design have been also convenient in an organisation through social media.

References

MITS5004 IT Security Research Report 2 Sample

Objective(s)

This assessment item relates to the unit learning outcomes as in the unit descriptor. This assessment is designed to improve student presentation skills and to give students experience in researching a topic and writing a report relevant to the Unit of Study subject matter.

INSTRUCTIONS

Assignment 2 - Research Study - 10% (Due Session 9) Individual Assignment For this component you will write a report or critique on the paper you chose from Assignment

1. Your report should be limited to approx. 1500 words (not including references). Use 1.5 spacing with a 12 point Times New Roman font. Though your paper will largely be based on the chosen article, you should use other sources to support your discussion or the chosen papers premises.

Citation of sources is mandatory and must be in the IEEE style.

Your report or critique must include:

Title Page: The title of the assessment, the name of the paper you are reporting on and its authors, and your name and student ID.

Introduction: Identification of the paper you are critiquing/ reviewing, a statement of the purpose for your report and a brief outline of how you will discuss the selected article (one or two paragraphs).

Body of Report: Describe the intention and content of the article. If it is a research report, discuss the research method (survey, case study, observation, experiment, or other method) and findings. Comment on problems or issues highlighted by the authors. Report on results discussed and discuss the conclusions of the article and how they are relevant to the topics of this Unit of Study.

Conclusion: A summary of the points you have made in the body of the paper. The conclusion should not introduce any ‘new’ material that was not discussed in the body of the paper. (One or two paragraphs)

References: A list of sources used in your text. They should be listed alphabetically by (first) author’s family name. Follow the IEEE style.

The footer must include your name, student ID, and page number.

Note: reports submitted on papers which are not approved or not the approved paper registered for the student will not be graded and attract a zero (0) grade.

Solution

Introduction

The exciting improvements of the upcoming Microsoft Windows 11 operating system are disclosed in an insightful essay from eMazzanti Technologies, a reputable IT consultant and Microsoft cloud services provider with offices in NYC. Windows 11 is expected to revolutionise PC users' productivity and security when it launches in October. For Assignment Help, The article goes in-depth on the main improvements, like faster access to Microsoft Teams and a better Snap tool for window management. The criteria for Microsoft Azure Attestation (MAA) and the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0 further emphasise the importance of security. Windows 11 offers consumers a better, safer future with less frequent upgrades, improved tablet compatibility, and simplified system requirements.

Critique of the paper

The impending Windows 11 operating system is described in detail, along with some of its anticipated features, in the article titled "Windows 11 Set to Deliver Security and Productivity Improvements." The work does, however, have a few features that call for criticism and more investigation. In its review of the new features in Windows 11, the article, to start, lacks depth. It highlights improvements like quicker access to Microsoft Teams and a better Snap feature, but it does not go into detail about these or discuss any possible repercussions [1]. The readership would profit from a more thorough investigation of the potential effects of these features on user experience and output.

Second, a critical viewpoint on the system requirements for Windows 11 is absent from the essay. Although it acknowledges the necessity of Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0, it does not address any potential difficulties or worries that consumers or organisations might encounter in order to comply with these standards. It would have been instructive to look more closely at the hardware requirements for upgrades and compatibility problems. The article also does not cover any potential downsides or compromises related to Windows 11 in any detail [2]. The new operating system is portrayed in a mainly positive light, but a fair analysis should take into account any drawbacks or restrictions that users might experience.

Strengths and Weaknesses

Strengths

The article outlines numerous advantages that Windows 11 is expected to offer. First and foremost, the improved security measures are a big plus. A proactive approach to tackling changing cybersecurity risks is demonstrated by the release of Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0 and support for Microsoft Azure Attestation (MAA). By providing physical security against malicious software, these methods safeguard critical data. Second, Windows 11 offers some notable productivity improvements [3]. The taskbar's quicker access to Microsoft Teams makes it easier to collaborate and communicate with clients and colleagues. Multitasking is facilitated by the enhanced Snap window management capability, increasing overall efficiency. The disruption and annoyance brought on by lengthy update processes are reduced by smaller annual feature upgrades and monthly security updates.

Weaknesses

Windows 11 does, however, have some shortcomings. The heightened system requirements are a significant obstacle. Although these improvements are intended to increase security, they could be difficult for users with outdated gear to use. Compatibility problems could result from this, necessitating expensive hardware upgrades. The article also mentions that most customers would not be able to upgrade from Windows 10 until early 2022. For individuals who cannot upgrade right once, this staggered release schedule could lead to differences in the user experience and even impair corporate operations [4]. However, organisations and people will need to take into account potential limitations while planning their transition to the new operating system, such as the increased system requirements and the delayed availability for some users.

Problems or issues identified by the Author

Despite discussing a number of different features of Windows 11 in this essay, the author falls short in properly addressing a number of significant difficulties and problems.

Absence of Critical Analysis: This is a significant problem. This essay, which was authored by a Microsoft partner, seems to be a marketing piece for Windows 11 [5]. As a result, it is biased and skips over any potential negative aspects or shortcomings of the new operating system. Both the advantages and disadvantages should be discussed in a fair manner.

Limited Hardware Compatibility: Despite mentioning Windows 11's system requirements, the page does not go into great detail about the difficulties that users with older hardware may encounter. Many consumers can discover that their current devices do not satisfy these standards, needing expensive upgrades or new
Dependence on the Microsoft Ecosystem: The article highlights elements like direct access to Microsoft Teams and interaction with Microsoft Azure [6]. This, however, raises questions about vendor lock-in because consumers may become more and more reliant on the Microsoft environment, reducing their flexibility and options.

Security Issues: Despite the article's mention of improved security measures, it fails to address any potential privacy issues brought on by these adjustments. Users may be concerned about how Microsoft uses and collects personal data.

Transition Challenges: Although it makes a passing reference of the necessity for users and companies to get ready for the switch to Windows 11, it offers no specific advice on how to do so in an efficient manner. There should be more focus on this topic because switching to a new operating system might be a difficult procedure.

Relationship with the first assignment

The previous paper highlighting the value of operating system security and the paper outlining the security and productivity aspects of Windows 11 are related in the context of IT security and technological breakthroughs. The previous assignment offers understanding into crucial elements of operating system security, including vulnerabilities, exploitation strategies, and security mechanisms [7]. It emphasises how important it is to protect operating systems so that data and programmes are shielded from potential dangers. The article regarding Windows 11, in contrast, emphasises the enhancements and novel features in the future operating system update. The need of Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0 is expressly mentioned as one of the improved security measures that must be in place to safeguard sensitive data.

The bigger picture of IT security is what connects these pieces. While the academic paper concentrates on the theoretical and practical elements of operating system security, the article about Windows 11 shows how operating system developers, like Microsoft, are actively addressing security concerns by incorporating new features and requirements. In the ever-evolving field of IT security, both publications emphasise the significance of strong operating system security mechanisms.

Components of the assignment

The upcoming release of Microsoft Windows 11 is examined in-depth in a new essay from eMazzanti Technologies by a well-known IT expert in the NYC region, who emphasises the significant gains in security and productivity. The rumour claims that an operating system for PCs that is extensively used will be released in October 2021. The focus is on the enhanced security capabilities of Windows 11, which include support for Microsoft Azure Attestation (MAA) and a requirement for the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0 [8]. These components make the system more robust to fend against threats that are always changing. Data security is enhanced by TPM 2.0's physical defence against malicious software.

The article also emphasises productivity upgrades that promote efficient multitasking and collaboration, such as easy access to Microsoft Teams directly from the taskbar and an improved Snap tool for window organising. By committing to monthly security updates that are 40% shorter than Windows 10's cumulative updates and annual feature upgrades rather to semi-annual ones, Windows 11 promises a more streamlined experience and addresses the continuing issue of lengthy Windows updates. While the transition to Windows 11 is expected to begin in October, the majority of customers will likely upgrade from Windows 10 to Windows 11 in the early months of 2022 [9]. During this transitional period, people and companies can assess their hardware compatibility and prepare for a seamless move.

Comparison and Analysis

This particular article from eMazzanti Technologies differs from other articles on Windows 11 in a number of ways:

Vendor Perspective: The author of this post is a Microsoft cloud services provider, in contrast to numerous articles that offer a more impartial and objective perspective on Windows 11. As a result, it has a more sales-oriented tenor and places greater emphasis on the operating system's advantages and good points. It differs from more unbiased evaluations due to the vendor-specific perspective.

Emphasis on Security and Productivity: The focus of this article is on security and productivity improvements rather than Windows 11's features, which are generally only mentioned in passing in other articles. It goes into detail about Microsoft Teams integration and the need for Trusted Platform Module (TPM) 2.0 [10]. Compared to articles that might cover a wider range of topics, it stands out because of its narrow emphasis.

Highlighting Vendor Knowledge: The article highlights eMazzanti Technologies' knowledge as a Microsoft Gold Partner and its preparedness to help with Windows 11 upgrades. Unlike posts that primarily try to enlighten readers without endorsing any particular service providers, this one promotes itself.
Specific Release Information: The article indicates that Windows 11 is scheduled to be released in October 2021 and offers a plan for upgrading from Windows 10 to Windows 11 in early 2022. It distinguishes itself from articles that might offer more general information without definite periods thanks to its temporal context.
Limited Criticism: This article tends to emphasise Windows 11's advantages rather than its potential disadvantages or difficulties, in contrast to other articles that might critically analyse those issues [11]. The advantages are emphasised rather than a thorough evaluation.

Conclusion

In conclusion, the eMazzanti Technologies paper discusses important features of Windows 11, with a focus on security, productivity, and system requirements. It forecasts a release date of October and highlights the advantages of greater productivity tools including Microsoft Teams integration, smaller monthly upgrades, and an annual update cycle. The article recognises that individuals and companies must get ready for the switch to Windows 11 because of the higher system requirements. It also emphasises how ready eMazzanti Technologies is to help with this shift. However, it's crucial to highlight that the essay lacks a critical viewpoint and is written from a promotional perspective, concentrating mostly on the positive elements of Windows 11.

References

MIS102 Data and Networking Report 3 Sample

Task Summary

Create a network disaster recovery plan (portfolio) (1500 words, 10%-or 10%+) along with a full network topology diagram. This portfolio should highlight the competencies you have gained in data and networking through the completion of Modules 1 – 6.

Context

The aim of this assessment is to demonstrate your proficiency in data and networking. In doing so, you will design a network disaster recovery plan for a company of your choice to demonstrate your proficiency with network design.

Task Instructions

1. Create a network disaster recovery plan (portfolio) along with a full network topology diagram for a company. (the choice of a company can be a local or international company)

2. It is recommended that to investigate the same company that was researched in Assignment 1 as this created a complete portrait of the company and becomes an e-portfolio of the work complete.

Note: The Company has branches worldwide and this should be considered when creating the network disaster recovery plan.

3. Network disaster recovery plan (portfolio)

Write a network disaster recovery plan using of 1500 words, (10%-or 10%+) The Portfolio must include the following:

An introductory section that highlights the importance of having a recovery plan.

• Whatstepsshould the company take if:

o There is a sudden internet outage.

o A malware (e.g. a virus) hasinfected the computers in the company network.

o There is no local area network for the entire company Is there a way to diagnose if this is a hardware failure. What communication protocol stack might be affected.

o Only a part of the company loses internet connection.

o There is a power outage.

o There is a natural disaster such as an earthquake, tsunami, floods or fire.

o There is a password security breach.

• Are there precautions and post-planning to ensure that the company will not repeat the same network disaster?

• Anticipate the likely questions about the network design that will be raised by the client (Please note that this may include both technical and non-technical staff of the organization).

4. Network topology diagram

• Create a full network topology diagram, that could ensure the business continuity of the company.

• The diagrams need to be your own work and need to be developed using Visio or Lucidchart or an approved graphic package. (Please seek the approval of the learning facilitator prior to commencing this activity).

• All diagrams need to be labeled and referenced if they are not your own.

• The full network topology will be part of the network disaster recovery plan and should be used to further enhance the understanding of the recovery plan.

Solution

Introduction

Even a digital firm like Apple may experience network outages and catastrophes in today's rapidly developing technological ecosystem. This research digs into the complex world of network disaster recovery planning, a vital part of modern corporate operations, and adapted to the specific requirements of a multinational corporation of Apple's figure. The capacity to quickly recover from network failures, cyber-attacks, and natural disasters is critical in today's always-connected digital world. For Assignment Help, This analysis highlights the value of preventative disaster recovery procedures by describing Apple's plans to ensure the availability of critical services, the security of sensitive data, and the robustness of the company in the face of adversity. 

Network disaster recovery plan

An organization like Apple would utilize a network disaster recovery strategy to restore its whole network in the event of a catastrophe. Finding the network's weak spots, creating a list of potential risks, developing a strategy to deal with those risks, and outlining a backup plan are all critical parts of a disaster recovery strategy (Meilani, Arief & Habibitullah, 2019).

Recovery plan – It allows Apple to keep operating, providing customers, and making money in the case of a calamity.

Protect Data - It helps to make sure that essential data is kept safe and can be recovered in the case of a disaster or legal complication (Zhang, Wang & Nicholson, 2017).

Reduce Monetary Costs - Significant monetary costs might come from downtime and data loss. These losses can be mitigated with a solid recovery strategy.

Protect Reputation - A speedy recovery shows that Apple values its consumers and will do what it takes to keep them happy.

Aspects of this plan

Precautions and Planning

- Organizations like Apple can reduce the likelihood of future network catastrophes by taking these preventative measures: Maintain a recovery strategy that takes into account developing risks and emerging technology.

- Training Employees - Regularly Have personnel trained on disaster preparedness and security best practices (Butun, Osterberg & Song, 2019).

- Regular testing and exercises should be carried out to ensure the efficacy of the disaster recovery strategy.

- Audits of the security measures in place should be carried out regularly to detect any flaws or weaknesses.

When it comes to addressing network failures and catastrophes, Apple, as a leader in the computer sector, must methodically develop and implement a complete set of safeguards and preventative measures to keep operations running smoothly.

Preventing internet outages is an important consideration. Apple would be wise to employ many independent internet connections through different ISPs (Finucane et al., 2020). To mitigate the effects of an ISP outage, these links must automatically switch to a backup connection in the event of an interruption. In addition, the user experience and availability may be improved by using material Delivery Networks (CDNs) to cache material closer to end-users. To further guarantee that key services are always available, especially during peak use periods, Apple should implement Quality of Service (QoS) policies to prioritize crucial traffic during network congestion.

Apple has to implement sophisticated threat detection systems capable of identifying malware in real-time if it wants to stop infections caused by malicious software. The danger of malware intrusion through phishing efforts and other vectors can be reduced by providing frequent training programs for employees. As important as network-wide defenses are, stopping malware infestations at their source requires effective endpoint protection software. Apple has to have spares of its network gear on hand in case of LAN problems so that it can quickly restore service. Tools for constant network monitoring can spot problems and hardware breakdowns early, allowing for preventative maintenance. It is important to keep accurate and detailed records of network setups to speed up the troubleshooting process in the event of a malfunction (Schultz, 2023).

Apple should implement network segmentation to ensure that mission-critical services continue to be available in the event of a partial loss of internet connectivity. In the case of a partial outage, technologies like Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) can be utilized to redirect traffic and keep services up. To ensure the failover procedures work as intended, they must be tested often. Reducing the likelihood of a power outage happening is crucial. Apple should install UPS systems in its mission-critical data centers and server farms to keep the machines running during power outages. Extending the electrical supply with backup generators is possible. Equipment failures during power outages can be avoided with regular power system maintenance (Rosencrance, 2023).

Apple should spread its data centres out over many locations to lessen the effects of calamities that affect only a small area. If data loss occurs, it may be quickly recovered through the use of real-time data replication to alternative data centres. Having a fully functional, off-site disaster recovery site with all of the data and resources synced across to it is like having an extra firewall up. Apple needs to deploy Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) for vital systems and accounts to stop password security breaches. Passwords should be changed often and be of a certain minimum complexity to reduce the possibility of hacking. It is also important to do security audits to find password security flaws.

As part of Apple's continuous dedication to network resilience and disaster recovery readiness, the company should continually reinforce these preventative actions. Apple is better able to protect its worldwide user base from interruptions in service because of the efforts it has taken to implement these measures throughout its network architecture (Peterson & Hilliard, 2022).

Client-Focused Question Anticipation

Questions from the Technical Staff

1. How frequently should we revise our disaster recovery strategy? Plans should be examined and revised at least once a year, or more frequently if necessary.

2. How often is crucial information backed up? Specify how often and what kind of backups will be done.

3. Can you give me a rough estimate of how long each rehabilitation plan will take? - Please include planned recuperation times.

Questions from Non-Technical Employees

1. How Will My Work Be Affected? - Describe the precautions taken to keep normal activities to a minimum.

2. To what extent do workers contribute to catastrophe preparedness? Stress the need of being punctual in reporting problems and sticking to established protocols.

3. In the event of an emergency, how will information be disseminated to staff members? Explain the current methods of interaction.
Network Diagram

Figure 1 Network topology diagram for Apple

Conclusion

This research has shown that even a technological centre like Apple needs a network disaster recovery strategy to keep operations running smoothly. Apple can keep up its rate of innovation and service availability by painstakingly tackling a wide range of potential calamities, from cyberattacks to natural disasters. Redundancy, backup solutions, and personnel training help the organization handle interruptions with resilience and agility, allowing it to maintain its promise to clients all across the world. Apple can keep its operations running smoothly, keep its unrivaled image intact, and weather any storm by adopting these measures and embracing a culture of readiness.

References

MIS609 Data Management and Analytics Case Study 3 Sample

Assessment Task

For this assignment, you are required to write a 2000-word case study report proposing data management solutions for the organisation presented in the case scenario.

Context

Module 5 and 6 explored the fundamentals of data management. This assignment gives you the opportunity to make use of these concepts and propose a data management solution for the organisation presented in the case scenario.

Assessment Instructions

1. Read the case scenario provided in the assessment area.

2. Write a 2000-word enterprise data management solution for the company

3. The solution should discuss how it helps the company to solve the technical or operational complexity of handling data.

Eg1: problem of securely maintaining customer data can be solved by implementing data security practises, setting up a security framework that establishes right users to get access to the data, continuous audit will help to monitor any malpractice etc.

Eg2: poor data quality issues can be solved by implementing data quality measures

4. Remember not to deep dive into any topics, the solution is more at a conceptual level

5. Please address the below areas

• Identifying the business requirements and existing issues in data operations (explain techniques used collecting requirements)

• Data management operations relating to the various kinds of data that the company deals with.

• Data Architecture (provide example of a proposed architecture that will help in processing the data e.g. ETL(data warehousing or cloud solution)

• Data quality measures

• Metadata management

• Handling legacy data - Data migration

• Data archival

• Data governance measures

• Data privacy

• Expected benefits

6. The areas listed above are indicative and are in no sequence. When addressing this in the solution, please ensure you write in an orderly fashion. Also, any other data management areas not listed above can also be covered.

7. You are strongly advised to read the rubric, which is an evaluation guide with criteria for grading your assignment.

Solution

Business Requirements and Existing Issues

The Status of the retail bank this time exposes severe issues brought on by out-of-date IT systems, which impede efficient data management and reduce client satisfaction. The bank has a sizable client base and a desire to grow even more, but it fails to manage new demands effectively. For Assignment Help, The problem is made worse by the dependence on uncoordinated technologies like Excel, Access DB, and outdated Oracle DB, which slows the generation of reports as a result of dispersed and inconsistent data. Additionally, the bank's capacity to respond quickly to problems and raise client satisfaction is hampered by insufficient data storage and management of consumer complaints. Modernisation, centralisation, and improvement of data processing are obviously necessary.

An complete business data management system is suggested to handle these problems. This approach ensures effective data management and integrity by replacing obsolete systems with contemporary database technology. The implementation of a centralised data repository will improve data quality and compliance when combined with strong data governance and security measures. Advanced analytics technologies may also help with the analysis and quicker response of consumer complaints (Orazalin, 2019, p.493). Business users may concentrate on innovation rather than mundane administration by automating manual data processes. Overall, the bank will be able to manage its expanding client base and update its IT environment thanks to this solution's simpler processes, increased customer happiness and increased business agility.

Data Management Operations

The retail bank is facing major difficulties with data management and its related operations given the status of the industry. The bank has a long history that dates back to the 1970s, has amassed a sizeable client base, and has a good reputation throughout Australia. The bank's quick client expansion has, however, resulted in operational inefficiencies brought on by outmoded IT systems and data management procedures. As a consequence of the current method's reliance on Excel sheets, Access databases, and outdated Oracle databases, data processing is fragmented, report production takes a long time, and data integrity is compromised.

Figure 1: Data Management Operations in Banks
Source: (Recode Solutions, 2022)

By year's end, the bank hopes to have one million customers, thus an updated and comprehensive data management system is required. The shortcomings in the present system make it difficult to handle consumer complaints effectively, resolve problems quickly, and make data-driven decisions. Furthermore, the problems are made worse by a lack of adequate data governance and security procedures. In order to enable business users to concentrate on strategic development rather of being bogged down by manual data activities, the Chief Technology Officer is aware of the necessity for a complete data management plan.

To address these concerns, implementing an enterprise data management solution is paramount. This solution will streamline data collection, storage, processing, and reporting, resulting in enhanced operational efficiency, improved customer satisfaction through faster complaint resolution, and better-informed decision-making (Reis et al., 2022, p.20). Additionally, the solution will establish robust data governance and security protocols, ensuring data quality, privacy, and compliance. Ultimately, the holistic approach aims to facilitate data-driven growth, enabling the bank to achieve its customer expansion goals while maintaining operational excellence and reputation.

Data Quality Measures

The current state of the retail bank highlights several data-related challenges that need to be addressed through an effective data management solution. The bank, with a long-standing reputation and an expanding customer base, is undergoing IT modernization to accommodate growth. However, the existing data infrastructure comprising Excel sheets, Access DB, and an outdated Oracle DB poses significant obstacles. These range from inefficient handling of customer requests and operations management to compromised customer satisfaction due to delayed complaint resolution. Generating reports from disorganized and disparate datasets is time-consuming, primarily due to data integrity issues stemming from poor data quality (Grimes et al., 2022, p.108).

There are several advantages to using an enterprise data management system. First, more accurate reporting and analytics will be possible because to enhanced data quality and integrity, which will allow for more informed choices. Second, by immediately resolving concerns, simplified procedures and effective data processing will raise customer satisfaction. Sensitive data will also be protected by the solution's governance and security safeguards, guaranteeing compliance with data protection laws. In the end, this solution will relieve business users of the stress of repetitive data administration duties and allow them to concentrate on strategic projects, promoting innovation and development.

Metadata Management

Metadata management is crucial for addressing the data-related challenges faced by the retail bank. Currently, the bank's operations are hindered by outdated systems and processes, leading to inefficiencies in managing customer data and operations. The bank's customer base is rapidly growing, and the use of Excel sheets, Access databases, and an old version of Oracle DB is causing data disarray and integrity issues. Due to scattered data sets and low data quality, it is difficult to provide timely reports for decision-making. Inadequate data storage and analytics skills also make it difficult for the bank to manage and report consumer concerns (Grimes et al., 2022, p.104).

It is crucial to establish a strong metadata management system in order to prevent these problems. In order to manage data definitions, linkages, and provenance across systems, a central repository must be established. With the help of this solution, data consistency, quality, and reporting and analytics will all be improved. Implementing governance and security measures will also improve compliance and data protection. The system will encourage innovation and development by automating data administration duties and allowing business users to concentrate on their main responsibilities. In the end, this strategy will speed up the processing of client complaints, increasing customer happiness and loyalty while also putting the bank in a position to easily meet its objective of one million customers by year’s end.

Data Governance Measures

A strong data governance policy has to be built to deal with these issues. Modern database systems will be used to centralise data storage, along with procedures for data integration and data quality implementation, as well as the establishment of distinct roles and responsibilities for data ownership. Data security measures should also be implemented to safeguard sensitive consumer information and guarantee compliance with relevant legislation, such as data privacy laws.

Figure 2: Types of Data Governance Measures
Source: (Nero, 2018, December 7)

The bank will profit in several ways by using an enterprise data management system. A faster response of client complaints will increase customer happiness and retention, which is the first benefit of streamlining data procedures. Second, more accurate reporting made possible by enhanced data integrity will lead to better decisions. Last but not least, the decreased human labour required for data administration chores would free up business users to concentrate on innovation and growth efforts, leading to the creating of new business possibilities and income.

Handling Legacy Data - Data Migration

For the bank’s modernization efforts and operational effectiveness, it is crucial to adopt a complete data management solution given the situation of the company today and the associated data-related problems. The bank's antiquated Oracle DB and legacy systems, such as Excel spreadsheets, Access databases, and Access databases, are unable to handle the growing client base and new demands. As a result, creating reports takes a lot of time, the data's quality is poor, and client satisfaction is suffering. A solid data transfer plan is suggested as a solution to these problems. In this approach, the current data from historical systems is moved to a more sophisticated and scalable platform, such a contemporary relational database or a cloud-based solution (Roskladka et al., 2019, p.15).

This method of data movement has several advantages. The bank would be able to manage the projected increase in clients with ease since it would first guarantee a smoother transfer to contemporary technology. Second, by consolidating data into a single repository, creating reports would be more quickly and cost-effectively. Additionally, increased data integrity would increase analytics' accuracy, resulting in better decision-making. In the end, the data transfer approach will lessen the load of legacy systems, allowing business users to concentrate on core duties, innovation, and customer-centric initiatives instead of being bogged down in manual data administration responsibilities. This transition to effective data management creates the groundwork for a bank that is more adaptable, responsive, and customer-focused.

Data Architecture

In response to the current challenges faced by the bank, a proposed enterprise data management solution aims to address data-related issues while supporting growth objectives. Given the bank's outdated systems and processes coupled with a growing customer base, a robust solution is imperative.

To streamline data operations, a modern data architecture is recommended, leveraging cloud-based technologies. This architecture involves Extract, Transform, Load (ETL) processes to efficiently collect data from sources like Excel sheets, Access DB, and Oracle DB. The data will then be cleansed, transformed, and loaded into a centralized cloud-based data warehouse. This repository ensures real-time access to accurate and consolidated data, thereby enhancing reporting efficiency and maintaining data integrity.

Figure 3: Data Architecture of Bank
Source: (Fernandez, 2019, August 20)

Benefits of this solution include improved operational efficiency, expedited decision-making, and elevated customer satisfaction. By automating data processes, bank employees can redirect their focus towards innovative business initiatives. Swift access to reliable data aids in promptly addressing customer complaints and boosting overall satisfaction. Furthermore, this data management approach establishes robust governance and security measures, mitigating risks associated with data mishandling. In conclusion, this holistic solution aligns with the bank's modernization goals and supports the CTO's vision of utilizing data for strategic growth (Grimes et al., 2022, p.171).

Data Privacy

One of the critical issues is the inability to manage customer complaints effectively, impeding the bank's goal of swift complaint resolution and improved customer satisfaction. The absence of a well-structured data storage mechanism for complaints, coupled with poor data quality, hinders insightful reporting and analytics. Furthermore, the lack of defined governance and security measures exposes the bank to potential risks associated with data mishandling. To address these challenges, implementing an enterprise data management solution is imperative. This solution would streamline data processes, centralize data storage, and enhance data quality through standardized practices. The integration of modern data management tools and technologies would enable efficient report generation and analytics, aiding decision-making processes. Moreover, by enforcing proper governance and security measures, the bank can ensure data privacy and mitigate potential breaches (La Torre et al., 2021, p.14)

Benefits of this data management solution include enhanced customer satisfaction through quicker complaint resolution, optimized operational efficiency, and improved data privacy and security. By liberating business users from tedious data management tasks, they can focus more on innovation and value creation, aligning with the Chief Technology Officer's vision for the bank's growth and modernization.

Data Archival

An enterprise data management system is essential to optimise operations and assure future scalability in response to the existing conditions of the company and the data-related difficulties encountered by the retail bank. Excel sheets, Access databases, and out-of-date versions of Oracle DB are just a few of the systems and procedures the bank now uses that make it difficult to handle data effectively and keep up with the growth in its client base. This leads to operational inefficiencies and a poor response to client concerns.

These problems will be solved and a number of advantages will result from using an extensive data management system. First, a crucial part of this approach will be data archiving. The bank may free up space on its current systems and improve the speed and responsiveness of those systems by preserving past client data and transaction records. Second, centralised data integration and storage will enhance data integrity and quality, allowing for more rapid and precise reporting. Furthermore, clear governance and security policies will guarantee data compliance and protect sensitive data. Overall, this solution will relieve business users of data administration duties so they can concentrate on core company responsibilities and innovation. Additionally, increased complaint resolution and operational efficiency will increase customer satisfactions.

Expected Benefits

The first step of the strategy is to centralize data storage and switch from outdated Oracle DB and separate systems like excel and Access DB to a more up-to-date, integrated database architecture. This change will improve data integrity, decrease duplication, and promote effective data retrieval, enabling the creation of reports more quickly and accurately. Second, the system has sophisticated data analytics and reporting features that will enable the bank to examine data on customer complaints, spot patterns, and respond quickly to resolve problems—all of which are in line with their objective of raising customer happiness.

The suggested solution also incorporates strong data governance and security mechanisms that guarantee regulatory compliance and protect private consumer data. By doing this, the bank's data handling procedures will be in line with industry best practices, reducing the likelihood of data breaches. Overall, the data management solution will allow business users to concentrate on strategic development objectives instead of being burdened by manual data management duties, freeing up critical time from them to do so.

References

CBS131 Cybersecurity Principles Report 2 Sample

Assessment Task

Produce a 1500-word cybersecurity group report. Advise on how to assess the cybersecurity threats facing the banking industry and apply an incident response plan to remediate from such attacks.

Please refer to the Task Instructions below for details on how to complete this task.

Task Instructions

Section A: Group Work

1. Group Formation

• Form a group of a maximum of 3 members.

• Your group must be formed by the end of Module 5 (Week 5) and registered.

• To register your group, you are required to send your Learning Facilitator an email before the registration deadline.

• Send an email to your Learning Facilitator with“CBS131 Group Registration” in the subject line. In the body of the email, please list the names and student ID numbers of all the members of your group. Also attach your completed Group Contract (see below for more details).

• Please note that you will work with your group members for Assessments 2 and 3.

2. Group Contract

Please read the attached CBS131_Assessments 2 & 3_Group Contract.

This document outlines the rules and conditions each group has to follow for both assessments as well as the roles and responsibilities of each group member. The group contract accounts for 5% of the assessment grade, as indicated in the Assessment Rubric.

• For assessments where students are expected to work in groups, the workload must be shared equitably among all group members. Please refer to sections 6.1 and 6.2 of the TUA PL_AC_014: Student Conduct Policy.

• When submitting the group contract, you are reminded not to ‘recycle’ (self-plagiarise) contracts from other assessments. Sections on deliverables, timeline and expectations should be unique to each assessment or project. Self-plagiarism constitutes a breach of Academic Integrity and can lead to penalties to the assessment or subject.

• During Assessments 2 and 3, you should keep records of communication and drafts. Any serious concerns about an
individual group member’s contribution should be brought to the attention of your Learning Facilitator as soon as they occur or at least two weeks before the due date, whichever is earlier.

• If a student has been accused of not contributing equally or fairly to a group assessment, the student will be contacted by the Learning Facilitator and given three working days to respond to the allegation and provide supporting evidence. If there is no response within three working days of contact, the Learning Facilitator will determine an appropriate mark based on the evidence available. This may differ from the mark awarded to other group members and would reflect the individual student’s contribution in terms of the quantity and quality of work.

Section B: Analyse the case and develop the group report

1. Read the attached case scenario to understand the concepts being discussed in the case.

2. Address the following:

• Review your subject notes to establish the relevant area of investigation that applies to the case. Study any relevant readings that have been recommended in the case area in modules. Plan how you will structure your ideas for the attacks/risk analysis, and remediation.

• Identify the methodology used to launch the cyber-attack against the bank and address the cyber threat landscaping and challenges facing the banking domain.

• Appraise the cyber attack’s impact on the bank’s operation.

• Explain the necessary security measures required to combat cyber threats, describe the basic security framework that banks need to have in place to defend against cyber threats and describe relevant security technologies to protect against cyber-attacks.

• Describe the strategies undertaken by banking management to regain customer trust in the aftermath of the cyber-attack.

• You will be assessed on the justification and understanding of security methods in relation to cyber-attack methodology, impact of the cyber-attack on banking industries, and effective strategies that can be used to regain trust of its customers. The quality of your research will also be assessed as described in the Assessment Rubric section. You may include references relating to the case as well as non-academic references. You will need to follow the relevant standards and reference them. If you chose not to follow a standard, then a detailed explanation of why you have done this is required.

• The content of the outlined chapters/books and discussion with the lecturer in the Modules 1 to 4 should be reviewed. Further search in the library and/or internet about the relevant topic is encouraged.

3. Group member roles:

• Each member is responsible for researching/writing about two methods or strategies.

• All group members are responsible for editing and checking the references of the report at the end so it’s not one member’s sole responsibility.

4. The report should consist of the following structure:

• A title page with the subject code and name, assessment title, student name, student number and Learning Facilitator name.

• The introduction (approx. 150 words) should describe the purpose of the report. You will need to inform the reader of:

• a) Your area of research in relation to data breach attacks and its context

• b) The key concepts of cybersecurity you will be addressing and what the effects of a data breach are.

• The body of the report (approx. 1,200 words) will need to respond to the specific requirements of the case study. It is advised that you use the case study to assist you in structuring the security methods in relation to the attacks/risk analysis and remediation, cyber threat

• landscaping and challenges facing the banking domain, impact of cyber attacks on the organisation and its customers, necessary security measures required to combat cyberthreats and effective strategies that can be used to regain the trust of its customers.

• The conclusion (approx. 150 words) will need to summarise any findings or recommendations that the report puts forward regarding the concepts covered in the report.

5. Format of the report:

• The report should use the Arial or Calibri font in 11 point, be line spaced at 1.5 for ease of reading and have page numbers on the bottom of each page. If diagrams or tables are used, due attention should be given to pagination to avoid loss of meaning and continuity by unnecessarily splitting information over two pages. Diagrams must include the appropriate labelling in APA style.

Please refer to the Assessment Rubric for the assessment criteria.

Solution

Introduction

As determined by cyber threat, the landscape includes an entire segment of cybersecurity affecting organisations, user groups and specific industries. The emergence of novel cyber threats daily changes its landscape accordingly. The threat landscape constitutes certain factors that pose a risk to every entity within a relevant context. The case study report has discussed the cyber threat landscaping faced by the banking sectors worldwide. For Assignment Help, The associated challenges to protect and maintain customer confidence, especially in the corporate domain, have also been discussed. The report has focused on data breaches as a strategy to carry out malicious activities by the actors and motivators of cybercrimes. An action data breach can significantly cause adverse effects for the parent organisation due to the mishandling of sensitive information resulting in identity theft (Benson, McAlaney & Frumkin, 2019). Hackers utilise such information to conduct malpractices in the form of new bank account opening or purchase actions.

Discussion

Cyber threat Landscaping and challenges facing the banking Domain

The sole responsibility for sensitive data security management has been given to the national government and the respective banking body. The global financial system has been undergoing a digital transformation accelerated by the global pandemic hit. Technology and banking systems are functioning parallelly to cater to digital payments and currency needs. Remote working of banking employees has necessitated the accessibility to sensitive information on personal data connections (Lamssaggad et al., 2021). This has facilitated the breach of data incidents across the globe as hackers can easily access customers' banking data from personal internet networks. Cyber-attacks are more prominent in middle income nations, while they are soft targets due to a lack of global attention.

Identify the methodology used to launch the cyber-attack against the bank

The continuation of cyber threats for the banking sectors involves identifying the following discussed methods as significant contributors.

Ransomware: The most significant form of cybercrime is ransomware, which involves encrypting selective files while blocking its real user. After that, a ransom is demanded by the criminal to provide accessibility for the encrypted files. The resultant event is witnessed in organisations facing an inactivity of their systems for longer. Ransom payment does not guarantee system recovery from criminals (Blazic, 2022).

The risk from remote working: Introducing hybrid working conditions for employees has led to significant vulnerabilities as cloud-based software is used. The banking sectors face significantly higher data breach risks due to sensitive data accessibility via employees' networks and systems.

Social engineering: Social engineering exploits the most important aspect of the financial system: the customers themselves. Customers are forced to share their sensitive credentials via unauthorised networks. The forms of social engineering include whaling and phishing attacks.

Supply chain attacks: Cybercriminals target a comparatively weaker partner in the supply chain for distributing malware. Certain messages regarding products and services are circulated via the system of the target partner to make the content legitimate, at least superficially. It is an increasing cybercrime in the financial sectors globally ( Lamssaggad et al., 2021). The hackers establish the authenticity of the networks as they gain control of the networks because of poor security management by the owner of the networks.

Cyber attack’s impact on the bank’s operation

Figure 1: Risk diagram for the banking sectors
Source: (Self developed)

Table 1: Risk Matrix
Source: (Self Developed)

It can be stated from the above risk matrix that cyber security for the banking industry has been associated with data security management policies. The above matrix shows that data breach is the most severe form of cyber risk which affects banking institutions. Whereas the risks associated with remote working environments have rarely occurred in the sector. The reason for such rarity is associated with the non-accessibility of the database from personal networks other than that of the bank's commercial network (Lallie et al., 2021).

Necessary security measures required to combat cyber threats

The launch of “International Strategy to Better Protect the Global Financial System against Cyber Threats” in the year 2020 have suggested specific actions to reduce fragmentation. This can be achieved by fostering collaborations among significant international and governmental agencies, tech companies and financial firms (Dupont, 2019). The World Economic Forum has been guided by strategies that include four aspects such as clarity regarding responsibilities and roles, the urgency of international collaboration, reducing fragmentation and protection of the international financial agencies. The governmental role involves the formation of financial CERTs (computer emergency response teams) for sharing sensitive risk management data as per Israel’s FinCERT. Cyber resilience can be strengthened by appropriate response formulation in the form of arrests, sanctions and asset seizures for combating cyber threats legally.

A security framework that banks need to have in place to defend against cyber threats

Table 2: NIST cyber security framework
Source: (Self Developed)

The NIST cybersecurity framework can be utilised to assess and implement every aspect of the problem, which is currently decreasing the value of the banking sectors across the globe (Kshetri, 2019). It has been noted that effectiveness regarding cyber security management greatly improves the customer relationships a bank maintains with its existing customers.

Security technologies to protect against cyber attacks

Intrusion Detection System (IDS): Network traffic is analysed by IDS to identify signatures corresponding to known attacks in the cyber domain. The requirement of human assistance or appropriate automated systems to interpret the results is a form of utilising more security measures for the action (Akintoye et al., 2022).

Figure 2: Elements of cybersecurity diagram
Source: (Geeksforgeeks 2022)

Data Loss Prevention (DLP): DLP utilises data encryption to prevent data loss by protecting information and decrypting them only with the help of appropriate encryption keys (Chang et al., 2020). Choosing a suitable encryption technology amongst AES, DES, and RSA determines the magnitude of prevention offered.
Firewalls: A network security device that operates based on the already proposed security rules and decides whether to allow certain network traffic into the system. Firewalls may include both hardware and software and are used to address mitigating threats and monitoring traffic.

Effective strategies that can be used to regain the trust of its customers

Loyalty exchange can be an effective strategy to gain customers' trust again in the global banking sectors. The dependency of the economy on digital transactions has made the avenues for cybercrimes more prominent for attackers. Customer service quality needs to be improved significantly by every banking organisation to achieve customer loyalty. Customer engagement can be increased by truthful sharing of banking scenarios with potential customers (Broby, 2021). The banking personnel should reciprocate customer loyalty to increase the trust component of the customers.

The management of the banking sectors should take adequate measures to help every growing business in the nearby localities. Transparency associated with the banking systems shall be put forth to increase customer satisfaction. Helpful behaviour on the part of the banking institutes shall also sow the seeds of cooperation and confidence in the customers. Adopting several community-minded activities by the banks shall be beneficial to install dependency and trust in the banking sectors once again.

The banks can utilise their economic knowledge about a particular economy to discuss the ill effects and benefits of investment into particular business sectors. The anxieties of customers regarding the management of their financial resources can be solved by the banks, especially at the branch level. This attitude shall reduce anxieties and improve customer reliance on banking systems (Ahmad et al., 2020). The warmth shared within the customer relationships shall effectively increase the confidence level of the customers in their respective banking institutes.

Conclusion

The report has discussed the cyber threat landscaping and its challenges in the banking sectors from a global perspective. It has been noted that the ongoing transition of financial transactions into digitised platforms has widened the scope of data breaches. The potential risks associated with online monetary transactions, use of UPI platforms and unauthorised access to sensitive data storage are major reasons for more cybercrimes. The associated damages are reflected in the withdrawal of confidence from the banking sectors across the global scenario. The risk matrix has identified the probability and factors which contribute to the risks faced by banking institutes. The report has also discussed hackers' methods to carry out such fraudulent activities. At the end of the report, certain suggestions have been discussed to regain customer confidence in the banks in the newly introduced digitised banking platform.

Reference list

DATA4300 Data Security and Ethics Report 3 Sample

Your Task

• Write a 1,500-word report and record a video reflecting on the report creation process (involving an initial ChatGPT-generated draft, then editing it to a final version) and lessons learned.

• Submit both as a Microsoft Word file in Turnitin and a Kaltura video file upload by Wednesday, Week 13, at 23:55 pm (AEST):

Assessment Description

You have been employed as a Data Ethics Officer by a medical industry board (professional body). The board asked you to write a Code of Conduct about using new technologies in healthcare, which should be kept up to date and reflect technological evolution. Because of this technology’s breakneck pace, the professional body wants to ensure a code of conduct review happens more regularly and has authorised you to experiment with AI-powered chatbots to create a faster update process.
You are to write a Code of Conduct focused on using new technologies to inform best practices in the healthcare industry. For this assessment, you will choose one of the following technologies:

a) A device that tracks and measures personal health indicators, or

b) An application that recommends mental health support therapies.

Inform your lecturer about your technology choice by Week 9

Assessment Instructions

You will be asked to produce a report and video for this assessment.

Report:

• You are to start by conducting your own research (Introduction and Considerations sections, see structure below) on your technology.

• You will then create a code of conduct draft generated by ChatGPT. Then, you will edit it to make it applicable to your chosen technology, compliant with current regulations, and meaningful to the medical board request. Your individual research will inform this.

• Your Code of Conduct will be presented in a report (a suggested structure is below). Add at least five original Harvard references and use citations to them in your report.

Solution

Introduction

The increasing adoption of new technology is having a revolutionary effect on the healthcare sector. One of the most talked-about new developments is the appearance of tools for monitoring one's own health statistics. For Assignment Help, These cutting-edge tools provide people a way to track their vital signs and collect useful information about their health in real time. Because it allows individuals to take an active role in their own health management, this technology has the potential to significantly alter the healthcare system.

Benefits of a device that tracks and measures personal health indicators

There are several benefits that a device that tracks and measures personal health indicators can provide, as mentioned below-

• Health monitoring and tracking process- Monitoring health indicators like heart rate, blood pressure, sleep, and activity levels help people keep tabs on their progress towards healthier lifestyles. Patients may evaluate their health improvement over time, which can boost their drive and self-awareness (Han, 2020).

• Improved diagnostics- The device helps people achieve their health goals by offering them with unique insights and suggestions based on their own health data. This encourages individuals to take charge of their health by making educated decisions about their lifestyle and taking preventative measures.

• Achieving Health Goals- The gadget helps create goals by delivering personalised health data insights and suggestions. This helps patients to make educated lifestyle choices and take proactive health activities (KORE, 2020).

Figure 1: benefits of health monitoring device
(Source: Scalefocus, 2022)

Privacy, Cybersecurity, and Data Ethics Concerns

The devices stored and using the patients also come with a few security issues as well-

• There is a risk of cyber threats and unauthorized access to sensitive health data.

• The healthcare department might use the data without any consent leading to a breach of privacy.

• The GDPR laws and other regulations related to data can be breached and data can be used to carry out cyber thefts.
 

Considerations on Regulatory Compliance, Patient Protection, and Risks

Cybersecurity, privacy, and ethical risks associated with a device that tracks and measures personal health indicators

Cybersecurity risks

• Data Breaches- The gadget may be hacked, exposing sensitive health data.

• Malware and viruses- Malware or viruses in the device's software or applications might compromise data security (Staynings, 2023).

• Lack of Encryption- Weak encryption may reveal sensitive health data during transmission or storage.

Privacy risks

• Unauthorised Data Sharing- Health data may be shared without permission, jeopardising privacy (Staynings, 2023).

• Insufficient Consent Procedures- Users may not completely grasp data gathering and sharing, resulting in partial or misinformed consent.

• Re-identification- Anonymized data may be re-identified, violating privacy.

Ethical risks

• Informed Consent- If users are not educated about the purpose, risks, and possible repercussions of data collection and usage, obtaining real informed consent might be difficult.

• Data Accuracy and Interpretation- Data collection or analysis errors or biases may lead to erroneous interpretations and improper health recommendations or actions (Healthcare, 2021).

Regulatory compliance issues and patient protection requirements

The key regulatory complaints and laws for the data and privacy protection of the patients being used via devices of the medical industry are as mentioned below, these laws and regulations are for the data protection and ensure customer safety.

• Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) - HIPAA compliance includes privacy and security requirements, breach reporting, and enforcement to safeguard healthcare system information. The HIPAA Privacy Rule applies to all healthcare professionals and covers all media types, including electronic, print, and oral. It gives people the right to see their own protected health information (PHI) and mandates that the information be disclosed as to how it is used (RiskOptics, 2022).

Figure 2: HIPAA
(Source: Splunk, 2023)

• Patient Safety and Quality Improvement Act (PSQIA) - The purpose of this regulation is to promote a culture of safety by offering peer review evaluations for information provided on healthcare mishaps. To prevent the information from being utilised in litigation against the PSO, the statute created new patient safety organisations (PSOs) (Carter Jr et al., 2022).

• Security Standards - Healthcare organisations must follow industry best practises and data security standards, such as encryption, access restrictions, and vulnerability monitoring. Standards like as ISO 27001 aim to assure the security, integrity, and availability of patient data (Cole, 2022).

• Incident Response and Breach Reporting - Organisations must have strong incident response procedures in place to deal with data breaches or security issues as soon as possible. They must also follow breach reporting standards, informing impacted persons and appropriate authorities within the times indicated (Healthcare Compliance, 2023).

Figure 3: regulatory compliances
(Source: MCN Healthcare, 2018)
 

CHAT GPT VERSION OF CODE OF CONDUCT

Code of Conduct for A Device that Tracks and Measures Personal Health Indicators

Privacy and Data Protection

1.1. Data Collection and Use: Ensure that the collection and use of personal health data by the device are transparent and conducted with the explicit consent of the individual. Clearly communicate the purpose of data collection, how the data will be used, and any third parties involved.

1.2. Data Security: Implement robust security measures to protect personal health data from unauthorized access, loss, or disclosure. This includes encryption, secure storage, access controls, and regular security assessments to identify and address vulnerabilities.

1.3. Data Retention: Establish clear guidelines on the retention period of personal health data. Retain data only for as long as necessary and securely dispose of it once no longer needed, following applicable legal and regulatory requirements.

1.4. Anonymization and De-identification: When feasible, provide options for anonymizing or de-identifying personal health data to protect individual privacy. Ensure that any re-identification risks are minimized to maintain confidentiality.

Informed Consent and User Empowerment

2.1. Informed Consent: Obtain informed consent from individuals before collecting their personal health data. Clearly explain the purpose, benefits, risks, and limitations of data collection, enabling individuals to make informed decisions about using the device.

2.2. User Control: Provide individuals with mechanisms to control the collection, use, and sharing of their personal health data. Allow users to easily access, review, and modify their data preferences and provide options for data sharing with healthcare professionals or researchers.

2.3. User Education: Promote user education and awareness about the device's functionalities, data collection practices, and privacy settings. Ensure that individuals understand how to use the device safely and responsibly, empowering them to make informed decisions about their health data.

Accuracy and Reliability

3.1. Data Accuracy: Strive for accuracy and reliability in the measurements and data generated by the device. Regularly calibrate and validate the device to ensure accurate and consistent results, minimizing potential inaccuracies that could impact health decisions.

3.2. Algorithm Transparency: Provide transparency regarding the algorithms used to process and interpret personal health data. Users should have access to information about how the device calculates metrics, enabling them to understand and interpret the results accurately.
Ethical Use of Data and Algorithms

4.1. Responsible Data Use: Use personal health data only for legitimate purposes related to the device's functionalities and in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Avoid the use of personal health data for discriminatory or unethical practices.

4.2. Avoidance of Bias: Ensure that the device's algorithms are developed and tested to minimize bias and discrimination. Regularly evaluate and address any potential biases in data collection or algorithmic decision-making processes to ensure fair and equitable outcomes.

Transparency and User Communication

5.1. Transparency of Data Practices: Provide clear and accessible information about how personal health data is handled, stored, and shared. Clearly communicate the device's data practices, including any third-party partnerships or data sharing arrangements, to foster transparency and trust.

5.2. User Communication: Establish effective channels of communication with users, allowing them to raise concerns, ask questions, or provide feedback about the device and its data practices. Promptly address user inquiries and provide transparent and meaningful responses.

Compliance with Applicable Laws and Standards

6.1. Regulatory Compliance: Adhere to all relevant laws, regulations, and standards governing the collection, use, and protection of personal health data. Stay updated with evolving regulatory requirements and ensure ongoing compliance with data privacy and protection obligations.

6.2. Industry Standards: Align with industry best practices and standards for privacy, data security, and ethical use of personal health data. This includes adhering to guidelines such as the GDPR, HIPAA, ISO 27001, and other applicable frameworks.
Accountability and Governance

7.1. Accountability: Establish clear accountability and governance mechanisms for the responsible use of personal health data. Assign roles and responsibilities for data privacy, security, and ethical considerations. Conduct regular audits and assessments to ensure compliance and identify areas for improvement.

7.2. Continuous Improvement: Regularly review and update the device's functionalities, privacy policies, and data practices to reflect advancements in technology, evolving regulatory requirements, and user feedback. Continuously strive for enhanced privacy, security, and ethical standards.

By following this Code of Conduct, developers, manufacturers, and operators of devices that track and measure personal health indicators can ensure the ethical and responsible use of personal health data, fostering trust among users and promoting the benefits of these innovative technologies in healthcare.

Code of Conduct

The technology chosen for this study is A device that tracks and measures personal health indicators, the device will require data from the patients which needs to be collected with informed consent, and all the regulatory compliances and data protection laws must be followed and adhered by the companies and medical industry. This will help the patients to build trust with their information on the company and medical industry and misuse of information can be done.

The code of conducts that needs to be followed are as mentioned below-

1. Privacy and data protection

a. Data collection and its usage- The Collection and Use of Personal Information. Make that the device is upfront about collecting and using an individual's personal health data, and that the subject gives their informed permission before any data is collected or used. Explain why you need the information, what you plan to do with it, and who else could have access to it (Data Privacy Manager, 2023).

b. Ensure top data security- Protect sensitive health information from theft, loss, and misuse by using industry-standard security protocols. Encryption, safe archiving, access limits, and routine vulnerability scans are all part of this.

c. Data retention- Clear rules on how long health records should be kept should be set out. When data is no longer required, it should be safely deleted in accordance with legal and regulatory standards.

d. De-identification and anonymisation- To further safeguard individuals' privacy, health records should be anonymized or de-identified wherever possible. Maintaining anonymity requires taking all necessary precautions (Maher et al., 2019).

2. User empowerment and informed consent

a. Patient’s control or data owner control- Allow people to make decisions about how their health information is collected, used, and shared. Provide choices for data sharing with healthcare practitioners or researchers and make it easy for consumers to access, evaluate, and adjust their data preferences.

b. Informed consent- Obtain people' informed permission before collecting their personal health data. Individuals will be able to make educated choices regarding device use if the purpose, advantages, dangers, and restrictions of data gathering are made clear (Sim, 2019).

c. User education- Increase user knowledge of the device's features, data gathering methods, and privacy controls. Make sure people know how to use the gadget properly and securely so they can make educated choices based on their health information.

3. Accuracy and reliability

a. Data accuracy- The device's measurements and data should be as accurate and trustworthy as possible. It is important to regularly calibrate and test the equipment to provide reliable findings and reduce the risk of inaccurate data influencing medical choices (Morley et al., 2020).

b. Algorithm and transparency- Be open and honest about the algorithms you’re using to analyse and interpret patients’ health information. In order to correctly interpret the data, users need to know how the gadget arrives at its conclusions.

4. Ethical use of data and algorithms

a. Using data responsibly- Use sensitive patient information responsibly and in line with all rules and regulations pertaining to the device's intended. Protect people's health information from being used in unethical or discriminatory ways.

b. Avoidance of bias- Make sure the device's algorithms have been designed and validated to reduce the likelihood of bias and unfair treatment. If you want to be sure that your data gathering and algorithmic decision-making processes are producing fair and equitable results, you should examine them on a regular basis and fix any problems you find.

5. Transparency and user communication

a. Data practices of transparency- Give people easy-to-understand details on how their health data is used and shared. Foster openness and trust by making it easy for users to understand the device's data practises, including any third-party partnerships or data sharing agreements (Kelly et al., 2020).

b. User Communication- Users should be able to voice their concerns, ask questions, and provide suggestions concerning the device and its data practises via established lines of contact. Get back to customers as soon as possible, and do it in a way that is both clear and helpful (Deloitte, 2020).

6. Compliance with Applicable Laws and Standards

a. Following laws and regulatory compliances- Respect all rules and regulations regarding the handling of sensitive health information. Maintain continuing compliance with data privacy and protection duties by keeping abreast of changing regulatory standards (Icumed, 2022).

b. Industry Standards- Maintain privacy, protect sensitive information, and utilise patient health data ethically in accordance with industry standards. The General Data Protection Regulation, the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act, the Information Security Standard ISO/IEC 27001.

7. Governance and accountability of the data

a. Continues improvement- The device's features, privacy rules, and data practises should be reviewed and updated on a regular basis to account for technological developments, shifting legislative requirements, and user input. Maintain a constant drive to improve confidentiality, safety, and morality.

b. Accountability- Establish transparent governance and accountability procedures for the ethical management of individual health records. Determine who is responsible for what in terms of protecting sensitive information and following ethical guidelines. Maintain a regimen of frequent audits and evaluations to check for inconsistencies and locate problem spots (Icumed, 2022).

Figure 4: code of conduct
(Source: Author, 2023)
 

References

DATA6000 Industry Research Report 4 Sample

Assessment Description

In order to synthesise what you have learnt in your Analytics degree you need to submit an industry research report. This report needs to:

1. Outline a business industry problem that can be addressed through data analytics

2. Apply descriptive and predictive analytics techniques to the business problem

3. Provide recommendations addressing the business problem with reference to by data visualisations and outputs

4. Communicate these recommendations to a diverse audience made up of both analytics and business professionals within the report

Assessment Instructions

In your report please follow the below structure.

1. Executive Summary (100 words)

• Summary of business problem and data-driven recommendations

2. Industry Problem (500 words)

• Provide industry background

• Outline a contemporary business problem in this industry

• Argue why solving this problem is important to the industry

• Justify how data can be used to provide actionable insights and solutions

• Reflect on how the availability of data affected the business problem you eventually chose to address.

3. Data processing and management (300 words)

• Describe the data source and its relevance

• Outline the applicability of descriptive and predictive analytics techniques to this data in the context of the business problem

• Briefly describe how the data was cleansed, prepared and mined (provide one supporting file to demonstrate this process)

4. Data Analytics Methodology (400 words)

• Describe the data analytics methodology and your rationale for choosing it

• Provide an Appendix with additional detail of the methodology

5. Visualisation and Evaluation of Results (300 words not including visuals)

• Visualise descriptive and predictive analytics insights

• Evaluate the significance of the visuals for addressing the business problem

• Reflect on the efficacy of the techniques/software used

6. Recommendations (800 words)

• Provide recommendations to address the business problem with reference to data visualisations and outputs

• Effectively communicate the data insights to a diverse audience

• Reflect on the limitations of the data and analytics technique

• Evaluate the role of data analytics in addressing this business problem

• Suggest further data analytics techniques, technologies and plans which may address the business problem in the future

7. Data Ethics and Security (400 words)

• Outline the privacy, legal, security and ethical considerations relevant to the data analysis

• Reflect on the accuracy and transparency of your visualisations

• Recommend how data ethics needs to be considered if using further analytics technologies and data to address this business problem

Solution

Executive Summary

The business strategy works as a backbone which leads the business achieve desired goals leading towards profit and secures the future decision making in a competitive market. The airline industry serves many purposes and the problem arises in the industry of customer satisfaction affects most of them. For assignment help, The solution for the problem is to analyses the customer satisfaction rate by different services airline is offering to the passengers. The analysis will be conducted for the services offered by the airline business industry for their customers or passengers during travel to analyze the satisfaction rate which can outline the key components which are affecting their business and reason for the customer dissatisfaction rate.

Industry Problem

Airline industry consists of number of services during travel to the passengers where the services for customers are paid with the business partners. The services offered for the passengers as well as the cargo via different modes including jets, helicopters and airlines. The airlines is one of the known businesses in the travel industry which offers services to the passengers to use their spaces by renting out to the travelers.

Contemporary business problems

There are multiple challenges comes in the aviation industry which includes:

• Fuel Efficiency
• Global Economy
• Passenger satisfaction
• Airline infrastructure
• Global congestion
• Technological advancement
• Terrorism
• Climate change

Figure 1 Industry issues

These contemporary problems affect most in the travel industry specially for the airlines. The mostly faced business problem in the airline is the passenger satisfaction which affects the business most as compares to all other problems.

The airline enterprise has been an important piece of the British financial system for many centuries. Through innovation and invention, the British led to the sector in travel aviating in the course of the Industrial Revolution. Inventions which include the spinning jenny, water frame, along with water-powered spinning mill had been described as all British innovations.

The style and airline enterprise in England, Wales, and Scotland employs around 500,000 humans, made from 88,000 hired in the aviating unit, 62,000 in the wholesale unit, and 413,000 in the retail sector. There had been 34, that is 1/2 groups running within the UK style and airline area in the year 2020, throughout the services, transporting, and aviating sectors of the travel industry.

As the airline and transporting in the marketplace in UK keeps act as rebound, each production and intake of customers and passengers are starts thriving, the quantity of undesirable apparel is likewise soaring, and is turning into certainly considered one among the most important demanding situations for the environmental and financial sustainability within the UK.

According to the latest studies performed through UK grocery store chain Sainsbury’s, customers within the UK are anticipated to throw away round 680 million portions of garb this coming spring, because of updating their wardrobes for the brand new season in the aviation sector. Within the heap of undesirable apparel, an amazing inflation of 235 million apparel gadgets are anticipated to become in landfill, inflicting a massive terrible effect for the business environment (Ali et.al., 2020).

The survey additionally suggests that every UK client will eliminate a mean of nineteen apparel objects this year, out of which the seven might be thrown directly into the bin in United Kingdom. Over 49% of the human beings puzzled within the passengers are surveyed and believed tired or grimy apparel gadgets that cannot be donated for services, prompting the travelling and services enterprise to induce the general public to set them apart there from their used products for services offering regardless of the desired quality (Indra et.al., 2022).

Furthermore, one in six respondents that is claimed that they've inadequate time to be had or can not be troubled to the various type and recycle undesirable apparel gadgets, at the same time as 6% raise in the apparel demand in the market that can be recycled for the fresh start up of the lifes of travel industry. The industry is now indulging in the various effective activities in creating the elements through recycling of the cloth for the sustainability of the environment.

Airline services is turning into one in all the largest demanding situations for the environmental and financial sustainability across the world. The UK isn’t the most effective one; different nations also are notably contributing towards the issue – over 15 million tonnes of the passengers travelling is produced each year within the United States, at the same time as an large 9.35 million tonnes of passengers services are being landfilled within the European Union every year for the sustainability.

Data processing and management

Data Source

The data chosen for the exploratory data analysis on the airline industry is from Kaggle which consists of different airline services offered to the passengers including attributes:

Id, Gender, Customer type, age, class of travel, satisfaction and satisfaction rate which are the main attributes on which analyses is performed to analyses the passenger satisfaction rate towards the airline industry. The visualizations on the attributes are performed to describe the services passengers mostly liked during travel and the satisfaction rate they have provided to the services availed by them.

Figure 2 Airline industry dataset

Applicability of descriptive and predictive analytics

The descriptive and predictive analytics is done in order to provide better decisions for future by analyzing the past services. The descriptive analytics is done to describe the company positives and negatives happened in their services by which customer satisfaction rate is increased or decreased where the predictive analytics is totally based upon descriptive analytics to provide the potential future outcomes from the actions analyzed combining all the problems and finding a solution for the future in order to reduce the negatives and provide better future outcomes.

Data cleaning

The data processing was done by removing and dropping of the columns not required for the analysis. Data consists of some not required attributes which has no use in the analysis which are dropped. Further data cleaning was done by checking of the null values and filling of the space so that no noise can be raised during the analysis and visualizing the data attributes (Sezgen et.al., 2019). The data mining is done by extracting out all the necessary information of the services provided to the passengers by comparing them to the satisfaction sentiment provided by the passengers to predict the satisfaction rate on each and every service availed by them which makes it easy for the company to look for each and every service offered by them.

Data Analytics Methodology

Python

Python is used in the analysis of the business industry problem of airline passenger satisfaction. Python is mostly used and known for managing and creating structures of data quickly and efficiently. There are multiple libraries in python which were used for effective, scalable data analytics methodology including

Pandas

Pandas is used for reading different forms of data which is data manipulating library used for handling data and managing it in different ways. The pandas used in the data analytics to store, manage the airline data and perform data different operations upon it by processing and cleaning of data.

Matplotlib

This library of python is used for extracting out all the data information in the form of plots and charts with the help of NumPy which is used to manage all the mathematical operations upon data to describe data in statistical manner and matplotlib presents all the operations using plots and charts.

Seaborn

This python library is also used to describe the data insights into different graphs and charts but in an interactive way using various colors and patterns upon the data which makes a data more attractive and easier to understand. These graphs generated are very attractive and can be used by businesses to describe as their efficiency in the business to the customers to travel with them (Noviantoro, and Huang, 2022).

The methodology details are further attached in the Appendix to describe in brief the methodology used for the data analytics and the predictions and calculations happened upon the data in descriptive and predictive analytics techniques using python programming language.

Visualization and Evaluation of Results

Results of the passenger satisfaction

The results of the analysis and visualization depicts the satisfaction as the binary classification where the dissatisfaction rate cannot be measured by neutral category by airline industry also measuring the aspects of the flight location, ticket price, missing in the data which can be a major aspect in analysis (Tahanisaz, 2020).

The results depict that airline provides increased satisfaction rate to the business travellers and passengers more as compared to the personal passengers. The services which are mostly disliked or the passengers were dissatisfied with were online booking and seat comfort which should be taken as priority by airline industry with the departure on time and the inflight services to tackle such issues as passengers appear to be the sensitive in aspects of such issues (Hayadi et.al., 2021).

Figure 3 Satisfaction results

Figure 4 Satisfaction by gender

Figure 5 Satisfaction by customer type

Figure 6 Satisfaction by services

Figure 7 Satisfaction by total score

Figure 8 Satisfaction by total score for personal travellers

Figure 9 Satisfaction by total score for business travellers

Figure 10 Data correlation heatmap

Significance of the visuals in business

Visuals depicts and communicate in a clear manner and defines the ideas to cost up the business and sort most of the business-related issues by analyzing and visualizing the data insights for future decision makings. Visuals manages the cost, time and customers for the business perspective.

Efficacy of Python Programming

The python programming language used for the visualization and analytics on the airline industry passenger satisfaction with the Jupyter notebook IDE and the Anaconda Framework. The python is very efficient in comparison to other analytics methods because it gives more efficient syntax as it is high level language and provides better methods to analyses and visualize data.

Recommendations

Ideally that is apparel that gains the maximizes high quality and minimises terrible environmental, social and financial affects along with its delivery and price chain. Airlines is sustainable does now no longer adversely affect the nature of purchasing behavior of human beings or the planet in its manufacturing, transport, retail or travel of lifestyles management in today's era.

A variety of realistic examples of the sustainable apparel are at the marketplace. These range within the degree of sustainability development they obtain that specialize in surroundings, honest alternate and hard work problems to various extents (Shah et.al, 2020). Some examples of movements to enhance the sustainability of apparel are: apparel crafted from licensed services food drinks, beverages, the use of organic and healthy food; departures that permit us to apply much less strength whilst services our customer satisfaction and are much less polluting; foods and drinks with the books for the passengers keep the use of much less strength that is garb reused at quit of existence on the second one hand market; cleanliness apparel recovered at give up of existence to be travel again into greater apparel; Fair Trade licensed online bookings allowing greater equitable buying and selling conditions, making sure hard work requirements are adhered to continue the exercise and stopping exploitation. Sustainability is critical due to the fact all of the selections that is pursued and all of the movements that make nowadays will have an effect on the entirety withinside the future or upcoming time. consequently interruption of the make sound selections at today's era so that it will keep away from restricting the selections of generations to come over here for the growth and development in the aviation sector. The motives for the environmental destruction are specifically because of populace ranges, intake, generation and the financial system. The trouble in considering the worldwide surroundings that has much less to do with populace increase in the demand than it does with stages of intake through the ones living in the airline industry (Gorzalczany et.al., 2021).

The courting among the inexperienced advertising and marketing creates the motion and client conduct is a vital subject matter to an extensive variety of the situational areas. Sustainability idea can't be finished with out related to the client. The key position of client behavior (and family client behavior in particular) in riding with the business or external environmental effect has long been recognized. In the end, it's miles the customers who dictate in which the marketplace will go to baggage handling the items. Passenger want and desires create a cycle of client demand and supply of the inflight services, business enterprise catering to that demand, and finally, stays for the client recognition with the acquisition of products within the online boarding services. The assessment of this look at ought to help in advertising and marketing efforts with the aid of using the green style strains and their information of client conduct. It may also help style airline businesses in figuring out whether or not or now no longer to provide an green line. The airline enterprise’s consciousness is one of the reasonably-priced productions and distribution of the services without giving an idea to its effect at the environment (Tsafarakis et.al., 2018).

Data Ethics and Security

Privacy, legal, security, and ethical considerations

The data of any business industry is taken under ethical measuremnts to secure the safety and privacy of the customers personal information. Considering privacy,s ecurity and legal issues data access is the major thing to be consider which provides freedom for the business to use the data for their requirements but the unauthorized access to the data and information may cause harm to business as well as the privacy of the customers and clients in business industry (North et.al., 2019).

Accuracy and transparency of visualizations

The visualization made accurately by applying machine learning models training on the data of the airline inudtry which makes sure to analyse data accurately and efficiently by describing the accurate data insights through visuals.

Ethics in adddressing future business problem

Set of designs and practices upon data regarding solving business issues can be used with the ethical principles to use data with confidentiality which do not harm the privacy of the customers and individuals and results in a way which is communicable by everyone to connect with the data insights and visuals with consistency.

References

TECH1300 Information Systems in Business Case Study 2 Sample

Your Task

This assessment is to be completed individually. In this assessment, you will create a comprehensive requirements specification plan using Agile Modelling frameworks for a new online shopping platform that meets the specifications described in the case study.

Assessment Description

You have been hired as a consultant to design a set of IT project specifications for a new online shopping platform. The platform will allow customers to browse, select, and purchase items online, and will require the development of a database to manage inventory and orders. You will need to apply various IT modelling techniques to produce a requirements specification plan and create a use-case model and associated user stories of a sufficient calibre to be presented to various stakeholders. Your task will be to document and communicate the requirements to various stakeholders, including the development team.

Case Study:

You have been hired as a consultant to design a set of IT project specifications for a new online shopping platform called "ShopEZ". ShopEZ is an e-commerce platform that will allow customers to browse, select, and purchase items online. The platform will require the development of a database to manage inventory and orders, as well as integration with various payment and delivery systems. The stakeholders for this project include the development team, the project sponsor, and the end- users (i.e., the customers). The project sponsor has set a strict deadline for the launch of the platform, and the development team is working in an Agile environment using Scrum methodology.

To complete this assessment, you will need to apply the elements of an Information Systems

Development Methodology to evaluate the business requirements, explain the components of Agile methodology, and document and communicate the information systems requirements to the stakeholders. You will need to use various IT modelling techniques to produce a requirements specification plan, including the creation of a use-case model and associated user stories. You will also need to create UML diagrams for the use-case, class, and sequence.

This assessment aims to achieve the following subject learning outcomes:

LO1 Apply the elements of an Information Systems Development Methodology when evaluating business requirements.

LO2 Explain the components of an Agile methodology and how they can be applied in the modelling process.

LO4 Document and communicate information systems requirements to various stakeholders.

Assessment Instructions

• In this assessment, students must work individually to prepare report highlighting business requirements.

• The report structure is stated below as part of the submission instructions:

1. Develop a comprehensive requirements specification plan using Agile Modelling frameworks.

2. The plan must include a use-case model and associated user stories, as well as UML diagrams for the use-case, class, and sequence.

3. Your plan must clearly communicate the requirements to various stakeholders, including the development team.

4. You must provide a detailed explanation of how you applied Agile methodology in the modelling process.

5. Your assessment must be submitted in a professional report format, adhering to KBS guidelines.

6. References

• Provide at least ten (10) academic references in Kaplan Harvard style.

• Please refer to the assessment marking guide to assist you in completing all the assessment criteria.

Solution

Introduction

The flexible and iterative approach to software development known as agile modeling places an emphasis on adaptability, collaboration, and communication. It focuses on creating visual models that are easy to understand and can change as the project goes on. This report is made for ShopEZ another internet shopping stage that expects to furnish clients with a consistent and helpful shopping experience. For assignment help, Responsibility as a consultant is to create ShopEZ's IT project specifications taking into account the requirements of the development team, project sponsor, and end users. This report will evaluate the business requirements, explain the components of the Agile methodology, and use IT modeling techniques like use-case models and UML diagrams to document the information systems requirements in this assessment.

The project explanation using four Methodologies for ShopEZ

Evaluating the Business Requirements:

As a consultant, the first responsibility is to take a specific and suitable methodology from Agile Methodology. Regarding making the software easier ShopEZ is going to use Kanban but especially the Scrum methodology. Scrum methodology is a very well-known and suitable methodology for the project(Athapaththu et al ., 2022). The Scrum methodology basically focuses on the breakdown of one project into many parts. Scrum methodology has a scrum board that includes an owner, a master core, and a development team. For this project as a consultant, it is very suitable to use a scrum methodology to do this software development for this project.ShopEZ is an upcoming e-commerce company that wants to

Figure 1: Scrum Diagram
(Source: https://lh3.googleusercontent.com)

2. Requirement gathering techniques used:

Agile Procedure is a lot of values, principles, and practices that guide the improvement of an item thing. The key convictions of Apt consolidate correspondence, facilitated exertion, client fixation, and responsiveness(Daum ., 2022). The guidelines of Flexible consolidate iterative and consistent new development, self-figuring out gatherings, and things drew in headway.

Kanban is a visual administration framework that helps groups track and deal with their work really. Work items are displayed as cards as they progress through the various stages of the workflow on a Kanban board. It advances straightforwardness, empowers a force-based approach, and permits groups to recognize bottlenecks and enhance their work process.

Continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD) is a set of methods for automating software delivery to production environments. Continuous Integration entails developers regularly merging their code changes into a shared repository, which initiates automated build and testing procedures.
At the conclusion of each sprint or project phase, structured meetings known as agile retrospectives are held. The object is to ponder the group's presentation, distinguish regions for development, and characterize noteworthy stages for future cycles.

Business requirements using the Agile

Coordinated technique underscore cooperation and iterative turn of events, and client stories work with this methodology by advancing compelling correspondence among partners and the improvement group. User stories ensure that the final product or service meets end users' expectations by focusing on their requirements and points of view.

The primary client story features the requirement for a client account creation include, empowering clients to get to customized highlights. The related acknowledgment measures frame the means engaged with making a record and the normal results.

The shopping experience is the focus of user stories three and four, which allow customers to add items to their cart, proceed to the checkout process, and receive email order confirmations.

Following request status is the focal point of the fifth client story, accentuating constant updates and permeability for clients. The need for a mobile user interface that is both responsive and optimized is emphasized in the sixth user story.

The seventh client story features the meaning of client input through audits and evaluations. The actions that customers can take.

Values of Agile Methodology:

The Agile Methodology procedure is portrayed by a bunch of values and rules that guide its execution. These qualities are framed in the Dexterous Declaration, which was made by a gathering of programming improvement specialists in 2001. The four basic beliefs of Deft are Working programming over exhaustive documentation: Light-footed focuses on conveying a functioning item or programming that offers some benefit to the client(Da Camara et al ., 2020). While documentation is essential, Deft underlines the need to find some kind of harmony between documentation and real advancement work. The objective is to make unmistakable results that can be tried and refined.

Principals of Agile Methodology:

Here are the critical standards of the Deft approach: Embrace change: Dexterous perceives that necessities and needs can change all through an undertaking(Fernández-Diego et al ., 2020). It supports embracing change and perspectives as an amazing chance to work on the item. Dexterous groups are adaptable and ready to adjust to evolving conditions, even late in the improvement cycle. Gradual and iterative turn of events: Lithe advances an iterative and steady way to deal with improvement. Rather than endeavoring to convey the whole item without a moment's delay, it breaks the work into little, sensible augmentations called emphases or runs. Every cycle creates a working, possibly shippable item increase.

UML diagram:

use case diagram

Class diagram

Sequences diagram 1

Figure 4: UML Diagram
(Source: Self Created in Draw.io)

Sequence diagram 2:

Figure 5: UML sequence diagram
(Source: Self Created in Draw.io)

Communication to the stakeholders:

"ShopEZ" web-based shopping stage project, the partners and improvement group assume essential parts in the progress of the task. Here is an outline of their jobs: Project Support: The undertaking support is the individual or gathering who starts and offers monetary help for the task. They are liable for defining the undertaking's objectives, financial plan, and courses of events The venture support goes about as a resource for the improvement group and guarantees that the task lines up with the association's essential targets. Advancement Group: The improvement group is liable for carrying out the specialized parts of the venture(Schulte et al ., 2019). In a Nimble climate utilizing the Scrum procedure, the advancement group regularly comprises of cross-utilitarian individuals who work cooperatively to convey additions to the item. The group might incorporate programming engineers, data set overseers, analyzers, UI/UX fashioners, and other pertinent jobs. They are engaged with all periods of the task, including necessities investigation, plan, advancement, testing, and organization. End-clients (Clients): The end-clients are the people or substances who will associate with and utilize the "ShopEZ" stage whenever it is sent off. In this situation, the clients are the end-clients of the web-based business stage. Their fulfillment and client experience are essential to the progress of the stage.

Conclusion

The assessment has outlined the steps for developing a comprehensive requirements specification plan using Agile Modelling frameworks for a new online shopping platform called "ShopEZ". This plan included a use-case model and associated user stories, as well as UML diagrams for the use-case, class, and sequence. The assessment also explained the components of Agile methodology and how they can be applied in the modeling process. Finally, the assessment discussed how to document and communicate the information systems requirements to the stakeholders.

Reference

DATA4200 Data Acquisition and Management Report 2 Sample

Your Task

This report will enable you to practice your LO1 and LO2 skills.

• LO1: Evaluate ethical data acquisition and best practice about project initiation

• LO2: Evaluate options for storing, accessing, distributing, and updating data during the life of a project.

• Complete all parts below. Consider the rubric at the end of the assignment for guidance on structure and content.

• Submit the results as a Word file in Turnitin by the due date.

Background

Unstructured data has typically been difficult to manage, since it has no predefined data model, is not always organised, may comprise multiple types. For example, data from thermostats, sensors, home electronic devices, cars, images, sounds and pdf files.

Given these characteristics, special collection, storage, and analysis methods, as well as software, have been created to take advantage of unstructured data.

Assessment Instructions

Given the considerations above, select one of the following industries for your assessment.

• Healthcare

• Retail - clothing

• Social Media

• Education

• Motor vehicles

• Fast Foods

1. Read relevant articles on the industry you have chosen.

2. Choose one application from that industry.

3. Introduce the industry and application, e.g., healthcare and image reconstruction.

4. Explain what sort of unstructured data could be used by an AI or Machine Learning algorithm in the area you chose.

a. Discuss best practice and options for

b. Accessing/collecting

c. Storing

d. Sharing

e. Documenting

f. and maintenance of the data

5. Propose a question that could be asked in relation to your unstructured data and what software might help you to run AI and answer the question.

Solution

Introduce the industry and application

The healthcare industry is made up of a variety of medical services, technologies, and professionals who work to improve people's health and well-being. It includes hospitals, clinics, pharmaceutical companies, manufacturers of medical devices, research institutions, and many more. For assignment help, The healthcare industry is always looking for new ways to improve patient care and outcomes in order to diagnose, treat, and prevent diseases.

One significant application inside the medical services industry is processing of medical images. The process of acquiring, analyzing, and interpreting medical images for the purposes of diagnosis and treatment is known as medical image processing. It is essential in a number of medical fields, including orthopedics, cardiology, neurology, oncology, and radiology. Medical images can be obtained through modalities like X-ray, computed tomography (CT), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), ultrasound, and positron emission tomography (PET), and advanced algorithms and computer-based techniques are used in medical image processing to extract meaningful information from medical images. The human body's internal structures, organs, tissues, and physiological processes are depicted in great detail in these images. Patients and healthcare professionals alike can reap numerous advantages from using medical image processing. It empowers more precise and proficient determination by giving nitty gritty bits of knowledge into the presence, area, and attributes of anomalies or infections. Images can be analyzed by doctors to find conditions like tumors, fractures, and blocked blood vessels, which can help with treatment planning and monitoring (Diène et al., 2020). Medical image processing aids in the development of healthcare research and development. It makes it possible to create massive image databases for the purpose of training machine learning algorithms. This can help automate tasks related to image analysis, increase productivity, and cut down on human error. Besides, it supports the investigation of new imaging procedures, for example, useful X-ray or dissemination tensor imaging, which gives important bits of knowledge into cerebrum capabilities and brain network.

Discussion on sort of unstructured data could be used by an AI or Machine Learning algorithm in the processing of medical image

There are many different kinds of unstructured data that can be used in image processing. Information that does not adhere to a predetermined data model or organization is referred to as unstructured data. Here are a few instances of unstructured data utilized in the processing of medical image:

Image Pixels: Unstructured data is created from an image's raw pixel values. Algorithms can use the color information in each pixel, such as RGB values, to extract features or carry out tasks like image classification and object detection.

Metadata for Images: Metadata that accompanies images typically contains additional information about the image. The camera's make and model, exposure settings, GPS coordinates, timestamps, and other information may be included in this metadata (Galetsi et al., 2020). This information can be used by machine learning algorithms to improve image analysis, such as locating an image or adjusting for particular camera characteristics.

Figure 1: Machine learning for medical image processing
(Source: https://pubs.rsna.org)

Captions or descriptions of images: Human-created portrayals or subtitles related to pictures give text based settings that can be utilized in artificial intelligence calculations. For tasks like image search, content recommendation, or sentiment analysis, natural language processing techniques can analyze these descriptions and extract useful information.

Labels and annotations: Unstructured information can likewise incorporate manual comments or marks that are added to pictures by people. These annotations may indicate the presence of bounding boxes, semantic segmentation, regions of interest, or objects. AI calculations can involve this marked information for preparing and approval purposes, empowering assignments like article acknowledgment, semantic division, or picture restriction.

Image Content: Textual elements, such as signs, labels, or captions, can also be present in unstructured data contained within images (Panesar, 2019). Algorithms can process and analyze the textual information in these images thanks to the ability of optical character recognition (OCR) techniques to extract the text from the images.

Picture Setting: Unstructured data can be used to access information about an image's context, such as its source website, related images, or user interactions. Machine learning algorithms can improve content filtering, image comprehension and recommendation systems by taking the context into account.

Discuss Best Practice and Options

Accessing/collecting, Storing, Sharing, Documenting and maintenance of the data are very important for the healthcare industry. Here is the discussion on some options and practices related to these procedures in the healthcare industry and image processing.

Accessing/collecting

Collection of healthcare data is important for the medical experts to provide better services to their patients. Here is the discussion of the options and practices related to this process.

Information Sources: Medical imaging archives, picture archiving and communication systems (PACS), wearable devices, and other relevant sources of healthcare data should be identified by the medical experts (Pandey et al., 2022). Team up with medical care suppliers and establishments are required to get close enough to the essential information.

Security and privacy of data: Stick to severe security and security conventions to safeguard delicate patient data can be taken as a best practice. Keeping patient confidentiality by adhering to laws like the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) is an important part of the collection of healthcare data.
Qualitative Data: Examine the collected data for accuracy and quality. To address any inconsistencies, missing values, or errors that could hinder the performance of the image processing algorithms, there is a need to employ data cleaning and preprocessing methods.

Storing

Image processing depends on healthcare data being stored effectively by taking into account the following options and best practices:

Online storage: Use of safe cloud storage options are taken by the medical experts to store healthcare data. Scalability, accessibility, and backup capabilities are provided by cloud platforms. The medical experts try to carry out encryption and access controls to safeguard the put away information (Jyotiyana and Kesswani, 2020).

Information Lake/Store: Creation of a centralized data lake or repository is required to consolidate healthcare data for image processing. This considers simple recovery, sharing, and joint effort among specialists and medical care experts.

Formats and Standards: Stick to standard configurations like Advanced Imaging and Correspondences in Medication (DICOM) for clinical pictures and Wellbeing Level 7 (HL7) for clinical information is helpful to store the medical data and use them properly in image processing. This guarantees similarity and interoperability across various frameworks and works with information sharing and reconciliation.

Sharing Medical Information for Image Processing

Sharing medical services information is significant for cooperative exploration and working on quiet consideration. Think about the accompanying prescribed procedures:

Agreements for the Sharing of Data: A proper layout of information sharing arrangements or agreements that frame the terms, conditions, and limitations for information sharing are followed by the medical experts to share the essential data appropriately (Tchito Tchapga et al., 2021). This guarantees lawful and moral consistency, safeguarding patient security and licensed innovation privileges.

Techniques for De-Identification: Patient-specific information can be anonymized from the shared data using de-identification techniques while still remaining useful for image processing. Data can be shared in this way while privacy is maintained.

Transfer data safely: Encrypted channels and secure channels for data transferring are very much required to transfer the healthcare data. It helps to maintain confidentiality and prevent unauthorized access or interception because it can harm the treatment process. Safe transfer of data also helps the medical experts to improve their services and get better responses from the patients.

Documenting

Healthcare data must be properly documented for long-term reproducibility and usability. Here is the discussion on some options and practices related to documentation of the healthcare data for image processing. Most of the time, medical experts are trying to catch and record thorough metadata related with medical services information, including patient socioeconomics, securing boundaries, and preprocessing steps. This data helps in grasping the unique circumstance and guaranteeing information discernibility (Willemink et al., 2020). Documentation of the healthcare data is very important and the medical experts try to do this in a proper way for providing better services to the patients.

Maintenance of the data

Version Management: Medical experts have tried to implement version control mechanisms to keep track of changes to the data, algorithms, or preprocessing methods over time. Reproducibility and comparison of results are made possible by this.

Governance of Data: Medical experts have tried to establish data governance policies and procedures to guarantee data integrity, accessibility, and compliance with regulatory requirements (Ahamed et al., 2023). They should check and update these policies on a regular basis to keep up with new technologies and best practices.

Healthcare data for image processing must be accessed, collected, stored, shared, documented, and maintained with careful consideration of privacy, security, data quality, interoperability, and compliance. Researchers and healthcare organizations can harness the power of healthcare data to advance medical imaging and patient care by adhering to best practices.

Propose a question that could be asked in relation to the unstructured data and what software might help to run AI and answer the question

Question: "How AI is used to improve lung cancer diagnosis accuracy by analyzing medical images from unstructured data?

Tensor Flow can be taken as software that might be helpful in running AI algorithms to answer this question. Tensor Flow is an open-source library broadly utilized for AI and profound learning undertakings, including picture handling. It gives an exhaustive system to building and preparing brain organizations, making it reasonable for creating computer based intelligence models to break down clinical pictures for cellular breakdown in the lungs location (Amalina et al., 2019). The extensive ecosystem and community support of Tensor Flow also make it possible to integrate other image processing libraries and tools, making it easier to create and implement accurate AI models for better healthcare diagnosis.

References

DATA4500 Social Media Analytics Report 3 Sample

Your Assessment

• This assessment is to be done individually.

• Students are to write a 1,500-word report about Influencers and Social Media Markers and submit it as a Microsoft Word file via the Turnitin portal at the end of Week 10.

• You will receive marks for content, appropriate structure, and referencing.

Assessment Description

• You are the Digital Marketing Officer in charge of picking a social media influencer to lead an Extensive campaign as the face of your organization.

• As part of your research and decision-making process, you must gather and analyse more than just average likes and comments per post.

• Some of the statistics you will need to gather and assess are (only as an example):

o Follower reach.

o Audience type (real people, influencers, and non-engaging).

o Demographics.

o Likes to comments ratio.

o Brand mentions.

o Engagement rates for social media accounts.

o How data into competitors’ use of influencers can be measured to generate insights.

Assessment Instructions

• You have been asked to write a report on your options and choice, the criteria you used, and any tool that will support your work in the future.

• Some of the information you are expected to cover in your report is:

o What is the audience-type composition?

o What is an engagement rate, and how should advertisers treat this statistic?

o When is an engagement considered an authentic engagement?

o Why should we care about the followings of followers?

o How does our influencer ROI compare against that of our competitors?

• Your report should include the following:

o Cover.

o Table of Contents (see template).

o Executive Summary (3-4 paragraphs).

o Introduction.

o A section discussing social media analytics and its value to the business.

o A section on the role of the techniques taught in class, like sentiment analysis, competitive analysis, data mining, and influencer analysis.

o A section on how social media analytics was used to choose the influencer you recommend.

o A section recommending how your choice of influencer will be used as part of the organization’s marketing strategy.

o At least ten references in Harvard format (pick an additional five on your own besides five from the list below).

Solution

Introduction

Utilizing social media sites to advertise something or provide something is known as social media marketing. In order to interact with target audiences, it involves creating and sharing content on social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and LinkedIn. Social media influencers are people who have a significant following on the internet and are regarded as authorities in a certain industry. For Assignment Help, Brands can use them to advertise their goods or services to a wider demographic. In order to inform advertising strategies, social media analytics entails the measurement, analysis, and reporting of data from social media platforms. Businesses can employ it to better understand their target market, spot trends, and evaluate the effectiveness of their social media marketing strategies. Businesses may measure KPIs like engagement, reach, and conversions by using social media analytics tools to optimise their social media marketing efforts.
Social media analytics and its value to the Business

- Characteristics

The collection and analysis of data from social media platforms in order to inform marketing tactics is known as social media analytics. The following are some of the
key characteristics of social media analytics:

Real Time data: Virtual entertainment examination gives admittance to constant information, permitting advertisers to screen drifts and answer input rapidly.

Numerous metrics: The engagement, reach, impressions, and conversion rates of social media campaigns can all be tracked using a variety of metrics provided by social media analytics ( Enholm et al., 2022).

Customizable reports: Online entertainment examination apparatuses can be modified to create reports that meet explicit business needs, like following effort execution or breaking down client feeling.

Competitive analysis: Social media analytics may be used to keep tabs on rival activity, revealing market trends and spotting development prospects (Nenonen et al., 2019).

Data visualization: To assist managers in rapidly and simply understanding complicated data sets, social media analytics solutions frequently include data visualization techniques, such as charts and graphs.

Machine learning: Social media analytics increasingly uses machine learning methods to spot patterns and trends in data, allowing for more precise forecasts and suggestions for the next marketing plans.

- Its value in business

Businesses may benefit significantly from social media analytics by using it to make data-driven choices and improve their social media strategies. Following are some examples of how social media analytics may help businesses:

Audience insights: Social media analytics may give businesses information on the preferences, interests, and behaviors of their target audience, allowing them to develop more specialized and successful social media campaigns (Zamith et al., 2020).

Monitoring the success of social media initiatives: Social media analytics may be used to monitor the success of social media campaigns. This enables organizations to assess engagement, reach, and conversion rates and modify their strategy as necessary.

Competitive analysis: By using social media analytics to track rivals' social media activity, firms may keep contemporary on market trends and spot growth prospects.
Reputation management: Social media analytics may be used to track brand mentions and social media sentiment, enabling companies to address unpleasant comments and manage their online reputation (Aula and Mantere, 2020).

Measurement of ROI: Social media analytics may be used to assess the return on investment (ROI) of social media efforts, enabling companies to evaluate the efficacy of their social media plans and more efficiently deploy their resources.

Roles of the techniques like sentiment analysis, competitive analysis, data mining, and influencer analysis.

Businesses can use social media analytics to measure and improve their social media marketing strategies. Different web-based entertainment logical methods can be utilized to accomplish various goals. Here is a brief synopsis of each technique's function:

Sentiment analysis: The process of determining how a brand, product, or service is received in social media posts or comments is known as sentiment analysis. Natural language processing, or NLP, is used in this method to assess the positivity, negativity, or neutrality of text data. Monitoring a brand's reputation, determining trends in customer sentiment, and responding to negative feedback can all benefit from using sentiment analysis (Aula and Mantere, 2020).

Competitive analysis: Monitoring and analyzing competitors' social media activities is part of competitive analysis. This method can be utilized to recognize industry patterns, benchmark execution against contenders, and distinguish valuable open doors for development. Businesses can benefit from competitive analysis by staying ahead of the curve and making well-informed decisions regarding their social media marketing strategies (Jaiswal and Heliwal, 2022).

Mining data: The process of looking for patterns and trends in large datasets is known as data mining. Data mining can be utilized in social media analytics to discover customer preferences, behavior patterns, and interests. This strategy can assist organizations with making more designated web-based entertainment crusades and further develop commitment rates.

Influencer analysis: The process of identifying social media influencers with a large following and high engagement rate in a specific industry or niche is called "influencer analysis." This method can be utilized to recognize potential brand ministers and make a force to be reckoned with advertising efforts. Businesses can use influencer analysis to reach a wider audience and raise brand awareness (Vrontis et al., 2021).

Every one of these online entertainment scientific strategies plays a one-of-a-kind part in assisting organizations with accomplishing their web-based entertainment showcasing goals. By utilizing a blend of these procedures, organizations can acquire important experiences in their interest group, screen contender exercises, and upgrade their online entertainment methodologies for the greatest effect.

How social media analytics was used to choose the recommended Influencer

Online entertainment examination can be an amazing asset for recognizing web-based entertainment powerhouses that can assist brands with arriving at their interest group and accomplishing their promoting objectives. Social media analytics played a crucial role in the decision to select Elon Musk as a social media influencer.

- In the beginning, social media analytics tools were used to identify the tech industry's most influential individuals (Kauffmann et al., 2020). This involved looking at data from social media platforms like Twitter and LinkedIn to find people with a lot of followers, a lot of people engaging with them, and a lot of social media presence.

- To assess the influencers' overall sentiment and level of influence in the tech industry, the social media analytics team performed sentiment analysis on their social media posts. They additionally directed serious examination to think about the distinguished forces to be reckoned with's online entertainment execution against each other.

Elon Musk emerged as a leading social media influencer in the tech industry based on the insights gleaned from these social media analytics techniques (Ding et al., 2021). He was an ideal candidate for a partnership as a social media influencer with a tech company due to his large social media following, high engagement rates, and positive sentiment in the tech community.

Data mining methods were also used by the social media analytics team to gain a deeper understanding of Musk's social media habits and interests. This involved looking at his activity on social media to find patterns, preferences, and interests that could be used to design a successful social media marketing campaign.
Elon Musk was selected as a social media influencer in large part as a result of social media analytics. The team was able to determine the most prominent individuals in the tech sector, carry out the sentiment and competitive analyses, and obtain deeper insights into Musk's social media behaviour and interests by utilising a variety of social media analytics approaches. This made it possible to make sure that the influencer was the ideal match for the brand's marketing objectives and target market.

Recommending how your choice of influencer will be used as part of the organization’s marketing strategy

Using Elon Musk as a social media influencer can be a great way to reach a larger audience and spread awareness of your company or brand. He has a large social media following. With more than 1.4 million followers on Instagram and over 9 million on Twitter, Elon Musk has a large social media following. Most of his followers are young men between the ages of 18 and 24, making up the largest age group. With high rates of likes, comments, and shares on his social media postings, Musk's fanbase is also quite active. Musk's Twitter account has a high average engagement rate of 2.84%, which is much higher than the sector average of 0.45% in terms of engagement ratios. Along with having a high interaction rate, his Instagram account averages 1.5 million likes for every post. With regard to Musk's feelings, Musk is known for his eccentric methodology and cutting-edge vision, which frequently gets compelling profound reactions from his crowd. His web-based entertainment posts frequently create a blend of positive and gloomy feelings, with energy, interest, and motivation is the most widely recognized good feelings. Social media analytics tools can be used to track metrics like follower growth, engagement rates, and audience demographics for both the influencer and their competitors to gain insight into how competitors are using influencers. Additionally, these tools can be utilized to monitor brand mentions and sentiment across social media platforms. By doing so, businesses are able to acquire a deeper comprehension of how their audience views their rivals and how they can enhance their own social media strategy. By dissecting this information, associations can arrive at additional educated conclusions about how to use forces to be reckoned with and streamline their web-based entertainment system to remain in front of the opposition.

Use Elon Musk as a social media influencer as part of your company's marketing strategy in the following ways:

Collaborate with Musk for a web-based entertainment takeover: Permit Musk to assume control over your association's web-based entertainment represents a day, seven days, or a month (Hunsaker and Knowles, 2021) This will offer him the chance to elevate your image to his huge understanding, share his contemplations on your industry, and draw in with your crowd.

Work on social media campaigns with Musk: Create a social media campaign for your brand, product, or service with Musk's help. Sponsored posts, videos, and social media contests are all examples of this.

Influence Musk's online entertainment presence to create buzz: Share Musk's posts and content on your association's web-based entertainment records to use his enormous pursuit and produce a which around your image (Guan, 2022)

Run influencer marketing campaigns: Become a brand advocate for your company by working with Musk. It can entail producing a number of sponsored articles, videos, and other pieces of content to advertise your company, its goods, or its services.

Reach out to Musk's audience: Take advantage of Musk's social media following by interacting with his followers through comments, direct messaging, and other online exchanges (Milks, 2020). By doing this, you may strengthen your bonds with your supporters and draw in new clients for your business.
Using Elon Musk as a social media influencer can be a great way to reach a wider audience and generate buzz around your brand or organization. By partnering with Musk on social media campaigns, leveraging his massive following, and engaging with his audience, you can build your brand, attract new customers, and generate long-term growth.

Conclusion

This particular report is based on social media analytics and social media influencers. There are various characteristics of social media analytics are discussed. Then its value o importance in business is discussed. On the other hand, the role of different social media analytics techniques is analyzed. The types of analytics are sentiment analysis, competitive analysis, data mining, and influencer analysis is done. Then how social media analytics is used to choose Elon Musk as an influencer is discussed and then how Elon Musk as a social media influencer can impact business strategy.

Reference list

DATA4000 Introduction to Business Analytics Case Study 1 Sample

Your Task

Complete Parts A to C below by the due date.

Consider the rubric at the end of the assignment for guidance on structure and content.

Assessment Description

• You are to read case studies provided and answer questions in relation to the content, analytics theory and potential analytics professionals required for solving the business problems at hand.

• Learning outcomes 1 and 2 are addressed.

Assessment Instructions

Part A: Case Study Analysis (700 words, 10 marks)

Instructions: Read the following two case studies. For each case study, briefly describe:

a) The industry to which analytics has been applied

b) A potential and meaningful business problem to be solved

c) The type of analytics used, and how it was used to address that potential and meaningful business problem

d) The main challenge(s) of using this type of analytics to achieve your business objective (from part b)

e) Recommendations regarding how to be assist stakeholders with adapting these applications for their business.

Part B: The Role of Analytics in Solving Business Problems (500 words, 8 marks)

Instructions: Describe two different types of analytics (from Workshop 1) and evaluate how each could be used as part of a solution to a business problem with reference to ONE real-world case study of your own choosing for one type of analytics and a SECOND real-world case study of your choosing for the second type of analytics.

You will need to conduct independent research and consult resources provided in the subject.

Part C: Developing and Sourcing Analytics Capabilities

Instructions: You are the Chief Analytics Officer for a large multinational corporation in the communications sector with operations that span India, China, the Philippines and Australia.

The organization is undergoing significant transformations; it is scaling back operations in existing low revenue segments and ramping up investments in next generation products and services - 5G, cloud computing and Software as a Service (SaaS).

The business is keen to develop its data and analytics capabilities. This includes using technology for product innovation and for developing a large contingent of knowledge workers.

To prepare management for these changes, you have been asked review Accenture’s report
(see link below) and publish a short report of your own that addresses the following key points:

1. How do we best ingrain analytics into the organisation’s decision-making processes?

2. How do we organize and coordinate analytics capabilities across the organization?

3. How should we source, train and deploy analytics talent?

The report is prepared for senior management and the board of directors. It must reflect the needs of your organization and the sector you operate in (communications).

Solution

Part A

1. Netflix Predictive Analytics: Journey to 220Mn+ subscribers

a) The case study covers how predictive analytics are being used in a variety of sectors, such as e-commerce, insurance, and customer support.

b) Reducing client turnover is a possible and significant business issue that can be resolved with predictive analytics. Businesses may experience a serious issue with customer churn, which is the rate at which customers leave doing business with a company. It might lead to revenue loss and reputational harm for the business. For assignment help, Businesses may enhance customer retention and eventually boost revenue by identifying customers who are at danger of leaving and taking proactive measures to keep them.

c) Customer demands were predicted using predictive analytics, which also helped to decrease churn, increase productivity, better allocate resources, and deliver tailored marketing messages. Customer data was analyzed using machine learning algorithms to spot trends and forecast future behavior. Predictive analytics, for instance, was used to inform customer service professionals to take proactive measures to keep clients who were at risk of leaving based on their behavior (Fouladirad et al., 2018).

d) Having access to high-quality data is the biggest obstacle to employing predictive analytics to accomplish the business goal of reducing customer turnover. In order to produce precise forecasts, predictive analytics needs reliable and pertinent data. The forecasts won't be correct if the data is unreliable, erroneous, or out of date. Additionally, firms may have trouble locating the proper talent to create and maintain the predictive models because predictive analytics needs substantial computational resources.

e) It is advised to start with a specific business problem in mind and find the data necessary to address it in order to help stakeholders with designing predictive analytics solutions for their organization. Making sure the data is correct and pertinent to the issue being addressed is crucial. In order to create and maintain the predictive models, businesses should also invest in the appropriate computational tools and recruit qualified data scientists. To guarantee that the predictive models continue to be accurate and useful, organizations should regularly assess their effectiveness and make any necessary adjustments (Ryu, 2013).
 
2. Coca-Cola vs. Pepsi: The Sweet Fight For Data-Driven Supremacy

a) The article focuses on the food and beverage industry, particularly the competition between Pepsi and Coca-Cola in terms of leveraging data and analytics to create new products and enhance corporate processes.

b) Keeping up with shifting consumer preferences and tastes is one of the potential commercial challenges for Coca-Cola and Pepsi. The difficulty lies in creating new beverages that satisfy the changing market needs and offer a tailored client experience. This issue calls for a cutting-edge strategy that can use analytics and data to spot patterns and customer behavior instantly.

c) Coca-Cola and Pepsi have both utilized various types of data analytics to help in the development of new products. The Freestyle beverage fountain from Coca-Cola gathers information on the most popular flavor combinations that can be used to crowdsource new product ideas. In order to track long-term consumer behavior and use it to personalize marketing campaigns and customer experiences, Coca-Cola has also integrated AI, ML, and real-time analytics. As an alternative, Pepsi has validated new product ideas by using AI-powered food analytics technologies like Trendscope and Tastewise to forecast consumer preferences. In order to spot new trends and forecast customer demand, these technologies comb through billions of social media posts, interactions with recipes, and menu items.

d) The accuracy and dependability of the data is one of the key difficulties when employing data analytics to create new goods. There is a chance that goods will be developed that may not be commercially successful since the data may not always accurately reflect actual consumer preferences and behavior. The demand for qualified data scientists and analysts who can decipher the data and offer useful insights for business decision-making is also great.

e) It is critical for stakeholders to understand the business issue they are attempting to solve before they can adapt data analytics applications for that issue. In order to gain insights into client behavior and preferences, they should identify the pertinent data sources and analytics technologies. In order to evaluate the data and offer actionable insights for business decision-making, stakeholders need also invest in qualified data scientists and analysts. In order to spur innovation and maintain an edge over the competition, firms should also be open to experimenting with new technology and methods.

Part B

By offering data-driven insights that can guide decision-making, analytics plays a significant role in resolving complicated business problems. This section will go over the two forms of analytics that can be utilized to solve business issues in many industries, namely descriptive analytics and predictive analytics.

Descriptive Analytics

A type of analytics called descriptive analytics includes looking at past data to understand past performance. It is frequently used to summarize and comprehend data, spot trends, and respond to the query "what happened?" Businesses can gain a better understanding of their historical performance and pinpoint opportunities for development by utilizing descriptive analytics.

Walmart is one example of a real-world case study that shows the application of descriptive analytics (Hwang et al., 2016). To optimize its inventory levels, cut expenses, and enhance the customer experience, Walmart employs descriptive analytics to examine customer purchasing trends and preferences. To find patterns in customer behavior, Walmart's data analysts examine sales information from both physical shops and online shopping platforms. By stocking up on items that are in high demand and reducing inventory levels of items that are not selling well, the corporation can better utilize the knowledge gained from these analysis (Dapi, 2012).

Predictive Analytics

Contrarily, predictive analytics is a subset of analytics that uses previous data to forecast future outcomes. When analyzing data, it is frequently used to spot trends and connections, predict the future, and provide a solution to the question, "What will happen?" Businesses can use predictive analytics to make data-driven decisions that foresee potential trends and business possibilities in the future.

The ride-hailing service Uber serves as one example of a real-world case study that demonstrates the application of predictive analytics (Chen et al.,2021). Uber employs predictive analytics to forecast rider supply and demand in real-time, enabling it to give drivers more precise arrival times and shorten wait times for riders. The business's data experts estimate the demand and supply trends for riders by analyzing data from a variety of sources, including historical ride data, weather forecasts, and event calendars. Uber can deploy its drivers more effectively thanks to the information gained from these analytics, which decreases rider wait times and enhances the entire riding experience (Batat, 2020).

Challenges

There are issues with using descriptive and predictive analytics, despite the fact that they both provide useful information for enterprises. The fact that descriptive analytics can only be used to analyze past data, which might not be a reliable indicator of future trends, is one of the key drawbacks of this approach. Furthermore, descriptive analytics ignores outside variables that can affect future performance. Using predictive analytics, however, presents a number of difficulties because it depends on precise and trustworthy data inputs. Predictive analytics may not produce accurate forecasts if the data is unreliable or incomplete.

Part C

Introduction

As Chief Analytics Officer for a large multinational corporation operating in the communications sector, I have been asked to review Accenture's report on building analytics-driven organizations and provide recommendations on how our company can develop its data and analytics capabilities.

Ingraining Analytics into Decision-making Processes

We must first create a data-driven culture before integrating analytics into our decision-making procedures. This entails encouraging the application of data and analytics at every level of the business, from the C-suite to the shop floor. By assembling cross-functional teams including data scientists, business analysts, and subject matter experts, we can do this. Together, these teams should pinpoint business issues that data and analytics may help to address and create solutions that are simple to comprehend and put into practice.

Investing in technology that facilitates data-driven decision making is another method to integrate analytics into our decision-making processes. Investments in big data platforms, data visualization tools, and predictive analytics software all fall under this category. By utilizing these tools, we can make greater use of the data we gather and offer data-based, actionable insights to decision-makers.

Organizing and Coordinating Analytics Capabilities

We must create a clear analytics strategy that supports our business objectives in order to organize and coordinate analytics skills across the organization. This strategy should lay out our plans for using data and analytics to accomplish our corporate goals as well as the precise skills we'll need to build to get there.

Additionally, we must clearly define the roles and duties of our analytics teams. This entails outlining the functions of domain experts, business analysts, and data scientists as well as developing a clear career path for each of these positions. By doing this, we can make sure that our analytics teams are functioning well and effectively, and that we are utilizing all of our analytical expertise to its fullest potential (Akter et al., 2016).

Sourcing, Training, and Deploying Analytics Talent

We must first have a clear talent strategy before we can find, train, and deploy analytical talent. This plan should detail the talents and expertise we specifically need, as well as the methods we'll use to find and develop the talent we need. We may achieve this through collaborating with colleges and training facilities, providing internships and apprenticeships, and funding staff development and training programmers.

Using our current employees as a resource for analytics talent is another option. Employees that are interested in data and analytics can be identified, and we can offer them the chances for training and growth they require to become proficient data analysts or data scientists. By doing this, we can utilize the knowledge and talents of our current personnel.

Enhancing Collaboration and Communication

Encourage collaboration and communication amongst divisions in order to successfully incorporate analytics into the organization's decision-making processes. Data silos and communication obstacles might make it difficult to adopt analytics solutions successfully. In order for teams to collaborate and solve business problems, it is critical to develop cross-functional communication and collaboration.

Investing in Training and Development

It is important to invest in the training and development of personnel if you want to create and coordinate analytics capabilities across your organization. This involves giving opportunities for upskilling and reskilling as well as strengthening data literacy abilities. Businesses may make sure that their staff members have the knowledge and abilities to use analytics tools and make data-driven decisions by investing in their training and development (Fadler & Legner, 2021).

Partnering with External Experts

Organizations can think about partnering with external experts to hasten the development of analytics capabilities. To acquire the most recent research and insights, this may entail working with academic institutions or employing outside experts. Organizations can benefit from a new viewpoint and access to cutting-edge analytics tools by collaborating with external experts.

Adopting a Continuous Learning attitude

Organizations must embrace a continuous learning attitude in order to effectively find, train, and deploy analytical talent. This entails supporting a culture of learning among staff members as well as their ongoing skill and knowledge development. In order to keep the company competitive in the market, it is also crucial to stay up to speed with the most recent analytics trends and technology. By adopting a continuous learning mindset, organizations can create a dynamic workforce that is agile and responsive to changing business needs.

Conclusion

To transform into an analytics-driven organization, we must create a data-driven culture, invest in the technology that enables data-driven decision-making, develop a clear analytics strategy, define the roles and responsibilities of our analytics teams, and create a talent strategy that enables us to efficiently find, develop, and deploy analytics talent. By doing this, we can make sure that we are maximizing the use of the data we gather and utilizing data and analytics to promote corporate growth and success in the communications industry.

References

DATA4300 Data Security and Ethics Case Study 1 Sample

Assessment Description

You are being considered for a job as a compliance expert by an organization and charged with writing recommendations to its Board of Directors’ Data Ethics Committee to decide on:

A. Adopting new technology solution that addresses a business need, and

B. The opportunities and risks of this technology in terms of privacy, cybersecurity and ethics

Based on this recommendation you will be considered for a job at the company.

Your Task

• Choose a company as your personal case study. You must choose a company which starts with the same letter as the first letter your first or last name.

• Complete Part A and B below:

1. Part A (Case Study): Students are to write a 700-word case study and submit it as a Microsoft word file via Turnitin by Monday, Week 6 at 10:00am (AEST) (Before class)

Note: Completing Step 1 before Step 2 is crucial. If you have not submitted Step 1 in time for your in-class Step 2, you must notify your facilitator via email immediately to receive further instruction about your assessment status.

2. Part B (One-way interview): Students need to be present IN CLASS in Week 6 where the lecturer will take them through how to record a one-way interview based on their case study.

Assessment Instructions

PART A: Case Study (20 marks)

You are being considered for a job as a compliance expert by an organisation and charged with writing recommendations to its Board of Directors’ Data Ethics Committee to decide about:

a) Adopting a new technology solution that addresses a company need, and

b) The opportunities and risks of this technology in terms of privacy, cybersecurity, regulation and ethics and how this affects the viability of the technology.

Your answers to the above two questions will be presented in a case study which will be considered in your job application. See suggested structure below:

Solution

Chosen Company and New Technology Solution

The chosen organisation is Pinterest. Pinterest is a well-known American company which offers the users to share and save image, creative portfolios, and generates aesthetic ideas, as well as it also offers social media services to the designers enabling the discovering of ideas and images (Pinterest, 2020). For Assignment Help, The company acquires the data of millions of its users, which makes it vulnerable to data thefts. As a compliance expert, my recommendation for technology solution to the Board of Directors’ Data Ethics Committee of Pinterest is Artificial Intelligence. AI is a booming technology which has a potential of bringing strong changes to the company’s operations, security challenges, and management as well as it enhances the efficiency, improved decision-making, and elevate the customer experience. The use of Artificial Intelligence technology also presents ethical as well as legal challenges which has to be considered carefully.
Below are mentioned the key areas in which the company can enhance its performance-

• Improved decision making- More informed decisions may be made with the help of AI's ability to analyse vast amount of data and derive useful conclusions. A company's strategic choices, discovery of new prospects, and operational optimisation may all benefit from this (Velvetech, 2019).

• Enhanced customer experiences- AI may help businesses customize their communications with customers, provide more personalized suggestions, and generally elevate the quality of their customers' experiences. This has the potential to boost satisfaction and loyalty among existing customers.

• Better risk management- Due to AI's ability to assist Pinterest detect and prevent vulnerabilities like fraud and cyberattacks. This can help to protect the company's reputation and financial performance.

• Increased innovation- AI has the potential to boost innovation by assisting Pinterest in creating and refining new offerings and providing access to previously unexplored consumer segments. This has the potential to aid businesses in competing successfully and expanding their operations (Kleinings, 2023).

Opportunities and Risks of This Technology in Terms of Privacy, Cybersecurity, Regulation and Ethics

AI technology offers several opportunities to Pinterest in order to improve the operations and performance of the company, however it also comes with challenges and risks which has to be addressed in order to ensure its viability. Below are mentioned the key opportunities and risks associated with AI technology in terms of privacy, cybersecurity, regulation, and ethics.
Opportunities of AI

• Personalised user feeds- AI helps in personalising and customising the user’s search recommendations and their feed on the basis of their search history, firstly the technology will collect the data of the users and further run the algorithm which will analyse and set what the user’s preferences are.

• Chatbots availability for customer help 24*7- Artificial intelligence has allowed chatbots to advance to the point where they are difficult to differentiate between real people. In many cases, chatbots are preferable to human customer service representatives. These bots can respond instantly to questions, provide faster service with fewer mistakes, and boost customer engagement (Kleinings, 2023).

• Customer relationship management - In addition to being an effective tool for sales teams, customer relationship management systems represent a significant commercial breakthrough. Despite the mixed results of previous CRM and sales force automation initiatives. Artificial intelligence (AI) has the potential to improve business operations and the quality of service provided to consumers in many ways.

• Intrusion detection- Most cyber defences today are reactive rather than proactive, but AI is helping to change that. By using AI to establish a standard for acceptable network behavior, businesses can better spot irregularities in traffic that may indicate the presence of malicious individuals (Qasmi, 2020).
Risks of AI

• Privacy concerns- Concerns concerning privacy have arisen due to the fact that AI technology gathers and analyses massive volumes of data. In order to secure customer information and remain in compliance with privacy laws, businesses must take the necessary precautions (Thomas, 2019).

• Cybersecurity risks- Artificial intelligence (AI) systems may be vulnerable to cyber dangers like hacking and data leaks. Companies must take strong cybersecurity precautions to guard against these dangers.

• Regulatory challenges- Issues with regulations Businesses have when using AI technology include having to adhere to a wide range of regulations. There may be financial penalties, legal action, and harm to Pinterest's reputation if Pinterest's don't follow these rules (Murillo, 2022).

• Ethical considerations- Issues of justice and equality can come up in the framework of AI usage, including issues of prejudice and discrimination.

• Legal issues- Concerns about legal responsibility arise when AI is used to make judgements that have far-reaching effects on people or corporations (Murillo, 2022).

• Lack of transparency- Decisions made by AI may be less transparent, making it more challenging for people and groups to grasp the reasoning behind them (Thomas, 2019).

References

COIT20263 Information Security Management Report 1 Sample

Objectives

This assessment task relates to Unit Learning Outcome 2 and must be done individually. In this assessment task, you will analyse the scenario given on page 3 and develop guidelines for the specified policy for the hospital given in the scenario.

Assessment Task

You are required to analyse the scenario given on page 3 and develop guidelines for an Issue-Specific Security Policy (ISSP) on the ‘Acceptable Encryption Policy’ for the organisation described in the scenario. You should ensure that you support the guidelines you prepare with references and justify why those guidelines are necessary.

Assessment 1 task contains two parts; part A is writing a report on the guidelines and part B is writing a reflection on the experience of completing the assessment task.

Part A: The report for the given scenario should include:

1. Executive Summary

2. Table of Contents

3. Discussion

a Statement of Purpose (Scope and applicability, definition of technology addresses, responsibilities)

b Acceptable ciphers and hash function requirements

c Key Generation, Key agreement, and Authentication

d Violations of Policy

e Policy Review and Modification

f Limitations of Liability

4. References

Please note that you might need to make some assumptions about the organisation in order to write this report. These assumptions should match the information in the case study and not contradict the objectives of the report. They should be incorporated in your report. To avoid loss of marks, do not make assumptions that are not relevant or contradictory, or will not be used in your report discussion.

Your discussion must be specific to the given case scenario and the discussion should be detailed with justification. Wherever appropriate please provide evidence of information (with proper referencing) to justify your argument.

Please refer to external resources as needed. Please use at least 5 relevant references.

Note: You must follow the Harvard citation and referencing guidelines when writing your report.

Part B: Your reflection on completing this assessment may include (the word limit for part B is 500 words):

• how you attempted the task, methods used,

• any hurdle faced and how those were solved

• what you have learnt

• if you are asked to do this again, would you take a different approach? Support your answer with justification.

Solution

Statement of Purpose

The purpose of this report is to provide guidelines for the development and implementation of an Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ, a leading Australian private health insurance company. For Assignment Help, The policy will apply to all employees of the company, including full-time and part-time staff. The policy will apply to all data and information that the business processes, transmits, or stores, including client data, employee data, and confidential company information.

Definition of Technology Addresses

Encryption technology is a vital tool that enables companies to secure their data by converting it into a coded form that can only be accessed by authorized personnel. Encryption technology involves the use of algorithms and keys to transform data into a secure format. The policy will define the types of encryption technologies that are acceptable for use by the company, including symmetric key encryption and asymmetric key encryption. The policy will also define the key lengths and encryption algorithms that are acceptable for use by the company (Lv and Qiao 2020).

Responsibilities

The policy will define the responsibilities of different roles and departments within the company. The Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) will be responsible for the overall management and implementation of the policy. The IT team at each site will be responsible for installing and maintaining the encryption software on their respective servers. The security team will be responsible for monitoring the encryption tools to ensure their effective use and report any potential security breaches. All employees will be responsible for following the policy guidelines and using encryption tools appropriately to secure the data they handle. The purpose of this report is to provide guidelines for the development and implementation of an Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ. The policy will define the scope of the policy, the definition of technology addresses, and the responsibilities of different roles and departments within the company. The next section of the report will discuss the objectives of the policy (Hajian et al. 2023).

Acceptable Ciphers and Hash Function Requirements:

Encryption is a key component of data security, and the use of effective ciphers and hash functions is critical to ensuring data protection. The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ will define the acceptable ciphers and hash functions that can be used to secure data.

Ciphers

The policy will define the types of ciphers that are acceptable for use by the company. These ciphers will include both symmetric and asymmetric ciphers. Symmetric ciphers, such as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), are widely used for securing data as they use only a single key to encrypt as well as decrypt data. Asymmetric ciphers, such as RSA, use two keys, a public key, and a private key, to encrypt and decrypt data. The policy will also define the key lengths that are acceptable for use with the different ciphers (Lv and Qiao 2020).

Hash Functions

Hash functions are used to transform data into a unique fixed-length code or hash value. This is an important aspect of data security because it allows data integrity to be confirmed by comparing the hash value of the original data to the hash value of the received data. The policy will define the acceptable hash functions that can be used to secure data. These hash functions will include Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) and Message Digest Algorithm (MD).

The policy will ensure that the ciphers and hash functions used by the company are regularly reviewed to ensure that they are still effective against current threats. The policy will also ensure that the use of weaker ciphers or hash functions is not permitted, as these may be vulnerable to attacks.

The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ will define the acceptable ciphers and hash functions that can be used to secure data. This section of the policy will ensure that the ciphers and hash functions used by the company are effective against current threats and that the use of weaker ciphers or hash functions is not permitted. The next section of the report will discuss the encryption key management requirements defined in the policy (Lv and Qiao 2020).

Key Generation, Key Agreement, and Authentication:

Key generation, key agreement, and authentication are critical components of encryption that ensure the security of data. The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ will define the key generation, key agreement, and authentication requirements to ensure that data is protected effectively.

Key Generation:

The policy will define the key generation requirements for the ciphers used by the company. The policy will require that keys be generated using a secure random number generator and that the key length be appropriate for the cipher. The policy will also define the process for key generation and the use of key derivation functions.

Key Agreement:

The policy will define the key agreement requirements for the ciphers used by the company. The policy will require that key agreement be performed using a secure key exchange protocol, such as Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The policy will also define the key agreement process and the use of key agreement parameters.

Authentication:

The policy will define the authentication requirements for the ciphers used by the company. The policy will require that authentication be performed using a secure authentication protocol, such as Secure Remote Password (SRP) or Public Key Infrastructure (PKI). The policy will also define the authentication process and the use of authentication parameters.

The policy will ensure that the key generation, key agreement, and authentication requirements used by the company are regularly reviewed to ensure that they are still effective against current threats. The policy will also ensure that the use of weaker key generation, key agreement, or authentication methods is not permitted, as these may be vulnerable to attacks (Niu et al. 2019).

Violations of Policy

The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ is a critical component of the organization's security program. Violations of this policy can have serious consequences for the organization, including loss of data, damage to the organization's reputation, and legal liability. The policy will define the consequences of violating the policy to ensure that all employees understand the importance of compliance.

The policy will define the penalties for non-compliance, which may include disciplinary action, termination of employment, and legal action. The policy will also define the process for reporting policy violations and the procedures for investigating and addressing violations.

It is important to note that violations of this policy are not limited to intentional actions. Accidental or unintentional violations can also have serious consequences for the organization. Therefore, the policy will also define the process for reporting accidental or unintentional violations and the procedures for addressing them.

The policy will also define the process for reviewing and updating the policy to ensure that it remains effective against current threats. Regular reviews of the policy will help to identify any gaps or weaknesses in the policy and ensure that the organization is prepared to address new threats. The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ will define the consequences of violating the policy, the process for reporting policy violations, and the procedures for investigating and addressing violations. The policy will also define the process for reviewing and updating the policy to ensure that it remains effective against current threats. The final section of the report will provide a conclusion and recommendations for implementing the policy (Niu et al. 2019).

Policy Review and Modification:

The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ is a living document that must be reviewed and updated regularly to remain effective against new and emerging threats. The policy review process should be documented and conducted on a regular basis, with a goal of ensuring that the policy is up-to-date and relevant.
The policy review process should include an evaluation of the organization's security posture, as well as a review of current threats and trends in the industry. This evaluation should identify any weaknesses in the current policy, as well as any new technologies or encryption algorithms that may need to be added to the policy.

The policy review process should also involve stakeholders from across the organization, including the IT department, security team, legal team, and executive management. These stakeholders can provide valuable insights into the effectiveness of the policy and identify any areas that may need to be strengthened or revised (Sun et al. 2020).

Once the policy review process is complete, any modifications or updates to the policy should be documented and communicated to all relevant stakeholders. This may include training sessions for employees, updated documentation and procedures, and updates to the organization's security controls and systems (Dixit et al. 2019).

It is also important to note that changes to the policy may require approval from executive management or legal counsel. Therefore, the policy review process should include a process for obtaining this approval and documenting it for future reference.

Limitations of Liability:

The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ provides guidelines and requirements for the use of encryption technology within the organization. While the policy is designed to reduce the risk of data breaches and other security incidents, it is important to note that no security measure can provide 100% protection against all threats.

Therefore, the policy includes a section on limitations of liability that outlines the organization's position on liability in the event of a security incident. This section states that while the organization will make every effort to protect the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of its data, it cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from a security incident.

This section also includes information on the steps that the organization will take to respond to a security incident, including incident response procedures, notification requirements, and any other relevant information.

It is important to note that the limitations of liability section is not intended to absolve the organization of all responsibility for data security. Rather, it is intended to provide clarity on the organization's position in the event of a security incident and to ensure that all stakeholders are aware of their responsibilities and obligations.

Conclusion

The Acceptable Encryption Policy for XYZ provides guidelines and requirements for the use of encryption technology within the organization. The policy outlines acceptable ciphers and hash function requirements, key generation, key agreement, and authentication procedures, as well as guidelines for addressing violations of the policy.

The policy is intended to protect confidential data from unauthorised access, disclosure, and alteration, as well as to reduce the risk of security incidents. The policy also includes provisions for reviewing and updating the policy as needed to address changes in technology or security threats.

References

MBIS4004 System Design Report Sample

Workshop Session 02

Activity 01:

Trapping a sample:

• Class will be broken in teams of 3-4 students using breakout rooms.

• Access your E-Book on page 174, read and discuss the case to answer (you have 30 min.):

• Each of you must access Discussion Board “Group X: Trapping a sample” to write your answers (you have 30 min.) - 1% Mark.

• It must be done within this given time, otherwise you won’t receive any mark.

Activity 02:

Problem:

You are hired as a systems analyst by an organization that is planning to redesign its website. Consider the following situations and describe the most appropriate sampling method for each of them.

a. To gauge employee perception towards website redesign, you post a notice on the intranet portal asking the employees to post their opinions.

b. You design a customer survey to find out which website features they wish to see redesigned.

c. You seek customer opinions through forms available at three of the company’s 20 helpdesks.

Explain why the answer to each situation would vary.

• Class will be broken in teams of 3-4 students using breakout rooms.

• Read and discuss the case to answer (you have 30 min.):

• Each of you must access Discussion Board “Group X: Activity 2”

Solution

Activity 1

The classes are being segregated into teams of 3 to 4 students each. This division has been done through the process of breakout rooms and they also had been provided with E-books. Meanwhile, every group was provided with Discussion books and regular classes were also being taken so that the students are in touch with their subjects regularly. For Assignment Help, Meanwhile, marks were being strictly distributed by teachers based on metrics, and hence only qualified students were being provided with the degree. Meanwhile, since I was a very serious student so I managed to clear all the exams easily, and hence due to this I am now a qualified system analyst.

Q) Role of System Analyst in Designing Website

Rahmawati et al. (2022) stated that system analysts have some critical challenges from the elicitation of requirements to the delivery of the technical requirements to the development teams so far. The system analyst always tends to look at the design more technically and functionally and human-computer interaction manages it through computer interaction. Sam Pelt is required to rely on software for sampling the opinion of customers and for making the strategic decision of stocking fake furs which have been always real for storing furs. Sam pelt is required to have a separate website for their company as websites have become the most important portal of communication. The business environment is extremely competitive and hence the development of the website has become mandatory.

Q) Designing Customer Survey

The system analyst always tends to serve to optimize user activity with systems and software for employees of an organization to work perfectly on it. Ninci et al. (2021) stated that these professionals always advise employees on which software they are required for implementing, and users are required to ensure for ensuring that the programs function correctly. Therefore, the system analyst employed by SamPelt is required to optimize the system and software so that the organization can perform effectively. Therefore, as a system analyst, I am required to ensure that the computer system, infrastructure, and systems perform effectively. Therefore, I carry the responsibility of researching the problem and finding solutions, and even recommending courses of action. The analyst of the system is required to be conversant in several operating systems, programming languages, hardware platforms, and software.

Q) Role of Customer Opinions in Designing Website

A system analyst is an individual who engages in techniques of design and analysis of engaged systems in solving any problem of business. Gao et al. (2023) reviewed that the analyst of the system is required to keep up to date with modern innovations for improving productivity at every time for the organization. Therefore as s system analyst of Sam Pelt, my main role is to improve productivity at every time of organization. I am going to leave no stone unturned in ensuring to use of a networked computer that supports the packaged software for selecting the mailing list of customers. Moreover, SamPelt is also interested in making a strategic decision that affects the purchasing of goods. Hence, as a system analyst, I am required to play a key role in this step to ensure that Sam Pelt is successful in developing a website for the organization so that it can operate effectively without any hiccups.

Reference List

DATA4000 Introduction to Business Analytics Report 3 Sample

Your Task

Consider below information regarding the National Australia Bank data breach. Read the case study carefully and using the resources listed, together with your own research, complete: Part A (Industry Report).

Assessment Description

Bank of Ireland
https://www.rte.ie/news/business/2022/0405/1290503-bank-of-ireland-fined-by-dpc/

Background

Bank of Ireland has been fined 463,000 by the Data Protection Commission for data breaches affecting more than 50,000 customers. It follows an inquiry into 22 personal data breach notifications that Bank of Ireland made to th Commission between 9 November 2018 and 27 June 2019. One of the data breach notifications affected 47,000 customers.

The breaches related to the corruption of information in the bank's data feed to the Central Credit Register (CCR), a centralised system that collects and securely stores information about loans. The incidents included unauthorised disclosures of customer personal data to the CCR and accidental alterations of customer personal data on the CCR”.

Brief

As an analyst within Bank of Ireland, you have been tasked with considering ways in which customer data can be used to further assist Bank of Ireland with its marketing campaigns. As a further task, you have been asked to consider how Bank of Ireland could potentially assist other vendors interested in the credit card history of its customers.

Assessment Instructions

Part A: Industry Report (1800 words, 25 marks) - Individual

Based on your own independent research, you are required to evaluate the implications of the European legislation such as GDPR on Bank of Ireland’s proposed analytics project and overall business model. Your report can be structured using the following headings:

Data Usability

- Benefits and costs of the database to its stakeholders.
- Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive applications of the data available and the data analytics software tools this would require.

Data Security and privacy

- Data security, privacy and accuracy issues associated with the use of the database in the way proposed in the brief.

Ethical Considerations

- The ethical considerations behind whether the customer has the option to opt in or opt out of having their data used and stored in the way proposed by the analytics brief

- Other ethical issues of gathering, maintaining and using the data in the way proposed above.

Artificial Intelligence

- How developments in AI intersects with data security, privacy and ethics, especially in light of your proposed analytics project.

It is a requirement to support each of the key points you make with references (both academic and “grey” material) Use the resources provided as well as your own research to assist with data collection and data privacy discussions.
https://gdpr-info.eu/

Solution

Part A: Industry Report

Introduction

The risk connected with the mortgages that the Bank of Ireland and other commercial organisations issue is managed via the application of data. For Assignment Help, Analysing the information they get about specific clients is how they accomplish things like client credit rating, payment card usage, balances owing on various payment cards, and balances owed on various kinds of credit (net loans capacity) can all be included in the dataset, although they are not the only ones. To determine a lender's creditworthiness or determine the hazard associated with loan issuing, credit security assessment is the study of past data (Shema 2019, p. 2). The research findings assist financial organisations and the Bank of Ireland in assessing both their own and their client's risks.

Data Usability

A person or group that might influence or be impacted by the information administration procedure is referred to as a participant in whatever data management program. The stakeholder database is used as more than just a device for public connections; it also acts as documentation for compliance and verification, a trustworthy source of data for future computer evaluations or studies, and fosters lengthy effectiveness. Stakeholder databases are essential, yet they are frequently underfunded, and numerous businesses continue to keep their data on unprotected worksheets (Campello, Gao, Qiu, & Zhang 2018, p 2). The average expense to design a database managing application is 24,000 dollars. Yet, the whole price ranges from 11,499 to 59,999 dollars. Any database administration application with fewer capabilities, or perhaps a Minimum viable product, would be less expensive than one that involves all of the anticipated functions.

Figure: Data usability
Source: (Hotz, et al, 2022)

An institution's daily activities regularly make utilization of descriptive data. Professional analyses that offer a historical overview of an institution's activities, such as stock, circulation, revenue, as well as income, all seem to be instances of descriptive data. Such reporting' material may be readily combined and utilized to provide operational glimpses of a company. Numerous phases in the descriptive analytical method may be made simpler by the use of corporate insight technologies including Power BI, Tableau, as well as Qlik.

Likelihoods are the foundation of predictive data analysis. Predictive modelling makes an effort to anticipate potential prospective results as well as the possibility of such occurrences utilizing a range of techniques, including data analysis, numerical modelling (arithmetical connections among factors to anticipate results), as well as optimization techniques for computer learning (categorization, stagnation, and grouping methods) (Lantz 2019, p 20). Among the best, most trustworthy, and most popular predictive analytic tools are IBM SPSS Statistical. It has existed for a while and provides a wide range of features, such as the SPSS modeller from the Statistics Framework for Behavioral Research.

Prescriptive data builds on the findings discovered via descriptive as well as predictive research by outlining the optimal potential plans of operation for a company. Because it is among the most difficult to complete and requires a high level of expertise in insights, this step of the corporate analytics method is hardly employed in regular corporate processes. Automating email is a clear example of prescriptive data in action. Marketers may send email content to each category of prospects separately by classifying prospects based on their goals, attitudes, and motivations. Email automation is the procedure in question.

Data Security and privacy

To safeguard database management systems from malicious intrusions and illegal usage, a broad variety of solutions are used in database security. Information security solutions are designed to defend from the abuse, loss, and intrusion of not just the data stored within the network but also the foundation for data management in general and any users (Asante et al. 2021, p 6). The term "database security" refers to a variety of techniques, methods, and technologies that provide confidentiality inside a database structure. Database security refers to a set of guidelines, strategies, and procedures that develop and maintain the database's security, confidentiality, and dependability. Because it is the area where breaches occur most frequently, openness is the most important component of data security.
Infringements might be caused by a variety of programming flaws, incorrect setups, or habits of abuse or negligence. Nearly half of documented data thefts still include poor credentials, credential exchange, unintentional data deletion or distortion, as well as other unwelcome human activities as their root reason. Database governance software ensures the confidentiality and security of data by ensuring that only permitted individuals get access to it and by executing permission tests when the entrance to private data is sought. One of the data breach reports involving Bank of Ireland involved 47,000 clients. The data flow from the bank to the National Credits Record, a unified platform that gathers and safely maintains data on mortgages, was compromised in the incidents. Unauthorized client private information exposures to the CCR and unintentional changes to client private information upon that CCR were among the instances.

Figure: Data Security and privacy
Source: (Yang, Xiong, & Ren, 2020)

According to Shaik, Shaik, Mohammad, & Alomari (2018), the safeguarding of content that is kept in databases is referred to as database integrity. Businesses often maintain a variety of data within the system. They must employ safety methods like encrypted networks, antivirus software, safety encrypting, etcetera, to protect that crucial data. The safety of the system itself as well as the moral and regulatory ramifications of whatever information must be put upon that database in the first position were the two key concerns concerning database confidentiality. Additionally, the ethical obligation imposed on database protection experts to protect a database management structure must be taken into account.

Data consistency, which acts as the primary yardstick for information quality, is defined as data consistency with reality. The proper information must match the data that is required since more conformity converts into higher dependability. It suggests that the information is accurate, without mistakes, and from a reliable and consistent source. Since inaccurate data leads to inaccurate projections, data integrity is essential. If the anticipated outcomes are inaccurate, time, money, and assets are wasted. Accurate information enhances decision-making confidence, increases productivity and advertising, and reduces costs.

Ethical Considerations

According to Tsang (2019), conversations regarding how firms manage consumer data typically revolve around regulatory issues, such as risks and constraints. With good reason: the massive private data collections made by businesses and government agencies entail severe consequences and the potential for harm. In a way, more current security regulations, including the General Data Protection Regulations (GDPR) of the European Union and the Consumers Privacy Act of California (CCPA), prohibit usage attempts to regain the user's power.

The best way for a business to convince consumers to give their consent for the collection and use of their private details is to use that data to the customer's benefit. Letting users understand what data companies gather about them and the ways it's used in company services or offerings. Every business with clients or users is providing a valued offering or service. The worth is sometimes rather clear-cut. Users of location tracking, for example, are likely aware that these apps must track user locations to show the participant's true location, alter turn-by-turn directions, or provide actual-time traffic data. Most users agree that utilizing up-to-date mapping information offers benefits over employing monitoring programs that can keep track of their locations (Trivedi, & Vasisht, 2020, p 77). In similar circumstances, businesses would have to convince clients of the benefit of their information consumption to win their support. Users are conscious of the barter as well as, in some cases, are willing to permit the utilization of personal data if it is used by a company to improve the value of its services, promote research and development, improve stock control, or for any other legitimate purpose. When businesses give clients a compelling cause to express their support, everyone wins. This requires gaining the client's trust through both behaviour and information.

Companies have an ethical responsibility to their customers to only collect the necessary material, to secure that information effectively, limit its dissemination, and also to correct any errors in relevant data. Employees have a moral duty to hold off on glancing at customer records or files until it is essential, to hold off on giving customer data to competitors, and to hold off on giving user details to friends or relatives. Customers who share data with companies they do business with also have an ethical responsibility in this respect (Kim, Yin, & Lee 2020, p 2). Such compliance might comprise providing accurate and complete data as needed as well as abiding by the prohibition on disclosing or using company data that individuals may have access to.

Artificial Intelligence

With the advent of technical advancement, multiple new and updated machines are used in several sectors across the globe. Financial sectors are one of the most growing and continuously changing sectors which requires an in-depth analysis of its internal changing faculties that takes place rapidly. According to Kaur, Sahdev, Sharma, & Siddiqui, (2020), the role of Artificial intelligence is enormous in securing the growth and development of the financial sectors. The Bank of Ireland has been providing satisfactory customer services for years. However, in recent times, some difficulties are generated in banking services due to questions regarding protecting the data of the customers and restricting the bank authority from any kind of malpractice of the data. In this regard, the role of artificial intelligence is crucial to bring a massive transformation in the data safety and security process and win the hearts of customers. Artificial intelligence works for enhancing cybersecurity and protecting the bank from money laundering (Manser Payne, Dahl, & Peltier 2021, p. 15(2). In recent times, a large number of banks are now focusing on the implementation of Artificial intelligence to ensure the safety and security of their data of customers. However, now the areas which require more emphasis are understanding how artificial intelligence works for protecting data and what steps can be implemented to harness the safety of data.

Artificial intelligence generally helps in future predictions based on previous activities of the customers and is significantly able to differentiate between the more important and least important data. With the help of cognitive process automation, multiple features can be enabled most appropriately. According to Manser Payne, Peltier, & Barger (2021), scecuring ROI reduces the cost and ensures the quick processes of services at each step of bank services. In the finance sector, it is important to have a quick review of the financial activities of the customers. For human labour, it is quite a tough task. To make the procedure easy and harness the financial activities of banks takes help from the inbuilt automation process and robot automation process which denotes a high level of accuracy, lesser human-made errors, use of the cognitive system for making decisions and deviating valuable time to the optimum success of the financial sectors (Flavián, Pérez-Rueda, Belanche, & Casaló 2022, p. 7).

Figure: Use of AI in banks
Source: (Shambira, 2020)

The Bank of Ireland uses cloud storage to keep the data of the customers safe and protected. The prime goal of using AI in banks is to make the financial activities of the bank more efficient and customer driven. Address the issues more efficiently and adopt new methods to attract more customers. The Bank of Ireland is one of the most prominent banks in the country and they have to handle a wide range of data. Using optimum levels of AI technologies will help to bring more efficiency to the banking system.

Conclusion

To conclude, it can be stated that the Bank of Ireland has been providing services for many years and since the inception of the bank its prime duty is to provide safe and secure services to its customers. With the increasing pressure on customers and raising questions about data protection, the banking sectors are now focusing on utilising Artificial intelligence in banks which can provide maximum safety to the data of the customers and increase the number of customers.

Reference

 DATA4100 Data Visualisation Software Report 4 Sample

Your Task

This written report with a dashboard is to be created individually.

• Given a business problem and data, finalise visualisations and prepare a report for the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade.

• On Tuesday of week 13 at or before 23:55 AEST submit your written report as a Microsoft Word file with a snapshot of your dashboard via Turnitin. This assessment covers Learning outcomes: LO2, LO3

Assessment Description

Should Australia enter a free trade agreement with Germany?

Business Background:

Germany, Japan, South Korea, United States, France and China are amongst the main exporters of cars. Suppose that the Australian government is particularly interested in the products exported from Germany, as well as Australian products exported to Germany, in considering the possibility of a free trade agreement.

Suppose that you have been asked, as an analyst for the Australian Department of Foreign Affairs and Trade, to report on exports from Germany, and in particular, the types of products Germany exports to Australia. Likewise, analyse the products that Australia exports to Germany currently, based on your own research into available data sets.

Your written report (to be prepared in this assessment - in Assessment 4) will ultimately end up in the hands of the minister for trade and investment, so any final decisions made should be supported by data In Assessment 4, you are to finish designing your visualisations, then prepare a report by interpreting the visualisations and integrating with theory from this subject.

Data set

- Use the data given to you in week 11

Assessment Instructions

- As an individual, finish the visualisations for your report.

- Write a structured report with appropriate sections, as follows:

- Introduce the business problem and content of your report. (150 words)

- Interpret your charts, summaries, clustering and any other analyses you have done in the process of creating your visualisations, and link it back to the business problem of whether Australia should enter a free trade agreement with Germany? (800 words)

- Justify the design of your visualisations in terms of what you have learnt about cognitive load and pre-attentive attributes and Tufte’s principles. (250 words)

- On Tuesday of week 13 at or before 23:55 AEST submit your report as a Microsoft Word file, containing your visualisations, via Turnitin.

Solution

Introduction

This report is based on analysis and visualisation for business export between two countries Australia and Germany. The business problem is based on exports from Australia to Germany and exports from Germany to Australia. These exports include animal base products such as animal itself and meats. For Assignment Help, The problem is to analyse and visualise the data provided for business export Australia to Germany and Germany to Australia. The purpose of this report is to provide understanding and knowledge regarding total trade value and product type between these two countries Australian Germany so that Australian government can take decisions based on product exports or import between these two countries. In this report visualisations are represented for both Australia to Germany export and Germany to Australia export along with the prototype. Power bi is a business intelligence tool that is used for which and analysis on provided data. At the end of this report each visualisation are justified along with the attributes and important points are concluded. The data loaded in Power Bi for visualizations. The data cleaned by removing null values from the data. Cluster line chart created for the product export with trade value. Clustering done for product type and trade value by year

Data Gathering and Analysis

The data collected based on the import and export between these two countries Germany and Australia that includes product type product category and the total trade value made by each country on each individual product. The data uploaded in business intelligence tool to check the valuation of the data for the further analysis. It is important to validate the data for desired result and analysis that will further make easy decisions for the business problem. For the analysis and virtualization to different charts are used such as cluster line chart and clustering chart so that each attributes can be analyzed with the help of visualization.

Australia to Germany

This section discuss about analysis and visualisation regarding export from Australia to Germany as export involve multiple products that belongs to the animal product category along with the total trade value made on each product. Analysis made with the help of individual year considering the trade value for each year.

Cluster line and Bar Chart

The above chart showing the cluster line chart created with the help of trade value and the product category along with the year. The way you lieration created for total products exported by each year along with total trade value created on each product from Australia to Germany. As it can be seen in chat mineral products and chemical products are the highest one which made highest trade value while export from Australia to Germany. And further trade value is continuously decreasing along with the product category and the least state value created by the product weapons that source the minimum exports from Australia to Germany is done for weapons. This complete visualisation is based on three consecutive years from 2018 to 2020 only as the data represented is showing visualisation from 2018 to 2020.

Cluster Chart

The above visualisation showing cluster data visualisation for the product type exported between Australia to Germany each individual year. The colourful dots showing product type along with the trade value created by each product type from 2018 to 2020. Each products type is highlighted with a different colour for better identification along with some of the trade value. This graph also shows that mineral products have the highest trade value achieved while exporting from Australia to Germany.

Pie Chart

The above visualisation shoes pie chart for total trade value created by each product type exported from Australia to Germany. Here each product is represented with different colour along with trade value represented at outlyers of the pie chart. This representation can clearly defined the highest and lowest trade value made by the product in each individual year from 2018 to 2020 exports. Each different visualisation defines the product category product type and total trade value generated by each product while exporting from Australia to Germany

Germany to Australia

This section discuss about visualisation and analysis regarding export from Germany to Australia. Based on the provided data set it can be observed that there are multiple category of products which are exported from Germany to Australia from 2018 to 2020. The product category involve animal product vegetable products food stuffs and fruit along with minerals and chemical products. This section also represent three different visualizations that includes cluster line chart, cluster chart and pie chart.

Cluster line and Bar chart

The above graph shows cluster line chart for the export data from Germany to Australia that define products exported by each year with individual trade value generated by each product. As it can be seen in visualisation that transportation created the highest trade value from Germany to Australia. The second highest trade value from Germany to Australia created by machines export. While the least trade value generated by the product called animal and vegetables by products because it includes very less in export business between Australia and Germany. This graph also showing data from 2018 to 2020 for the export from Germany to Australia.

Cluster Chart

The above graph showing cluster chart that defined visualisation for the product type with trade value by each individual year from 2018 to 2020. Here each product type is represented with a different colour and each dot in above scatter plot defines product type along with the total trade value generated by each product from 2018 to 2020. The highest trade value and the least trade value can also be identified with the help of dots showing in above cluster visualisation. With the help of cluster chart each and every product type can be identified individually along with the accurate value.

Pie Chart

This is a pie chart that showing export of each product type along with trade value generated by each product. In this pie chart is product type is highlighted with different colour in order to categories each product trade value as the trade value highlighted at outlliers of the pie chart. Here it can be observed that transportation has the highest state value while export from Germany to Australia. Here transportation means product related to the transportation category such as vehicles so the major export involved from Germany to Australia is for vehicles. The second highest export made by Germany to Australia is for machinery and other mechanical products.

Conclusions

Based on the above visualisation and analysis it is found at Germany is a good exporter for machine related products such as vehicles and other machineries. In the same way it is also found that Australia is good in mineral products that is why Australia has created high trade value while exporting mineral products to Germany. Both countries have different experties regarding products and both are creating high trade value in each individual export is for the product export. The business value between Australia and Germany is identified high due to the heavy products exported and imported between these two countries. The purpose of analysis and visualization on export data between Australia and Germany has successfully completed.

References

COIT20253 Business Intelligence Using Big Data Report Sample

Assessment Task:

Assignment 1 is an individual assessment. In this assessment, you are assigned tasks which assess your unit knowledge gained between weeks 1 and 5 about big data and how it can be used for decision making in any industry. All students will have to write a “professional” business report with Executive summary, Table of Content (MS generated); Introduction; Discussion; Conclusion; Recommendations and References.

Please note that ALL submissions will be checked by a computerised copy detection system and it is extremely easy for teaching staff to identify copied or otherwise plagiarised work.

• Copying (plagiarism) can incur penalties, ranging from deduction of marks to failing the unit or even exclusion from the University.

• Please ensure you are familiar with the Academic Misconduct Procedures. As a student, you are responsible for reading and following CQUniversity’s policies, including the Student Academic Integrity Policy and Procedure.

In this assessment, you are required to choose one of the following industries: Healthcare, Insurance, Retailing, Marketing, Finance, Human resources, Manufacturing, Telecommunications, or Travel.

This assessment consists of two parts as follows:

Part A - You are required to prepare a professional report on WHY Big Data should be integrated to any business to create opportunities and help value creation process for your chosen industry.

Part B - You need to identify at least one open dataset relevant to the industry and describe what opportunities it could create by using this dataset. You can access open data source from different websites. Please try finding it using Google.

In Part A, you will describe what new business insights you could gain from Big Data, how Big Data could help you to optimise your business, how you could leverage Big Data to create new revenue opportunitiesfor your industry, and how you could use Big Data to transform your industry to introduce new services into new markets. Moreover, you will need to elaborate how you can leverage four big data business drivers- structured, unstructured, low latency data and predictive analytics to create value for your industry. You are also required to use Porter’s Value Chain Analysis model and Porter’s Five Forces Analysis model to identify how the four big data business drivers could impact your business initiatives.

Solution

Part A

Introduction

The integration of big data has emerged as a transformative force in today's rapidly evolving business landscape which has reshaped industries and redefined organizational paradigms. The sheer volume and variety of data available have paved the way for unprecedented insights and opportunities. For Assignment Help, This report will explore the multifaceted impact of big data on business initiatives which elucidate how four key drivers i.e., structured, unstructured, low latency data and predictive analytics used to intersect with Porter's Value Chain Analysis and Five Forces Analysis. The report aims to provide a comprehensive understanding of how big data drivers foster value creation by delving into these intricate interactions which can enhance operational efficiency and steer strategic decision-making across industries.

Big Data Opportunities

Enhanced Customer Insights and Personalization:

Big data analytics offers the power to delve into expansive customer datasets which can help to unveil new insights into preferences, behaviors, and trends (Himeur et al. 2021). Businesses can create personalized experiences that resonate deeply with their customers by harnessing this data. Personalization has cultivated a strong bond between the business and its customers from tailored product recommendations based on browsing history to precisely targeted marketing campaigns. This not only amplifies customer satisfaction but also fosters loyalty and advocacy which can be considered as a major parameter to drive sustained revenue growth. Personalized experiences have become a defining factor in competitive differentiation in industries such as e-commerce, retail, and hospitality.

Operational Efficiency and Process Optimization:

Big data's analytical prowess extends to scrutinizing intricate operational processes. Organizations can leverage this capability to identify inefficiencies, bottlenecks, and areas for improvement. Companies gain a holistic view of their workflows by analyzing operational data that can help to enable them to streamline operations along with reducing resource wastage and enhancing overall productivity. Integrating real-time and low-latency data empowers businesses to make agile decisions, ensuring prompt adaptation to dynamic market shifts. Industries spanning manufacturing, logistics, and healthcare can reap significant benefits from this opportunity, resulting in cost savings and improved service delivery.

Predictive Analytics for Proactive Decision-making:

The integration of predictive analytics into big data strategies empowers industries to foresee future trends and outcomes (Stylos, Zwiegelaar & Buhalis, 2021). This predictive prowess holds applications across various sectors, from retail to finance. By analyzing historical data and identifying patterns, businesses can forecast demand, anticipate market shifts, and assess potential risks. Armed with these insights, organizations can make proactive decisions that minimize risks and capitalize on emerging opportunities. In sectors where timeliness is paramount, such as finance and supply chain management, predictive analytics offers a competitive edge.

Innovation and New Revenue Streams:

Big data serves as a wellspring of inspiration for innovation. Industries can leverage data-driven insights from customer feedback, market trends, and emerging technologies to create novel products and services. By identifying gaps in the market and understanding unmet needs, businesses can design solutions that resonate with consumers. These innovations not only open new revenue streams but also position organizations as market leaders. Industries as diverse as technology, healthcare, and agriculture can leverage this opportunity to foster disruptive ideas that cater to evolving demands.

Value Creation Using Big Data

Enhanced Decision-making and Insights:

Big data equips industries with a wealth of information that transcends traditional data sources. By amassing vast volumes of structured and unstructured data, businesses can extract actionable insights that drive informed decision-making (Ajah & Nweke, 2019). From consumer behavior patterns to market trends, big data analysis unveils previously hidden correlations and emerging opportunities. This heightened awareness empowers industries to make strategic choices grounded in empirical evidence, mitigating risks and optimizing outcomes. In sectors such as retail and finance, data-driven insights enable precision in understanding customer preferences and forecasting market shifts, ultimately shaping successful strategies.

Operational Efficiency and Process Optimization:

The integration of big data analytics facilitates the optimization of operational processes, delivering heightened efficiency and resource allocation. Through data-driven analysis, industries identify inefficiencies and bottlenecks that hinder productivity. This leads to targeted process improvements and streamlined workflows, translating into resource and cost savings. Moreover, real-time data feeds enable agile adjustments, enabling swift responses to market fluctuations. Industries such as manufacturing and logistics reap substantial benefits, achieving seamless coordination and reduced wastage through data-informed process enhancement.

Personalized Customer Experiences:

Big data revolutionizes customer engagement by enabling hyper-personalization. By analyzing vast datasets comprising customer behavior, preferences, and transaction history, businesses can tailor offerings to individual needs (Shahzad et al. 2023). This personalization extends to tailored marketing campaigns, product recommendations, and service interactions, enhancing customer satisfaction and loyalty. In industries like e-commerce and telecommunications, personalized experiences not only foster customer retention but also amplify cross-selling and upselling opportunities, consequently elevating revenue streams.

Innovation and New Revenue Streams:

Big data serves as a catalyst for innovation, propelling industries to develop groundbreaking products and services. By decoding customer feedback, market trends, and emerging technologies, businesses gain insights that steer novel offerings. This innovation not only fosters market differentiation but also creates new revenue streams. Industries ranging from healthcare to entertainment tap into big data to identify gaps in the market and devise disruptive solutions. This adaptability to evolving consumer demands positions businesses as pioneers in their sectors.

Porter’s Value Chain Analysis

Porter's Value Chain Analysis is a strategic framework that helps organizations dissect their operations into distinct activities and examine how each activity contributes to the creation of value for customers and, consequently, the organization as a whole (Ngunjiri & Ragui, 2020).

Porter's Value Chain Components:

Now, applying this analysis to the impact of four big data business drivers - structured data, unstructured data, low latency data, and predictive analytics - can offer valuable insights into how these drivers influence various stages of the value chain.

Support Activities:

1. Firm Infrastructure: Big data impacts strategic decision-making. Structured data provides historical performance insights, guiding long-term planning. Unstructured data can uncover emerging market trends and competitive intelligence, influencing strategic initiatives.

2. Human Resources: Big data assists in talent management. Structured data aids in identifying skill gaps and training needs. Unstructured data, such as employee feedback and sentiment analysis, offers insights into employee satisfaction and engagement.

3. Technology: Technology plays a pivotal role in handling big data. The integration of structured and unstructured data requires robust IT infrastructure. Low latency data ensures real-time data processing and analysis capabilities, enhancing decision-making speed.

4. Procurement: Big data enhances procurement processes (Bag et al. 2020). Structured data supports supplier performance evaluation, aiding in supplier selection. Unstructured data assists in supplier risk assessment by analyzing external factors that may impact the supply chain.

Applying the Value Chain Analysis: To illustrate, let's consider a retail business. The impact of big data drivers can be observed across the value chain. Structured data aids in optimizing inventory management and supplier relationships in inbound logistics. Low latency data ensures real-time monitoring of stock levels and customer preferences in operations. Predictive analytics forecasts demand patterns in marketing and sales which can create tailored promotions and inventory adjustments. Post-sale service benefits from unstructured data insights into customer feedback which aids in improving customer satisfaction.

Porter’s Five Forces Analysis

1. Competitive Rivalry:

Big data drivers have a profound impact on competitive rivalry within an industry. Structured data enables companies to analyze market trends along with customer preferences and competitive benchmarks which fosters strategic differentiation (Suoniemi et al. 2020). Unstructured data can provide insights into brand perception and competitive positioning such as social media sentiment. Businesses can anticipate shifts in customer demands by leveraging predictive analytics which can enhance their ability to innovate and stay ahead of competitors. Low latency data ensures real-time decision-making that allows businesses to respond promptly to competitive moves.

2. Supplier Power:

The utilization of big data drivers can reshape the dynamics of supplier power. Structured data aids in supplier evaluation which facilitates data-driven negotiations and contract terms. Unstructured data provides insights into supplier reputations that helps businesses make informed decisions. Low latency data enhances supply chain visibility which can reduce dependency on single suppliers (Singagerda, Fauzan & Desfiandi, 2022). Predictive analytics anticipates supplier performance and potential disruptions which allows proactive risk mitigation strategies.

3. Buyer Power:

Big data drivers impact buyer power by enabling businesses to tailor offerings to customer preferences. Structured data allows for customer segmentation and customized pricing strategies. Unstructured data offers insights into buyer sentiments that can influence marketing and product strategies. Predictive analytics helps forecast consumer demand which can allow businesses to adjust pricing and supply accordingly (Bharadiya, 2023). Low latency data ensures quick responses to changing buyer behaviors and preferences.

4. Threat of Substitution:

Big data drivers can influence the threat of substitution by enhancing customer loyalty. Structured data-driven insights enable businesses to create personalized experiences that are difficult for substitutes to replicate (Sjödin et al. 2021). Unstructured data offers insights into customer feedback and preferences which can provide support for continuous improvement and product differentiation. Predictive analytics anticipates customer needs in order to reduce the likelihood of customers seeking alternatives. Low latency data ensures quick adaptation to market shifts that can reduce the window of opportunity for substitutes.

5. Threat of New Entrants:

The incorporation of big data drivers can impact the threat of new entrants by raising barriers to entry. Structured data enables established businesses to capitalize on economies of scale and create efficient operations which makes it challenging for newcomers to compete. Unstructured data provides insights into customer preferences to support brand loyalty. Predictive analytics helps incumbents anticipate market trends which enable preemptive strategies against new entrants. Low latency data facilitates real-time responses to emerging threats which can reduce the vulnerability of established players.

Conclusion

The integration of big data drivers into business strategies represents a pivotal juncture in the ongoing digital transformation. The confluence of structured and unstructured data along with the power of low-latency data and predictive analytics can alters the fundamental fabric of industries. From optimizing processes to driving innovation, big data's imprint is visible across the value chain and competitive dynamics. As organizations harness this potential, they position themselves to thrive in an era where data-driven insights are the cornerstone of informed decision-making and sustainable growth. By embracing big data's capabilities, businesses are poised to navigate challenges, seize opportunities, and unlock the full spectrum of possibilities presented by the data-driven future. 

Part B

Dataset identification

The dataset includes several parameters which are related to the retail industry. The dataset focused on date-wise CPI and employment rate with the weekly holiday. The dataset can help to identify the consumer price index along with the employment rate in the retail industry and the impact of holidays on them. The dataset is openly available and consists of three data files in which the considered dataset is the ‘Featured data set’ (Kaggle, 2023). It can be identified as one of the most suitable datasets that have provided structured data in order to analyze different outcomes.

Metadata of The Chosen Dataset

The selected dataset pertains to the retail industry and encompasses parameters such as Store, Date, Temperature, Fuel_Price, and various MarkDown values (MarkDown1 to MarkDown5), along with CPI (Consumer Price Index), Unemployment rate, and IsHoliday indicator. This metadata provides crucial insights into the dataset's composition and relevance within the retail sector.

The "Store" parameter likely represents unique store identifiers, facilitating the segregation of data based on store locations. "Date" captures chronological information, potentially enabling the analysis of temporal trends and seasonality. "Temperature" and "Fuel_Price" suggest that weather conditions and fuel costs might influence retail performance, as these factors impact consumer behavior and purchasing patterns.

The "MarkDown" values could denote promotional discounts applied to products, aiding in assessing the impact of markdown strategies on sales. Parameters like CPI and Unemployment offer a macroeconomic context, possibly influencing consumer spending habits. The "IsHoliday" parameter indicates whether a given date corresponds to a holiday, offering insights into potential fluctuations in sales during holiday periods.

Business Opportunities Through The Chosen Dataset

The analytical findings indicating a lower average unemployment rate on holidays and a higher average Consumer Price Index (CPI) during holiday periods hold significant implications for the chosen industry. These insights unveil a range of strategic opportunities that the industry can capitalize on to drive growth, enhance customer experiences, and optimize its operations.

Figure 1: Consumer price index comparison
(Source: Author)

Increased Consumer Spending: The lower average unemployment rate on holidays suggests a potential uptick in consumer spending power during these periods. This provides a prime opportunity for the industry to design targeted marketing campaigns, exclusive offers, and attractive promotions. By aligning their product offerings and marketing strategies with consumers' improved financial situations, businesses can drive higher sales volumes and revenue.

Customized Product Assortments: The availability of higher disposable income on holidays opens the door to curating specialized product assortments. Retailers can introduce premium and luxury items, cater to aspirational purchases, and offer exclusive collections that cater to elevated consumer spending capacity. This approach enhances the perceived value of products and creates a unique shopping experience.

Figure 2: Unemployment rate comparison
(Source: Author)

Strategic Inventory Management: Capitalizing on the lower unemployment rate on holidays can drive retailers to anticipate increased foot traffic and online orders. This presents an opportunity for strategic inventory management. Businesses can optimize stock levels, ensure the availability of popular products, and align staffing resources to accommodate higher consumer demand, ultimately enhancing customer satisfaction.

Enhanced Customer Engagement: With a heightened CPI during holidays, businesses can strategically invest in enhancing customer experiences to match the anticipated premium pricing. This could involve personalized shopping assistance, concierge services, or engaging in-store events. Elevated customer engagement fosters brand loyalty and differentiates the business in a competitive market.

Dynamic Pricing Strategies: The observed correlation between higher CPI and holidays enables the adoption of dynamic pricing strategies. By leveraging these insights, the industry can implement flexible pricing models that respond to demand fluctuations. This approach optimizes revenue generation while maintaining alignment with consumer expectations and market trends.

References

DBFN212 Database Fundamentals Report 4 Sample

ASSESSMENT DESCRIPTION:

Students are required to analyse the weekly lecture material of weeks 1 to 11 and create concise content analysis summaries of the theoretical concepts contained in the course lecture slides.

Where the lab content or information contained in technical articles from the Internet or books helps to fully describe the lecture slide content, discussion of such theoretical articles or discussion of the lab material should be included in the content analysis.

The document structure is as follows (2500 Words):

1. Title Page

2. Introduction and Background (85 words)

3. Content analysis (reflective journals) for each week from 1 to 11 (2365 words; 215 words per week):

a. Theoretical Discussion

i. Important topics covered

ii. Definitions

b. Reflection on the Contents

i. Create a brief scenario and apply the database concept learnt on it. You can use the same scenario for every lecture or modify it if needed. (Note: For week 1, you can omit providing a scenario, instead give your interpretation of the concepts.)

c. Outcome

i. What was the objective of the database feature/concept learnt?
ii. How the learnt concept/feature improves your understanding of the database systems.

4. Conclusion (50 words)

Your report must include:

• At least five references, out of which, three references must be from academic resources.
• Harvard Australian referencing for any sources you use.
• Refer to the Academic Learning Skills student guide on Referencing

Solution

Introduction

It is significant to reflect on the overall learning as it assists in gaining better insight into what has been learned during the course. For Assignment Help, The present report aims to describe the primary aspects related to database technology and database management, and it also aims to critically evaluate database management and database technology. The report also aims to apply concepts related to transaction processing and concurrency in systems of multi-user database. The report also aims to analyse primary issues related to data retrieval, access, storage, privacy and ethics.

Content Analysis

Week 1

A. Theoretical Discussion

The unit assisted in developing better insight into how a professional career can be developed in the field of database management. The insight about various disadvantages of database systems was gained during the unit, and some of the disadvantages involve complexity in management, increased costs, dependence on the vendor, maintaining currency and frequent replacement and upgrade cycles (Naseri and Ludwig, 2010).

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned raw facts make up data, which is typically recorded in a database. The database structure is defined by database design. It's possible to categorise it based on the number of users, location, and data usage and structure. DBMSs were created to overcome the inherent flaws of the file system. Manual and electronic file systems gave way to databases. The administration of data in a file system has some constraints (Tan et al., 2019).

C. Outcome

The distinction between data and information was defined. There was a discussion about what a database is, the different varieties, and why they are important decision-making tools. Also saw how file systems evolved into current databases. Complete learning about the significance of database design was gathered. The major topic was the database system's main components. During the session learned the functions of a database management system in detail (DBMS).

Week 2

A. Theoretical Discussion

Different data views (local and global) and the level abstraction of data influence modeling of data requirements. In the real world a data model is a representation of a complicated data environment. The learning during the unit enhances knowledge of different database systems and models that are practically used by organisations in the business (Codd, 2015).

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned that data model of a complicated data environment is represented in the real world. Relational, network, hierarchical, extended relational data model, and object-oriented data models are only a few examples. There are multiple database models available, and some of the examples are Cassandra, CouchBase, CouchDB, HBase, Riak, Redis and MongoDB. The MongoDB database is used by e-commerce organisations like eBay and Tesco, whereas Amazon uses its own Amazon SimpleDB, which is a document-oriented database (Dong and Qin, 2018).

C. Outcome

Basic data modelling building elements were taught to the students. Data modelling and why data models are important were discussed during the unit. During the event, the participants had a deeper knowledge of how the key data models evolved. Business rules were developed by the tutor, along with how they affect database design. The teacher demonstrated how data models are classed according to their level of abstraction. In addition, the event showcased new alternative data models and the demands they address.

Week 3

A. Theoretical Discussion

A relational database's basic building pieces are tables. A large amount of the data manipulation effort is done behind the scenes by a relational database.

B. Reflection on the Contents

A database of relational nature organises the data which can be related or linked n the basis of common data to each of the unit and that is what I learned. This ability assists me in retrieving a completely new table from the information in one or more than one table with the help of a single query. The popular examples of standard databases of relational nature involve Oracle Database, Microsoft SQL Server, IBM and MySQL. The database of the cloud relational system involves Google Cloud SQUL, Amazon RDS (Relational Database Services) (Song et al., 2018).

C. Outcome

The tutor went through the core components of the relational model as well as the content, structures, and properties of a relational table. The teacher also went through how to manipulate relational table contents using relational database operators. The logical structure of the relational database model was discussed in class.

In a relational database, the function of indexing was explained. The teacher also showed how the relational database model handles data redundancy. The session began with the identification of acceptable entities, followed by a discussion of the relationships between the entities in the relational database model. The components and function of the data dictionary and system catalogue were covered in class.

Week 4

A. Theoretical Discussion

The ERM represents the conceptual database as seen by the end-user with ERDs. Database designers are frequently obliged to make design compromises, regardless of how effectively they can generate designs that adhere to all applicable modelling norms (Pokorny, 2016).

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned Conceptual data models at a high level provide ideas for presenting data in ways that are similar to how people see data. The entity-relationship model, which employs key concepts such as entities, attributes, and relationships, is a good example. The primary use of such data is done in the sales department of the business as it allows the people in business to view expenses data, sales data and to analyse total demand. It is also used in libraries where a system has the detail about the books, borrower entities and library (Das et al., 2019).

C. Outcome

The instructor explained how the database design process refines, defines, and incorporates relationships between entities. The teacher talked about the basic characteristics of entity-relationship components and how to investigate them. The impact of ERD components on database design and implementation was also examined. We learned about relationship components after finishing this chapter. There was some discussion about how real-world database design frequently necessitates the balancing of competing aims.

Week 5

A. Theoretical Discussion

Keys of surrogate primary are beneficial when there is no natural key that can be used as a primary key, the composite primary is the primary key that contains various data kinds, or when the primary key is too long to be used. Entity supertypes, subtypes, and clusters are used in the extended entity-relationship (EER) model to provide semantics to the ER model (Lang et al., 2019).

B. Reflection on the Contents

This is an example of a "sub-class" relationship which I developed after learning. We have four staff here: an engineer, a technician, and a secretary. The employee is the super-class of the other three sets of individual sub-classes, which are all subsets of the Employee set.

Employee 1001 will have the attributes eno, salary, typing speed and name because it is a sub-class entity that inherits all of the attributes of the super-class. A sub-class entity has a relationship with a super-class entity. For example, emp 1001 is a secretary with a typing speed of 68. Emp number 1009 is a sub-class engineer whose trade is "Electrical," and so on.

C. Outcome

The properties of good primary keys were discussed, as well as how to choose them. The unit aided in the comprehension of flexible solutions for unique data-modelling scenarios. In an entity-relationship diagram, the class learned about entity clusters, which are used to depict several entities and relationships (ERD). The instructor went over the key extended entity-relationship (EER) model constructs and how EERDs and ERDs represent them.

Week 6

A. Theoretical Discussion

The designer can use the data-modelling checklist to ensure that the ERD meets a set of basic standards. The more tables you have, the more I/O operations and processing logic you'll need to connect them.

B. Reflection on the Contents

Normalisation is a technique for creating tables with as few data redundancies as possible and I learned this during the module. When a table is in 2NF and has no transitive dependents, it is in 3NF. When a table is in 1NF and has no partial dependencies, it is in 2NF. When all, attributes are dependent and key attributes are defined on the primary key, a table is in 1NF.

C. Outcome

We understood the use of a checklist of data modelling to check that ERD meets a set of minimum demands. The teacher also assisted with investigations of situation that demands denormalisation to efficiently generate information. The class learned about the application of normalisation rules to correct structures of the table and to evaluate the structures of tables. The class discussed the role of normalisation in the process of designing data. The teacher also discussed the normal forms known as 4NF, 1NF, 2NF, BCNF and 3NF. The class discussed the way how normal forms can be transformed goes from lower average forms till the normal forms that are high.

Week 7

A. Theoretical Discussion

To limit the rows affected by a DDL command, use the WHERE clause with the UPDATE, SELECT, and DELETE commands. When it's necessary to process data depending on previously processed data, sub-queries and correlated queries are employed. Relational set operators in SQL allow you to combine the results of two queries to create a new relation (Alvanos Michalis, 2019).

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned that All RDBMS vendors support the ANSI standard data types in different ways. In SQL, the SELECT statement is the most used data retrieval instruction. Inner joins and outer joins are two types of table joining operations. A natural join avoids duplicate columns by returning all rows with matching values in the matching columns (Koch & König, 2018).

C. Outcome

In this week, we learned retrieval of specified columns from the data of a large database. The class learned about how to join different table in a single query of SQL. There was an in-depth discussion about the restriction of retrieval of data to rows that aligns with difficult sets of criteria. The class also learned about the aggregation of data through rows and their groups. The teacher helped us create preprocess data subqueries for the purpose of inclusion in other queries. In the class, we learned to use and identification of different functions of SQL for numeric, string and manipulation of data. There was a depth discussion about the crafting of queries in SELECT.

Week 8

A. Theoretical Discussion

A cursor is required when SQL statements in SQL/PL code are meant to return several values. A stored procedure is a set of SQL statements with a unique name. The SQL embedded refers to SQL statements use within an application of programming languages such as Visual Basic, NET, Java, COBOL or C# (Lindsay, 2019).

B. Reflection on the Contents

All RDBMS vendors support the ANSI standard data types in different ways. I learned Tables and indexes can be created using the basic data definition procedures. You can use data manipulation commands to add, change, and delete rows in tables. Sequences can be used to generate values to be allocated to records in Oracle and SQL Server. Views can be used to show end-users subsets of data, typically for security and privacy concerns (Raut, 2017).

C. Outcome

We learned to manipulate the data using SQL and also how to delete, update, insert rows of data) In the module, we also gained knowledge to create updatable and database views. SQL also helped me in creating tables through the use of subquery. Throughout the module, we learned to modify, add and remove the tables, constraints and columns. The database views are created using SQL by including updatable views. Also, by studying the whole module, we learned the use of procedural language that is SQL/PL to create, store, triggers and SQL/PL functions. Also, the module taught me to create embedded SQL.

Week 9

A. Theoretical Discussion

An information system is intended to assist in the transformation of data into information as well as the management of information and data both. The SDLC (Systems Development Life Cycle) chronicles an application's journey through the information system (Mykletun and Tusdik, 2019).

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned the SDLC (systems development life cycle) is a conceptual model that is used in the management of a project that discusses the involved stages in a development project of the information system from an initial study of feasibility through completed application maintenance. The SDLC can be made use of systems that are not technical and technical (Omollo and Alago, 2020).

C. Outcome

The module helped in enhancing knowledge about database design to build up the information system. The five phases are also explained about the System Development Life Cycle. The module explained the six phases in the designing of the database life cycle framework. The revision and evaluation within the DBLC and SDLC framework were learned. We learned bottom-up and top-down approaches in designing the database. Also, the module helped in distinguishing between decentralised and centralised in conceptualising the designing of the database.

Week 10

A. Theoretical Discussion

COMMIT, which saves changes to disc, and ROLLBACK, which restores the database which is set previously, are two SQL statements that support transactions. Concurrency control coordinates the execution of many transactions at the same time. The transactions have four major elements that are consistency, atomicity, durability and location. Database recovery returns a database to a previous consistent state from a given state.

B. Reflection on the Contents

I learned the recovery management in the DBMS allows to restores the database to correct conditioning of functioning and restarting the transactions of processing. The aim of database transaction maintenance integrity is to make sure there are no changes that are unauthorised changes that happen either through system error or user interaction (Semancik, 2019).

C. Outcome

The management process has helped me in gaining database transactions. The module described the various properties of transactions through the database. During the unit concurrency control in maintaining the integrity of the database. Also, the locking methods are taught during the lecture that can be used in concurrency control. In the lecture, we gained knowledge related to stamping methods for the control of concurrency. In the sessions, optimistic methods are used for controlling the concurrency. Also, the module explained the transaction isolation at the ANSI level. The module also discussed the recovery of the database in managing the integrity of the database.

Week 11

A. Theoretical Discussion

SQL data services (SDS) are a data management service cloud computing-based that offers enterprises of all sizes relational storage of data, local management, and ubiquitous access. The Extensible Markup Language (XML) promotes B2B and other data exchanges over the Internet (Jones, 2019).

B. Reflection on the Contents

Microsoft database connectivity interfaces are market leaders, with support from the majority of database manufacturers. I learned the connection interface offered by the database exclusive and vendor to that vendor is referred to as native database connectivity. The means by which application programmes connect to and communicate with data repositories are referred to as database connection.

C. Outcome

In the class, there was an explanation of standard interfaces of database connectivity. The teacher described the features and functionality of various connectivity technologies of the database. There was a discussion of OLE, ODBC, ADO.NET and JDBC. In class, there was an in-depth discussion about how database middleware which is used to integrate database through the use of the Internet. The teacher also helped to identify the services provided by servers of the web application. The teacher also discussed how XML (Extensible Markup Language) is used for the development of web database (Sharma et al., 2018).

Conclusion

The report described primary database management and technology aspects. The report also critically evaluated the database technology and data management. The report also applied concepts related to the processing of transaction and concurrency in systems of multi-user database. The report also focused on evaluating major challenges related to access, retrieval, privacy, ethics and storage.

References

MITS4003 Database Systems Report 3 Sample

Objectives(s)

This assessment item relates to the unit learning outcomes as in the unit descriptor. This assessment is designed to improve student knowledge through further research on recent trends to demonstrate competence in tasks related to modelling, designing, implementing a DBMS, Data Warehousing, Data management, Database Security. Also, to enhance students experience in researching a topic based on the learning outcomes they acquired during lectures, activities, assignment 1 and assignment 2. Furthermore, to evaluate their ability to identify the latest research trends and writing a report relevant to the Unit of Study subject matter. This assessment covers the following LOs.

1. Synthesize user requirements/inputs and analyse the matching data processing needs, demonstrating adaptability to changing circumstances;

2. Develop an enterprise data model that reflects the organization's fundamental business rules; refine the conceptual data model, including all entities, relationships, attributes, and business rules.

3. Derive a physical design from the logical design taking into account application, hardware, operating system, and data communications networks requirements; further use of data manipulation language to query, update, and manage a database

4. Identify functional dependencies, referential integrity, data integrity and security requirements; Further integrate and merge physical design by applying normalization techniques;

5. Design and build a database system using the knowledge acquired in the unit as well as through further research on recent trends to demonstrate competence in various advanced tasks with regard to modelling, designing, and implementing a DBMS including Data warehousing, Data Management, DB Security.

Note: Group Assignment. Maximum 4 students are allowed in a group.

INSTRUCTIONS

These instructions apply to both the Report and Presentation assessments. For this component you will be required to select a published research article / academic paper which must cover one or more of the topics including Database modelling, designing, and implementing a DBMS including Data warehousing, Data Management, DB Security, Data Mining or Data Analysis. The paper you select must be directly relevant to these topics. The paper can be from any academic conference or other relevant Journal or online sources such as Google Scholar, academic department repositories etc. All students are encouraged to select a different paper; and it must be approved by your lecturer or tutor before proceeding. In case two groups are wanting to present on the same paper, the first who emails the lecturer or tutor with their choice will be allocated that paper.

Report - 20% (Due week 12)

For this component you will prepare a report or critique on the paper you chose as mentioned above. Your report should be limited to approx. 1500 words (not including references).

Use 1.5 spacing with a 12-point Times New Roman font. Though your paper will largely be based on the chosen article, you can use other sources to support your discussion. Citation of sources is mandatory and must be in the Harvard style.

Your report or critique must include:

Title Page: The title of the assessment, the name of the paper you are reviewing and its authors, and your name and student ID.

Introduction: A statement of the purpose for your report and a brief outline of how you will discuss the selected article (one or two paragraphs). Make sure to identify the article being reviewed.

Body of Report: Describe the intention and content of the article. Discuss the research method (survey, case study, observation, experiment, or other method) and findings. Comment on problems or issues highlighted by the authors. Discuss the conclusions of the article and how they are relevant to what you are studying this semester.

Conclusion: A summary of the points you have made in the body of the paper. The conclusion should not introduce any ‘new’ material that was not discussed in the body of the paper. (One or two paragraphs)

References: A list of sources used in your text. Follow the IEEE style. The footer must include your name, student ID, and page number.

Solution

Introduction

The article “An overview of end-to-end entity resolution for big data.“ will give a brief description of the entity resolution for big data which is being rebuked and critically analyzed. The paper will provide a comprehensive view that includes the field of entity resolution and focus on the application with context to big data. For Assignment Help, This research article will propose the framework or the entity resolution on behalf of big data which entitles the identification and collapse of records in real-world entities. This Framework will also design and challenge the proposed big data on behalf of different considering techniques and evaluating the proposed Framework with the help of real-world data sets. This article will cover topics such as database modeling data management and data analysis. It will be more relevant to the topics that will be presented by the framework to design and implement the system which can handle the challenges of Designing and considering the entity resolution more accurately and efficiently.

The intention of the Article

The article is likely to produce the intention of the comprehensive view and analysis which will be conducted on the end entity resolution and the techniques that are specifically organized and implemented for the big data scenarios.

- The research also leads to the importance and the challenges that are been faced while using data resolution to solve the big data issues. The accurate integration of the data and cleansing is been applied so that the impact of data characteristics can be processed on the entity resolution [6].

- The article also explores the Different techniques and approaches that will be used in resolving the big data which will be implemented with the help of rule base methods such as machine learning algorithms or probabilistic models to design and handle the big data.

- The data preprocessing is also been covered for the effective and necessary entity resolution in the big data. This also includes the normalization and analysis of the data warehouse to propose the data modeling for high-quality results.

- The article also optimizes the scalability and the efficiency of the data that is been analyzed to explore the techniques in parallel and distributed processing. The data partitioning with the entity resolution process plays a major role when it comes to the large-scale data set.

- The evaluation and the applications of the case study also play a major role in the resolution of the techniques that leads to the successful implementation of big data scenarios such as various domains of Healthcare or e-commerce.

Survey

- The author has specified the big data error concerning the government and the specific organization that increases the internal and external aspects.

- The Entity resolution mainly AIMS to the real-world entity that is been structured and stored in the relational tables of the big data to consider the scenarios.

- The author has illustrated the description of the movie directors and the places from the different knowledge bases and the entity description is being defected in the tabular format.

- The classification of the pairs and the description is being assumed to process the in-compasses task and indexing to match the data.

Figure 1 Movies, Directors, and Locations from DBpedia (blue) and Freebase (red). Note that e1, e2, e3 and e4 match with e7, e5, e6 and e8, respectively.

- The author includes the survey about the big data characteristics which shows the algorithm and the implemented task and the workflow of the data. This includes the volume variety velocity as the characteristics of the big data [2].

Case Study Based on Data Modelling and Data Analytics

- The big data entry resolution considered the case study about the continuous concern and improving the scalability of this technique for increasing the volume of entities using the massively parallel implementations with the help of data Modelling and analysis.

- The Entity description is being evaluated with high veracity which is been resolved by matching the Data Analytics value and traditionally duplicating the techniques. With the help of analysis the conceived processing of the structure data can be educated pre-process to data warehouse and enhanced the blocking keys to rule the different types of challenging data.

- The below figure depicts the different types of similarities and the entities with the benchmark data set and considered the restaurant or other key parameters that are involved with the dot corresponding to each other of the matching pair [4].

- The horizontal accessing of the similarity is described with the vertical and maximum similarities are based on the entity neighbors. The value-based similarities are being proposed on the big data entities which are being used to improvise the data quality and the data modeling techniques to compile the integrity of the data management.

Figure 2 Value and neighbor similarity distribution of matching entities in 4 established, real-world datasets.

Observations

- Data Modelling

The article considered data modeling as an approach for entity resolution in the context of big data. As this covered the techniques of representing the structure data which help in capturing the attributes and relationship with the attitude resolution. The schema design and the data integration also play a major role in the data representation of formulating big data [1].

- Data Analysis

The technique leads to the discussion and the observation of measuring the feature extraction and statistical methods which help in comparison the matching the entities. This also covers the algorithm which is based on machine learning and the data mining to the employee or deploying the Entity resolution with the clustering and classification models.

- Data Management

The Strategies and processing of the large data is been managed during the entity resolution process. This technique leads to the handling of noise and inconsistency with the missing values of the big data full stop this also leads to the exploring the index and the storage mechanism which help in facilitating the retrieval of the matching entity full stop the parallel and the distributed processing leads to the scalability and challenging resolution of the big data.

Conflicts or Issues

- Heterogenous Data Sources

The environment of the analyzing technique and big data necessitate the diversification of sources, such as databases and sensor networks. The entities' integrity and rec counseling have been viewed as a problem or conflict to suggest difficulties arising from differences in data formats and schemas [5].

- Dimensionality

The numerical attribute or features needed to handle dimensional data are the data and entities' dimensions. In order to avoid the dimensionality curse, the most effective method is taken into consideration, as are the featured engineers and other computations.

- Computational Efficiency

The entity resolution is being performed and processed with the computational demand of the algorithms which are considered as the contract of parallel processing technique. This distributed computational and the Framework are necessary which achieve the scalability and entity of the big data.

Similarities of research with the Study of Semester

- As the research is been considered the similarity of developing the knowledge regarding the user requirements and analysis to match the data and processing the needs to demonstrate the circumstances.

- With the help of this research, the enterprise data model and the reflects fundamental business rule is being conceptually Defined by the data modeling which includes the attribute and the business rules.

- The physical designing and the logical designing is been taken under the implementation to account for the communication with the network requirement and manipulating the language to manage the database [3].

- The identification of the functionality and its dependency is the referential integration and the Data integrity to provide the security requirements for merging the physical design and applying the normalization technique.

- The building of the database and the knowledge is being acquired by further research to demonstrate the competency in the Advanced Task of modeling and designing the implementation of data warehouse and Management.

Conclusion

The report has deeply explained about the theoretical aspect of the and to end resolution of the big data with the implementation methodology of data Modelling and analysis to manage the data. The specific methodology and case study has been considered in the article with the general representation of the concluded entity and algorithms that is been applied. The problem has been observed with the recent years of data-intensive and the description of the real world entities with the government or the corporate-specific data sources for stop the view of entity resolution with the engineering aspect and the task has also been implemented as a theoretical aspect of considering the certain algorithms. The big data and the area of open-world systems have also allowed the different blocking and matching algorithms to easily integrate the third-party tools for data exploration and sampling the Data Analytics.

References

TITP105 The IT Professional Report Sample

COURSE: Bachelor of Information Technology

Assessment Task:

Students are required to analyse the weekly lecture material of weeks 1 to 11 and create concise content analysis summaries of the theoretical concepts contained in the course lecture slides.

ASSESSMENT DESCRIPTION:

Students are required to analyse the weekly lecture material of weeks 1 to 11 and create concise content analysis summaries (reflective journal report) of the theoretical concepts contained in the course lecture slides. Where the lab content or information contained in technical articles from the Internet or books helps to fully describe the lecture slide content, discussion of such theoretical articles or discussion of the lab material should be included in the content analysis.

The document structure is as follows (3500 Words):

1. Title Page

2. Introduction (100 words)

3. Background (100 words)

4. Content analysis (reflective journals) for each week from 1 to 11 (3200 words; approx. 300 words per week):

a. Theoretical Discussion

i. Important topics covered

ii. Definitions

b. Interpretations of the contents

i. What are the most important/useful/relevant information about the content?

c. Outcome

i. What have I learned from this?

5. Conclusion (100 words)

Your report must include:

• At least five references, out of which, three references must be from academic resources.
• Harvard Australian referencing for any sources you use.
• Refer to the Academic Learning Skills student guide on Referencing.

Solution

1. Introduction

The main aim to write this reflective journal report is to analyse the lectures of weeks 1 to 11 regarding ethics in information technology. This reflective journal will describe various roles for IT professionals and social, personal, legal and ethical impacts arising from their work. The role of the professional associations which are available to IT professionals will also be described in this reflective journal. For Assignment Help, It will assess the relationship between IT professionals and the issues of governance, ethics and corporate citizenship. I will critically analyse and review the IT professional Codes of Conduct and Codes of Ethics in this reflective journal report. This will help to develop a personal ethical framework.

2. Background

Technology offers various opportunities and benefits to people worldwide. However, it also gives the risk of abolishing one's privacy. Information technology must conduct business or transfer Information from one place to another in today's era. With the development of Information Technology, the ethics in information technology has become important as information technology can harm one's Intellectual property rights. Ethics among IT professionals can be defined as their attitude in order to complete something base on their behaviour. IT professionals need to have high ethics to process the data to control, manage, analyse, maintain, control, design, store and implement. Information Technology professionals face several challenges in their profession. It is their role and responsibility to solve these issues. The ethics of information technology professionals guide them to handle these issues in their work.

3. Content analysis

Week 1

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In week 1, an overview of Ethics was discussed. Ethicalbehaviouris generally accepted norms that evolve according to the evolving needs of the society or social group who share similar values, traditions and laws. Morals are the personal principles that guide an individual to make decisions about right and wrong (Reynolds, 2018). On the other hand, the law is considered as a system of rules which guide and control an individual to do work.

ii. Definitions

Corporate Social Responsibility: Corporate social responsibility adheres to organisational ethics. It is a concept of management that aims to integrate social and environmental concerns for promoting well-being through business operations (Carroll and Brown, 2018, p. 39). Organisational ethics and employee morale lead to greater productivity for managing corporate social responsibility.

b. Interpretation

The complex work environment in today's era makes it difficult to implement Codes of Ethics and principles regarding this in the workplace. In this context, the idea of Corporate Social Responsibility comes. CSR is the continuing commitment by a business that guides them to contribute in the economic development and in ethical behaviour which have the potentiality to improve the life quality and living of the employees and local people (Kumar, 2017,p. 5). CSR and good business ethics must create an organisation that operates consistently and fosters well-structured business practices.

c. Outcome

From these lectures in the 1st week, I have learned the basic concepts of ethics and their role and importance in business and organisation. There are several ways to improve business ethics in an organisation by establishing a Corporate code of ethics, establishing a board of directors to set high ethical standards, conducting social audits and including ethical quality criteria in their organisation's employee appraisal. I have also learned the five-step model of ethical decision making by defining the problem, identifying alternatives, choosing an alternative, implementing the final decisions and monitoring the outcomes.

Week 2

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In the 2nd week, the ethics for IT professionals and IT users were discussed. IT workers are involved in several work relationships with employers, clients, suppliers, and other professionals. The key issues in the relationship between the IT workers and the employer are setting and implementing policies related to the ethical use of IT, whistleblowing and safeguarding trade secrets. The BSA |The Software Alliance and Software and Information Industry Association (SIIA) trade groups represent the world's largest hardware and software manufacturers. Their main aim is to prevent unauthorised copying of software produced by their members.

ii. Definition

Whistle-blowing refers to the release of information unethically by a member or a former member of an organisation which can cause harm to the public interest(Reynolds, 2018). For example, it occurs when an employee reveals that their company is undergoing inappropriate activities (Whistleblowing: balancing on a tight rope, 2021).

b. Interpretation

The key issues in the relationship between IT workers and clients are preventing fraud, misinterpretation, the conflict between client's interests and IT workers' interests. The key issues in the relationship between the IT workers and the suppliers are bribery, separation of duties and internal control. IT professionals need to monitor inexperienced colleagues, prevent inappropriate information sharing and demonstrate professional loyalty in their workplace. IT workers also need to safeguard against software piracy, inappropriate information sharing, and inappropriate use of IT resources to secure the IT users' privacy and Intellectual property rights and ethically practice their professions so that their activities do not harm society and provide benefits to society.

c. Outcome

I have learnt the various work relationships that IT workers share with suppliers, clients, IT users, employers and other IT professionals.

Week 3

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In week 3, the ethics for IT professionals and IT users further discussed extensively, and the solutions to solve several issues that IT professionals’ faces were discussed. IT professionals need to have several characteristics to face these issues and to solve them effectively. These characteristics are the ability to produce high-quality results, effective communication skills, adhere to high moral and ethical standards and have expertise in skills and tools.

ii. Definition

A professional code of ethics is the set of principles that guide the behaviour of the employees in a business(Professional code of ethics [Ready to use Example] | Workable, 2021). It helps make ethical decisions with high standards of ethical behaviour, access to an evaluation benchmark for self-assessment, and trust and respect with the general public in business organisations.

b. Interpretation

Licensing and certification increase the effectiveness and reliability of information systems. IT professionals face several ethical issues in their jobs like inappropriate sharing of information, software piracy and inappropriate use of computing resources.

c. Outcome

I have learned several ways that organisations use to encourage the professionalism of IT workers. A professional code of ethics is used for the improvement of the professionalism of IT workers. I have learnt several ways to improve their ethical behaviour by maintaining a firewall, establishing guidelines for using technology, structuring information systems to protect data and defining an AUP.

Week 4

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In week 4, the discussion was focused on the intellectual property and the measurements of the organisations to take care of their intellectual properties. Intellectual property is the creations of the mind, like artistic and literary work, inventions, symbols and designs used in an organisation. There are several ways to safeguard an organisation's intellectual property by using patents, copyright, trademark and trade secret law.

ii. Definition

A patent is an exclusive right to the owner of the invention about the invention, and with the help of that the owner have the full power to decide that the how the inventios will be used in future(Reynolds, 2018). Due to the presence of Digital Millennium Copyright Act, the access of technology protected works has become illegal.. It limits the liability of ISPs for copyright violation by their consumers. Trademarks are the signs which distinguish the goods and services of an organisation from that of other organisations. There are several acts that protect Trademarks secrets, such as theEconomic Espionage Act and Uniform Trade Secrets Acts.

b. Interpretation

Open-source code can be defined by any program which have the available source code for modification or use. Competitive intelligence refers to a systematic process initiated by an organisation to gather and analyse information about the economic and socio-political environment and the other competitors of the organisation (Shujahat et al. 2017, p. 4). Competitive intelligence analysts must avoid unethical behaviours like misinterpretation, lying, bribery or theft. Cybercasters register domain names for famous company names or trademarks with no connection, which is completely illegal.

c. Outcome

I have learnt several current issues related to the protection of intellectual property, such asreverse engineering,competitive intelligence,cybersquatting, and open-source code. For example, reverse engineering breaks something down to build a copy or understand it or make improvements. Plagiarism refers to stealing someone's ideas or words without giving them credits.

Week 5

a. Theoretical Discussion

i. Important topics covered

The ethics of IT organisations include legal and ethical issues associated with contingent workers. Overview of whistleblowing and ethical issues associated with whistleblowing is being addressed (Reynolds, 2018). Green computing is the environmental and eco-friendly use of resources and technology(Reynolds, 2018). In this topic, there is the definition of green computing and what is initially the organisations are taking to adopt this method.

ii. Definition

Offshore Outsourcing: This is a process of outsourcing that provides services to employees currently operating in a foreign country(Reynolds, 2018). Sometimes the service is provided to different continents. In the case of information technology, the offshore outsourcing process is common and effective. It generally takes place when the company shifts some parts or all of its business operation into another country for lowering cost and improving profit.

b. Interpretation

The most relevant information about the context is whistleblowing and green computing. Whistleblowing is the method of drawing public attention to understand unethical activity and misconduct behaviour within private, public, and third sector organisations (HRZone. 2021).

c. Outcome

After reading the book, I have learned that green computing and whistleblowing are vital factors for the organisation's work. I have also learned about the diverse workforce in tech firms and the factors behind the trend towards independent contractors—the need and effect of H1-B workers in the organisation. Furthermore, the legal and ethical issues associated with green computing and whistleblowing have also been made.

Week 6

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In this chapter, the importance of software quality and important strategies to develop a quality system. Software quality is defined as the desirable qualities of software products. Software quality consists of two main essential approaches include quality attributes and defect management. Furthermore, the poor-quality software also caused a huge problem in the organisation (Reynolds, 2018). The development model including waterfall and agile development methodology. Lastly, the capability maturity model integration which is a process to improve the process.

ii. Definition

System-human interface: The system-human interface helps improve user experience by designing proper interfaces within the system(Reynolds, 2018). The process facilitates better interaction between users and machines. It is among the critical areas of system safety. The system performance depends largely upon the system-human interface. The interaction between humans and the system takes place through an interaction process. Better interaction improves UX.

b. Interpretation

The useful information about the context is the software quality and the important strategies to improve the quality of software. The Capability Maturity Model Integration is the next generation of CMM, and it is the more involved model incorporating the individual disciplines of CMM like system engineering CMM and people CMM (GeeksforGeeks. 2021).

c. Outcome

After reading the context, I have concluded that software quality is one of the essential elements for the development of business. The software derives predictability from improving productivity in the business. The software quality decreases the rework, and the product and services are delivered on time. The theories and facts that are involved in developing the strategies that are involved in developing the software quality in the organisation.

Week 7

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In this context, it will discuss privacy, which is one of the most important features for the growth and development of individuals and organisations. The right, laws, and various strategies to mitigate ethical issues are adopted (Reynolds, 2018). The e-discovery can be defined as the electronic aspect ofidentifying, collecting, and producing electronically stored information for the production of investigation and lawsuit.

ii. Definition

Right of Privacy: The privacy of information and confidentiality of vital information comes under the right of privacy(Reynolds, 2018). In information technology, the privacy right helps in managing the access control and provides proper security to the user and system information. This also concerns the right not to disclose an individual's personal information to the public.

b. Interpretation

The most relevant in the context are privacy laws that are responsible for the protection of individual and organisation's rights. The protection laws include the European Union data protection directive, organisation for economic cooperation and development, and general data protection regulation that protect the data and information of the individual and company (Reynolds, 2018). Furthermore, the key and anonymity issues that exist in the workplace like cyberloafing. The employees exercised the practice to use the internet access for personal use without doing their work.

c. Outcome

I have learned from this context that privacy is required for every organisation to protect the private information about the personal information and credentials that are present in the company—privacy along with developed technology that secures the data and information about the organisation. I have also got information about the ways and technological development to protect the data.

Week 8

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In this context, it is discussed freedom of expression, meaning the right to hold information and share decisions without any interference. Some of the vital issues of freedom of expression include controlling access to information on the internet, censorship to certain videos on the internet, hate speech,anonymity on the internet, pornography, and eradication of fake news often relevant on the internet (Reynolds, 2018).

ii. Definition

Freedom of Expression: Freedom of expression denotes the ability to express the thoughts, beliefs, ideas, and emotions of an individual or a group (Scanlon, 2018, p. 24). It is under the government censorship which promotes the right to express and impart information regardless of communication borders which include oral, written, the art of any other form.

b. Interpretation

The most important information regarding the context is John Doe Lawsuits. It is a law that helps to identify the anonymous person who is exercising malicious behaviour like online harassment and extortion. Fake news about any information that is irrelevant, which are however removed by several networking websites. However, the fake news sites and social media websites are shared by several videos and images cause confusion and misinterpretation regarding a particular subject (Reynolds, 2018).

c. Outcome

After reading the book, I have concluded that the internet is a wide platform where several malicious practices are carried out, like fake news, hate speech, and many other practices practised on the internet. I have also gained information about several laws and regulations to protect the right and regulations on the internet, including the telecommunication act 1996 and the communication decency act 1997.

Week 9

a. Theoretical discission

i. Important topics covered

In this context, it will be discussed about cyberattacks and cybersecurity. Cyberattacks are an assault launched by an anonymous individual from one or more computers using several network chains (Reynolds, 2018). A cyber-attack can steal personal information a can disable the computer. On the other hand, cybersecurity is the practice of protecting information from cyberattacks. There are several methods to protect the internet from malware, viruses and threats.

ii. Definition

Cyber espionage: This is the process of using computer networks for gaining illicit access to confidential information(Reynolds, 2018). The malicious practice increases the risk of data breaching. It steals sensitive data or intellectual property, typically preserved by a government entity or an organisation (Herrmann, 2019, p. 94). Cyber espionage is a threat to IT companies, especially as it targets the digital networks for information hacking.

b. Interpretation

The most important aspect in this context is intrusion detection system, proxy servers like a virtual private network. The intrusion detection system is the software that alerts the servers during the detection of network traffic issues. The proxy servers act as an intermediator between the web browser and another web server on the internet. The virtual private network enables the user to access the organisation's server and use the server to share data by transmitting and encryption over the Internet (Reynolds, 2018).

c. Outcome

After reading the entire context, I have gained information about several cyberattacks and cybersecurity. Cyber attackers like crackers, black hat hackers, malicious insiders, cyberterrorists, and industrial spies (Reynolds, 2018). Cybersecurity like CIA security trial. Department of homeland security, an agency for safer and secure America against cyber threats and cyberterrorism. The transport layer security is the organisation to secure the internet from cyber threats between the communicating application and other users on the Internet (Reynolds, 2018).

Week 10

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

In this context, it is discussed about social media and essential elements associated with social media. Social media can be defined as modern technology that enhances the sharing of thoughts, ideas, and information after establishing various networks and communities (Reynolds, 2018). Several companies adopt social media marketing to sell their services and products on the internet by creating several websites across the Internet.

ii. Definition

Earned Media: It is observed in brand promotions in organisations where media awareness awarded through promotion(Reynolds, 2018). It is also considered the organic media, which may include television interviews, online articles, and consumer-generated videos. It is not a paid media; rather, it is voluntarily awarded to any organisation. The earned media value is calculated through website referrals, message resonance, mentions, and article quality scores.

b. Interpretation

The most important aspect of social media marketing where the internet is used to promote products and services. As per the sources, global social media marketing spends nearly doubled from 2014 to 2016, increasing from 15$ billion to 30$ billion—organic media marketing and viral marketing as one important aspect of social media marketing.

c. Outcome

I have gained much information about social media and elements of social media marketing, which encourages marketers to sell their products and services to another individual across the internet. Social media is a vast platform that has both advantages and disadvantages aspect. The issues regarding social media including social networking ethical issues that are causing harmful threats and emotional distress on the individual. There is a solution to these issues, which is adopted by several organisations like fighter cyberstalking, stalking risk profile, and many more.

Week 11

a. Theoretical discussion

i. Important topics covered

This context will eventually discuss the impact of information technology on society. The information impacts the gross domestic product and standard of living of people residing in developed countries. Information technology has made the education system more productive and effective. The process of e-learning has allowed the students to study from their homes. The health care system is also affected by information technology.

ii. Definition

Robotics: It is the design and construction of machines (robots) for performing tasks done by human beings (Malik and Bilberg, 2018, p. 282). It promotes autonomous machine operating systems for easing the burden and complexity of human labour. In this case, artificial intelligence helps to improve the development process of machines by incorporating the machine learning process. Automobile manufacturing industries use robotics design for safeguarding humans from environmental hazards.

b. Interpretation

The most information aspect of the topic is the artificial intelligence and machine learning have impacted the growth of IT. Artificial intelligence includes data and human intelligence processes that include activities like learning, reasoning, and self-correction. Machine learning is the process to talk with the technology through machine languages.

c. Outcome

I have gained much information about information technology and its impact on the organisation and people. The innovation and development occurred vastly due to the effect of social media.

4. Conclusion

It is to be concluded that this reflective journal report describes all the aspects of ethics in information technology by providing an understanding of the ethical, legal and social implications of information technology that IT professionals need to nurture in their professional work. Critical analysis of the privacy, freedom of expression, common issues of IT professionals, solutions of these issues are reflected in this journal report. The journal report also attempts to address the ethical issues in the IT workplace. An understanding of IT and ethics needed in IT professionals to achieve success is reflected in this journal report.

References

BDA601 Big Data and Analytics Report Sample

Task Summary

Customer churn, also known as customer attrition, refers to the movement of customers from one service provider to another. It is well known that attracting new customers costs significantly more than retaining existing customers. Additionally, long-term customers are found to be less costly to serve and less sensitive to competitors’ marketing activities. Thus, predicting customer churn is valuable to telecommunication industries, utility service providers, paid television channels, insurance companies and other business organisations providing subscription-based services. Customer-churn prediction allows for targeted retention planning.

In this Assessment, you will build a machine learning (ML) model to predict customer churn using the principles of ML and big data tools.

As part of this Assessment, you will write a 1,000-word report that will include the following:

a) A predictive model from a given dataset that follows data mining principles and techniques;

b) Explanations as to how to handle missing values in a dataset; and

c) An interpretation of the outcomes of the customer churn analysis.

Please refer to the Task Instructions (below) for details on how to complete this task.

Task Instructions

1. Dataset Construction

Kaggle telco churn dataset is a sample dataset from IBM, containing 21 attributes of approximately 7,043 telecommunication customers. In this Assessment, you are required to work with a modified version of this dataset (the dataset can be found at the URL provided below). Modify the dataset by removing the following attributes: MonthlyCharges, OnlineSecurity, StreamingTV, InternetService and Partner.

As the dataset is in .csv format, any spreadsheet application, such as Microsoft Excel or Open Office Calc, can be used to modify it. You will use your resulting dataset, which should comprise 7,043 observations and 16 attributes, to complete the subsequent tasks. The ‘Churn’ attribute (i.e., the last attribute in the dataset) is the target of your churn analysis. Kaggle.com. (2020). Telco customer churn—IBM sample data sets. Retrieved from https://www.kaggle.com/blastchar/telco-customer-churn [Accessed 05 August 2020].

2. Model Development

From the dataset constructed in the previous step, present appropriate data visualisation and descriptive statistics, then develop a ‘decision-tree’ model to predict customer churn. The model can be developed in Jupyter Notebook using Python and Spark’s Machine Learning Library (Pyspark MLlib). You can use any other platform if you find it more efficient. The notebook should include the following sections:

a) Problem Statement

In this section, briefly state the context and the problem you will solve in the notebook.

b) Exploratory Data Analysis

In this section, perform both a visual and statistical exploratory analysis to gain insights about the dataset.

c) Data Cleaning and Feature Selection

In this section, perform data pre-processing and feature selection for the model, which you will build in the next section.

d) Model Building

In this section, use the pre-processed data and the selected features to build a ‘decision-tree’ model to predict customer churn.

In the notebook, the code should be well documented, the graphs and charts should be neatly labelled, the narrative text should clearly state the objectives and a logical justification for each of the steps should be provided.

3. Handling Missing Values

The given dataset has very few missing values; however, in a real-world scenario, data- scientists often need to work with datasets with many missing values. If an attribute is important to build an effective model and have significant missing values, then the data-scientists need to come up with strategies to handle any missing values.

From the ‘decision-tree’ model, built in the previous step, identify the most important attribute. If a significant number of values were missing in the most important attribute column, implement a method to replace the missing values and describe that method in your
report.

4. Interpretation of Churn Analysis

Modelling churn is difficult because there is inherent uncertainty when measuring churn. Thus, it is important not only to understand any limitations associated with a churn analysis but also to be able to interpret the outcomes of a churn analysis.

In your report, interpret and describe the key findings that you were able to discover as part of your churn analysis. Describe the following facts with supporting details:

• The effectiveness of your churn analysis: What was the percentage of time at which your analysis was able to correctly identify the churn? Can this be considered a satisfactory outcome? Explain why or why not;

• Who is churning: Describe the attributes of the customers who are churning and explain what is driving the churn; and

• Improving the accuracy of your churn analysis: Describe the effects that your previous steps, model development and handling of missing values had on the outcome of your churn analysis and how the accuracy of your churn analysis could be improved.

Solution

INTRODUCTION

Customers are the important entities of any organization that help them to make business and profit. So, every organization should have an intention to attract more customers in order to gain more profit. For Assignment Help, If the customers will be satisfied with the service, they will be retained in the business of the organization otherwise attrition may be seen (Eduonix, 2018). This is called customer churning that defines whether the customer has been retained or attrited from the business. In this paper, customer attrition will be determined with the application of machine learning.

1 COLLECTION OF CUSTOMER CHURN DATA

The data has been collected from Kaggle regarding customer churn (BlastChar, 2017). The data contains the records of those customers who have left the company and for those also who have retained with the company by taking services and purchasing goods. The Data is shown below:

Fig-1: Customer Churn Dataset

Initially, after collecting the data, it has been seen that the data contains 7043 instances or rows and 21 features or columns. The number of rows and columns are shown below:

Fig-2: Initial Data Attributes

Now, five features namely Monthly Charges, Online Security, Streaming TV and Internet Service and Partner have been removed and the resulting dataset is now containing the following attributes:

Fig-3: Resulting Data Attributes

So, presently, the data contains 7043 instances and 16 columns.

1.1 INFORMATION FOR TELCO DATA

The descriptive statistics of the dataset has been checked and the following outcome has been achieved (Learning, 2018).

Fig-4: Data Description

After that, the information of the data has been checked and the following outcome has been obtained:

Fig-5: Data Information

From the information of the data, it has been seen that all features are now in the form of the object (categorical).

2 DEVELOPMENT OF DECISION TREE MODEL

2.1 PROBLEM STATEMENT

In this paper, the problem statements have been prepared as follows:

1. What are the factors that are influencing customer churn?

2. How Decision Tree Classifier is helpful in determining the attrition of customers?

2.2 EXPLORATORY DATA ANALYSIS

The data analysis has been performed based on some of the features. First, the analysis has been done to visualize the customer attrition based on gender (Sosnovshchenko, 2018). It has been seen that Male customer has more tendency to be attrited compared to female customers.

Fig-6: Analysis of Gender

Nest, the analysis has been done to visualize whether Online backup is related to customer attrition. The outcome of the analysis is shown below:

Fig-7: Analysis of Online Backup

The analysis has been performed on the paperless billing of the purchased products. It has been seen that those customers have been attrited who have not received paperless billing.

Fig-8: Analysis of Paperless Billing

The analysis has been performed on the payment method for the purchased products. It has been seen that those customers have been attrited who have used the electronic check.

Fig-9: Analysis of Payment Method

2.3 DATA CLEANING AND FEATURE SELECTION

2.3.1 Data preprocessing and Cleaning

As seen earlier, the features of the data are categorical that cannot be fitted into machine learning (Learning, 2018). So, all the features have been preprocessed and converted to numerical data using data encoding as follows:

Fig-10: Data Preprocessing and Encoding

After preprocessing the data, the missing values have been found and it has been seen that there are no missing values in the data as follows:

Fig-11: Detecting Missing Values

So, there is no requirement for data cleaning as the data is already cleaned.

2.3.2 Feature Selection

Now, the correlation has been applied to check the relationship of the features with Churn. The outcome of the correlation is shown below in the form of a heatmap:

Fig-12: Correlation of Features

From the outcome of the correlation, the highly correlated features have been selected and shown below:

Fig-13: Finally Selected Features

So, these features will now be used as the final predictor features for the Decision Tree Classifier by retaining Churn as the target feature (Sosnovshchenko, 2018).

2.4 MODEL BUILDING

The predictor features have been selected from the correlation and the final dataset is shown below:

This data has been split into train and test sets as follows:

Fig-14: Data Splitting

The data splitting has been done using a 75-25 split ratio and the training dataset contains 5283 observations (through which the decision tree classifier will be trained) and the test set contains 1760 instances (through which the decision tree model will be tested) (Eduonix, 2018). In this test set, 1297 instances belong to “Not Churn” and 463 instances belongs to “Churn”. Now, the decision tree classifier has been applied with the following hyperparameter tuning and it has been trained with the training data:

• criterion='entropy'
• splitter='random'
• max_features='auto'
• random_state=10

After training the decision tree classifier, the model has been tested and the confusion matrix has been obtained as follows:

Fig-15: Confusion matrix

In this confusion matrix, It can be seen that 1110 instances out of 1297 instanced have been correctly classified as “Not Churn” and 302 instances out of 463 instances have been correctly classified as “Churn”. By considering the overall performances, 1412 instances have been correctly classified by attaining 80.23% accuracy, 81% precision, 80% recall and 80% f1-score. The performance overview is shown below in the form of a classification report (Lakshmanan, Robinson, & Munn, 2021).

Fig-16: Classification Report

3 FINDING AND CONCLUSION

The data has been selected from Kaggle regarding customer churn and analysed for the detection of customer attrition. In this context, the data has been preprocessed and the features have been selected. After preparing the data, it has been split into train and test sets and the decision tree classifier has been trained and tested accordingly and the performance of the classification has been achieved. The problem statements have been addressed as follows:

1. The features such as senior citizen, Dependents, online backup, DeviceProtection, TechSupport, StreamingMovies, Contract, PaperlessBilling, PaymentMethod have been seen to be the important features for the prediction of customer churn.

2. Decision Tree Classifier can be used to classify and predict the customer churn with 80.23% accuracy, 81% precision, 80% recall and 80% f1-score.

4 REFERENCES

MIS603 Microservices Architecture Report 2 Sample

Assessment Task

This proposal should be approximately 1500 words (+/- 10%) excluding cover page, references and appendix. This proposal must be typed and clearly set out (presented professionally). You need to pay special attention to principles and key concepts of Microservices Architecture (MSA), service design and DevOps. The purpose of this assessment is to give you an opportunity to contextualise and convey to learning facilitator relevant knowledge based on “real-world” application. Particularly, the aim of this assessment is to enhance your employability skills through providing hands-on education and opportunities to practice real life experience. As a result, this assessment item is developed not only to evaluate your understanding of MSA application, but also to assist you practicing and improving your research skills. In doing so, this assessment will formatively develops the knowledge required for you to complete Assessment 3 successfully.

Context

MSA have been getting more and more popular over the last year, and several organisations are migrating monolithic applications to MSA. A MSA consists of a collection of small, autonomous services that each service is a separate codebase, which can be managed by a small development team. A team can update an existing service without rebuilding and redeploying the entire application.

Services are responsible for persisting their own data or external state. This differs from the traditional model, where a separate data layer handles data persistence. More recently, with the development of cloud computing, new ways of software development have evolved with MSA recognised as a cloud-native software development approach. As a professional, your role will require that you understand the principles of software development, especially in the field of cloud-based platforms, which are rapidly becoming the preferred hosting solution for many organisations. Having a working understanding of these concepts will enable you to fulfil many roles and functions, and be informed as to what factors influence decision making when software development architecture has been selected. Whilst you may not be a developer, it will enable you to have meaningful conversations about the principles of MSA and why certain decisions may be made in a certain way. This will support you to manage the bridge between IT and the business.

Instructions

You are expected to address the following steps to fulfil this assessment task:

1. From the list below, select an organisation that you are familiar with and / or have enough data and information. Here are list of organisations using microservices:

o Comcast Cable
o Uber
o Hailo
o Netflix
o Zalando
o Amazon
o Twitter
o PayPal
o Ebay
o Sound Cloud
o Groupon
o Gilt

2. Discuss how MSA has transformed or revolutionised the operations of the organisation. Identify and analyse at least three business or organisational reasons for justifying your discussion.

3. Develop a business proposal to introduce the selected organisation, justify why you choose it and why microroservices is the best architecture in the selected organisation.

The report should consist of the following structure:

A title page with subject code and name, assignment title, student’s name, student number, and lecturer’s name.

The introduction (200–250 words) that will also serve as your statement of purpose for the proposal— this means that you will tell the reader what you are going to cover in your proposal. You will need to inform the reader of:

a) Your area of research and its context

b) The key elements you will be addressing

c) What the reader can expect to find in the body of the report.

The body of the report (1000–1100 words) you are required to research and write a proposal focused on organisation using MSA as a software development philosophy. However, you are strongly advised to do some research regarding MSA in a “real-world” application.

The conclusion (200–250 words) will summarise any findings or recommendations that the report puts forward regarding the concepts covered in the report.

Format of the report

The report should use font Arial or Calibri 11 point, be line spaced at 1.5 for ease of reading, and have page numbers on the bottom of each page. If diagrams or tables are used, due attention should be given to pagination to avoid loss of meaning and continuity by unnecessarily splitting information over two pages. Diagrams must carry the appropriate captioning.

Solution

Introduction

Microservices architecture has started gaining popularity in the past few years as displayed with the migration of the monolithic applications towards its adoption. It stands to encompass a collection of small and autonomous services wherein each of the service consists of a separate codebase that possesses the feature of being managed by a compact development team. For Assignment Help, A unique benefit of the element corresponds with the fact that the development team can update the existing service in the absence of the need of rebuilding or redeploying of the entire application (Li et al., 2020).With the recent advancements in the aspects of cloud computing, and the new and innovative manner of software development, microservices architecture has acquired recognition as a cloud-native method for software development (Aderaldo et al., 2017).

The report is concerned with the discussion of the manner in which microservices architecture has led to substantial transformation and revolutionization of the operations of the selected company, Uber. In the same context, it identifies and analyses the organisations reasons for the justification of the shift of Uber from the monolithic architecture to the microservice system by assessing the issues that led Uber to make the decision. As such, the report intends to develop a business proposal that would be introduced to the selected organisation in line with the recognition of microservices as the best architecture by laying an emphasis on the benefits that it brings to Uber.

Discussion

An adoption of the aspect of microservices architecture is becoming a popular solution to large and complex issues in the context of IT systems owing to the fact that is entails a technique for the development of applications in the form of small services wherein each of the service is tasked with one function akin to product search, shipment, payment. Such services communicate with one another with the application of API gateways. A number of international companies such as Amazon or Netflix has displayed a transition from monolith to microservices, thus, clarifying its relevance and usability. Similar to many start-ups, the company Uber initiated its operations in line with monolithic architecture in order to cater to a single offering in one particular location. The choice had been justified at that tome with all the operations transpiring under the UberBLACK option based in San Francisco (Haddad, 2019). The presence of a single codebase had proven to be sufficient for the resolution of the business concerns for the company, which remained inclusive of connecting drivers with the riders, billing as well as payments. As such, it was reasonable to confine the business logic of the company in one particular location. Nevertheless, with the rapid expansion of Uber into a greater number of citizens, accompanied by the introduction of new products, such a nature of operations needed to undergo considerable variations or a complete change.

Consequently, the growth the core domain models and the introduction of new features led to an outcome wherein the components of the company became tightly coupled, thus, resulting in an enforcement of the encapsulation which increased the difficulty of separation. Furthermore, the continual integration proved to be a liability owing to the fact that the deployment of the codebase corresponded with the deployment of all the services at once. This meant a greater amount of pressure for the engineering team who had to handle more requests as well as the significant increase in the developer activity, irrespective of the rapid growth and scaling of the said engineering team (Haddad, 2019). Moreover, the continual need for the addition of new features, resolution of bugs and fixing the technical debt within a single repo developed as significant challenges. In the same context, the expansion of the system, on the basis of a monolithic architecture, resulted in issues for the company in line with scalability as well as persisting integration (Torvekar & Game, 2019).

Additionally, a single change in the system became a huge responsibility for the developers in view of the dependencies of the components of the app of Uber.The monolithic structure of Uber entailed a connection between the passengers and drivers with the aid of the REST API (Hillpot, 2021). It also possessed three adapters that contained embedded API to serve the aforementioned purposes of pilling, payment and text messages. Furthermore, the system involved a MySQL database with all the features being contained in the monolith (Hillpot, 2021). In other words, the primary reasons for the decision of Uber to transition to microservices architecture corresponded with the following factors (Gluck, 2020):

- The deployments were expensive and time consuming, in addition to necessitating frequent rollbacks.

- The maintenance of good separations of concerns in relation to the huge codebase proved challenging since expediency, in an exponential growth environment, results in poor boundaries between components and logic.

- The combined issues provided challenges for the execution of the system in an autonomous or independent manner.

As such, Uber opted for the hypergrowth of other successful companies such as Amazon, Netflix or Twitter, with the aim of breaking the monolith into multiple codebases such that a service oriented architecture could be developed. To be specific, the company opted for the adoption of microservices architecture. The migration from the monolithic codebase to microservices architecture enabled the company to resolve a number of concerns. Accordingly, the introduction of the new architecture was accompanied by the introduction of an API gateway, as well as independent services, each of which possessed individuals functions and the feature of being deployed and scaled in a distinct manner (Kwiecien, 2019). The adoption of the microservices architecture led to the increase of the overall system reliability and facilitated the separation of concerns by the establishment of more distinctly defined roles of each of the components. It also highlights the ownership of the code and enables autonomous execution of the services (Gluck, 2020).

The implementation of microservices architecture also allows for developer velocity wherein the teams retain the capability of deploying the codes in an independent manner at their own pace (Gluck, 2020), thus, improving productivity. Owing to the fact that the software developed as microservices is fragmented in smaller and independent services, in which each component can be written in its own unique language, aided Uber in the development process, formulating continual delivery and in the acceleration of the growth of the business (Rud, 2020). Consequently, the transition of Uber from a monolithic system to microservices architecture augmented the speed, quality and manageability of the development of the software and the reliability with regards to the factor of fault tolerance, while allowing the teams to focus on just the services that required scaling, thus, speeding up the process (Sundar, 2020). Finally, a few real world applications of microservices architecture for Uber corresponded with the processing and maintenance of the profile data of the customers, handling the different types of available rides on the basis of the location, mapping of the location of the customer and that of the nearly rides on a custom map, formation of a set of potential rides with respect to a specific ride, and computation of the price of the ride in a dynamic manner.

Conclusion

Microservices services remain responsible for the persistence of their external state or personal data. As such, the primary difference from a traditional model is related to the prevalence of a separate layer of data that manages the persistence of data. An understanding of the concepts enable the fulfilment of varied roles and functions, in addition to gaining knowledge on the factors that influence decision-making in the instance of selection of the software development architecture. A number of international companies such as Amazon, Netflix or Coca Cola have opted for a transformation in terms of their IT infrastructure for the implementation of microservice architecture. The process is also accompanied by the rebuilding of the internal organisational structure to obtain a competitive edge.

It is significant to comprehend the principles associated with the said software development, particularly with respect to cloud-based platforms that have found increasing application as preferred hosting solutions for a number of organisations.The transition to microservices architecture has proven to bring with it significant benefits for Uber with respect to the process of development, scaling and independent deployment of each of the microservice. In the same context, it also allows the company to cut back on undesired expenses, while encouraging innovation as well. It has also highlighted the fact that microservices architecture possesses a strong reliance on people and processes within the context of an organisation owing to its involvement with technology, in view of the fact that single microservices stand to be maintained by independent and specialised teams. 

References

MIS609 Data Management and Analytics Report 3 Sample

Task Summary

In groups, apply data analysis and visualisation skills, and create meaningful data visualisations for secondary data (selected after approval of your facilitator). Then, create a 5-10-minute presentation as a short video collage explaining the findings of your visual analysis.

Task Instructions

Step 1: Group formation and registration

Form groups of two members each. Please refer to the attached Group Formation Guidelines document for more information about group formation and registration. You may seek help from your learning facilitator.

Step 2: Select secondary data from the internet. Make sure you select the data after approval of your learning facilitator.

Step 3: Find out the issues that the selected data has. Make note of all the identified issues. For every issue identified you should have a solid rationale.

Step 4: Select a data analysis / visualisation tool. You can surf the web and find out some free data analysis / visualisation tools. Some of the recommended tools are Tableau, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Power BI, Qlik and Google Data Studio. Make sure that before you select a tool, you carefully understand the merits and demerits of that tool. Also discuss with your facilitator the choice of your tool.

Step 5: Analyse selected data using the selected tool and try creating meaningful visualisations that give you more visual insight into data.

Step 6: Based on analysis using visualisation, identify important finding about that data.

Step 7: Carefully identify your limitations.

Step 8: Now create a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation having the following sections:

Section1: Selected Dataset

- Provide a link to data.
- Explain why you select this data.
- Explain the issues in the selected data.

Section 2: Selected Analysis/Visualisation Tool

- Explain why you selected this tool.

- What were the problems that you faced with this tool?

- What are the benefits and drawbacks of the selected tool?

Section 3: Visualisations (Diagrams)

- On every PowerPoint slide, copy a diagram (visualisation) and beneath every diagram briefly explain what information/knowledge you obtained from the diagram. Make as many PowerPoint slides as you want to.

Section 4: Findings and Limitations

- Explain what your findings are about the selected data as a result of data analysis (/ visualisation) that you have performed.

- Enlist your limitations.

Section 5: Group Work Distribution

- Categorically explain how work was distributed between group members.

Step 9: Now using the PowerPoint, create a video collage in which your facilitator should be able to see you as well as the PowerPoint slides in the video. Please note that this 5-10-minute video is like an online presentation. Both members of the group should take part in the video equally. Please ensure that you are objective in your presentation (PowerPoint and video). Plan and rehearse what you have to speak in the video before creating it.

Solution

Introduction

Background

The aim of the report is to found issues within the aspects of sustainability and Business ethics. It is focused on demonstrating the learnings of the field by analysing and providing recommendations in reference to real life cases from an organisation. For Assignment Help, The topic which is being researched in the current report is new shopping experience unveiled by Zara.

Importance

It is an important topic because the aspect of sustainability has become very important in customer journey. Customers are only likely to incline their purchasing behaviour in favour of those brands who are making efforts to make sure that their business operations are not harmful to environment and community (Pei et al., 2020). Zara has integrated sustainability in its customer journey at new store in Plaza de Lugo store slated to reopen in A Coruña in March. It will unveil new concepts, materials, and designs, which will establish a benchmark for the brand.

Major Issue and Outline of Methodology

The major issue addressed in the report is that of Fast Fashion. It can be referred to as trendy and cheap clothing that are representative of the celebrity culture. Zara is one of the most prominent dealers in fast fashion. The brand is looking forward to make a change by presenting a experience of sustainable clothing.

In the current report, data would be collected through secondary sources. It will allow, the researcher, to integrate viewpoints of other individuals in reference to sustainable clothing and customer journey and its relationship with business ethics. The viewpoints would be further studied in reference to Zara in the later stages of the report for identifying the correlation and providing recommendations in order to deal with the situation.

Contribution of Assignment

This report will contribute to the literature related to sustainable customer journey and clotting and how it impacts on business ethics and sustainability of the company. It will also provide recommendations to the manager of Zara regarding how they could deal with the issues of fast fashion and secure the overall sustainability of the business.

Literature Review

Concept of Sustainable Shopping experience

According to Ijaz and Rhee (2018) shopping experiences and sustainability are the major elements which are affecting how their customers are shopping now and will continue to do so in the future. They have led to considerable changes in the Global retail landscape which would inevitably impact and shape that future retail environment.

Han et al. (2019) stated that in order to attract Shoppers to the physical retail space if it is necessary to provide them with sustainability and aesthetic. This is so because they are likely to be attracted by a spacer where they could confront a wide variety of reactions, experiences, and emotions.

In the perception of Lin et al. (2020) the importance of a light, texture, sound and smell has taken the centre stage where the store designers are combining subconscious and sensor elements in order to generate experiences and memories which are not only visual but also atmospheric.

However, De et al. (2021) argued that stores in future are likely to merge with online retail environments rather than competing. It makes it more important for current retailers to improve their shopping experience when it comes to dominating the online space. The physical store is likely to become a space aware retailer and brands will be able to express their personality to the customers.

As per the views of Geiger and Keller (2018) personality of the brand could be reflected through the showroom where they would provide engaging experience in order to encourage Shoppers to purchase their products online after they have touched and tried that in the shop. It could be said that a sustainable shopping experience revolves around making shopping centres of the future engagement centres. Retailers such as Dara would need to focus on how to take the shopkeeper on an improved and sustainable customer journey.

Relationship Between Sustainable Shopping Experience and Customer Journey

Signori et al. (2019) highlighted that sustainability in both environmental and social aspects is one of the most defining Trends of retail evolution. It is becoming Paramount as the customers are taking a long-term shift to an eco-friendlier environment and adopting similar shopping behaviour. Consumers are already asking brands about what they are doing to integrate sustainability in their business operations.

From the research conducted by Lin et al. (2020) it has been identified that the trend of sustainable shopping is very strong among gen Z and millennial consumers. This is so because they belong to a younger shopper segment and tend to identify themselves with sustainable values as compared to older generation Shoppers.
Witell et al. (2020) explained that sustainable shopping is not just about the brand. Product packaging and store design are an integral part and one of the most important aspects of providing a sustainable shopping experience to the customers. Adivar et al. (2019) contradicted that customers are not asking for environmental sustainability but they are also concerned about the impact of the company's operations across the entire supply chain. They want to get information about ethical components Sourcing to consumption of water and management of pollution.

However, Holmlund et al. (2020) argued that Shoppers are more concerned about product packaging and have been expecting brands and retailers to invest more in sustainable alternatives. This is an important aspect of a customer journey because the packaging communicates brand tone when the customer opens the product.

In the views of Cervellon and Vigreux (2018) if the brand does not have a recyclable packaging or then it is highly unlikely that the customer would make another purchase. This is so because they feel that when they open the product packaging goes to waste and if it's non-recyclable then it is just to contribute to the pile of waste.

Literature Gap

In the current literature, a gap has been identified in the impact of Sustainable shopping experience on customer journey and their viewpoints. It is an important element because even though there is a relationship between this component, they exist independently in a retail environment. Brands such as Zara are making a conscious effort to provide a sustainable shopping experience to the customers but are still looking for answers on how it improves the customer journey and make them want to spend more time in the store and incline their Purchase Decision in favour of the business organisation. Impact of Sustainable shopping experience on customer journeys needs to be explored so as to gain clarity on the particular aspects which could be integrated with the business organisation for improving the customer journey while exercising functions in a sustainable manner.

Methodology

Within the current report, data has been collected from secondary sources. Qualitative information has been collected. It is useful in the present context because the researcher aims to explore business sustainability in terms of Zara by reflecting upon its case study. In order to add credibility and reliability into the study data from both secondary sources as well as a real-life organisation has been integrated. Database library which has been surfed for collecting secondary data is Google scholar. This is so because it makes it easier for the individual to search for published books and journals based upon keywords (Johhson and Sylvia, 2018).

The researcher has made sure that only those books and journals which have been published in 2017 for after that have been integrated. This is so because this data is comparatively newer as it is only 4 years old at maximum. This allows the learner to reflect upon the latest perspectives in reference to sustainable shopping experience and customer journey. By doing so, the individual would be able to curate an informed set of findings.

Case Study Findings and Analysis

Overview of the Organization

Zara is a Spanish apparel retailer. It was founded in 1974 and is currently headquartered in the municipality of Arteixo, Spain (Zara, 021). Zara is one of the biggest International fashion companies where the customer is the core element of the business model. It has an extensive retail network which includes production, distribution, design, and sales. It tends to work closely and together as a single company globally with its parent organisation — Inditex, Zara has been able to focus on the key elements of production. The business operations of the organisation are based on three major pillars which are digital integration, sustainability, and flexibility. It has been able to bring its customers closer than ever to the products and provide them at affordable prices.

The success of Zara was followed by international expansion at the end of 1980s and the successive launch of new brands within the same parent organisation which now have an integrated model of physical stores as well as online business operations (Inditex, 2021). The human resource at Zara is focused on fulfilling the demands of the customers. This is so because it is focused on creation of value which is beyond profit by placing the concerns of the environment and people at the core of its decision-making capabilities. Zara is focused on doing better and being better in reference to do business operations while securing sustainability.

Critical Evaluation of the Issue – Sustainable Shopping Experience at Zara

Zara Home is focused on unveiling its new Global image. It's new Store, The Plaza de Lugo will reopen in March with a totally overhauled concept. The store has been reported to have new designs and materials which would establish a global benchmark for the brand. This is so because the new concert revolves around being 100% ecological (Inditex, 2021). The story would be featuring minimalistic designs with traditional routes along with the latest technologies which would contribute to the shopping experience of the buyer.

The construction materials of the store have been made with the help of local artisans and include lime and marble with linen and Silk. It is in contrast with the furniture which is made from traditional materials such as oak, slate and Granite. It has been identified that this environmentally friendly store has used those materials which are capable of absorbing carbon dioxide. It only displays traditional handcrafted pieces on Handlooms which have been burnt by a novel warm and comfortable lighting. The energy consumption of the store has been enabled through sustainable technology and focused towards making sure that it is not harming the environment in any manner with monitored use of electricity. The idea of this store is to provide a new shopping experience to the customers.

Within this, the product displayed tends to stand out in a space which feels familiar like home thus, is in Alliance with the brand image of Zara home. It has been done by recreating a mixture of aesthetic beauty and feelings of well-being and comfort. The results of the Sustainable shopping experience curated by Zara would be on display for its flagship store which reopened in March 2021 as it was under a process of a full renovation and overhaul (Inditex, 2021). It could be stated that the new Zara home store concept enables the customers to uniquely experience the products and Discover its collections in a better way. The idea behind the design was to create an enjoyable visit for the customers to a warmer which focuses on sustainability and comfort by integrating the aspects of beauty and Technology together.

Recommendations

By analysing the contents of the report, following recommendations would be made for Zara in order to improve its sustainable shopping experience and ultimately enhance customer journey:

Using recycled and biodegradable packaging: it is suggested that Zara should make efforts to reduce the amount of plastic packaging which is used in its products. Biodegradable packaging which is made from plant-based materials such as cellulose and starch could be used which is broken down in a manner that could be made into bags. It is necessary to reassess how the organisation uses its packaging and where it can reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Minimising use of paper: it is necessary to reduce the amount of paper which is used in the organisation in order to drive sustainability. Zara needs to identify tasks and processes that require pen and paper to perform and then digitise them. For example, providing the bill and invoice to the customers requires the use of paper and ink which could be digitised and sent directly to the phone number or email address. It will make it easier for both the organisation as well as the customers to access the invoice if it is available in digital form because people are likely to misplace paper slips.

Empowering customers for engaging in sustainable operations: it has been identified that when people want to be more sustainable, they are likely to make sustainable purchases in decisions in order to leave their mark. By helping the customers to offset their impact in reference to retail habits would be highly beneficial for Zara's own sustainability efforts. It would need to make the people feel empowered as consumers and motivate them to bring changes in their daily habits. It also provides them with the confidence that Zara is out there to make a difference in the long term.

Conclusion

Findings and Importance to Business

From the current report, it has been found that sustainable shopping experience is gaining importance in the current environment. This is so because customers are inclined towards making purchasing decisions in favour of those business entities who integrate sustainable aspects in their operations. It is important to Zara because it holds a negative reputation of engaging into fast fashion and not performing sustainable operations. However, by integrating aspects of the Sustainable shopping experience it would be able to improve its business model and brand image in both short-term and long-term which will further help the organisation to increase its sales and be up-to-date with the current trends in the market.

Risks for Implementation

The major risks for implementing the recommendations is that it would need to make changes in a business model on an international level. For example, in order to introduce biodegradable packaging, it would need to make changes in all the stores and warehouses which satisfy both offline and online demand in order to make sure that the change has been implemented. It is risky because even though the customers would be in favour of biodegradable packaging it is unclear on how it will actually solve the issue.

In addition to this, by minimising the uses of paper it can get difficult for the customers to adhere to the change. Since always Zara has provided invoices and builds on paper and when it would turn digital it does not know how the customers would be able to absorb the change and be in favour of it. One of the major reasons behind the same is that our customers are sceptical in giving their personal details such as a phone number and email address while making a purchase as it makes them susceptible to phishing scams.

Limitations of the Study

The limitations of the current study are stated below:

- The researcher has only used the secondary data. This means that the findings of the study have been developed on the opinions and perspective of other authors and researchers.

- Limited number of studies are integrated in the report which reduces the reliability of the conclusion. The major reason behind the same is that a small sample size interferes with the level of generalization because the researcher generalisation specific content on the basis of the opinions in findings of a small number of people.

References

MIS603 Microservices Architecture Research Report Sample

Assessment Task

This research paper should be approximately 2500 words (+/- 10%) excluding cover page, references and appendix. In this assessment, you need to present the different issues that have been previously documented on the topic using a variety of research articles and industry examples. Please make sure your discussion matches the stated purpose of the report and include the cases study throughout. Discuss and support any conclusions that can be reached using the evidence provided by the research articles you have found. Details about the different industry cases studies should NOT be a standalone section of the paper.

Task Instructions (the scenario)

You suppose to work for your selected organization (in assessment 2) and have read reports of other organisations leveraging the MSA application in three areas (innovation, augmented reality and supply chain). Accordingly, you need to prepare a research report for management on how the MSA application can be used to deliver benefits in these areas as well as how and why organisational culture can influence the successful implementation of an MSA. Use at least 2 different case study examples for showing the benefits can be achieved by organisations.

The report should consist of the following structure:

A title page with subject code and name, assignment title, student’s name, student number, and lecturer’s name.

The introduction (250–300 words) that will also serve as your statement of purpose for the proposal—this means that you will tell the reader what you are going to cover in your proposal.

You will need to inform the reader of:

a) Your area of research and its context

b) The key elements you will be addressing

c) What the reader can expect to find in the body of the report

The body of the report (1900–2000 words) will need to focus on these three areas (innovation, augmented reality and supply chain) also organisational culture to develop your research paper. Particularly, you need to prepare a research report for management on how the MSA application can be used to deliver benefits in different organisational environments- cultures.

The conclusion (250–300 words) will summarise any findings or recommendations

Solution

Introduction

The study is going to introduce the underdosing of microservices that develop better business processes in Netflix. In this study, Netflix is considered in this proposal to present an implementation plan of MSA for the business processes. Netflix is the online Network platform that is presenting digital entertainment. For Assignment Help, It also increases productivity with developing the business processes. The study also demonstrated the important undressing of developing customer satisfaction and productivity. A different model of business also develops the innovation system of Netflix like the Subscription-based business model. Moreover, the real-life data also presents a better understanding of this business process with the development of the MSA.

The Proposal also focused on the development of the revolution and the transformation which involved developing the research properly. The use of MSA also helps for developing closer communication. The culture of the organization also interacts with the internal and external context. In this context, the MSA application helps to develop the entire study on a current business operation to develop the organization's growth. Moreover, the implantation of a data management system and the infrastructure of the cloud also develop future studies.

The area of the study also highlighted the important key elements which will also address proper research on the selection of an organization. Moreover, the global concept also recognizes that Netflix is a total entertainment company which is also demonstrated with the micro services of global media cloud-based streaming services. Netflix is also improving the technologies by developing machine learning, artificial intelligence and IoT. It is a software-based technology that also helps improve the performance of Netflix. Moreover, it is increasing the business capacity with developing the business productivity including the use of modern technology. On the other hand, Netflix is the storage management system that is exposed with open source on the data management.

Main body

Innovation

Reflecting the creation with innovation in business processes or business model

Subscription-based Business Model

Netflix also introduced a subscription-based business model which makes money with a different simple plan including basic standard and the premium. This plan is getting access to the streaming series, shows and movies (Kukkamallaet al. 2021). The company also gains profit from this plan that is slow with a positive cash flow with growth in the content of original production. The streaming content is also specialized with the entertainment of subscribers in July 2021 with 72 million users from the Canada and United States. Netflix has their own offices in Brazil, France, the United Kingdom, Japan and South Korea.

Figure 1: Subscription business model
(Source:Duggan nMurphy&Dabalsa, 2021)

It is the member of the motion association picture that is distributed and produces the content from different countries over glow. In order to think of this company, it was founded in 1997 by Marc Rudolph and Reed Hastings (Martinez, 2014). It is also known for providing our best services that are used by people for renting some movies which they wanted to see in DVD format. It is the service of the internet that is making a sure journey with the business model.

The business model develops with a profitable run with the original content of productivity by the organization of Netflix. These models also described that they are the subscribers who are also able for Internet services where the company rents the movies and the online shows. The subscription is the base that is incorporated with the company that is considered huge that is also helpful when it comes through the Netflix business model.

The work of Netflix business model

To define Netflix, it has been stated that it is the basic provider of content that is used online for properly developing online TV shows and movies along with some documentaries. Online streaming is the site that is an application that is mood applicable for the connection of devices (). So, it has been stated that it is providing a better service to the people with their needs.

Netflix also defines the business model as subscription-based which is the opposite of a generating model revenue in the specific level of title(DuggannMurphy&Dabalsa, 2021). The continent assets are likely produced and licensed with the review that has an operating segment on the circumstances. It is also indicating all changes with expected usefulness.

Figure 2: Netflix business model
(Source:Ulin,, 2013)

American media services are the provider as well as and production company where the business model of Netflix revolves with the subscription base of learning. It consists of online streaming with the library forms and the TV programs which are also included with the films and produced in the house (Ulin,, 2013). The user also has a surety about monthly subscription where the services are used by paying money e that is provided by the people with the name-based online process. What different content also provides online streaming with the site and access of clients that make a better platform.

Transformation of The Organization Internal Environments

The transformation of Netflix also developed the internal environment of organization business by modifying the business tools, strategy, policy, infrastructure structure and culture. They are the most relevant reasons also included with changing the organization technology, new market conditions and the customer demand (Hinssen,, 2015). Moreover, the organizational changes also enable the Netflix component to develop a scope in the digital platform. Thereafter the organization also embraced the technological changes to adjust the digital concept (Braun& Latham, 2012). The organizational changes also assist with the development company which is replacing the old system with new strategies to achieve a competitive advantage in the marketplace.

The Changes Example in Netflix

Netflix is an important example of the change of an organization that has the best scope in the new context. As an example, the Netflix organization also changed with real-life examples including changes in the business model of Lewin's (McDonald& Smith-Rowsey, 2016). The organization also changes with a different stage that is completing the whole process including the significant factors of culture, the environment and technology. It is also simulated with the organizational change including the new strategies in the current situation (De Oliveira, 2018). So, it is always proved that Netflix is the best example for an organization and change where the different software companies accept the organizational changes as Netflix to achieve all the competitive advantage.

Augmented Reality

Reflecting the superimposing images in the revolution of Netflix
Netflix has great goals to help the members with developing the context to enjoy the discovering. Personalization is the important pillar that allows Netflix to help each member with the different content views. The adapt has the best interest on the content which is present over time expands on this (Curtin,Holt &Sanson, 2014). Each kind of experience is personalized with the different dimensions where the videos have suggested the ranking. The videos are the way that the all-advanced work plays that have a unique address on the member's needs.

Figure 3: Revolution of Netflix
(Source: Stawski& Brown, 2019)

Personalization is the start with the homepage which is extended with the products beyond. It is keeping an informed engagement on the reality that is picking a growing form of development in the original content. Netflix also uses the multimedia mechanism in the learning and the recommended algorithm which has a running scale on the personalization. It presents better research on personalization with developing the all-continuous improvements of the online experiments (Stawski& Brown, 2019). The organization also works through all improvements in the development areas by looking through the new opportunities for making better-personalized experiences. Revolution is the best part for developing online context with improving the personalized homepage experiences.

Netflix also seeks the offering of TV shows and movies that also shows the relevant concept with joy. The artwork of personalization also represents each video where machine learning is the crucial piece. Including the new alignments of collaboration, natural and online. The movements also recognize the best concept with developing the best connectivity in the online processes. It is presenting a great watch on the development of online series and movies with proper opportunities.
The real object for developing the study

Search of Algorithm

Search leverages the combination of the processing of natural languages, machine learning, text analytics and collaborative filtering. It is the member of Netflix to discover a new connection between the textual queries and the titles of the catalogue (McDonald& Smith-Rowsey , 2016)It is also struck with simplicity with the Netflix members by minimizing all the numbers including the interactions of member needs for making a search interface.

Figure 4: Netflix algorithm
(Source:Springer, 2014)

Moreover, it is present a search interface to look for the algorithms which also handle the catalogue and queries to span with the languages including many countries. The search also develops with good coverage what each title and each query get the best shot (Springer, 2014). Whenever the little title appears with the member homepage, the search algorithm also ensures that every title has a chance to lead a play surface.

Marketing Personalization

It is the main site of the product interface where Netflix applies the personalization algorithm with many types of critical areas in order to provide a base experience to the member. Moreover, the different areas also provide the best future for the members to connect with the personalized algorithm (Ulin,2013). For achieving this Netflix also reaches the members with new recommendations with notification and emails. The delivery of a billion messages in a year also worked with a personalized algorithm. On the other hand, this algorithm aims to optimize the member's joy by creating a mind full volume on the messages. Additionally, it is invested with a heavy growth that is retaining the members with the base of programmatic advertising.

Figure 5: Marketing personalization
(Source: Weinman, 2015)

In order to promote the services in the original contract, Netflix also developed the budget system allocation algorithm which decides the advertisement. Both also determine the algorithm's delicate balance with the incremental and cost to reward (Weinman, 2015). Different types of machine learning algorithms as well as statistical techniques like natural networks, casual models and collaboration are also diverse with the set of a product and business. These business patterns also solve the business need and the complex product with the use of Netflix expertise.

Supply Chain

Effectiveness of MSA in Closer Communication

MSA also defines the experimental and the mathematical methods that determine a variation of the amount which exist with the measurement process. A variation in the development of the measurement process has directly contributed to the overall variability. So, MSA is also used for certifying the system of measurement with evaluating the development accuracy, stability and precision (FarmakiSpanou, & Christou,2021). Fortunately, they are the different adaptation of micro services also sharing all expertise that has an open spirit on the different sources. Netflix is the best example where the transition form of Netflix has a traditional model plan on the development of DVD rental applications.

It is the micro service architecture that is responsible with a small team to create an end-to-end development on the micro services. It is developing the communication with streaming the digital entertainment for millions of Netflix customers (López Jiménez&Ouariachi, 2021). Now the technology is fellow on the Cockcroft which is prominent for micro services as well as the architecture of cloud-native.

Effectiveness of MSA application in the benefits of organization environments and culture

The revolution of Netflix also presents an effective application of MSA that has benefited the organizational culture and the environment that is using radical data. At the same time, the Netflix business including innovating and old fashion is transport with the town-to-town country. The postal services of the governments in the oldest departments also apply with the rental distribution of video. It is presenting an innovative approach to the Netflix industry which is entirely based on a brick-and-mortar concept.

The balance between old fashion and innovation is the master of influence in the culture of organization Netflix. The necklace is successful in the evolution of pre-existing content elements which has a distribution on the medical advancement. Netflix also took a pre-existing DVD in the film as well as the television that also gives the customer a new way for receiving them with television all storytelling distribution method (Shaughnessy,, 2018). It is the part of an innovation that maintains the structure of pre-existing whenever it has a comprehension with the usability of different models.

Engagement and Interactivity Among the Important external or internal entities

The transition of multi challenge places an engagement and interactivity with the internal and external concept of Netflix. It is the type of field that is involved in the technological innovation that increases the control, programs office taxation and the viewer’s choice. In the internal and external concept, the changes of the technology have also measured the technique that is capable of developing the revolution with viewing the television including distribution of narrative structure. The translation of this multichannel also drives channel proliferation. In the year of 1986, it premiered with the complete concept of the broadcast network (Olivier, 2020). All through the presentation of cables is specialized with the offerings of different formats of economics including the outstanding status of FCC regulation.
It has an important concept in the long-lasting television industry which is important to develop the technologies. This technology is also helping to remove the control of normalized concepts where the drivers also increase the control program. On the other hand, the VCR also gives the viewers control over the recording program(Olivier, 2020). The advanced concept of the audience is also presented in measurement technique which allows for determining the concept of television including specification and accuracy.

Conclusion and recommendation

Netflix is the company that is presenting a constant flow which is made with the streaming product that is corporate with the philosophy. Netflix also uses the analytic tool which is recommended for the videos. Netflix is the 90-second window that helps the weavers to find TV shows or movies. It is also presenting an understanding of the customer needs which is belonging through the movies, web series, advertisements and videos. The researcher also finds the best creation of the innovation in this business process through the subscription business model. And the supply chain processes will present a close communication including the MSA application. This application is also highlighted within this study for developing the organization culture and the environment as well as engaging the interactivity e with important entities of external and internal.

This proposal also creates a developed understanding of the implementation and the benefits of MSA business operation. Moreover, it is present in top scope to create a strong network on the MSA data center which helps the Netflix organization for gaining a better market criterion. The organization also helps to improve the work performance issues by developing the understanding of company capacity. In this context, the management system of data is presented as a based action on the business operation which is used for developing customer data with a proper demand. Moreover, the data management system also in Hindi company productivity with the working capacity. It is presenting a transformation in the structure of MSA that is led with the proper changes which increase the satisfaction of the customer. MSA also developed opportunities for the company to expand their market system with the development of continuous improvement in Netflix.

References

MIS607 Cybersecurity Report Sample

Task Summary

Reflecting on your initial report (A2), the organisation has decided to continue to employ you for the next phase: risk analysis and development of the mitigation plan.

The organisation has become aware that the Australian Government (AG) has developed strict privacy requirements for business. The company wishes you to produce a brief summary of these based on real- world Australian government requirements (similar to how you used real-world information in A2 for the real-world attack).

These include the Australian Privacy Policies (APPs) especially the requirements on notifiable data breaches. PEP wants you to examine these requirements and advise them on their legal requirements. Also ensure that your threat list includes attacks on customer data breaches. The company wishes to know if the GDPR applies to them.

You need to include a brief discussion of the APP and GDPR and the relationship between them. This should show the main points.

Be careful not to use up word count discussing cybersecurity basics. This is not an exercise in summarising your class notes, and such material will not count towards marks. You can cover theory outside the classes.

Requirements

Assessment 3 (A3) is a continuation of A2. You will start with the threat list from A2, although feel free to make changes to the threat list if it is not suitable for A3. You may need to include threats related to privacy concerns.

Beginning with the threat list:

• You need to align threats/vulnerabilities, as much as possible, with controls.

• Perform a risk analysis and determine controls to be employed.

• Combine the controls into a project of mitigation.

• Give advice on the need for ongoing cybersecurity, after your main mitigation steps.

Note:

• You must use the risk matrix approach covered in classes. Remember risk = likelihood x consequence. (Use the tables from Stallings and Brown and remember to reference them in the caption.)

• You should show evidence of gathering data on likelihood, and consequence, for each threat identified. You should briefly explain how this was done.

• At least one of the risks must be so trivial and/or expensive to control that you decide not to use it (in other words, in this case, accept the risk). At least one of the risks, but obviously not all.

• Provide cost estimates for the controls, including policy or training controls. You can make up these values but try to justify at least one of the costs (if possible, use links to justify costs).

Reference Requirement

A3 requires at least 5 references (but as many as you like above this number) with at least 3 references coming from peer-reviewed sources: conferences or journals. (Please put a star “*” after these in the reference section to highlight which are peer reviewed.)

One of the peer-reviewed articles must be uploaded in pdf format along with the A3 report (this can be done in BB). This pdf will be referred to here as the “nominated article”. (Zero marks for referencing if the nominated article is not itself peer-reviewed.) Of course, the nominated article should be properly referenced and cited, but you need to site an important direct quote from within the article (with page number), not just a brief sentence from the abstract. The quote should also relate to the main topic of the article, not just a side issue.

Solution

Introduction:

Cyber security threat is one of the important steps or crucial steps within the organization to make the whole information secure than previous. For Assignment help, Cyber threats are giving a huge impact on various types of businesses and tools which are getting resolved. A threat security plan will be prepared for one packaging company named PEP for describing the attack on JBS food.

PEP management wants a safeguard system to mitigate the JBS food attack. A cybersecurity specialist will be required to identify all threats and vulnerabilities regarding the intruders' attack. Here different cybersecurity factors will be described elaborately. All threats and vulnerabilities reports will be mentioned in this report. A STRIDE methodology is very much important to understand the different types of cyber threats within the organization.

PEP will implement the STRIDE methodology for resolving the issues of different types of cyberattacks within the organization. It can also create concrete growth in the organization.

Body of the report:

Discussion of App and GDPR:

APP: The privacy act is recognized as one of the useful principles within the Australian Legislation. There are mainly 13 principles presented here to secure the information of an organization. Few rules and purposes of the organization have been incorporated in this section.

Principal name

Australian Privacy policy 1 is a open communication systems among the management and team. This privacy act can help to make transparent communication within the hierarchical team. It can produce a clear APP policy.

APP 2: Anonymity and pseudonymity. APP entities are required to identify the pseudonym. Here a limited exception has been applied.

APP3: Gathering all personal data and information. All personal information is sensitive so it is very important to handle that information gently.

APP4: Dealing with all unsolicited information. In that case all personal information of the users which are not solicited deal with a proper
effectiveness.

APP 5: Notification for personal information. Here all the circumstances have been described for gathering all required personal information.

APP 6: Disclosing all personal information. APP entities can be used for disclosing all personal information to meet all certain requirements.

APP 7: Direct marketing is one of the useful strategies for improving certain conditions.

APP 8: Cross organization culture for understanding the personal information. APP entity is very much important to protect all required personal information

APP 9: Adoption and disclose of government based identifiers. Limited circumstances are very much important for adopting the Government related identifier.

App 10: Personal information gathering system should be more smooth and accurate for collecting all essential information. Quality of personal information

APP 11: Security of all essential information. APP privacy policy should take some necessary steps to restrict any misuse of information, unauthorized access. The entity has enough rights to destroy the obligation.

APP 12: Accessing personal information. APP entity obligation is very much important to get access to any personal information

APP 13: Error correction of all essential information. Personal information should be corrected for maintaining the obligation.

GDPR:

THE GDPR rule is mainly based on the UK. There are a few factors that are highly responsive to creating an effective cybersecurity policy for restricting any upcoming threats in the future from the side of the UK. There are mainly seven key factors that are responsible to make the start-up organization secure and help them to grow in the future. a). Lawful, fairness and transparency, purpose limitation, the accuracy of the information, prop[er information regarding the storage, Accountability. This gdpr information helps to cover up the Australian Privacy policy. Not only that but also it can create a huge impact on the PEP organization's growth. It can secure the future of GDPR privacy acts.JBS food facility service is recognized as one of the important packaging canters all over the world which has created a huge impact on organizational growth.

Threat lists and STRIDE categorization:

Cyber threats can become up with defining the different types of factors that can create a significant impact to grow the business sustainably. Here in this report, a threat modelling process has been organized for improving the security control system. In this report, the STRIDE model has been introduced to mitigate all potential vulnerabilities within the system. There are mainly six threat categorization techniques that are going to be introduced which can significantly impact the growth of the business model of PEP. There are mainly 7 types of cyber threats that have been considered here named as Malware, Denial of Service, Phishing technique, and SQL injection. Nuclear deterrence is viewed so positively that cyber-deterrence is frequently suggested as a promising analogous next step (Hellman,2017, 52-52).

1. Ransomware:

According to the detailed analysis, Ransomware attacks or malware attacks hold all infected files from IT software systems which can be easily paid for by hackers. The ransomware track also defines the concept of security breach policy.(Jones-Foster, 2014)[ The risk of PHI theft is growing as the nation’s health care system moves toward a value-based care model, which promotes more robust use of electronic health records and improved information technology integration across the continuum of care. "The sophistication and creativity of hackers today is pretty scary,” says Michael Archuleta, HIPAA security officer at 25-bed Mt. San Rafael Hospital, Trinidad, Colo. "You really have to be on your toes and pay attention, because viruses, malware and computer security threats change almost daily.] Malicious websites. Infected websites and phishing emails are recognized as an important factor for stealing all information of the customers (Ekelund&Iskoujina, 2019). Ransomware attacks have enough capability to stop any essential operation with any start-up organization. PEP is recognized as one of the start-up stores to execute its products within the market(Cox, 2008).

2. DDoS attack:

Distributed denial service attack is also recognized as another branch for all cyber hackers. Cybercriminals have enough potential to stop access from the users. Attackers are constantly trying to generate the spoof of the IP address technique. Attackers are producing a lot of information to all the victims for creating extensive connections outside the servers' end (Banham, 2017).[To fund Phase 3, the Defense Department's Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) just awarded almost $9 million lo BBN. Key priorities involve work on DTN scalability and robustness to support thousands of nodes, and designing and implementing new algorithms or several key tasks]

3. Social Attack: In that case, attackers are trying to build up a log file for accessing or stealing important information from the side of users. Vulnerable and intruder attacks have enough priority for installing the malware function within the system device. Here Phishing technique is recognized as one of the important tools to steal various information (Benzel, 2021, 26). Cyber attackers are always trying to provide some email for accessing all required login credentials (Cox, 2008).[ s. Social engineering, where hackers manipulate employees to gain access to passwords and systems, is one of the main risks organizations face. Therefore, encouraging employees to be vigilant regarding company information is very important.]

4. SQL injection: This is determined as another type of cyber threat where cyber-attack is established by inserting the malicious codes in SQL. When the server has become infected, it release all necessary information. The malicious codecan steal all necessary information from the users (Bertino& Sandhu, 2005).

5. Emotet: CISA described the concept of Emotet in an advance manner. Emotet is also recognised as one of the costly and destructive malware within the system.

STRIDE Model:

The STRIDE model is recognized as one of the useful systems where it can secure the app into three different categories named Spoofing, Tampering, Repudiation, Information disclosure, DDOS, and elevation privileges.

Techniques:

Spoofing: This technique can help to enter those people who are authenticated to access all required information as per the company’s standard.

Tampering: Integrity is the best policy to modify all network issues. It can also cover up the data on disk, , memory, and networks. This is a useful technique to take responsible action.

Information disclosure technique: This can help to provide all information that is not so much authorized or end to end encrypted

DdoS: This DDoS service has defined the concept of denying all access to the required resources which can make the service more immense.

Elevation of privilege: The proper authorization has been neglected to give access to other users. It can damage the overall infrastructure of Peter Excellent Packers.

Threat analysis:

Threat factors are getting measured here with the help of multiple risk factors within the organization. Multiple threads can arise here to improve the cybersecurity risk within the organization. All cyber threat factors are enlisted within the table.“While cyber-warfare might use some precepts of kinetic warfare, others had little significance in cyberspace” (Lilienthal & Ahmad, 2015).

Cyber Threats:

Hacking Password:

Cybersecurity threats are recognized as one of the important factors for analysing the priority of different risks, DDoS attacks and malware attacks. Ransomware is highly responsible to steal all the user's transaction history from the transactional database.

DDoS attack: Analyzing the severity of the risk, it is determined as one of the important and medium risk factors for stealing all required information from the customer table. According to the Risk factor analysis, the severity of individual risk factors creates a huge impact on organizational growth. The scaling technique is quite helpful to measure the severity of cyber attacks within the organization.

The Social attack: This attack has been considered a high priority and high level of consequences. Phishing attacks are also recognized as severe risk factors.ll intruders are trying to send some ransom mails for creating a log file within the organization's system. It can also become helpful to steal all necessary information from the users. Customers are always trying to open the mail which is coming from the PEP organization. It can directly impact the psyche of all potential and existing customers.

The weak password policy: Cloud-based service has been hacked with the help of a weak password system. A weak password policy can become more helpful to lose all sensitive information and personal information from the existing data sets or policy. These password policies can be overcome by creating a strong suggestion of the password.

Risk Register matrix:

Figure 4:Risk matrix
(Source: Stallings & Brown, 2018)

According to the Risk register matrix, the priority of all risk factors can be stated below:

1. Social attack
2.DDoS attack
3. hacking password attack
4. Weak password policy.

Threat controls:

According to the whole market analysis, it is very important to resolve all cyber threat factors in order to mitigate any issues within the organization. Phishing technique is recognized as one of the high threats which creates log files within the main file. It creates a wide range of opportunities within organizational growth. There are several factors that are highly responsible for mitigating all upcoming threats within the organizations. According to the severity of this act, a huge number of methods are responsible to mitigate such issues. These control measures will be updated with proposing the actual budget in the market.
The whole threat resolution process will be discussed here by identifying some threats within the new start up organization named as PEP. When these methods are applied in IT security infrastructure, it can enhance organizational growth.

Figure 5: Threat controls
(Source: Banham, 2017)

Proper knowledge of IT assets:

BYOT, Third party components are recognised as main service for all employees within the organization.

Supervisor of IT infrastructure should be more aware about different types of vulnerabilities. The minimum cost estimation for managing whole IT assets are $50,000.
Strong protocol of IT security:

.Security within IT devices must be extended by the help of BYOT. All the transactional information or databases must be updated on a regular basis. Strong security protocol is very much necessary for improving the internal and external environment. Employees cost:$20,000 (McLaughlin, 2011)
Equipmentscost:$50,000

Real time visibility: Therefore the team can become alert to avoid such issues from the grassroot level. the organizational control can enhance the growth of such organizations.

A QA analysis team must be incorporated in this section for improving the organizational growth. The whole system requires $10,000 maintenance charges.

Continuous, Actionable and Adaptive risk:

According to the risk severity, the management team should give some resolution structure for identifying threads in a prior manner.

Team should be more focused to mitigate all issues from the grassroot level.Technological advancement should be checked on a regular basis for identifying all vulnerabilities before getting into the system. The most important risk security control requires:$10,000.

These are main thread control measures to identify all cyber security threats. It is very important to incorporate such a strategy within organizational growth for reducing all upcoming threads. It can also produce a better visibility about which risk resolution technique is necessary to mitigate the issue.
Mitigation scheme:

Cyber security risk mitigation scheme is recognized as one of the important factors to reduce all security policies and produce a huge impact on cyberthreats. Risk mitigation schemes separate or segregate three different elements named prevention, detection, and remedies. Cyber security risk factors can be mitigated by six different strategies which will be mentioned below in a sequential manner.

Improving the network access control criteria: A proper network access control needs to be established for mitigating all inside threats. Many organizations are trying to improve the security system efficiently. This factor can minimize the impact of likelihood and consequences. All the connected devices with the IT management system can increase the endpoint security within the system.

Firewall protection and antivirus: Cybersecurity risk can be measured by implementing the methods like firewall and antivirus software within the system. These technological factors are providing some exceptional security to restrict all intruders within the system. Outgoing traffic is also getting stopped with the help of such firewall security systems(Stiawan et al., 2017).

Antivirus software is also very useful to identify any malicious threats which can create significant damage within the organization.

Monitoring Network Traffic: A proactive action is very much important to mitigate all cybersecurity risk factors. Continuous traffic is necessary for improving the cybersecurity posture. A comprehensive view of the IT ecosystem can boost up organizational growth. This can enhance the IT security system. Continuous traffic helps to analyse or identify all-new threats and increases the minimal path of remediation.
Building a response plan:

PEP organizations must ensure that IT security teams and non-technical employees are highly responsible for any kind of data breach within the organization.

An incident response plan is determined as one of the useful techniques to mitigate cyber risk for improving the network environment. The incident response plan is recognized as one of the important strategies for preparing a team to mitigate an existing issue. Security Rating is also determined as one of the important strategies for getting feedback regarding implementing control measures.

Conclusion:

In this report, cybersecurity threat factors were discussed in a very detailed analysis. On the other hand, different types of measures will be elaborate to reduce the cyber threats factors. PEP company has been taken here to identify all future threats within the organization and resolution factors to remove these threats from the grassroots level. A risk matrix was given here to identify the severity of such a risk factor. According to the risk scale analysis, few resolutions were described here to mitigate all cyber threats. Different techniques with a cost estimate budget for implementing those techniques were discussed elaborately. It can enhance the growth of such an organization.

Reference:

PROG2008 Computational Thinking Assignment 3 Sample

Task Description:

In assignment 2, you have helped a real estate agent to gain some understanding of the market. The agent now wants you to help them set the indicative sale price for their new properties on the market. In this assignment, you will apply your knowledge in data analysis and modelling to build a regression model to predict the indicative sale price of a given property using the previous sale data. In particular, you will

- Apply multivariate analysis and appropriate visualization techniques to analyze the given dataset for the relationship between the sold price and other features of a property.

- Based on the analysis select one feature that can be used to predict the property indicative price. Justify your selection.

- Build a regression model to predict the indicative price from the selected feature.

- Train and validate the model using the given dataset and analyze the prediction power of the model. Discuss the result.

- Distinction students: propose a solution to improve the model accuracy.

- High Distinction students: implement the proposed solution to improve the model. You will use Jupyter Notebook in this assignment to perform the required analyses, visualise data, and show the analysis results.

Getting Help:

This assignment, which is to be completed individually, is your chance to gain an understanding of the fundamental concepts of computer networks which later learning will be based. It is important that you master these concepts yourself. Since you are mastering fundamental skills, you are permitted to work from the examples in the MySCU site or textbook, but you must acknowledge assistance from other textbooks or classmates. In particular, you must not use online material or help from others, as this would prevent you from mastering these concepts. This diagram will help you understand where you can get help:

Solution

Analysis Report

The property sales prediction was done using a python programming language with Anaconda Framework using Jupyter Notebook IDE where the sales prediction dataset was explored at first. The libraries of python used for analysis and visualization were pandas, NumPy, matplotlib, seaborn, and sklearn for importing machine learning algorithms. For Assignment Help -

About data

The details about the data are thouroughly discussed in the notebook where each column details has been described about the property and sales.

The data reading was done using pandas where the information about the data was described.
Data processing including the column details, column information of data types, handling missing values and checking null values if present, and summary statistics of the data where the mean, deviation, maximum, count, etc. of the data are described.

Data Visualization

The data visualizations were done using matplotlib and seaborn library which are used for creating attractive and interactive graphs, plots, and charts in python. The different graphs from the data insights are described as communicating about the data containing visuals.

Figure 4 Bedroom description bar chart

The bar chart here describing the bedroom description count where the data containing 45.5% of property with bedrooms and the sales is also depended upon these factors.

Figure 5 Property sales price with bedroom availability

Figure 6 Property sales price with bathroom availability

Figure 7 Property sales price with square fit living availability

Figure 8 Property sales price with floors availability

Figure 9 Property sales price with condition availability

The sale prediction according to the property description is clearly described by the visualizations which describe the descriptive analysis of the data which represents the sales of the property according to the different infrastructure based happened in the past.

Figure 10 Property sales price with space availability

Figure 11 Property sales price with condition availability

Figure 12 Property sales price with grades availability

Data Modelling

The machine learning algorithm is applied to the dataset for the predictive analysis where the future prediction based on the descriptive analysis is done to look at whether the models are accurate according to the data and the accuracy of the model describes the predictive analysis rate to predict the property sales in the future.

Figure 13 Regression model

The algorithms are applied to the dataset by training the models by splitting the dataset into train and test split and then the trained and tested values are applied to the algorithms to calculate the score of the applied data.

The predictive analysis score of the linear regression model predicted 100% accuracy whereas the decision tree regression score comes to 99% accuracy which describes the property sales prediction as mostly accurate as assumed.

 MIS500 Foundations of Information Systems Report-3 Sample

Task Summary

This assessment task requires you to reflect on your experiences in MIS500 this trimester by following a four-step process to gain insights into the work you have done and how it relates to your own career and life more broadly. In doing so, you will need to produce a weekly journal to record your learning and then as the trimester comes to a close reflect on these experiences and submit a final reflection of 1500 words (+/- 10%) that will include the weekly journal as an appendices.

Context

This is an individual assignment that tracks your growth as a student of Information Systems over the trimester. It is scaffolded around your weekly learning activities. Completing the activities and seeking input from your peers and the learning facilitator is essential for you to achieve a positive result in this subject. Before you start this assessment, be sure that you have completed the learning activities in all of the modules. This reflective report gives you the opportunity to communicate your understanding of how information systems relate to your career and future.

Task Instructions

1. During Module 1 – 5, you were ask to produce a weekly journal to record your learnings each week. Based on these weekly journals, please write a 1500 word reflective report about your experience focussing on how this will support developing and planning your future career.

2. You are required to follow the four steps of Kolb’s learning cycle when writing the reflective report.
You will keep a learning journal throughout the trimester. Each week as you complete the learning activities you record your experience in spreadsheet or word document.

A suggested format for the learning journal is as follows:

Table 1: Learning Journal

For each day in your learning journey, write the date and then the learning activity you engaged in. Detail what impact the learning had on you and then include any evidence you might like to keep for use later on. This journal should be appended to this assessment when you submit it.

Figure 1 – Kolb’s Learning Cycle

Solutions

Introduction

In this study, I have reflected on my learning experience related to MIS500 modules. I have described my learning experience based on Kolb’s learning cycle. For Assignment Help, This model explains that effective learning is a progressive process in which learners' knowledge develop based on the development of their understanding of a particular subject matter. Kolb's learning cycle has four phases, concrete learning, reflective observation, abstract conceptualisation and active experimentation. The learning process will help me to develop my career in the field of information technology.

Concrete Experience

Before the first module, I had little idea about the use of information systems in business. Thus, I was in the concrete experience stage of Kolb’s learning model, in which a learner has little idea about a concept. The first stage of Kolb’s model is concrete experience. In this stage, learners encounter new knowledge, concepts and ideas, or they reinterpret the ideas, concepts and knowledge that they already know (Hydrie et al., 2021). I learnt the use of information systems for making rational decisions in business is called business intelligence. I had no knowledge about business intelligence before the first module. Thus, it helped me to experience new knowledge about business intelligence. I started to think about how I can develop my career in the field of business career and the learning strategies that can help me to enhance my knowledge about the professional field.

The next modules helped me to deepen my understanding of business intelligence. I learnt that the emerging area of business intelligence is the result of a digital revolution across the world. Digital revolution refers to an increase in the number of users of tools and technologies of digital communication, such as smartphones and other types of computers, internet technology. The evidence for the digital revolution is the report "The Global State of Digital in October 2019.” The report mentions that there were around 155 billion unique users of mobile phones worldwide (Kemp, 2019). However, there were 479 billion internet users. The total number of social media users were 725 billion. The evidence has been obtained from module 1.2. Thus, there is high global penetration of digital technologies. The global penetration of digital technologies helped me to understand that I want to develop my career in the field of business intelligence. The digital revolution created thousands of career opportunities in the field. Business organisations need to use digital technologies to communicate with people or customers who use digital devices and technologies. Digital technologies are helping organisations in growth and international expansion (Hydrie et al., 2021). Businesses are expanding themselves with the help of digital technologies. Many businesses have transformed themselves from global to local with the help of digital technologies.

Reflective Observation

When I started to learn module 2, I learnt how business organisations use data to gain a competitive advantage over their competitors. In digital, the organisation which has relevant data can reach the targeted customers, improve their products and services and leverage different opportunities (Hydrie et al., 2021). Thus, data management and information management are vital for the success of an organisation. By collecting and managing data effectively, companies can obtain the knowledge that they require to achieve their business goals. I had reached the reflective observation stage by the time I learned this module because I started to reflect on new experiences by explaining why businesses need to digitise themselves. The reflection of observation is related to the second stage of Kolb’s model of learning. The reflective observation stage is related to the reflection on a new experience that a learner receives through his/her learning (Hydrie et al., 2021). It includes a comparison between the new knowledge or experience and existing knowledge or experience to identify a knowledge gap. This stage allowed me to know what I need to learn more to develop my career in the field of business intelligence or information system professional.

In the next modules, I tried to bridge the knowledge gap. In module 2.2, I learnt about the concepts of knowledge management and big data. Knowledge management is a collection of approaches that help to gather, share, create, use and manage related to management or information of an organisation (Arif et al., 2020). Knowledge management is crucial for organisations to gain meaningful insights from the collected data. However, big data refers to data in abundance which has high velocity and volume. Big data helps to identify important patterns related to events and processes and facilitates decision-making for business organisations.

These information systems are human resource information systems (HRIS), enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems and customer relationship management (CRM) systems Arif et al., 2020). This module played a vital role in shaping my knowledge by helping me to understand the practical use of information technology and information systems in business operations. I learnt how information systems help to describe and analyse the value chains of business organisations. A value chain of a business organisation is consist of main activities and supporting or auxiliary activities that help business organisations to carry out all their operations.
Module 3.1 also proved to bridge the knowledge gap. In this module, my knowledge reached to abstract conceptualisation stage of Kolb's learning model, which is related to the development of new ideas in a learner's mind or help him/her to modify existing ideas related to a concept. I started to use my learnings on how information systems can be used more effectively by business organisations. Thus, I tried to modify the knowledge related to existing applications of information systems in business.

Abstract Conceptualisation

Active conceptualisation is the stage of Kolb's learning cycle in which learners give a personal response to new experiences. In this stage, I started to think about how to use the new knowledge that I gained for the advancement of my career. I decided to learn more about ERP and CRM. If I learn about the two types of information systems, I can learn to develop them and help other organisations to learn their uses. It helped to shape my knowledge about area-specific information systems that can help organisations to meet the needs of the operations of their certain business operations. The two specific areas about which I gained knowledge in the module were ERP and CRM (Arif et al., 2020). ERP is an information system that helps to plan and manage the resources of a business organisation. It helps in managing to carry out supply chain operations. The main functions of an ERP are inventory planning and management, demand forecast and management of operations related to suppliers, wholesalers and retailers. However, CRM helps in managing relations with customers of business organisations (Hamdani & Susilawati, 2018). It helps to know and resolve customers’ grievances. CRM allows organisations to communicate with their customers to understand their needs and provide them with information about product and services offerings effectively. In module 4.2, I learnt how can help an organisation selects its business information system. The selection of a business information system by a business organisation depends on its business architecture (Hamdani & Susilawati, 2018). A business architecture refers to a holistic overview of operations, business capabilities, processes of value delivery and operational requirements. The information system that suits the business architecture of an organisation is most suitable for it. The price of information systems ascertained by vendors also influences the decisions of business organisations to use it.

Active Experiment

The active experiment is the stage in which learners decide what to do with the knowledge that they gained (Hydrie et al., 2021). I used the reflection technique to decide how to use my knowledge about information systems to develop my career. Harvard research in 2016 also explained the importance of reflection (Module 5.2). Reflecting on previous experiences helps individuals and organisations to recall what they learnt and find scopes of improvements in their existing skills and knowledge (Rigby, Sutherland & Noble, 2018). Thus, if business organisations reflect on their previous experiences related to IT operations, they can improve their knowledge about IT operations. Reflection can also help them to find a scope of improvements in their existing knowledge. As a result, they can improve their future IT strategies to achieve business goals. The improvements in the strategies can help them to ensure their future success. Thus, reflection can be an effective source of learning for organisations. The reflection of my learning helped me to know that I want to become a big data analyst because the requirements of big data analysis increasing in different fields, and I have effective knowledge about it. I will always follow ethics related to my profession to maintain professionalism because it is an ethical responsibility and professional conduct for IT professionals (McNamara et al., 2018).

Conclusion

In conclusion, my learning experience related to information systems helped me to know new concepts related to them. It helped me to bridge my knowledge gap about the use of information systems in business analytics. Based on my learning, I found that I have gained effective knowledge about big data analysis. Thus, I want to develop my career in the field of big data analysis.

References

Data4400 Data Driven Decision Making and Forecasting IT Report Sample

Your Task

Apply forecasting techniques to a given dataset and provide a business application of the forecasts. The report is worth 30 marks (see rubric for allocation of these marks).

Assessment Description

A dataset from a retailer that has more than 45 stores in different regions (Public data from Kaggle) has been sourced. The data provided for the assessment represents two stores. Store number 20 has the highest revenue within the country and store 25 does not have a high volume of sales. The objective of the assessment is to develop different demand forecast models for these stores and compare the forecast models in terms of accuracy, trend, and seasonality alignment with the historical data provided. Students must use visual inspection, error metrics and information criteria on the test data to provide conclusions.

Assessment Instructions

In class: You will be presented with a dataset in class. As a group, analyse the dataset using Tableau and Exploratory.io. You will provide an oral presentation of the group work in parts A to C during the third hour of the workshop.

The data set will be posted or emailed to you at the beginning of class in Week 6.

After Class: Individually write a 1000-word report which briefly summarises the analysis and provides suggestions for further analysis. This component of the assessment is to be submitted via Turnitin in by Tuesday of week 7. No marks will be awarded for the assessment unless this report is submitted.

Hint: take notes during the group assessment to use as prompts for your report.As a group:

Part A

- Use Tableau to compare the two stores in terms of sales using adequate visualisation(s).
- Run Holt-Winters forecasts of the next 5 months for stores 20 and 25.
analyse the results of the forecasts in terms of:
o Accuracy
o Alignment with the historical trend
o Alignment with the historical seasonality

Part B

- Use Exploratory to generate ARIMA forecasts for stores 20 and 25.
- Create visualisations, interpret and describe your findings.
- Analyse the forecasts in terms of:
o Accuracy
o Alignment with the historical trend.
o Alignment with the historical seasonality.

Part C

Prepare a presentation:
• Include key findings.
• Highlight methodologies.
• Advise which methods to use for each store.
• Recommend improvements in terms of forecasting for the retailer.

Note: All members of the group should be involved in the presentation. The allocated time for the presentation will be decided by your lecturer.

Solution

Introduction

The ability for organisations to base decisions on empirical evidence rather than preconceptions makes data-driven decision-making and forecasting essential. For Assignment Help, Forecasting trends help proactive tactics, resource optimisation, and market leadership in fast-moving environments. With the aid of various forecasting models, including ARIMA, HOLT-WINTERS, and others, the study's goal is to visualise the sales of both STORE 20 and STORE 25 and forecast sales based on historical sales trends.
Discussion on Results

Figure 1: Visualization of STORE 25 sales

Figure 2: Forecast result of STORE 25 sales

With a decline of 336,738 units from the initial figure of 3,149,931 units in October 2012, the projection for STORE 25 sales from October 2012 to February 2013 shows a downward trend. With a peak in December 2012 (1,616,475) and a trough in January 2013 (-563,853 units), the seasonal effect is clear.

Figure 3: Sum of value for STORE 25 sales

It appears reasonable to use the selected additive model for level, trend, and seasonality. The forecast's accuracy is fairly high, with a low MAPE of 10.8%, despite occasional forecast errors, as seen by measures like RMSE (383,833) and MAE (296,225). This shows that the model effectively captures underlying patterns, assisting in the formulation of successful decisions for the STORE 25 sales strategy.

Figure 4: Visualization of STORE 20 sales

Figure 5: Forecast result of STORE 20 sales

A time series methodology was used to determine the sales prediction for STORE 20 for the period from October 2012 to February 2013. Notably, it was clear that an additive model for level and trend had been used and that there was no identifiable seasonal regularity. Sales began at roughly $9.88 million in October 2012, and by February 2013, they had increased by $197,857.

Figure 6: Sum of value for STORE 20 sales

Quality metrics showed an RMSE of $1.3 million and a fair degree of accuracy. The forecast's relative accuracy may be seen in the forecast's mean absolute percentage error (MAPE), which was 12.4%. STORE 20's sales trend could be understood by the chosen model despite the lack of a pronounced seasonal effect.

Figure 7: Visualization of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 25 sales

Figure 8: Result of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 25 sales

When five periods of STORE 25 sales data are smoothed using the HOLT-WINTERS exponential method, a downward trend is evident. The anticipated values start at 3,028,050.52 and successively drop to 2,949,111.42. This tendency is reflected in the upper and lower limits, which have values between 4,165,588.2 and 4,108,064.45 for the upper bound and 1,890,512.83 to 1,790,158.39 for the lower bound. This means that the sales forecast for Store 25 will continue to drop.

Figure 9: Visualization of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 20 sales

Figure 10: Result of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 20 sales

The sales data from STORE 20 were smoothed using the HOLT-WINTERS exponential projection for five periods. The predicted values show an upward trend over the specified periods, rising from 9,692,132.56 to 9,838,792.22. The forecast's upper and lower ranges are also climbing, with upper bounds falling between 12,274,556.54 and 12,428,330.21 and lower bounds between 7,109,708.57 and 7,249,254.23 in size. This implies a steady upward growth trajectory for the forecast's accuracy for sales at STORE 20.

Figure 11: Visualization of ARIMA test for STORE 25 sales

Figure 12: Visualization of ARIMA test for STORE 20 sales

Figure 13: Quality performance of ARIMA model for STORE 25 sales

The quality performance of the ARIMA model for STORE 25 sales is encouraging. The MAE (9,455.64) and MAPE (0.0034%) are low, indicating that the forecasts are correct. Moderate variability is shown by RMSE (29,901.35). The model outperforms a naive strategy, according to MASE (0.460). The model's appropriateness is supported by its AIC and BIC values of 73,748.40.

Figure 14: Quality performance of ARIMA model for STORE 20 sales

For STORE 20 sales, the quality performance of the ARIMA model is inconsistent. RMSE (86,950.12) denotes increased variability whereas MAE (27,496.04) and MAPE (0.0033%) suggest relatively accurate predictions. MASE (0.508) indicates that the model performs somewhat better than a naive strategy. A reasonable model fit is indicated by the AIC (78,652.94) and BIC (78,658.86).

Figure 15: Quality performance of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 25 sales

The performance of the HOLT-WINTERS model for STORE 25 sales contains flaws. A bias is evident from the Mean Error (ME) value of -37,486.18. Despite having moderate RMSE (580,387.03) and MAE (435,527.36) values, MAPE (15.47%) indicates significant percentage errors. The positive MASE (0.708) denotes relative improvement, while the negative ACF1 (-0.097) suggests that the predictive model may have been overfitted.

Figure 16: Quality performance of HOLT-WINTERS test for STORE 20 sales

The performance of the HOLT-WINTERS model for sales at STORE 20 shows limitations. The Mean Error (ME) of -152,449.83 shows that forecasts are biased. MAPE (13.54%) and MASE (0.731) point to accuracy issues while RMSE (1,317,587.47) and MAE (1,043,392.14) show substantial mistakes. The low ACF1 (-0.25) suggests that the prediction model may have been overfit.

Key Findings and Recommendations

Key Findings:

1. STORE 20 frequently outsells STORE 25, especially throughout the winter.

2. Holt-Winters forecasting works well for STORE 20 because of its ascending trend, but ARIMA works well for STORE 25 because of its declining pattern.

Recommendations:

1. In order to capitalise on the increasing trend, Holt-Winters will be useful for STORE 20 sales estimates.

2. In order to consider into account its decreasing tendency, ARIMA will be used for STORE 25 sales predictions.

3. Strategic resource allocation will be advantageous to maximise sales for each shop based on its unique trends.

Conclusion

Precision and strategic planning are greatly improved by data-driven forecasting and decision-making. We visualised and examined sales trends for STORE 20 and STORE 25 using a variety of forecasting models, including ARIMA and HOLT-WINTERS. The findings offer guidance for developing tactics that can take advantage of the unique sales trends found in each location.
 

Bibliography

COIT20262 Advanced Network Security Assignment Sample

Instructions

Attempt all questions.

This is an individual assignment, and it is expected students answer the questions themselves. Discussion of approaches to solving questions is allowed (and encouraged), however each student should develop and write-up their own answers. See CQUniversity resources on Referencing and Plagiarism. Guidelines for this assignment include:

• Do not exchange files (reports, captures, diagrams) with other students.

• Complete tasks with virtnet yourself – do not use results from another student.

• Draw your own diagrams. Do not use diagrams from other sources (Internet, textbooks) or from other students.

• Write your own explanations. In some cases, students may arrive at the same numerical answer; however their explanation of the answer should always be their own.

• do not copy text from websites or textbooks. During research you should read and understand what others have written, and then write in your own words.

• Perform the tasks using the correct values listed in the question and using the correct file names.

File Names and Parameters Where you see [StudentID] in the text, replace it with your actual student ID. If your student ID contains a letter (e.g. “s1234567”), make sure the letter is in lowercase.

Where you see [FirstName] in the text, replace it with your actual first name. If you do not have a first name, then use your last name. Do NOT include any spaces or other non-alphabetical characters (e.g. “-“).

Submission

Submit two files on Moodle only:

1. The report, based on the answer template, called [StudentID]-report.docx.

2. Submit the packet capture [StudentID]-https.pcap on Moodle Marking Scheme

A separate spreadsheet lists the detailed marking criteria. Virtnet Questions 1 and 3 require you to use virtnet topology 5. The questions are related, so you must use the same nodes for all three questions.

• node1: client; assumed to be external from the perspective of the firewall.

• node2: router; gateway between the internal network and external network. Also runs the firewall.

• node3: server; assumed to be internal from the perspective of the firewall. Runs a web server with HTTPS and a SSH server for external users (e.g. on node1) to login to. Will contain accounts for multiple users.

Question 1. HTTPS and Certificates [10]

For this question you must use virtnet (as used in the Tutorials) to study HTTPS and certificates. This assumes you have already setup and are familiar with virtnet. See Moodle and workshop instructions for information on setting up and using virtnet, deploying the website, and testing the website.

Your task is to setup a web server that supports HTTPS. The tasks and sub-questions are grouped into multiple phases.

Phase 1: Setup

1. Ensure your MyUni grading system, including new student user and domain of are setup. See the instructions in Assignment 1. You can continue to use the setup from
Assignment 1.

Phase 2: Certificate Creation

1. Using [StudentID]-keypair.pem from Assignment 1, create a
Certificate Signing Request called [StudentID]-csr.pem. The CSR must contain thesefield values:
o State: state of your campus
o Locality: city of your campus
o Organisation Name: your full name
o Common Name: www.[StudentID].edu
o Email address: your @cqumail address
o Other field values must be selected appropriately.

2. Now you will change role to be a CA. A different public/private key pair has been created for your CA as [StudentID]-ca-keypair.pem. As the CA you must:

3. Setup the files/directories for a demoCA

4. Create a self-signed certificate for the CA called [StudentID]-ca-cert.pem.

5. Using the CSR from step 1 issue a certificate for www.[StudentID].edu called [StudentID]-cert.pem.

Question 2. Attack Detection from Real Intrusion Dataset

For this question you need to implement three meta-classifiers to identify attack and normal behaviour from the UNSW-NB15 intrusion dataset. You are required to read the data from training set (175,341records) and test set (82,332 records).

You are required to implement it by using the publicly available machine learning software WEKA. For this task you will need two files available on Moodle:

• training.arff and test.arff.

You need to perform the following steps:

• Import training data.

• For each classifier:
- Select an appropriate classifier
- Specify test option
- Supply test data set
- Evaluate the classifier.

You need to repeat for at least 3 classifiers, and eventually select the results from the best 2 classifiers.

You need to include in your report the following:

(a) Screenshot of the performance details for 3 classifiers [1.5 marks]

(b) Compare the results of the selected best 2 classifiers, evaluating with the metrics:Accuracy, precision, recall, F1-Score and false positive rate.

Question 3. Firewalls and iptables [8]

You are tasked with designing a network upgrade for an educational institute which has a single router, referred to as the gateway router, connecting its internal network to the Internet. The institute has the public address range 100.50.0.0/17 and the gateway router has address 100.50.170.1 on its external interface (referred to as interface ifext). The internal network consists of four subnets:

A DMZ, which is attached to interface ifdmz of the gateway router and uses address range 100.50.171.0/25.

• A small network, referred to as shared, with interface ifint of the gateway router connected to three other routers, referred to as staff_router, student_router, and research_router. This network has no hosts attached (only four routers) and uses network address 10.5.0.0/18.

• A staff subnet, which is for use by staff members only, that is attached to the staff_router router and uses network address 10.5.1.0/23.

• A student subnet, which is for use by students only, that is attached to the student_router router and uses network address 10.5.2.0/23.

• A research subnet, which is for use by research staff, that is attached to the research_router router and uses network address 10.5.3.0/23.

Question 4. Wireless security [10]

Read the research article on Wi-Fi Security Analysis (2021) from the below link:

You need to perform the following tasks:

(a) Write an interesting, engaging, and informative summary of the provided article. You must use your own words and you should highlight aspects of the article you think are particularly interesting. It is important that you simplify it into common, easily understood language. Your summary MUST NOT exceed 400 words. [3 marks]

(b) Find an Internet (online) resource (e.g., research article or link) that provides additional information and/or a different perspective on the central theme of the article you summarised in (a). Like you did in (a), summarise the resource, in your own words and the summary should focus on highlighting how the resource you selected expands upon and adds to the original prescribed resource. You must also provide a full Harvard reference to the resource. This includes a URL and access date. [4 marks]

(c) Reflect on the concepts and topics discussed in the prescribed article and the resource you found and summarised and how you think they could potentially impact us in future.

Solution

Question 1- HTTPS and Certificates

HTTPS is the shorter format of Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure. HTTPS appears in the Uniform Resource Locator when the SSL certification barricades the website. The overall details of the credential and the website proprietor's corporate standing can be considered by clicking on the specific safety symbol on the browser streak.

Part (a)

The ala data of the student's Id and the user's details are added with the help of the MyUni system (Aas et al. 2019). Follow the basic information of Assignment 1. The setup is being processed in that way.

Part (b)

Certificate creation follows an essential process where one must send a signing request to the Certificate Authority.

1. Run the necessary Command to can make a certificate signing request (CSR) file: openssl.exe req-new-key certaname. Key-out certname. CSR.
2. The promotion time is needed information like the common name, Tableau Server name, etc.

The use of HTTPS with the specific Domain name requires an SSL certificate, which has to be installed on the website.

Figure 1: Kali Linux cmd server
(Source: Created on Kali Linux)

Figure 2: Creating CSR

(Source: Created on Kali Linux)

In this figure, a key pair file is used to construct a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Specific field values seen in the CSR include email address, organization name, common name, state, and locale. The CSR is created with the name [StudentID]-csr.pem with the intention of getting a certificate for the student website.

Figure 3: Details of Certificate
(Source: Created on Kali Linux)

Part (c)

Write your answer here

The HTTPS on Apache is followed in several steps.

- Discover the Apache format file and unlock it with the text editor. The name of the Apache Configuration File has to depend on the system outlet.
- Demonstrate the Apache SSL structure file and save it. Open the Apache SSL layout file.
- Restart the Apache Web Server in the Linux OS System.

Part (d)

The testing process of the HTTPS certificate is done in basic simple steps. These are 1. First of all, check the Uniform Resource Locator of the specified website starting with HTTPS, where the SSL certificate has been created.2. Tab on the Padlock icon on the valuable address bar to can check all the specific details and information which is related to the Certificate.

Part (e)

The SSL is known as the Secure Sockets Layer. The SSL is a basic protocol that has the ability to can create an encipher link between the Web browser and Web Server (Gerhardt et al. 2023). Any data that can be swapped between a website and a specific visitor will be protected. Holding an SSL certificate for the WordPress website is a must for running an Ecommerce Store.

Question-2

Attack Detection from Real Intrusion Dataset

Part (a)

Training.arff

Classifier 1

Figure 1: Run Information of Rules Classifier 1

Figure 2: Rules Classifier in Test Model

Figure 3: Summary of Rules Classifier

Figure 4: Accuracy of Rules Classifier

Figure 5: Confusion Matrix of Rules Classifier

Classifier 2

Figure 6: Run Information of Bayes Classifier 2

Figure 7: Classification Model in Bayes Classifier

Figure 8: Evaluation Test and Summary of Rules Classifier

Figure 9: Accuracy of the Rules Classifier

Figure 10: Confusion Matrix in Rules Classifier

Classifier 3

Figure 11: Run Information of Trees Classifier 3

Figure 12: Classification Model in Trees Classifier

Figure 13: Summary of Trees Classifier

Figure 14: Accuracy of the Trees Classifier

Figure 15: Confusion Matrix of Trees classifier

Test.arff

Classifier 1

Figure 16: Run Information Test of Rules Classifier 1

Figure 17: Test Model in Rules Classifier

Figure 18: Summary Test of Rules Classifier

Figure 19: Accuracy of the Rules Classifier

Figure 20: Confusion Matrix of Rules Classifier

Classifier 2

Figure 21: Run Information of Bayes Classifier 2

Figure 22: Test model of Bayes Classifier

Figure 23: Build Model in Test.arff Bayes Classifier

Figure 24: Accuracy of Bayes Classifier

Figure 25: Confusion Matrix of Bayes Classifier

Classifier 3

Figure 26: Run Information of the Trees classifier 3

Figure 27: Classification Model in Trees

Figure 28: Summary of the Tress Classifier

Figure 29: Accuracy of the Trees Classifier

Figure 30: Confusion Matrix of Trees Classifier

Part (b)

Test.arff

The run information of Classification 1 is needed a shorter type scheme and very long attributes, but Classification 2 is specified a different scheme. The accuracy of classification 1 is presented in a more elaborate way but in the case of classification 2, there is a little much short about the accuracy. The F1 score and the false positive rate are better in Classification 2 than the Classification 1 (Ahmad et al. 2022).

Train.arff

The run information of the Classification 1 is very detailed in the primary part but the portion of Classification 2 is not specified in a proper way. The accuracy is less in classification 1 in the Train.arff but classification 2 is more accurate from the matrix perspective. The F1 score in the machine learning process is more specified in Classification 2 than in Classification 1 in the Train.arff (Alduailij et al. 2022).

Part (c)

Based on the specific comparison between classification1 and Classification 2, Classification 2 is better than Classification 1 because the scheme is more evaluated in Classification 2. The accuracy in Classification 1 is little much less appropriate than in Classification 1. The F1 score and the false positive rate are always better in Classification 2 than in Classification 1 of the bother test.arff and train.arff (Ceragioli et al. 2022).

Part (d)

The UNSW-NB15 is a process of the network Instruction sheets. It basically contains nine types of different attacks. The whole dataset contains ideal network packets. The number of possible records in the training set is primarily 175,341. Records. Of these nine attacks, the normal and the Generic are the most powerful. Because the training set and testing are best in these two category.
 

Question 3- Firewalls

Part (a)

Wireless networks utilize radio swells to transfer data into machines, similar to laptops, smartphones, and tablets, or entry points, that have attached to the “Wired Network”. “Wired Networks” utilize cables, similar to Ethernet, to secure machines, similar to routers, buttons, and wait people, to individually different or to the internet. The “Virtual Private Network” has an encrypted association up the Internet from the device to the web. The encrypted association supports guarantees that exposed data has been safely transferred. This precludes unauthorized somebody from eavesdropping on the gridlock or permits the user to execute a career remotely.

Figure 34: Diagram of wired Network
(Source: Created on Draw.io)

The network diagram in the example would show a wired network, a wireless network, and a VPN. One to three devices each would be used to represent the staff, student, and research subnets. The IP addresses of each machine and router interface would be noted. The areas of the network where data is encrypted, either by WIFI encryption or the VPN, would be prominently marked on the diagram as encrypted using red or similar easily recognizable label.

Part (b)

The firewall rules have the entry authority mechanism utilized by a firewall to protect the network from the contaminated application or unauthorized entrance. Fire3wall rules determine the variety of gridlock the firewall takes or that have rejected. The exhibition of the firewall rules creates the firewall entrance procedure. The firewall has network security that maintains getaway unauthorized users or hackers. Virtual software support saving files from viruses. Firewall support to maintain intruders by obstructing them from accessing the system in the rather residence. The firewall has a technique planned to control undesirable data from reaching and leaving the personal network. The learner will utilize either hardware or software to execute the firewall or an assortment of the two. In the company environment, or association can have an intranet that they save utilizing the network.

Part (c)

The Rules of the tables are primarily:

- Flare the concluding app or log in with the use of the sash command: $ sash user @server- name.
- List all of the IPv4 rules: $ sudo iptables -S.
- Find the valuable list of all IPv6tables -S.
- List all the special section table rules: $ sudo ip6tables -L -v -n | more.
- Lat List all the rules for the specified INPUT tables.

To add some new rule as the special section of the existing rule, merely use the index numeral of that current rule (Ruzomberka et al. 2023).

Figure 34: Network of educational institute
(Source: Created on Cisco)

The gateway router that connects the internal network to the Internet makes up the network architecture of the educational institution. The gateway router's external interface has the address 100.50.170.1, and the institute's public address range is “100.50.0.0/17”. A shared network with four routers, a DMZ subnet linked to the gateway router, a staff subnet is 10.5.1.0/23, a student subnet (10.5.2.0/23), and a research staff subnet (10.5.3.0/23) connected to their respective routers are all included in the internal network.

Figure 35: Server Configuration
(Source: Created on Cisco)

A web server that supports “HTTP” and “HTTPS”, an “SMTP” email server, and an SSH server would be included in the server setup for the educational institution's DMZ using Cisco Packet Tracer. On the gateway router, access control lists (ACLs) would be set up to permit access from the staff, student, and research subnets to the web server, staff members exclusively to the IMAP email server, and staff and research members to the SSH server from outside the network.

Figure 36: DHCP Server
(Source: Created on Cisco)

Question- 4- Wireless security

Part (a)

Advanced network security is the set of valuable technologies that have the ability to can protect the whole usability and also the goodness of the company’s framework by the process of containing the entry or the accumulation within the web of the wide range of variety of possible threats. The Hypertext Protocol Secure is a specific kind of combination of the HTTP with the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or the Transport Layer Security which is the longer format of TLS. The TLS is an authentication and also security system that is widely connected in Web browsers and Web servers. The second portion is made on the Instruction detection system.

An instruction on the Detection of suspicious activities generates the alert when the detected system has been proceeding. Connected to the specific process of a security operation Center, the longer format of the SOC or incident responder has the capability to investigate the obstacles and also take proper actions to remediate the threat. The real instruction Database includes the classification matrix and classification them in a proper manner. The process is described on the VMware Kali Linux. The tables which are in the third section allow the specific system administrator to define the actual table and draw the diagram which can illustrate the wired network and also the firewall rules mentioned here.

Part (b)

Wireless Network Security is the stage for patterns or instruments utilized to watch WLAN infrastructure or the gridlock crosses them. Extensively communicating, wireless security of articulates that endpoints have or exist allowed on the Wi-Fi network via network entrance or security policies. Resource Allocation has given time, distance, and Commonness environment in the scope established on the technique that categorized CDMA, TDMA, SDMA, and FDMA.

Part (c)

This essential security significant to details on the internet has confidentiality, integrity, or availability. Ideas connecting to the somebody who utilized the statement have authentication, permission, or nonrepudiation. Wireless security has the precluding of unauthorized entrance and impairment to computer data utilizing wireless networks that process Wi-Fi networks. The duration can again guide to confidentiality, integrity, and availability of the web.

DATA4000 Introduction to Business Analytics Report 3 Sample

Your Task

Consider below information regarding the Capital One data breach. Read the case study carefully and using the resources listed, together with your own research, complete:

• Part A (Industry Report) Individually by Monday 23: 55pm AEDT Week 12
Assessment Description

Capital One

Background

Who is Capital One?

Capital One Financial Corporation is an American bank holding company specializing in credit cards, auto loans, banking, and savings accounts. The bank has 755 branches including 30 café style locations and 2,000 ATMs. It is ranked 97th on the Fortune 500, 17th on Fortune's 100 Best Companies to Work For list, and conducts business in the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom. The company helped pioneer the mass marketing of credit cards in the 1990s. In 2016, it was the 5th largest credit card issuer by purchase volume, after American Express, JPMorgan Chase, Bank of America, and Citigroup. The company's three divisions are credit cards, consumer banking and commercial banking. In the fourth quarter of 2018, 75% of the company's revenues were from credit cards, 14% were from consumer banking, and 11% were from commercial banking.

History

Capital One is the fifth largest consumer bank in the U.S. and eighth largest bank overall(Capital One, 2020), with approximately 50 thousand employees and 28 billion US dollars in revenue in 2018(Capital One, 2019).Capital One works in a highly regulated industry, and the company abides to existing regulations, as stated by them: “The Director Independence Standards are intended to comply with the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) corporate governance rules, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010, and the implementing rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) thereunder (or any other legal or regulatory requirements, as applicable)”(Capital One, 2019). In addition, Capital One is a member of the Financial Services Sector Coordinating Council (FSSCC), the organization responsible for proposing improvements in the Cybersecurity framework. Capital One is an organization that values the use of technology and it is a leading U.S. bank in terms of early adoption of cloud computing technologies. According to its 2018 annual investor report (Capital One, 2019), Capital One considers that “We’re Building a Technology Company that Does Banking”. Within this mindset, the company points out that “For years, we have been building a leading technology company (...). Today, 85% of our technology workforce are engineers. Capital One has embraced advanced technology strategies and modern data environments. We have adopted agile management practices, (...).We harness highly flexible APIs and use microservices to deliver and deploy software. We've been building APIs for years, and today we have thousands that serves as the backbone for billions of customer transactions every year.” In addition, the report highlights that “The vast majority of our operating and customer-facing applications operate in the cloud(...).”Capital One was one of the first banks in the world to invest in migrating their on-premise datacenters to a cloud computing environment, which was impacted by the data leak incident in 2019.

Indeed, Amazon lists Capital One migration to their cloud computing services as a renowned case study. Since 2014, Capital One has been expanding the use of cloud computing environments for key financial services and has set a roadmap to reduce its datacenter footprint. From 8 data centers in 2014, the last 3 are expected to be decommissioned by 2020, reducing or eliminating the cost of running on-premise datacenters and servers. In addition, Capital One worked closely with AWS to develop a security model to enable operating more securely. According to George Brady, executive vice president at Capital One, Assessment Instructions

Part A: Industry Report - Individual

Based on the readings provided in this outline, combined with your own independent research, you are required to evaluate the implications of legislation such as GDPR on the Capital One’s business model. The structure of your report should be as follows.
Your report needs to be structured in line with the Kaplan Business School Report Writing Guide and address the following areas:

• Data Usability

- Benefits and costs of the database to its stakeholders.
- Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive applications of the data available and the data analytics software tools this would require.

• Data Security and privacy

- Data security, privacy and accuracy issues associated with the database.

• Ethical Considerations

- The ethical considerations behind whether the user has the option to opt in or opt out of having their data stored.
- Other ethical issues of gathering, maintaining and using the data.

• Artificial Intelligence

- How developments in AI intersects with data security, privacy and ethics.

• Use the resources provided as well as your own research to assist with data collection and data privacy discussions.

Solution

Introduction

Capital One Financial Corporation is known to be a popular American bank holding company. It is capitalizing in credit card, auto loans and saving accounts. The bank does come with branch strengths of 755 inclusive of 30 café style locations along 2,000 number of ATMs. For Assignment Help, This particular financial company has been ranked as 97th on the fortune list of 500 and even 17th on fortune out of 100 best companies to work. The company has even helped to become pioneer in terms of mass marketing of credit cards in the year 1990. In the year 2016, it has positioned as 5th largest card issuer in terms of purchase volume(GDPR Compliance Australia. 2021). Capital one is a firm which tend to value the use of technology and has evolved as leading U.S bank with respect to adaptation of cloud computing(Greve, Masuch and Trang 2020 p 1280). Amazon has listed Capital One migration right into their cloud computing environment for some of vital financial services. In addition, it does come up with a roadmap for reducing its data centre footprint in near future.

In the coming pages, an evaluation has been regarding implication of legislation on GDPR on the capital One’s business model. The next section reveals data usability, data security and privacy, ethical consideration and artificial intelligence.

Data Usability

Benefits and costs of database to its stakeholders

Database is considered to be an important tool for handling various digital processes within the system. The main aspect of storing, organization and analysis of critical data of business for different aspects like staff, customer, accounts, payroll and inventory. Database management system will allow access to various kinds of data. This will again help in creating and management of huge amount of information with respect to use of single software(Novaes Neto 2021). Data consistency is also ensured within database as there is no kind of data redundancy. All the required data appears to be much more consistent in nature with database. Here data is found to be same for various users to view the database(Lending, Minnick and Schorno 2018 p 420). Any kind of changes within database are reflected on immediate basis for users and thereby ensuring that there is no kind of data consistency.

Database do automatically take care of both recovery and backup. User’s does not need any kind of backup of data on periodic basis due to the point that care is taken by database system. In addition, it also helps in restoring database right after or even failure of system. Data integrity helps in ensuring that store data is accurate and consistent within database(Spriggs, 2021). The fact should be noted that data integrity is vital parameter when data is accurate and consistent within database. It can be noted that database do comprises of data being visible to range of users(Vemprala, and Dietrich 2019). As a result, there is need for ensuring that collected data is correct and consistent in nature for database and its users.

Descriptive, predictive and prescriptive applications of the data

Capital One can make use of analytics to explore and examination of data. It will help in transform findings into the insights which can help manager, executives and operational employees to go for informed decision-making. Descriptive analytics is being commonly used as form of data analysis where various kind of historical data is collected(GDPR Compliance Australia. 2021). After this, the collected data is organized and presented in such a way that it is easily understandable. Predictive analytics is focused on predictive and proper understanding what can happen in near future. Predictive analytics is completely based on probabilities.

There are wide range of statistical methods which can be use for this purpose named as descriptive statistics. It does comprise of numerical and graphical tools which can help in summarizing collection of data and collect some of the vital information. IBM SPSS is known to be predictive analytics platform which can again help user to build right predictive model at quick rate(Giwah et al. 2019). All this will be used for delivery of predictive intelligence to groups, system, individual and different enterprises. Predictive analytics software tools do come up with some advanced analytical capabilities like text analysis, real-time analysis and statistical analysis, machine learning and optimization.

Data Security and privacy

Database Security Issues: Database can be easily hacked by making use of flaws within their feature. Hackers can easily break direct into legitimate and compel the given system by making use of arbitrary code. Although it is found to be bit complex one, the access can be collected by using some of basic flaws to accept features. Database can help in providing protection from the third party by using security testing(Poyraz et al. 2020). The database can easily protect from third party access by making use of security testing. The function of database is simple one as there is chance for ensuring proper protection from each of the database feature.

Data privacy: Increased in use of personal data puts the data privacy at the top on business risk management. It is found to be an acceptable challenge and even dangerous to completely ignore. Breaching GDPR and other kind of similar regulation like CCPA and HIPAA do come up with up some hefty fines(Rosati et al. 2019 pp 460). The damage to reputation can be biggest kind of threat to the business and even create a career limit on the blot for IT resume manager. Data privacy can be easily tracked down into IT security or disaster recovery plan. But this is not good enough due to the fact that data privacy aim to touch various section of the business.

Data Accuracy:Business on global platform is increasing their lean on their data so that they can power day-to-day operations. It will help in providing enhanced data management being top directive for some of leading companies. Secondly, entry of three section blog series will help in looking towards more leading blog series. There is need for considering some of the popular data management challenges with cloud deployment, integration of various data sources along with maintaining accuracy(Zou et al. 2019 pp. 10). It emphasizes on data without any kind of disruptive analytics along with neglecting any possible impact. Issues related to data availability and security plague for enterprise of different size all around the verticals.

Ethical Considerations

In the infancy age of internet, data protection laws were created. Right before the advent of social media, no has ever heard about the term big data. General data protection regulation (GDPR) does come into effect right in the month of May. It will provide overhaul for legal framework for providing privacy and protection to some of personal data all across EU(Truong et al. 2019 pp, 1750). GDPR is getting much of attention due to the fact that organization aim to impose personal data which will help in to comply.

An opt-in completely depends on person so that they can actively reveal exact data about them which can be used properly. In general, the lighter touch in comparison to informed consent approach. On the contrary, opt-out system is possibility to result in much high coverage within population. It will provide the option of default assumption so that people can feel about data which can be used. It is possibly that only few people can actively take part for step-out(Goddard, 2017 p 704). It is more specifically to diverse population which has changing ethnicities as best tool for providing prevention. Some of the ethical responsibility for data which this patient can individually manage for opt-in depended system.

Taking into account opt-out availability,Capital One needs to consider some of the important points:

• It will help in providing meaningful, easy availability, together with clear information so that people can have well-informed regarding choices.

• Customers are not that much disadvantages if they come up decision to opt out.

• There is need for good and robust governance regarding data use. It does comprise of some independent sight and ability for auditing(Wachter, Mittelstadt and Russell 2017 p 841). This will ensure that data can be enhanced in certain methods.

Artificial Intelligence

Security, privacy and ethics are found to be of low priority problem for developers when modelling the machine learning solution. Security is considered as one of the serious blind spots. Here the respondents reveal that they do not check for any kind of security vulnerabilities at the instance of modelling building. There are various kind of regulations which tend to cover some vital areas of data protections. It will again have certain clause in relation to artificial intelligence(Zhang et al. 2021 p.106994). AI governance aim to post GDPR lessons learned and road ahead with a number of key areas to tackle to be identified to tackled down AI and privacy. It aims to list out on the following areas namely

• Incentivising compliance centred innovation AI.
• Empowering civil society by making use of AI
• Enhancing interoperability for AI-based governance structure.

European GDPR is such that law which does have special pull-on artificial intelligence to set out requirements which do comprises of its use. The report encourages both local and international level for resolving the possible challenges related to AI governance within privacy as being privacy being contextual in nature.

. This is found to be useful for manufacturing as it accepts latest technologies (Weinberg 2020). Due to the nature of this nature of technology, an individual needs more data so that they can enhance efficiency and smartness. In order to so, it creates certain number of privacy and ethical issues which needs to be dealt with policy along with careful design solution. Centre of Data Ethics and innovation will help in reducing any kind of barriers related to acceptance of artificial intelligence within society. Three areas namely business, citizen and public sector which require some clear set of rules and structure for providing safety and ethical innovation within data and artificial intelligence (AI)(Tomás and Teixeira 2020 pp. 220). Artificial intelligence depended solution will evolve to become much more ubiquitous in nature in upcoming days. As a result, there is need for acting ways to check that these solutions tend to evolve in ethical and privacy protecting ways.

Conclusion

From the above pages, it can be noted that this report is all about Capital One. Even Amazon has listed capital one migration in their cloud computing as the reputed case study. Capital One has evolved as one of prior banks on global platform so that they can invest to migrate its data centre on cloud computing-based environment. The report aims to evaluate possible implication of legislation like GDPR on Capital One business model. There are mainly four sections covered on report like data usability, data security and privacy, ethical consideration and artificial intelligence. The report covers data security, privacy and accuracy problem in relation to database. In the last section, an overview has been given how artificial intelligence aim to intersect with data security, ethics and privacy.

References

MIS609 Data Management and Analytics Case Study Sample

Task Summary

For this assignment, you are required to write a 1500-word report proposing data management solutions for the organisation presented in the case scenario.

Context

Module 1 and 2 explored the fundamentals of data management. This assignment gives you the opportunity to make use of these concepts and propose a data management solution (a pre- proposal) for the organisation presented in the case scenario. This assessment is largely inspired from Data Management Maturity (DMM)SM Model by CMMI (Capability Maturity Model Integration).

Task Instructions

1. Please read the attached case scenario.
2. Write a 1500-word data management pre-proposal for the organisation.
3. The pre-proposal should not only discuss the technical but also the managerial aspects (cost, manpower, resources, etc.). Please keep in mind that you are writing a pre-proposal and not a detailed proposal.
4. Please ensure that you remain objective when writing the pre-proposal.
5. Your pre-proposal should ideally answer (but not be limited to) the following questions:
a) What would the data management strategy be?
b) How would data communication be done?
c) Which kind of data would be managed by your organization and how?
d) How many staff members at your organization would manage data of this school; what would be the team hierarchy and what would their expertise be?
e) What resources would be required from the school?
f) What deliverables (hard and soft) would be provided to the school?
g) What would general data management operations look like?
h) How would data management policy be set and how would it be implemented?
i) How would metadata be managed?
j) How would data quality be managed?
k) How would data management practices be audited and how would quality be assessed?
l) How will user and business requirements be collected from the clients?
m) Which data architectures and platforms would be used?
n) How would legacy data be taken care of?
o) How would risks be managed?
p) What benefits would the school have as a result of outsourcing this service to your organisation?
q) What are the potential disadvantages that the school can face?
r) Others....

6. The questions mentioned above are written randomly, in no particular sequence. When addressing these questions in your pre-proposal, please ensure that you write in a systematic way. Make use of the web to find out what pre-proposals look like.

7. You are strongly advised to read the rubric, which is an evaluation guide with criteria for grading your assignment. This will give you a clear picture of what a successful pre-proposal looks like.

Solution

Section 1

Introduction

Westpac was formed in 1817 and is Australia's oldest bank and corporation. With its current market capitalization, Commonwealth Bank of Australia as well as New Zealand has become one of the world's top banks, including one of the the top ten global publicly traded enterprises (WestPac, 2021). For Assignment Help, Financial services offered by Westpac include retail, business & institutional financing, as well as a high-growth wealth advisory business. In terms of corporate governance and sustainability, Westpac seems to be a worldwide powerhouse. For the past six years, they have been placed top in the Dow Jones Sustainability Index (WestPac, 2021).

Reason for selection

Considering Westpac Group been around for a long period of time, it was a logical choice. Big customer-related knowledge has been a problem for the organisation in its efforts to use big data analytics to make better business decisions. Since the organisation faced hurdles and gained outcomes, it's best if one learn about how they used big data analytics techniques to overcome those obstacles given their massive database.

Business of Westpac

Westpac Group is a multinational corporation that operates in a number of countries throughout the world. Four customer-focused deals make up the banking group, all of which play a critical role in the company's operations. A wide variety of financial and banking services are offered by Westpac, encompassing wealth management, consumer banking, & institutional banking. Over the course of its global activities, Westpac Group employs about 40,000 people and serves approximately 14 million clients (Li & Wang 2019). Large retail franchise comprising 825 locations and 1,666 ATMs throughout Australia, offering mortgage & credit card and short-long-term deposits.

Section 2

Concepts of Big Data

Unstructured, structured, & semi-organized real-time data are all part of the "big data" idea, which encompasses all types of data. It has to cope with massive, complex data sets which are too large or complex for standard application software to handle. To begin with, it's designed to collect, store, analyse, and then distribute and show data. Professionals and commercial organisations gather useful information from a vast amount of data. Businesses utilise this information to help them make better decisions (Agarwal, 2016). Many major organisations use data to produce real-time improvements in business outcomes and to build a competitive edge in the marketplace among multiple firms. Analyzing data helps to establish frameworks for information management during decision-making. Consequently, company owners will be able to make more informed choices regarding their enterprises.

Business intelligence

The term "business intelligence" refers to a wide range of technologies that provide quick and simple access to information about an organization's present state based on the available data. BI uses services and tools to translate data into actionable information and help a firm make operational and strategic decisions. Tools for business intelligence access and analyse data sets and show analytical results or breakthroughs in dashboards, charts, reports, graphs, highlights and infographics in order to give users detailed information about the company situation to users (Chandrashekar et al., 2017). The term "business intelligence" refers to a wide range of techniques and concepts that are used to address business-related problems that are beyond the capabilities of human people. An specialist in business intelligence, on the other hand, should be well-versed in the methods, procedures, and technology used to collect and analyse business data. In order to use business intelligence to address problems, those in this position need analytical talents as well (Schoneveld et al., 2021).

Data warehousing

In the data warehousing idea, there are huge reservoirs of data for combining data from one or many sources into a single location. In a data warehouse, there are specific structures for data storage, processes, and tools that support data quality (Palanivinayagam & Nagarajan, 2020). Deduplication, data extraction, feature extraction, and data integration are only few of the techniques used to assure the integrity of data in the warehouse (Morgan, 2019). Data warehousing has several advantages in terms of technology. An organization's strategic vision and operational efficiency can be improved with the use of these technological advantages.

Data Mining Concept

Patterns may be discovered in enormous databases using the data mining idea. Knowledge of data management, database, and large data is required for data mining. It mostly aids in spotting anomalies in large datasets. It also aids in the understanding of relationships between variables using primary data. Furthermore, data mining aids in the finding of previously unnoticed patterns in large datasets. Data summaries and regression analysis also benefit from this tool (Hussain & Roy, 2016).

Section 3

Data Sources

A wide variety of external data sources were explored to gather the information needed for such an evaluation. The term "secondary data" refers to data gathered by anyone other than the recipient of the information. This material comes from a variety of sources, including the official site of the firm, journal papers, books, and lectures that are available throughout the web. A simpler overview is described below:

Problems Faced

There were a number of issues faced by Westpac Group when it came to collecting and storing data, managing marketing, goods, and services delivery, embezzlement and risk mitigation, absence of appropriate multiple channel experiences, inability to design adequate usage of information strategy, and sharing of data schemes (Cameron, 2014). There wasn't enough assistance from key players for the sector, particularly in terms of finance and board approval for initiatives. In addition to the foregoing, the following critical concerns were discovered:

• Report production or ad hoc queries were typically delayed since data generated by several programmes would have to be manually cleaned, reconciled, and manually coded. Owing to the duplication of work and data, there were also inefficiencies (Cameron, 2014).

• Inconsistent methods for data integration were employed (e.g., push of data into flat files, hand code,. This is also not future-proof because no concepts or approaches were employed to handle emerging Big Data prospects, such as data services as well as service-oriented architecture (SOA).

• There was an error in data handling and data security categories, which resulted in unwarranted risks and possible consequences.

Implementation of the Solution

The Westpac Group was aware that financial services businesses needed to advertise their services and products as a banking sector. When it came to serving consumers and managing customer data across numerous channels, the corporation realised that it had an obligation toward becoming a true, customer-centric organisation. That which was just stated implies that seamless multichannel experiences are available. It was only with the emergence or introduction of big data, notably in the realm of social media, that the bank was able to discover that channel strategies were not restricted to traditional banking channels alone. Before anything else, Westpac set out to establish an information management strategy that would assist them navigate the path of big data (Cameron, 2014). However, achieving such a feat was not without difficulty (WestPac, 2016).

It was determined that the Westpac bank needed better visibility into its data assets. Data warehouse senior System Manager, Mr. Torrance Mayberry recommended Informatica's solution. Torrance Mayberry, a specialist in the field, worked with the bank to help break down organisational barriers and foster a more open and collaborative environment for new ideas. Customer focus was still far off, but Westpac didn't stop exploring the vast possibilities data held, particularly on social media. There was a further increase in the bank's desire to understand its customers in depth. The bank included sentiment analysis within big data analytics as well.
Quddus (2020) said that IBM Banking DW (BDW) was used by Westpac for data warehousing, and that IBM changed the BDW model hybridized version, that was implemented in an Oracle RDBMS, to include the bank's best practises into its DW. As a result, IBM's BDW came to provide a fully standardised and comprehensive representation of the data requirements of said financial services sector. Informatica was the platform of choice for integrating and accessing data. Informatica Metadata Manager was also included in the implementation of Informatica PowerExchange. Informatica platform variant 8.6.1 was used by Westpac until it was updated to edition 9.1 (Quddus, 2020).

An EDW was used as the principal data warehouse architecture, serving as a central hub from which data was fed into a number of smaller data marts that were dependent on it. Analytical solutions for enabling and maximizing economic gain, marketing, including pricing were part of the supply of these data marts. As an example, financial products' price history was saved and managed in the DW, and then sent to the data mart in order to fulfil the analysis requirements for pricing rationalization. Informatica's platform gathered data from the bank's PRM system, that allowed this same bank to quickly refresh its knowledge of fraud and reduce individual risk. Data-driven decision-making at Westpac developed as a result of increased trust in the information provided by the DW, as well as the creation of new business links.

Section 4

Problems Faced in Implementation

Data warehousing (DW) was the first step in Westpac's road to Big Data. Similarly to other large corporations with data-intensive tasks, the Westpac Group has a large number of unconnected apps that were not meant to share information.

• There was a lack of data strategy. The lack of a single version of Westpac's products and clients because critical data was gathered and stored in silos, and dissimilar information utilisation and definitions were the norm; and the inability to obtain a single version of Westpac's products and clients because critical data was gathered and stored in silos, and dissimilar information utilisation and definitions were the norm (Cameron, 2014).

• Due to the laborious scrubbing, validation, and hand-coding of data from several systems, the response time for ad hoc or reporting production requests was sometimes delayed. In addition, there was a lack of efficiency due to the duplication of data and labour

• To integrate data, many methods were used, including pushing information into flat files and manually coding.

• Soa (service-oriented architecture) as well as data services didn't exist at the time; and there were no methodologies or ideas that might be used to handle new big data opportunities; Information security and data handling were classified wrongly, resulting in potentially harmful complications and hazards.

Benefits realization to WestPac

According to Quddus (2020), Westpac has reaped the benefits of the big data revolution in a variety of ways. According to Westpac's data warehouse, a large number of its business units (LOBs) are now able to get information as well as reports from it (DW). Westpac said that the bank's core business stakeholders started to realise the strategic importance of the bank's data assets therefore began to embrace Westpac DW acceleration. Financing, retail and commercial banking departments in both New Zealand and Australia as well as an insight team for risk analytics as well as customer service were all part of it. It was possible for Westpac to invest in the development of a comprehensive data strategy to guide business decisions by delivering relevant, accurate, comprehensive, on-time managed information and data through the implementation of this plan. Impacted quantifiable goals and results for securing top-level management help as a result of change. In Westpac's view, the project's goals and outcomes were viewed as data-driven. The chance of obtaining funds and board approval for such ventures grew in respect of profit and productivity.

Conclusion

Big data analytics have just placed the company in a functioning stage thanks to the potential future gains or expansions that may be derived from the examination of enormous amounts of data. The Westpac Group anticipates the big data analysis journey to help the banking industry obtain insights according to what clients are saying, what they are seeking for, or what kinds of issues they are facing. The bank will be able to create, advertise, and sell more effective services, programmes, and products as a result of this.

Recommendations

The following recommendations can be sought for

• These early victories are vital.

DW team at Westpac was able to leverage this accomplishment to involve key stakeholders as well as the (LOBS) or line of businesses, thereby increasing awareness of the problem for the company's data strategy by leveraging this internal success.

• To obtain the support of the company's senior management, provide a set of quantifiable goals.

Westpac correctly recognises that quantifying the aims and outcomes of data-centric projects in order to improve productivity and profit enhances the likelihood that certain projects will be approved by the board and funded.

• Enhance IT and business cooperation.

"Lost in translation" problems can be avoided if IT and business people work together effectively.

References

MIS608 Agile Project Management Report Sample

Task Summary

You are required to write an individual research report of 1500 words to demonstrate your understanding of the origins and foundations of Agile by addressing the following areas:

1. The origins of Agile – why did Agile emerge, what was it in response to, and how did this lead to the values and principles as outlined in the agile manifesto?

2. The origins of Lean and how it has influenced Agile practice

3. The similarities and differences between Scrum and Kanban as work methods

4. Why adopting Agile benefits an organization.

Please refer to the Task Instructions for details on how to complete this task.

Task Instructions

1. Write a 1500 words research report to demonstrate your understanding of the origins and foundations of Agile by addressing the following areas:

• The origins of Agile – why did Agile emerge, what was it in response to, and how did this lead to the values and principles as outlined in the agile manifesto?

• The origins of Lean and how it has influenced Agile practice.

• The similarities and differences between Scrum and Kanban as work methods.

• Why adopting Agile benefits an organisation.

2. Review your subject notes to establish the relevant area of investigation that applies to the case. Perform additional research in the area of investigation and select FIVE (5) additional sources which will add value to your report in the relevant area of investigation.

3. Plan how you will structure your ideas for the report. Write a report plan before you start writing. The report should be 1500 words. Therefore, it does not require an executive summary nor an abstract.

4. The report should consist of the following structure:

A title page with subject code and name, assignment title, student’s name, student number, and lecturer’s name.

The introduction (100 – 150 words) that will also serve as your statement of purpose for the report—this means that you will tell the reader what you are going to cover in your report.

You will need to inform the reader of:

a. Your area of research and its context
b. The key concepts you will be addressing
c. What the reader can expect to find in the body of the report

The body of the report (1200-1300 words) will need to cover four specific areas:

a) Why did Agile originate? When did it emerge and what was it in response to? How did this lead to the four values and 12 principles that are outline by the agile manifesto?

b) Where did Lean originate? Briefly define what Lean is and two Lean philosophies
have been adopted in the evolution of Agile practice?

c) Scrum and Kanban have many similarities, but also key differences. Compare and contrast Scrum and Kanban with each other, illustrating these similarities and differences with examples.

d) Explain what value adopting Agile can offer to an organisation.
The conclusion (100-150 words) will summarise any findings or recommendations that the report puts forward regarding the concepts covered in the report.

5. Format of the report

The report should use font Arial or Calibri 11 point, be line spaced at 1.5 for ease of reading, and have page numbers on the bottom of each page. If diagrams or tables are used, due attention should be given to pagination to avoid loss of meaning and continuity by unnecessarily splitting information over two pages. Diagrams must carry the appropriate captioning.

6. Referencing

There are requirements for referencing this report using APA referencing style. It is expected that you reference any lecture notes used and five additional sources in the relevant subject area based on readings and further research.

Solution

Introduction

The business enterprises are always facing changes in the external environment and adopting an agile approach in project development helps them respond to change effectively. Understanding of concepts like Scrum, agile, lean and Kanban will; be helpful for proceeding in this subject. For Assignment Help In this paper the agile and its origin and how the agile manifesto was formed are discussed in depth. Along with this the audience will read in the body of this report more discussions about lean, scrum and Kanban concepts used in software development. Such in-depth knowledge will not just help pupils in software development but also can be used in other areas in workplaces in future.

Agile, its Origination & Events that led to the Agile Manifesto

The agile method had originated in the industry of software development much before the manifesto was formed (Nadeem & Lee, 2019, p. 963). Most software development projects which were conducted previous to the agile manifesto formation were taking a very long time for finishing them. An innovative, new and effective approach was necessary by the industry and the consumers. In the early 1990s the industry of software development faced crisis of application delays or lags. The time used to fulfill the need of an application in the market was huge. Thirty years back one had to wait for years for solving a problem in the business of software development, production, and aerospace and in defense. The waterfall method was first manifested in this time where all phases were defined clearly in lifecycle of a project. As its name suggests it is a process where teams will finish one step completely and then start doing the next (Chari & Agrawal, 2018, p. 165). When a stage in such projects was completed it would be frozen for a very long time too. This method was not effective at all. Rarely did a software development project experience stability of the same kind. The need towards iterative development began because the teams needed to conduct activities, measure them, make change as needed and again improve.

Many software developers out of frustrated began making changes to their approach of development during the 1990s. Different methods such as Scrum, DSDM, Rapid Application Development or RAD emerged during this time. A group of software engineers met in year 2001 at Utah at a ski resort with an intention to solve problems such as delays in project delivery or bridging the disparities between expectations and delivered products. There was a pressing need to ensure that the software development time was less and the product reached the end user faster. Two things were identified in this conference. First, delay shortening will make products market fit and secondly with faster feedback from the consumer the teams can make continuous betterment of the products. Within a year from this conference meet the developers met again and formed the agile manifesto. The manifesto has laid out values and principles which gave the industry of software development a new traction and power (Hohl et al., 2018, p.1).

Origination of Lean Methodology

The lean as per history began much before the era where software development first began. Lean rather initiated itself in the Japanese factory of Toyota which used to make automobiles. In the year 1950s and in the 1960s Taiichi Ohno had developed TPS or the Toyota Production System and aimed to enhance the loss and enhance sustainable means of automobile production. Visual signals were utilized for producing the inventory as was needed. This was technically known as a just in time production process and it focused primarily over minimizing the wastage and optimizing all the production processes. Manufacturers in the west were struggling to be at par with the speed of manufacturing by Japanese organizations and hence soon they began using lean manufacturing processes (Rafique et al., 2019, p. 386). The lean guiding principles made easier implementation and major IT companies began adopting it as a result.

Lean can be defined as an approach of management which is supporting the continuous improvement model. The process aims in organizing the human actions for delivering value and eliminating waste.

There are many similarities in the concepts of agile and lean thinking. Blending the philosophies of lean into agile innovative work processes is formed. By blending the best of these two methodologies businesses are moving faster and developing better quality and forming healthy and sustainable work environments. Two philosophies of the lean methodology are used in agile practices.

Build-measure and learn: The build, measure and learn principle used in lean methodology is used in the agile (Kane, 2020, p. 1561). The agile and its iterative approach is based on this very lean principle which encourages testing, measurement and validation on the basis of past work and market trends. The lean always focuses on finding the way which offers maximum value to the customer.

Waste elimination: The philosophy of lean to eliminate waste is adopted in agile. Teams in agile pulls the work which is of the highest priority and they iterate and delivers it progressively. Continuously they are learning and improving to see that nothing is unused or wasted.

Scrum and Kanban Point of Similarities

Kanban is a methodology used for the optimization and management of the workflow where one can visualize the entire processes with the aid of tools such as the Kanban Board and teams can work continuously. The Scrum methodology is another framework used where in-depth and restrictive planning is of importance. There are many similar characteristics in between the Scrum and the Kanban. These popular methodologies are used in many organizations. Following are the point of similarities which are observed between them:

1. The methodologies are lean as well as agile in their approach.
2. The goal in these methods is also to restrict the work in progress.
3. They both use the pull scheduling for moving work faster.
4. Scrum and Kanban both breaks the work down.
5. Both these methods are focused on teams which are organised.
6. Software targeted by both these methodologies is reusable in nature.
7. Both the methodologies utilises transparency as a tool to process the continuous improvement (Lei, Ganjeizadeh, Jayachandran, et al., 2017, p. 59).

Scrum and Kanban Point of Differences

Agile advantages to the enterprise

A large number of organizations are moving towards agile development as it offers an environment which is evolving constantly.

Beat competition: The consumers, regulators and the business partners all have needs which are pressing. Stakeholders in business demand products and services which help them beat competition (Mckew, 2018, p. 22). This involves fast changing goals, quick restructuring and team adaptability.

Integrate innovation: Moreover with an agile approach organizations can encourage used of new technologies which helps them enhance their overall efficiency and performance (Potdar Routroy, S., & Behera, 2017, p. 2022).

Stakeholder engagement: Before the sprint process, during the process and after the sprint the stakeholders collaborate. With working software released to the client in intervals makes the entire tam come together with a shared goal in mind. Such teams display high involvement in the enterprise in general.

Forecast delivery better: In agile progress of the project is significant. At times the companies even make beta release of the software thus increasing the overall value of the business. Agile use can provide the team an opportunity for make delivery predictions accurately which satisfies the customer.

Element of transparency: The agile use gives organization the golden opportunity to work with the consumer during the development phase. The customer is aware of the features of the product being developed and gives feedback (Kalenda, Hyna & Rossi, 2018, p. 30). All the parties engaged in the development process in agile enjoys a high level of awareness and transparency.

Change opportunities: Due to the iterative approach of agile there are ample scopes for making changes. Minimum resistance comes from the workforce because they are already accustomed with the element of change.

Conclusion

The world is going through a major digital shift. Businesses in every industry are integrating new technologies and processes. Staying forefront to changing environment is important for survival. The concepts showcased in this paper about agile and used of its values and principles are indeed valuable for businesses. It is recognized that agile is the most suitable methodology which can be applied to projects, product development and also to man power management. Through agile, mangers can detect problems, find solutions and implement them fast. A recommendation to such dynamic thinking where more importance is given over solutions will no doubt helps enterprise achieve sustainable success.

References

MIS604 Requirement Engineering Case Study Sample

Task Summary

This final assessment requires you to respond to the given case study used in Assessment 1 and 2, so that you can develop insights into the different facets of Requirements Analysis in agile. In this assessment you are required to produce an individual report of 2000 words (+/-10%) detailing the following:

1. A Product Roadmap for the project

2. Product Backlog of coarse granularity including Epics and User stories

3. Personas who typifies the future system end user

4. Decomposition of Epics into User stories for first release

5. Minimum Viable Product (MVP) definition for first release

6. Story Mapping for MVP - ordering User stories according to priority and sophistication

7. Story elaboration of User stories for MVP to ensure that the User story is clear, along with the acceptance criteria for the elaborated stories to ensure the ‘definition of done’.

8. A paragraph detailing the similarities and differences between ‘traditional predictive’ and ‘Agile’ requirements analysis and management.

Please refer to the Task Instructions for details on how to complete this task.

Context

In the second assessment you would have developed capability in the areas of requirements analysis and requirements lifecycle management, which are well recognised Business Analysis skills and capabilities. However, Agile has become a recognised software development approach which is both adaptive and iterative in nature. This has necessitated the development of new and differentiated requirements analysis and management skills, techniques, and capabilities. This assessment aims to assist you in developing well-rounded skills as a Business Analyst who uses a spectrum tools and techniques. In doing so, you can draw irrespective of the approach your future employer may take to software development.

Task Instructions

1. Please read the attached MIS604_Assessment_Case Study

2. Write a 2000 words Agile Requirements Analysis & Management Report as a response to the case study provided.

3. Review your subject notes to establish the relevant area of investigation that applies to the case. Re- read any relevant readings.

4. Perform additional research and investigation and select five additional sources in the field of agile requirement specification, analysis, and management to add depth to your explanation of method selection.

5. Plan how you will structure your ideas for your report and write a report plan before you start writing.

6. The report DOES NOT require an executive summary or abstract.

Case Study

ABC Pty Ltd is a start-up tech company based in Adelaide Australia, who are currently seeking to develop an online delivery system named “ServicePlease”. The system aims to create a convenient platform to be used by service providers, customers, and supermarkets for home delivery of groceries to customer residents. The application will be available in both forms of website and mobile app, with separate views for service providers, supermarket, and customers. ABC Pty Ltd wants to launch this system to market in the next six months and have secured an investment for this. You have been hired by ABC Pty Ltd as the Business Analyst (BA) to help them with the requirement analysis for this project.

The “ServicePlease” application should provide the service providers to register with the system. During registration service providers will be asked to complete the background checking process. Criminal history or background will be checked through National Crime Check (NCC). Right – to – work will be checked through Visa Entitlement Verification Online (VEVO), which will confirm their citizenship, residency or visa status that allows them to work in Australia. All service providers will need to provide an Australian Business number (ABN), which will be checked through ABN Lookup. Service providers also need to give proof for delivery capability by car through driving license and vehicle registration certificate. Upon successful completion of registration, the service provider will be eligible and available for grocery delivery service in “ServicePlease”. Supermarkets can register with “ServicePlease” online delivery system. When registered, customers will be able to find the supermarket in “ServicePlease” system. Supermarkets can accept and prepare an order to be picked up by the service provider authorized by a customer. The system should enable supermarkets to rate service providers and certify as their preferred one. To use this service, resident customers need to sign-up first. Sign up can be verified with a valid mobile phone number and an email address. Customers need to set-up the payment method using credit card, debit card or PayPal, to pay for the service when used. While ordering, the application should enable customersto search and select a supermarket first (pick- up location). Then the customer needs to authorise a service provider from the available list (certified service providers will be shown at the top of this list, then based on rating) to pick up groceries from a selected supermarket and deliver to their residence (drop-off location). Once the job is completed, payment can be made securely through the app. Customer will get email confirmation after successful completion of an order. Customers also can rate and review the service provider, as well as the supermarket.

Solutions

Introduction

The report will discuss the different user stories and epics in developing a product, "ServicePlease", which is an online delivery system. The grocery stores can register in the system where the users can see the profile and order the products. A software system will require the development of user stories and product roadmap by developing personas from consumers' perspectives. For Assignment Help, The story mapping for the minimum viable product will be described in this report, where the sophistication of the design approach and priority of design according to the mapping of the product will be highlighted. The use of agile project management and the traditional predictive model will be discussed, where similarities and differences of each project management style will be examined.

Addressing the areas regarding case study

Product Roadmap for the project

ABC Pty Ltd aims to develop the "ServicePlease" online home delivery system based on the combination of website and mobile application. For that purpose, the roadmap to ensure efficient system development is needed to be considered. Release planning involved in product roadmap creates effective time management (Aguanno, & Schibi, 2018).

Table 1: Product Roadmap including releases and time
Source: (Developed by the author)

Product backlog including Epics and User stories

Table 2: Product backlog
Source: (Developed by the author)

Persona who typifies the future system end-user

Table 3: Persona engaged in satisfying end-users
Source: (Developed by the author)

Decomposition of Epics into User Stories for the first release

Requirements analysis for system development includes specific user stories which help to elicit the requirements for new systems in business (Stephens, 2015). The decomposition of epics into user stories will help specify the requirements and the tasks associated with each user story.

Table 4: (Epics decomposed into user stories)
Source: (Developed by the author)

Minimum Viable Product (MVP) definition for the first release

The first release will include several items which will increase the viability of the system. System design development through minimum viable products ensures basic operations within the software (John, Robert, & Stephen, 2015). The minimum viable products for the "ServicePlease" home delivery system may include a basic user interface design for registration, sign-up, and verification. The registration and sign-up processes will allow the users to enter into the system. Verification of the criminal history and other records of the service providers will help to maintain the safety of the residential customers and to appoint appropriate candidates as service providers. The interface will serve as a communication platform between the users and the system. The system will also include security check-up features like VCC, VEVO, ABN for the first release. The payment feature will also be developed during the first release. Apart from that, the "ServicePlease '' home delivery system will include the features like a search bar tool, navigation key, order desk, and feedback and review desk.

Story Mapping for MVP

The user stories related to the system development of "ServicePlease" in ABC Pty Ltd will be arranged systematically for identifying the priority level.

Priority 1

- The registration process in the first release is the most important step as it will ensure proper verification of the users' details.

- Inputting the criminal history, driving license, vehicle registration certificate, and citizenship proof, the service providers will register within the system.

- The security checking process helps to ensure authentication within the system (Liu et al. 2018).

Priority 2

- The sign-up process will help the customers to enter into the system by providing their email address, phone number, and basic details.

- Sign-up is essential for managing order placement and product search

Priority 3

- The payment option will help the resident customers to pay for the orders

- Information and transaction security during payment is essential (Serrano, Oliva, & Kraiselburd, 2018)

- The priority of the payment feature development in the first release is high

Priority 4

- Order preparation option will help the supermarkets to accept the orders of the customers.

- The priority of order desk creation in the first release is moderate

Priority 5

- The feedback and Review option will be generated after the first release, so the priority is low.

- The feedback process will help the customers to state their comments about the services.

Story elaboration of User Stories for MVP

Table 5: Story Elaboration of User Stories for MVP
Source: (Developed by the author)

Acceptance Criteria for elaborated stories

Table 6: Acceptance criteria
Source: (Developed by the author)

Similarities and differences between agile and traditional predictive analysis and management

Similarities:

The agile methodology delas with the development of user stories, roadmaps and develops product vision. It also helps to create user stories and develops a project management plan. Reasonable and marketable products are developed in an iteration due to which monitoring and creating the project development through a retrospective approach can be an easy approach. The primary focus of agile is to achieve targets and customer satisfaction. IT and software projects tend to prefer agile project management (El-Wakeel, 2019). On the other hand, Project charter development and the project plan is developed by developing sub-projects in the case of traditional project management. Also, interim deliverables are developed and the project control and execution are managed with predictive analysis. Following a waterfall model and each phase are planned at different stages of the product life cycle.

Differences

Agile focuses on planning, cost, scope and time with prominence with term work and customer collaboration. Considers customer feedback and constant development at each phase of iteration, preventing time consumption and improved customer satisfaction. The client involvement is high as interaction and requirements constantly change in every phase of development. Both current and predictable requirements are used where the waterfall model is considered. Agile project development of good quality, motivation in team performance and client satisfaction (Loiro et al. 2019). In the case of traditional predictive methodology, The project follows the same life cycle where every stage is fixed, like planning, design, building, production, testing and support. The requirements are fixed and do not change with time. The current and predictable requirements are considered as the product develops completely without any change in iterative phases. Coding is done at a single stage, and testing is not performed at every iteration.

Conclusion

The epic story and user identification help in developing the right product according to customer requirements. Minimum Viable Product design is important to initially develop the product outcomes and the features associated with the software design. Using an agile project approach will be helpful for the design of software as feedback at iterative stages can guide in user mapping based on requirements, and the final product can be justified in terms of the demand and identification of the probable consumers. The ordering of user stories according to priority is elaborated, which is helpful in developing the product. The definition of done is achieved by developing the product through story mapping based on user stories, and the persona development identifies the specific expectations related to consumer experiences and requirements associated with the product. 

References

MIS605 Systems Analysis and Design Case Study 2 Sample

Task Summary

Based on your responses to Assessment 1 – Written assessment, perform process and data modelling and develop and document a number of design diagrams using UML (including Context Diagram, Level 0 and Level 1 Data Flow Diagram, Entity Relationship Diagram).

Scenario (The Case)

Book reading is an extremely healthy activity. It has many benefits and above all, it is exciting, entertaining and a great way to release stress, anxiety and depression. These are not the only benefits. Above everything; book reading helps in mental stimulation; improvement of memory and it also helps in improving language skills. It also certainly allows an individual to help concentrate better. In short, the benefits are enormous.

In recent times we have been introduced to technologies such as laptops, cell phones, tablets and other technologies but to date, the conventional book reading is something that people cherish and enjoy in its own way. It is believed that a “book has no substitute” and book readers from all over the world firmly agree to this.
Cynthia, a young technopreneur and a book lover; plans to open an online lifestyle substitute business named ‘bookedbook.com’. This online business is Cynthia’s dream. Cynthia has formally registered her new company, everything is in place from a legal perspective and the company now has ample funds to develop an online website that would support Cynthia’s business idea. bookedbook.com would be an extremely interesting website. This website will require user registration. Children would also be able to register but their registration would be accompanied with some details of parents and their contacts. The website would only offer individual registrations and proof of ID would be a must when registering. bookedbook.com will offer quarterly, biannual and annual memberships.

The whole idea is very simple. Registered book readers would be able to launch the books that they own and which they would want to give away to other registered members. A book launch would require complete details of the book. It would also require the user to provide the address where the book is available. Once the book details are provided by the subscriber (registered book reader) the company’s content manager would approve the book launch request. Once approved, the book would be available for all users for them to review and/or acquire. The review process would allow all users to provide feedback and comments about the book and would also allow users to rate the book. The acquisition process would allow book readers to acquire the book from the book owner.

The users planning on acquiring the book, would make a request for book acquisition. This request would help facilitate book reader meetup and exchange books. Once the book would be acquired the book owner would have the option of removing the book.

Bookedbook.com will also allow users to interact with one another via messaging and chat rooms. Users will be given an option to decide the mode of communication that they would prefer. Off course all chat request, messages and acquisition request and all other messages are also provided to the user via email that is provided at the time of subscription.

The website would also provide a portal to the administrator for data analytics. Cynthia is keen to observe and analyse every type of data that is obtained at this website. For example, she wants to know which book is being exchanged mostly, she wants complete customer analytics, book
exchange analytics, analysis of book reviews and rating and other similar portals for data analysis.

As soon as the user registration would expire, all book launch requests would be halted by the system and the users interested in acquiring the book(s) placed by the user whose registration is about to expire would be sent an email that these book(s) are no longer available. Users would be asked to renew their subscription 15 days before the registration expiry date to ensure continuity of services.

Cynthia does not want this website to be a book exchange platform only. She also wants the website to provide a platform for all the users to arrange for an online and face to face meetup. She wants to ensure that any book meetup events that bookedbook.com plans should be available to its users.

Users should be able to register for these events which may be paid or unpaid. She feels that these meetups would be a great source of fun for book lovers and also a source of marketing for the company.

In order to ensure this website stays profitable Cynthia also wants this website to allow book authors from all around the world to advertise their books on bookedbook.com. This functionality, however, would not require book authors to register with bookedbook.com formally. Book authors would be able to just fill in a ‘book show request form’, provide their details, provide the details of their book and a credit/debit card number. They would also provide information about the time period for which they want their book to be advertised on the website. Advertisement requests would also be approved by the content manager. Once approved, the book authors would be charged and the advertisement would go live. The ad would be removed by the system automatically once it reaches the end date. bookedbook.com will only allow advertisement of up to 5 books at a time. All advertisement requests would be entertained by the system on a first come first serve basis. The advertisement functionality is also available for subscribers. In this case the fee for advertisement is very minimal.

Cynthia wants this website to be upgradable and secure. She wants simple and modern interfaces and also wants a mobile application version of this website.

Instructions

1. Please read case study provided with assessment 1. Please note that every piece of information provided in this case study serves a purpose.

2. Please complete the following tasks:

Task 1.

Create a Context Diagram for the given case study.

Task 2.

Create and document a Level 0 Data Flow Diagram (DFD). The Level 0 DFD should contain all
the major high-level processes of the System and how these processes are interrelated.

Task 3.

Select three important processes from Level 0 DFD, decompose each of the processes into a
more explicit Level 1 DFD.

Task 4.

For the given case study, provide an Entity Relationship Diagram (ERD).
For the given case study, identify the data stores including the files that are not part of ERD.

Task 6.

Translate the ERD you developed in Task 4 into a physical relational database design.

Document database tables and their relationship in MSWord file. Normalise your database design to the Third Normal Form (3NF).

Please note that your responses to the tasks above must relate to the case study provided.

Solution

Introduction

The case study deals with the online lifestyle substitute vision of young technopreneur named Cynthia. The bookedbook.com website is concise with features like user registration, advertisement, data analytics, review and book acquisition. The booked book. For Assignment Help com aims to serves as a platform for the book lovers all across the world. This website offers authenticity via series of procedures followed up for user registration. This platform allows the one user to interact with other via messaging and chat rooms. This assignment has designed the database to store the data precisely dealing with user, book, advertisement and other entities provided. The rest of the assignment is organized as such, context diagram, Level 0 Data Flow Diagram (DFD), Level 1 Data Flow Diagram (DFD), Entity Relational Diagram (ERD) and at last Schema design up to 3 Normal Form (NF).

1. Context Diagram

The context flow diagram is diagrammatic representation of the system (Sciore, 2020). The CFD has a centric bubble, drawn in the epicenter of the diagram. The rest of the interconnected processes encloses this context bubble. Arrow headed lines with labeling states the flow of information. CFD gives out the high-level view without going into the details of it. This is how data hiding is achieved via CFD. CFD unlike other diagram is not for technocrats or engineers. It is to be used by project stakeholder therefore should be designed as simple as possible. Pros and cons of the Context Flow Diagram are follows:

Pros:

• CFD makes error listing easy and handy.
• If helps to trace out the rough sketch of the project straightforwardly.
• There are no limitations to the shapes that are used to depict CFD. Any preferred symbols can also be used. No hard and fast rule exists.
• This do not ask for any technical skillset to understand.

Cons:

• Context flow diagram fails to lay down the sequence of the process happening. By the sequence it means parallel execution of the project processes or sequential processing of the project processes.

• CFD diagrams are erroneous. Since they are just a high-level depiction without venturing about the detailing of the process happening.

• Context flow diagram fails to display out the all the detailing involved in the process. Moreover, to present out the exact relationship in CFD is also very difficult. Therefore, the need for more explained ER diagrams were felt. Unlike other diagram CFD do not go for well-defined meaning for the geometric shapes used in it.

Context Flow diagram in respect of proffered case study is delineated in figure 1.

Fig 1. Context Diagram

2. Level 0 Data Flow Diagram

The Level 0 DFD (Harrington, 2016) depicts high-level processes of the system namely, advertisement, user registration, book acquisition, review and data analytics and others. The major components of DFD are listed below-

- Processes – It is represented by rounded rectangle.

- Data Flows - It can be represented by straight line with arrowhead. The direction of arrowhead represents the flow direction.

- Stored data – It can be represented by two horizontal and parallel lines including a label mentioning the database name.

- External Entities – It can be represented as a rectangle.

The diagrammatic representation is depicted in figure 2.

Fig 2. Level 0 DFD

a. Advertisement

In the context diagram advertisement process depicts the two types of labeled flow. Internal flow labeled as "Payment", towards the context bubble, ventures the payment revenue generated by the bookedbook.com via the advertisement displayed on the website. External flow labeled as "Provide slot", outwards the context bubble, asks for the time period for which their book has to be advertised on the website. The advertisement process allows the authors from all over the world to advertise their book on bookedbook.com. This process does not ask for the registration. Authors have to fill the 'book show request form' along with time period and payments.

b. User Registration

The website bookedbook.com offers its website visitors to get themselves registered. The user registration process asks users for ID proof in the return website gives registration number to the user. The arrow headed line pointing towards the context bubble labeled as "ID proof" depicts the ID proof requirement asked by bookedbook.com for the authentication purpose. The arrow headed line pointing outwards the context bubble labeled as "Provide Registration Number" depicts the allotment of registration number to the user via the portal. Children are also allowed to register. The nitty gritty for their registration process will also be the same. In addition, they will be asked for parents’ details and contact number. Registered book user is allowed to launch the book they own. The registered user can give away book to other registered members.

c. Book Acquisition

Book acquisition process allows the book reader to acquire the book from the book owner. The user has to make a request first for the book acquisition. This request facilitates the smooth meet-up and book exchange process to happen. The user can remove the book after the successful book acquisition. In the context diagram this process depicts the two types of labeled flow. Internal flow labeled as "Approval", towards the context bubble, marks the approval of the book. External flow labeled as "Details", outwards the context bubble, provides the details of the required book.

d. Data Analytics

In the context diagram Data Analytics process depicts the two types of labeled flow. Internal flow labeled as "Analysis Result", towards the context bubble, this provides the results, done on the given dataset to website administrator. The prerequisite for the results to be generated is dataset generated on the website. External flow labeled as "Data", outwards the context bubble, this provides the dataset for the analysis. The data is broadly centric to customer and book. This includes all possible type of data generated like whichever book is exchanged most, which one is reviewed best and other related information.

e. Review

The review bubble depicted in the context diagram and Level 0 data flow diagram allows the user to provide feedback and comments about the book. The rating of books is generated. This review mechanism serves the purpose for data analytics. In the context diagram Review process is presented inside the bubble. The two-arrow headed line one pointing outwards from the main context bubble, labeled as "Related Data" and other one pointing towards the main context bubble, labeled as "Feedback" depicts the types of functionalities happening.

3. Level 1 Data Flow Diagram

Three important processes from Level 0 DFD are decomposed further and stated below. The Level 1 DFD are presented as follows:

a. Level 1 DFD (Narayanan, 2016) for User Registration in accordance with the case study provided is depicted in figure 3a.

Fig. 3a. Level 1 DFD for User Registration

b. L Level 1 DFD (Narayanan, 2016) for Book Advertisement in accordance with the case study provided is depicted in figure 3b.

Fig. 3b. Level 1 DFD for Book Advertisement

c. Level 1 DFD (Narayanan, 2016) for Book Launch in accordance with the case study provided is depicted in figure 3c.

Fig. 3c. Level 1 DFD for Book Launch

In Level 1 DFD, the processes of level 0 DFD are further decomposed in sub-processes. It is used to show the internal processes of the major/trivial process of level 0 DFD.

4. Entity Relationship Diagram

ER diagram has three main components: Entity, Attribute and Relationship (Cooper, 2013). ER diagram uses several geometric shapes to portray out different meaning to entities involved. Unlike context diagram where the high-level functioning of the process is depicted, ER diagram lays down all the nitty gritty involved in relation with the process. The required entity relationship diagram for the given case study is depicted in figure 4.

Fig 4. ER Diagram

5. Schema design up to 3NF

ER diagram depicted in above figure is served as one of the fundamentals of physical relational database. Some of the relational schema (Date, 2019) is described below.

USER:

REVIEW:

BOOK:

ADVERTISEMENT:

BOOK ACQUISITION:

PR and FR stand primary key and foreign key respectively.

FIRST NORMAL FORM (1NF):

The relational schema is considered to be in first normal form if the attributes hold only the atomic values, i.e., no attribute may have multiple values. (Gordon, 2017). Basically, multivalued attribute is not allowed.
Example:

The following table is not in 1NF.

This can be converted into 1NF by arranging the data as in the following table.

SECOND NORMAL FORM (2NF):

The relational schema will be considered as in 2NF if and only if both the following conditions satisfies. The schema must be in 1NF (First normal form). There must be no non-prime attribute that is dependent on the any subset of candidate key of the schema.

A non-prime attribute can be defined as an attribute that is not the part of any candidate key.

Example: Consider the following table for example.

This table is in 1NF but not in 2NF, because ‘Age’ is non-prime attributes and is dependent on User ID, which is proper subset of candidate key. Thus, we can break the table in 2NF as-

And,

THIRD NORMAL FORM (3NF):

Schema to get into the third normal form must needs to be firstly observed in second normal form. Moreover, it should not hold transitive functionality. Transitive functionality reflects the dependency of non-primitive attribute on that of the super key.

Mentioned above are only necessary conditions for any relational schema to be considered as in third normal form.

Example: Consider the following table for example.

This table is in 2NF, but not in 3NF as the attributes Book ID and Book Name are transitively dependent on super key User ID. Thus, we can split the table as follows to make it in 3NF.

And,

References

MIS500 Foundations of Information Systems Case Study Sample

Task Summary

In groups of 3-5, you are to act as consultants hired by the company the case study is based on, to research, investigate and propose an information system for your client.

Part A: In response to the case study provided, your group will produce a report explaining the information system plan you develop for your client. The report should be no more than 3000 words.

Part A Group report

1. Fibre Fashion – Case Study

To complete this assessment task you are required to design an information system for Fibre Fashion to assist with their business. You have discussed Porter’s Value Chain in class and you should understand the primary and support activities within businesses. For this assessment you need to concentrate on Marketing and Sales only.

2. Watch the case study video about Fibre Fashion (link below). This video will allow you to understand the business and where you, as consultants, can add value by improving their information systems in marketing and sales.

4. For further details about current information systems of Fibre Fashion, please see the Assessment 2 Database document and the Fibre Sales Figures Contacts spreadsheet in the Assessment 2 area of Blackboard.

5. Based on the information provided as well as your own research (reading!) into information systems for SMEs (small to medium enterprise), write a report for Fibre Fashion to assist them in using Business Intelligence (BI) to develop insights for their marketing and sales.

Solution

Introduction: Student 1

The main aim of the report is to propose the Advanced Business Intelligence Information System to assist the business of the Fibre Fashion Company. For Assignment Help, The report discussed the issues regarding the business information recording system of the Fibre Fashion Company. The first section of the report identified the main issue regarding the recording system of marketing and sales data of the company. It also identified the research questions for further research regarding the advanced marketing and sales data analysis system for the Fibre Fashion Company. The second section of the report reviewed the different journals and articles regarding the importance of the marketing and sales data analysis for Small and Medium Enterprises and available updated the Business Intelligence system for meeting the need of marketing and sales data analysis of the SMEs. The Final Section proposed a recommendation about the business intelligence information system that will assist the business record and marketing and sales data analysis system of the Fibre Fashion Company.

Background of the issue: Student 1

Fibre Fashion Company has been an effective and consistent presence in the wholesale fashion industry of Melbourne for over 20 years. The fledgling business of the Fibre Fashion Company has evolved with colour, flourish, embellishments and accents of the pure boutique. The main issue of the Fibre Fashion Company is their inefficient Excel Spreadsheet recording System of the company for recording details of the client and business sales per brand of the boutique. Moreover, the order placing system and invoice creation system of the company also is inefficient. The company uses a simple database system for placing the order and creating an invoice for the order that only contains the style number, category of the product, the colour of the product, and total cost of the product. The company also does not enter the other details of the product in the record like delivery date, pattern, job number, manufacturer details, etc. The Company also uses a simple database to keep the record regarding the simple information of customers including the contact details, customer code, customer address, mail details, credit and discount details and product purchase price details. The Company uses a simple Excel spreadsheet for keeping the details of the clients of the company. It contains the name of the retailer details and location details of the retailer. It contains the details of all open and closed retailer details in the excel spreadsheet. It removes the close retailer name by striking on the name of the retailer. It contains the details regarding “new client details”, “viewed but didn’t place order”, “Placed, then cancelled”, “Sale or return”, “viewed look book”, “Sent pack”, “Appt”, “cancelled appt”, “not interested to view”, “Order to come” etc. details regarding the client appointment and the order details of the product in a numerical format. It is very inefficient in nature for handling bulk data of marketing and sales information of the Fibre Fashion Company.

The report aims to review the needs of marketing and sales data analysis for SMEs and the range of updated Business Intelligent Systems for handling these needs. The report also aims to propose a better BI Information System for Fibre Fashion Business to assist their marketing and sales data.

Following are the objectives:

- To investigate the needs of the marketing and data analysis for SMEs.
- To identify the range of BI systems for meeting marketing and data analysis for SMEs.
- To propose a better BI information system for Fibre Fashion Company to handle their client and sales data.

Research Questions: Student 1

What are the needs of marketing and sales data analysis for SMEs and the range of updated Business Intelligent Systems for handling these needs?

Analysis and Review: Student 2 and Student 3

Identification of the issue:

According to the case study, The Fibre Fashion Company maintains a simple excel spreadsheet and database for handling and keeping records regarding the client details and sales details per brand of the company. Storing and keeping the data in the excel spreadsheet is not easy for data visualisation and it increases the chances of the error. Moreover, there is no particular indication regarding “who are the clients”, “what they order” and “when” etc. It is quite painful for reporting regarding the details of the client and sales per brand for the company. It can increase the chances of fraud and corruption and also it is difficult to troubleshoot and test. It is sometimes not possible to interrelate the spreadsheet data across the workstations on different locations. Lack of security and control issue is the major problem. It is not user-friendly and the excel round-off the large numbers using imprecise calculation. It reduces the accuracy of the data. Excel spreadsheet is not efficient for managing the advanced pricing rules. Moreover, the simple database system is not sufficient for handling the advanced pricing strategies like quantity based pricing, psychological pricing, handling pricing based on the market and different geographic locations, and attribute-based pricing etc. It is unfit for agile business practices. Maintaining and keeping the record in the excel spreadsheet is quite painful for extracting the marketing and sales data from different departments and retailers, consolidating those data and summarising the entire information is also painful for the management of the company. It is incapable of supporting the company to make a quick decision and because keeping the record and extracting the data from the spreadsheet is a time-consuming process. It is also totally unsuitable for the continuation of the business. It is required to use the updated BI information system to develop the new insights for the company’s marketing and sales data.

Importance and needs of the marketing and Sales data analysis for SMEs: Student 2

In the view of Jena & Panda (2017), sales and marketing data analysis is essential for unlocking the relevant commercial business insights. It helps to increase the profitability and revenue of SMEs. It also improves brand perception. It helps in uncovering new audience and customer niches, new markets and areas for future market development It helps SMEs to reach different segments of the market via the different channels that are working and not working. It helps SMEs to take all the necessary information regarding the market for building an effective marketing plan. It focuses on the internal and external environmental factors. It considers the weaknesses and strengths of the SMEs by gathering the data of all marketing channels of the SMEs. Marketing data analysis helps SMEs to analyse the current market and helps them to understand the market more efficiently (Chiang, Liang & Zhang, 2018). Sales data analysis helps SMEs to understand the behaviour of customers, the products that maximum customer select and the reason behind selecting the product and behaviour of the product.

Mikalef, Pappas, Krogstie & Giannakos (2018) stated that marketing and sales data analytics helps in predicting the behaviour of consumers, improves the SMEs decision-making process and determine the best path for increasing the return of investment based on the marketing efforts of the SMEs. It helps them to protect their market share. The study stated that big data technology to analyse the marketing and sales data of the business is important for increasing the business efficiency, reduces the operational cost, marketing and sales cost of the company. It helps in identifying the failures and weaknesses of the SMEs. It helps in conducting a review of customers and design the new services and products for SMEs for increasing the marketing and sales of their product. It helps in identifying the fraud while keeping the record of clients’ data and sales records of SMEs. It prevents fraudulent activities and helps SMEs to make smarter decisions for enhancing their business. It helps the owners of small businesses to meet their business goals. It helps the sourcing the marketing sales information for analysis the marketing and sales data from different sources such as sales receipts, email marketing reports, publicly available data, website data and social media data.

Based on the research by Grover, Chiang, Liang & Zhang (2018), the use of marketing and sales data analysis increases the chance of return on investments while taking any marketing initiatives in SMEs. It helps SMEs to make proper decisions for providing proper service to their customers to retain them (Becker & Gould, 2019). A real-time data analysis facility helps SMEs to provide critical meaningful insights to the decision-makers in real-time to make a proper decision regarding further steps. Data analysis system helps SMEs to grow their business by allowing them to develop an update and fine-tune marketing strategies and search engine strategies (SMEs who have their online websites) (Cortez & Johnston, 2017). It helps SMEs to determine the right mix (product, price, place and promotion strategy) strategy for optimising the sales of the product. It helps to store the sales data in one place to improve the performance of sales. It determines the areas that need modification by determining the facts and relevant data regarding the marketing and sales.

BI System for meeting marketing and data analysis needs of SMEs: Student 3

In the view of Anshari, Almunawar, Lim & Al-Mudimigh (2019), Business Intelligence is the advanced technology that enables the business processes to analyse, organise and contextualise the business data from the company. BI also includes multiple techniques and data to transform the raw data into actionable and meaningful information. The BI system has mainly four parts that include 1) The data warehouse stores that help in gathering a variety of sources in an accessible and centralised location. 2) Data management tools and Business Analytics Tools analyse and mine the data in the data warehouse system. 3) Business Performance Management Tools for analysing and monitoring the data. It helps SMEs to progress their business towards the goals of the business. 4) User Interface tools and interactive dashboards with the facility of data visualisation reporting tools that helps in quick access of the business information. Business Intelligence tools offer a wide variety of techniques and tools for supporting accurate and reliable decision making for progressing the business performance. BI based and data-driven process of decision making helps SMEs to stay competitive and relevant.

As an example, Lotte.com the leading and renowned shopping mall in Korea uses the BI Information system for understanding customer behaviour and uses that information to develop marketing strategies. It increases the sales of the product of the company. Stitch Fix Company provides online personal accessory and clothing styling services uses data science and recommended algorithms of BI Tools throughout their buying process to personalised their products as per the requirements (Ryan Ayers. 2020). Netflix also uses the information and data using BI software to get more people and engage them with their content. Walmart uses BI software to influence in-store and online activity. They analyse simulations to understand the purchasing patterns of customers. It helps them to increase the marketing and sales of products of the company.

Followings are some examples of advanced and updated Business Intelligence Software:

Power BI is the Business Intelligence Tools and it is serviced by the Microsoft Company. It provides interactive visualisations of data and provides the proper services for enhancing the business intelligence capabilities through the simple interface for creating the own business reports and dashboards. It brings the raw data from different sources also from a simple spreadsheet to cloud base data. It helps in sharing powerful insights by analysing the marketing and sales data.
Oracle Analytics Cloud is a Business intelligence Software system that is embedded with the machine learning facility (Oracle.com. 2021). It helps the organisations to discover effective and unique new business insights faster with the facility of a Business intelligence system and automation system.

Qlik Sense is another Business Intelligence Information System that helps SMEs and other companies to create interactive dashboards and tools based on marketing and sales data, operational data and data from different departments of the company (Qlik. 2021). It helps in creating stunning graphs and charts to make relevant business decisions.

SAS BI is also a cloud-based distribution model to deliver business analytics services like business reports and dashboards (Sas.com. 2021). It analyses the business data using modern cloud BI technology.

Tableau Business Intelligence uses the ad hoc analysis process to improve the ability to better see and understand the business data across every department of the company for better decision making (Carlisle, 2018).

Recommendation: Student 4

Based on the overall analysis, it is recommended that Fibre Fashion Company can use the Power BI Software to develop the business insights for marketing and sales of the company. Power BI will help the company to meet the enterprise business intelligence needs and self-service needs. It is the largest and fastest-growing business intelligence information system. It creates and shares effective and interactive data visualisations across the entire global data centre. It also includes the national clouds to meet the regulation and compliance needs of the Company (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021). Power BI Desktop, Power BI Service and Power BI Mobile Apps these three elements are the total package by Microsoft to provide an effective Business Intelligence Information system for the SMEs and also other leading companies. The Cost-effective plans and high-quality data analysis facility increases the demand for this product. Moreover, the Power BI Report server allows the company to publish the reports of the Power BI to the on-premises remote server after the report has been created in the Power BI Desktop. Iqbal et al. (2018) stated that the BI system drives the business decision based on the current, historical and potential future data. Predictive analytics system uses predictive modelling, data mining and machine learning system for making the projections and assumptions of future business events. It also helps in assessing the likelihood of particular events. Prescriptive analytics helps in revealing the actual reason for taking the particular action and initiative for enhancing the business performance. It enables the simulation and optimization of the marketing and sales data and uses the decision modelling system to provide the best possible business actions and decisions for the growth of SMEs. BI Tools helps marketers track the campaign metrics from the company’s central digital space. It helps SMEs in real-time campaign tracking that helps in measuring the performance of each effort and develop a plan for future business campaigns. It gives the marketing teams of the company more visibility into the overall business performance. BI Tools helps the sales team to quickly access complex information like customer profitability information, discount analysis information and information regarding the lifetime value for customers (Chiang, Liang & Zhang, 2018). It helps the sales managers to monitor sales performance, revenue targets with the real-time status of the sales pipeline using BI Dashboards with data visualizations and real-time business reports.

The main Key Features of the Power BI are:

Fig : Overview of Power BI information system
Source: (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021)

1. Power Query allows the transformation and integration of the company’s business data into the web service of Power BI. The company can shred the data across multiple users and multiple retailers in different geographic locations. The company can also model this data for enhanced data visualisation (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021).

2. The Common model of the database allows the company to use extensible database schemas and construction.

3. The Hybrid Development Support helps the tool of business intelligence to connect to the different data sources. It allows automatic data analytics application to information by creating the subsets of data through the use of quick insight feature.

4. The customisation feature can help the company to change the appearance of data visualisation tools. It also helps in importing new business intelligence tools into the platform.

5. The Dashboard of Power BI embedded in other appropriate software products through the use of APIs.

6. Complex data Models can also be divided into small and separate diagrams by using the modelling view common properties. It can be set, modified and viewed the data as per the requirements.

7. Cortana integration facility allows the employees and users of the company to query for any data verbally by using natural languages. It provides a digital assistant facility. The Power BI System helps in easily and quickly sharing the relevant data and meaningful insights after analysing the marketing and sales data across all system such as IOS, Windows and Android (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021).

Fig : Sales Performance Report
Source: (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021)

It will help the company to protect their marketing and sales data details by using the Power BI security facility with the other facilities like Azure Private Link, Service tags and Azure Virtual Network. It will help the company to prevent data loss. Power BI Desktop is also free for clients to use and the Pro level of the Power BI Information system is also available at a low monthly price per user. Moreover, the weekly and monthly updates of the Power BI improve the marketing and sales data analysis capability. It will help the Fibre Fashion Company to develop better decisions for enhancing the sales of the product. It will help the Company to get self-service analytics reports at an enterprise scale. It reduces the complexity, added cost and data security risks of recording the marketing and sales data and details clients, and sales per brand details that scales data from the individual level to the organisation level as a whole (nabler.com. 2021). It uses Smart tools, facility of data visualizations, tight integration of excel, prebuilt data connectors and custom data connectors and built-in AI Capabilities helps in providing strong outcomes for helping management of the company to make better decisions. Moreover, end-to-end encryption of the data, sensitivity labelling and Access monitoring system in real-time will increase the data security of the marketing and sales data, clients’ data and details of sales per brand of the company (Becker & Gould, 2019).

Fig : Transforming Excel data into Power BI
Source: (Powerbi.microsoft.com. 2021)

Power BI will allow the company to correlate the marketing data and metrics from the different business sources. It also removes the maximum possibility of having false positives from the marketing data. The Company can easily connect the data models, excel queries and other reports regarding the sales data to the Power BI Dashboards. It helps the company to gather the sales data of the company, analyse the data, publish and share the outcomes and business data in excel in new ways (Carlisle, 2018). It will help the company get new insights from the data and use the effective business insights for making the appropriate business decision for enhancing the business activities of the Fibre Fashion Company. It will help the company to track the record of their products in their inner-city warehouse of company. The use of the Power BI Software will enhance the skills and knowledge of the staff in providing unique services to the clients of the company. It will help them to maintain error-free transactions and ordering activities with their clients (Wright & Wernecke, 2020). It will help the fibre fashion Company to develop a loyal and trustworthy relationship with their clients that will help them to expand their business in the broader market.

Conclusion: Student 1

It concluded that the Fibre Fashion Company can use the Power BI Information System to get more meaningful business insights by analysing the marketing and sales data of the Company. The Power BI software will help the company to improve the security of their recorded data in the database system. It will help the company to enhance the privacy of the clients’ data and details of the sales record per brand. It will help the company to develop new business insights for improving the marketing and sales figure of the Fibre Fashion Company. It will help the company to take the appropriate decision for improving the market share of the company. It will help the company to track the record of their products per brand in the warehouse. It will help the company to develop a fruitful business relationship with their clients that will help them to increase their sales and marketing profitability in future. The report also discussed the importance of data analysis for SMEs for the enhancement of their business in the market. It revealed that the use of the data analysis facility helps SMEs to achieve their business goals and objectives.

References:

MIS607 Cybersecurity Report Sample

Task Summary

You are required write a 1500 words Threat modelling report in response to a case scenario by identifying the threat types and key factors involved. This assessment is intended to build your fundamental understanding of these key threats so that you will be able to respond/mitigate those factors in Assessment 3. In doing so, this assessment will formatively develop the knowledge required for you to complete Assessment 3 successfully.

Context

Security threat modelling, or threat modelling is a process of assessing and documenting a system's security risks. Threat modelling is a repeatable process that helps you find and mitigate all of the threats to your products/services. It contributes to the risk management process because threats to software and infrastructure are risks to the user and environment deploying the software. As a professional, your role will require you to understand the most at-risk components and create awareness among the staff of such high-risk components and how to manage them. Having a working understanding of these concepts will enable you to uncover threats to the system before the system is committed to code.

Task Instructions

1. Carefully read the attached the case scenario to understand the concepts being discussed in the case.

2. Review your subject notes to establish the relevant area of investigation that applies to the case. Re- read any relevant readings that have been recommended in the case area in modules. Plan how you will structure your ideas for the threat model report.

3. Draw a use DFDs (Data Flow Diagrams):

• Include processes, data stores, data flows
• Include trust boundaries (Add trust boundaries that intersect data flows)
• Iterate over processes, data stores, and see where they need to be broken down
• Enumerate assumptions, dependencies
• Number everything (if manual)
• Determine the threat types that might impact your system
• STRIDE/Element: Identifying threats to the system.
• Understanding the threats (threat, property, definition)

4. The report should consist of the following structure:

A title page with subject code and name, assignment title, student’s name, student number, and lecturer’s name. The introduction that will also serve as your statement of purpose for the report. This means that you will tell the reader what you are going to cover in your report. You will need to inform the reader of:

a) Your area of research and its context

b) The key concepts of cybersecurity you will be addressing and why you are drawing the threat model

c) What the reader can expect to find in the body of the report

The body of the report) will need to respond to the specific requirements of the case study. It is advised that you use the case study to assist you in structuring the threat model report, drawing DFD and presenting the diagram by means of subheadings in the body of the report.

The conclusion will summarise any findings or recommendations that the report puts forward regarding the concepts covered in the report.

5. Format of the report

The report should use font Arial or Calibri 11 point, be line spaced at 1.5 for ease of reading, and have page numbers on the bottom of each page. If diagrams or tables are used, due attention should be given to pagination to avoid loss of meaning and continuity by unnecessarily splitting information over two pages. Diagrams must carry the appropriate captioning.

6. Referencing

There are requirements for referencing this report using APA style for citing and referencing research. It is expected that you used 10 external references in the relevant subject area based on readings and further research. Please see more information on referencing here:
https://library.torrens.edu.au/academicskills/apa/tool

7. You are strongly advised to read the rubric, which is an evaluation guide with criteria for grading the assignment. This will give you a clear picture of what a successful report looks like.

Solution

1. Introduction

The report will develop a threat model for solving the issues of cyber risk in Business & Communication Insurance company. Cybersecurity management is essential for risk identification, analysis, and mitigation (Mulligan, & Schneider, 2011). Cyber security management plays crucial roles for building cyber resilience by minimizing the threats (Ferdinand, 2015). For Assignment Help, The B&C Insurance company is under the threat of information hacking as a ransom email from an unknown source has come to the CEO company where the hackers claimed that they have the details of 200,000 clients of the company and as proof, they have attached a sample of 200 clients. The report will identify the risk factors and "at-risk" elements to develop a threat model using the STRIDE framework to mitigate the risk associated with cyber hacking in B&C Insurance company. For identifying the potential risks, their impacts and to suggest proper mitigation of the cyber threats, the threat model will be developed and the DFD diagram will be drawn to explore the risk factors and mitigation strategy related to the case study of B&C Insurance company.

2. Response to the specificrequirements

2.1. Types of threat and major factors involved

The B&C Insurance company can be under the threat of various types of cyberattacks. The different types of threats increase the potentiality of information risks where the aid of cybersecurity management is required (Reuvid, 2018). As the B&C Insurance company is a private firm, the possibility of malware attacks is high. The ransom email from the unauthorized source confirms that the sample of 200 clients is genuine which was investigated by the forensic computer specialists. Therefore, the risk lies in the information of the 200,000 clients of the company which was hacked by an unknown source. The type of attack is ransomware. Some of the potent threats that businesses face is ransomware, malware, DDoS attacks and others (Russell, 2017). As the hacker uses a ransom email, it can be possible that the threat lies in a malware attack.

The network, system, and user are the three factors that are prone to high risk. Within the company B&C Insurance, the insecure network can cause a risk of information hacking where confidential information can be hacked by an unknown source. Security of user information lies in the secret authentication process (Antonucci, 2017). The employees within the company can unknowingly share confidential data while giving access to any source. A similar incident can happen in the case of customers of the company. However, the vulnerability also lies in the system where data integrity is required for system management.

Other possible attacks are phishing and spoofing where attackers can target the employees of the company. The trap of fraudulent tricks can take the access of information from the employees. The clients can also be tricked where they are believed that the access is provided from an authorized source.

2.2. Threat Modeling using STRIDE framework

The threat modeling framework helps to manage cybersecurity by analyzing the risks, their impact and proposing the mitigation strategy to tackle the risks (Xiong, &Lagerström, 2019). Implementation of STRIDE framework in threat modeling process specifies the threats and keeps the integrity, confidentiality, and availability of information. However, the STRIDE framework will help to ensure the security of the information in B&C Insurance company by implementing the strategy for threat detection, evaluation, and mitigation. The six steps of the STRIDE model will be implemented to resolve the cyber risks within B&C Insurance company.

Table 1: STRIDE
Source: (Developed by the author)

2.3. Other Models and Frameworks of Threat modeling

The other suitable models may help the company to manage the risks in the information system.
The DREAD framework is capable of deriving a threat intelligence solution where it implements the appropriate rating systems for risk assessment, analysis, and development of risk probabilities (Omotosho, Ayemlo Haruna, &MikailOlaniyi, 2019). Through the information collection process, the DREAD framework rates the potential risks from low to medium to high. It allows the users to identify the threat for proper mitigation plan development. The B&C Insurance company can use the DREAD model for risk identification, analysis, and rating system development.

The NIST model of security management helps to set specific guidelines for managing the risks through threat detection and responding to cyber-attacks. It helps to manage the risks by generating a strategy for risk prevention. The cybersecurity framework of NIST can be implemented in B&C Insurance company for the identification of the type of threat and then the development of risk mitigation strategy. The framework can promote the organization to manage cyber threats by setting proper guidelines for cybersecurity management.

2.4. Data Flow Diagram

At-risk components

The health insurance company B&C has a record of its client's information related to health. Other information of the clients may include the personal details, demographic information, financial information, and family information of the clients. Risks can occur in the information of the clients where the hackers can steal the confidential information of the clients for misuse. Cyber risks increase the vulnerability in the information system (Stephens, 2020). The employees within the organization are also at risk of cyber hacking. The basic details of employees, their salary status, and family background are prone to high risk. The information of the system within the B&C Insurance company is a valuable asset that is under cyber threat. Moreover, the risk can also occur in the networking system where the information can be hacked by an unknown source. Therefore, it is essential to safeguard the at-risk components in the organization.

Figure 1: Context diagram

Figure 2: Level-1 Diagram

2.5. Security Strategies

The B&C Insurance company needs to safeguard its information and system from cyber attacks. For managing information security, the company needs to take the following actions.

· The data encryption process will help to control the access of users where using biometric or access control lists can be effective.

· Antivirus, network security control tools, anti-malware, and anti-phishing tools can be implemented to manage the proper security of the system. Installing an automated security tool can also be helpful.

· Access control and user authentication through proper password development is also an effective technique for managing information security (Stallings, & Brown, 2018).

· Security control measures like proxy firewalls can help in managing the security of systems (Durieux, Hamadi, &Monperrus, 2020).

· Training of the staff regarding security management is required to reduce the risk of phishing and spoofing.

3. Conclusion

Cybersecurity management can be possible through developing the thread model. The STRIDE framework will help B&C Insurance company to effectively manage the information system. The model implementation will also help to identify the potential risks, analyze the risks and mitigate them. However, the identification of the at-risk components will help the company to understand the underlying vulnerability within the information system of the company. The identified risk factors have contributed to drawing the DFD diagram where the application of the STRIDE framework has created potential solutions for security risk management. Moreover, the alternative models and the security risk strategy will also help the company to manage the future risks in an information system.

References

MIS610 Advanced Professional Practice Report Sample

Task Summary

You are required to write a 1500 words professional practice reflection. This requires you to by reflect on your experiences in Master of Business Information Systems (MBIS), specifically the IS Capstone and how these experiences provided you with insights into your own future as an IT/IS Professional.

Context

You have been studying Information Systems through a lens of Business, as most of you will chose careers in IS management and analytics. Technology is a strategic part of any enterprise today, large or small. Throughout your degree, you have been developing an understanding and skills that enable you to work at a high level in these environments. You are soon to graduate and follow your career path. This assessment gives you an opportunity to reflect on how far you have come and where you wish to go.

Task Instructions

Write a 1500 words professional practice reflection addressing the following questions:

• Complete the skills audit to identify your level of skills and knowledge with compared to the nationally recognised ICT skills set needed for a career in ICT.

• Identify your two strongest skills and reflect on why those are your strongest. Link this to your experiences in the MBIS and your life in general (for example you might also be influenced by family, work experience, previous study, hobbies, volunteer work etc.)

• Identify the two skills that need the most work. As above, link this discussion to your experiences in the MBIS and your life in general.

• Now that you are about to graduate, how do these skills match the job/career that you want?

Find a job advertisement and match the skills and knowledge wanted in the advertisement against your audit. What do you need to work on?

• Finally, you have identified your skills levels and how it relates to your career, now choose three skills and set yourself SMART* goals for the next six months to achieve your career objectives.

Solution

Introduction:

From a traditional viewpoint, the job of IT professionals is linked with developing software for solving complex problems on a computer. Information systems have been evolved over the years with the development of technology, the Internet, big data, and others. The emerging technologies have opened many career opportunities which include Chief Information Officer, Chief Technology Officer, and cybersecurity specialists, business analysts, and others. Rapid changes in the industry are one of the hallmarks within ICT domains which is prominent at our micro and macro levels. For Assignment Help Disruptive technologies like IoT and Big data have implied many changes within the ‘macro level’ due to which job opportunities have increased from the last few decades. Technical information is a system that allows students like us to work on the Internet efficiently while connecting globally (Intersoft consulting, 2016). The knowledge of various developed software will help in gaining information on varied domains thus enhancing professional knowledge life. This report aims in evaluating interests and knowledge on ICT career opportunities. Thus, conducting an audit on skills to recognize strengths and weaknesses can be improved for substantial career growth. This will strengthen skills and help students like us to grab adequate and good career opportunities.

Reflection report:

Completion of the audit skills:

Since the ICT domain witnesses, rapid changes hence skill audits help in recognizing. weaknesses and strengthswhich will help in attaining a promising career in ICT domains. I have a deep interest in networks and computer systems that further protects computer systems from unauthorized access or cybercrimes. It has become important to possess advanced skills in ICT domains for protecting all types of electronic devices from the breach. Thus,I have acquired additional knowledge from attending webinars, participating in class activities along studying through module lectures. I assume that my knowledge base in cyber-threat activities is strengthened that has been benefitting me in safeguarding my electronic devices while I am also keen to apply and broadened my information base for protecting the ICT infrastructure of organizations. As per the skills audit done by me, I have assumed that my knowledge of IT management, data management, IT infrastructure is strongest. However, to sustain rapid changes in the domain and HR strategies, I require to polish my skills for sustaining in the job market. (Australian Computer Society, 2014).

Identification of the two strongest skills:

Proper identification of own strength is necessary for achieving success in personal and professional life. Any person can enhance their scope and range of opportunities by adding value to their strongest skills (S. Tufféry, & S. Tufféry, 2011). As I have been studying the Information system specifically through a business perspective, I have generally mastered a wide variety of disciplines properly. But amongst them, I have preferred, Data and information management along with Software Development as my strongest set of competencies. These two skills have been providing have been helping me in completing my MBIS degree.

Data and information management is based on the managementquality and storage of both structured and unstructured information properly. It also includes integrity and security for providing support regarding digital services in business management (Hall &Wilcox, 2019). Besides, it also helps the business units to strategize business plans and policies for future investment purposes. I have also mastered web development and software development, as this skill has been my hobby for some time. I have also done several freelancing jobs on web and software development purposes due to which I can affirm that the aforementioned skillsare the main pillars for my future professional aspects.

Identification of the skills required for improvement purposes:

In this present digitalized era, for achieving a successful professional life, flexibility is very important without which the scope and opportunities of professionalcareerstend to be narrower after a certain period(Hunt, 2018). Also, flexibility supports the adoption of varied job purposes along with technological assistance. Currently, I lack skills in IT infrastructure and Network support skills due to which I faced many issues while completing assessments and understanding activities during my MBIS course. I also struggle in proper management and regulation of the hardware-related aspects, which also encompasses the problems regarding changed services. I have several examples of failures in support services to the customers while working as a software technician in a small size business organization during my volunteer work. I was also unable to resolve many problematic aspects which dissatisfied the customers. Network support is another important set of skills that needed to be enhanced for me.

The utilization of the skills towards professional career:

As per my skills, audit, and identification of strengths during my MBIS degree, a web developer or web designer would be the preferable and best-suited job for me. Hence, I have searched for the business companies that specifically advertise for a web developer or web designer in their organization. ENTTEC has been opted by me, as they are currently facing a high shortage of web developers. The company operates through its offices at Keysborough VIC, Australia. The company has advertised that the web developer will be required for updating and creating innovative software with related components like websites and software applications. The IT products and services offered by the company acts as the revenue for which management and regulation are of utmost importance. However, the company has strong recommendations for soft skills sets like teamwork, communication,crisis management which I need to polish.

Also, I have undergone other job searches as well, which demonstrates similar skills, however, requires higher work experience. Hence strengthening my skills will help in obtaining internships which will increase my professional expertise that will further enable me to work in the esteemed organization of my desired professional career.

SMART goals for the next six months:

Although the skills of web development along with data and information management are my strongest skills, however, I require polishing of competencies on infrastructure perspectives.

In addition to this, I would also like to improve my communication, teamwork, and forms of interpersonal skills for sustaining in highly competitive ICT Organizations. Also, I realize that strengthening ICT competencies is important as advanced technology is being rapidly applied by all organizations, hence it provides a good opportunity with high job satisfaction as my job will help many companies to progress with efficiencies (Mainga, 2017).

Conclusion:

The report has helped me monitor my strengths and weaknesses in this domain, which has helped many career developments. Through the audits, I obtained information that must improve my skills in IT management data and administration for which I have designed SMART goals for six months. In addition to this, I recognized that IT domains undergo rapid change due to which possession of interpersonal skills is important. In recent times, the business environments are highly competitive which requires a balance of both personal and professional skills. Students like us, who will be stepping into the professional world are required for obtaining information on HR strategies and practices, hence job adverts are helpful tools in polishing skills for a higher opportunity of being recruited in the organizations.Also, the skill audit has enlightened me that I require continuous improvement for assessing strengths and weaknesses, hence I would continue this type of reflection in my professional career as well. My skills should be strengthened so that they can be used especially in the job-oriented process later in the future while I can also explore my job role and related skills for reaping benefits in different developmental domains of ICT.
 

References

ITC561 Business Requirements Report Sample

TASK

Read the Regional Gardens case study in the Resources section of Interact 2 before attempting this assignment help.

You are an ICT Cloud consultant and you have been approached by Regional Gardens (RG) to advise them on how to improve their data centre and move into the Cloud. The Managing Director (MD) is still unsure that this is the best approach for his company as he feels that his company is "not really big enough to be thinking about moving to the Cloud" and that any money should be spent on their garden design and product development rather than ICT. But both the Design manager and the Sales Manager are both concerned that if the company's data centre isn't improved then the company will not be able to expand.

The company has recently upgraded their display garden and also added a series of new product lines to their nursery store as a result. The Sales Manager is concerned that the current order system will be inadequate to handle the expected large increase in orders that is likely to come from these upgrades. The online sales system is currently running on the RG web services infrastructure, which has not been updated for a considerable amount of time. RG uses their own custom-designed garden design platform that runs on SharePoint 2013.

This allows them to enable a number of designers to work on individual customer designs or to collaborate on larger designs. This platform allows them to access the design software from the office, but also allows the possibility of remote access. The Design Manager would really like to enable the remote working capability, but has concerns that the SharePoint infrastructure is also quite dated and may not support an increase in the level of demand or for remote work.

The company is quite reluctant to put more capital into ICT infrastructure as the MD, correctly, reasons that this capital will be needed to support sales, design and distribution. The MD has read that the company can set up ICT infrastructure on Amazon Web Services (AWS) for no capital cost and reasonable monthly payments for the use of their infrastructure. The Regional Gardens MD is not entirely convinced that this is a valid approach as the company has always purchased and owned its own infrastrastructure so that it is not reliant on other organisations. But in the current circumstances, a Cloud approach now has to be investigated.

Regional Gardens Case Study

Regional Gardens Ltd is a company that runs a number of related gardening enterprises. It has a large display garden that it opens for public inspection a number of times a year. These enterprises include the Regional Gardens Nursery which sells plants and garden supplies to the public, and Regional Garden Planners which provides garden advice, design and consultancy services.

Regional Gardens Ltd has a small data centre at its main site in Bathurst where the company’s servers and data storage is located. The company has the following server infrastructure:

• 2 x Active Directory domain controllers on Windows Server 2012 R2;

• 2 x SQL Server 2008 R2 database servers on Windows Server 2012;

• 1 x Exchange 2010 email server on Windows Server 2012 R2;

• 4 x Windows Server 2012 File and Print servers;

• 2 x Windows SharePoint 2013 servers on Windows server 2012 R2;

• 2 x Red Hat Enterprise 5 Linux servers running Apache and TomCat (2 x Xeon 2.8GHZ, 16GB RAM, 140GB HDD).

• 1 x Cisco ASA 5512-X firewall running v9.6 ASA software.

This infrastructure has not been updated for some time and the Regional Gardens Board is concerned that a full upgrade may now cost them more than it is worth. The Board is now considering moving some, or all, of their current infrastructure into the Cloud. The Board sees this as a strategic move to future-proof the company.

Regional Gardens has engaged you as a consultant to advise them on the use of Cloud Computing in their daily operations. They have some 70 garden design, horticultural and support staff that work on different projects for clients in New South Wales. They have been advised that a move to using a Cloud based infrastructure would be an advantage to them.

Solution

Cloud discussion:

Advantages of Web Services:

Interoperability: Web service mainly works outside of any private networks and provides some important non-proprietary route to mitigate all issues of servers. Developers have enough priority to set up their programming language to communicate with authentic users. It can also determine as an independent platform.

Usability: Web service provides some business logic to expose through the web page. Web service helps the user to choose their application as per their preference. This type of approach can enhance the overall service and produces some useful code with different languages (Li et al., 2020). 

Deployability: Web service is mainly used through standard Internet technologies. Web service is used in different firewalls to the servers for completing the internet connection. Community standard also depends on the webserver.

A regional garden can become more helpful by the deployment of the web server in the cloud security storage. It can also create a user-friendly atmosphere.

The disadvantage of web service:

Storage capacity: Web service protocol mainly followed plain text format. Therefore, this format occupied a large space than binary methods. Large spaces with low internet connections are strictly affected by the regional garden's organization resources. It is one of the significant drawbacks of the webserver (Ullah et al., 2020).

HTTP server: Comparing the core web protocols and web services, HTTP is mainly grown-up for the long-term session. Browser mainly uses this HTTP connection for providing some web pages and images. On the other hand, the webserver can establish the connection for a long-term period and sent the data periodic manner. Web service process has become quite difficult for the clients of Regional Garden Ltd company.

The server provides some unique identification to the client for accessing the server. This kind of unique identification process provides the further request to the server. The server mainly depends on the timeout mechanism. If the server did not get any response from the customer side, they usually remove the data. It can become an extra load for the Web service. Cloud infrastructure of the regional garden will be getting a random threat from the service provider to store ant information for future use.

Advantages of share point:

Advantages for Business growth:

SharePoint architecture helps the user to gather any important information about the portal and it can easily be accessible by the authentic user of such an organization. The regional garden must implement this activity to install data from various sources Like EXCEL. Microsoft SQL. This can enhance the business process of Regional Garden Pvt. Ltd.

Cloud-based framework: Share point can access the progress of any project at any time with the help of a web browser. Authentic users of the company can use their data and resource as per the company's requirements.

Security in cloud solution: The security of the company is mainly determined by the business data of any renowned organization. SharePoint helps the user to arrange any data with the help of the firewall security process. Unauthorized members or outsiders of the organization can hardly access the information. Cloud solution helps to improve the confidentiality of any documents.
Disadvantages of SharePoint:

Integration requires developmental effort: Sharepoint integration issue is recognized as a very important aspect. All user mainly invest their time and cost to creates any project. If the project has become fail, then it is determined as a wastage of time and money.

Poor capability: SharePoint is a traditional approach. User can not get their information in a few seconds. It will take some time to display the information on the screen.

Though Share pointer has some good qualities, the traditional approach and the low developmental process can restrict the growth of the Regional garden.

Source: (Mahloo et al., 2017)

Web service infrastructure:

Deploying RG web service into AWS cloud:

Amazon web service is determined as a comprehensive platform that consists of three different types of services like IaaS, Platform as a service, and Packaged software as a service model. Cloud deployment has been created with four different architectures like public cloud, private cloud, hybrid cloud, community cloud. Few processes will be introduced in this section to deploy the AWS cloud service.

1. RG private limited company use this service to make available the service and resources

2. AWS mainly helps to manage customers' data for different authenticated users. Consumers are managing all application stacks and also make logging information authorized(Abbasi et al., 2019).

3. After that patching the information and gives a backup plan to use the data as per the organization's requirement.

4. The provider gives the Host and VM installation process.

5. The server provides network service and storage capacity.

6. In a PaaS environment, the virtual server is installed to make a readymade environment (Zhang et al., 2019).

RG web service deployed in the public subnet and AWS service used to protect RG web service:

RG web service has taken a few steps or methods to install the AWS service model architecture. These processes are like production VPC, UAT vpc, and DEV vpc.

1. In the production subnet method private and public subnets are used to rout in a particular table. The proxy server will be available here for 24*7 hours. It can share the database and log storage by the VPG method.

2. In UAT internet access, a public subnet will be deployed with the help of a router and proxy server. VPG method is used here to share the database snapshot and log storage services.

3. Router table, virtual private gateway helps to deploy the web server into public subnet model. It can also access the data or services.

Public access to the web service:

1. When the webserver is allowing for the users, intruders are always ready to create a log file for stealing all personal information of the Real Garden PVT. Ltd. Company. Therefore a DNS server should be installed here to pollute the cache of the server. It can give some questions to the transmission control protocol. This can also help to build up protection against the cache protocol system.

2. To restrict the malicious user it is very important to disable the recursion of the DNS server. The service provider should give the information to ISP for restricting the similar attack of DNS server.

These are the required method to make the web server for public access in RG Pvt. Ltd.

Remote access for the authorized web users: The main problem of secure remote access is internal webserver from the outsides of the firewall security system. In the meantime, unauthorized users have enough opportunities to get access the sensitive information. The main goal of the Real Garden infrastructure cloud is to implement a one-time password solution for accessing all documents of RG. Pvt Ltd. A secure socket layer is also used here. These components are needed to be implemented here in such a way as to improve the security, performance, and availability scale.

2.Another process is the main component of the system has two subcomponents. Proxy has one subcomponent behind the firewall. Another component is present behind the firewall.

3.Push web machine is used inside the machine, another machine absent is used outside. When a web request comes from DWT, absent uses control connection statement to initiate actual communication with authorized users. Push web server only helps to establish a connection.

Source: (Pacevic & Kaceniauskas, 2017)

Share point design Platform:

Process of SharePoint infrastructure in AWS cloud:

Share point infrastructure can increase the security and high availability of the system in AWS cloud storage. Few steps should be followed here with the help of AWS cloud Formation template, multiple servers, and single server topologies. This deployment option included some specific categories like a single server and multiple server share points to form a virtual private cloud (Hodson et al., 2017).

1. Public subnet and private subnet mask are used here to make a static internet activity. In virtual private cloud storage, the Public subnet has two categories like NAT gateway and RD gateway.

2. Private subnet consists of 4 different categories like Frontend server, app server, database server, and directory server.

3. Network address translation gateway used here to allow outbound internet access for the required private subnets.
Private subnet: Application load balancer is used within the AWS server. Amazon EC2 instance is also added to the front-end device. Two amazon EC2 instances serve as Microsoft SQL servers needed to be deployed in the Amazon web server application (Yu et al., 2020).

4. A remote desktop gateway in the auto-scaling group allows the remote desktop protocol to Amazon elastic compute system. It can make the connection between private and public subnets.

These methods are required here to install SharePoint infrastructure in the AWS cloud(Varghese & Buyya, 2018).

SharePoint uses private subnet and AWS to protect RG web service:

According to the AWS configuration, VPC configuration has been used to place internet and non-internet servers in particular positions. This can also help to restrict direct access from the other instances of the internet.

1. Hybrid architecture is one of the useful methods to extend private policy and it can also enhance the Active directory infrastructure.

2. Private subnet made up with the help of application load balancer.

3. A network load balancer is used here for the SharePoint application server.

4. Two Amazon electric compute systems serve Microsoft SharePoint as an application server (Waguia & Menshchikov, 2021).

5. Amazon EC2 is also used here as a Windows failover file share witness.

6. At last SQL server is also used in RG infrastructure Pvt. Ltd to create a high available cluster.

7. These are the main components mainly used to set up the RG Pvt. Ltd company by implementing Amazon web server cloud architectural system.

Protection to RG web service: AWS server continuously helps to protect the data, information, and threats by improving the encryption, key management, and threat detection system. These concepts will be discussed in this section:

Threat identification and monitoring: AWS server is constantly monitoring threats in any system or network activity. As a result, it can detect any suspicious behavior within the cloud environment.

Identity access management: AWS identity constantly helps to make a secure management identity, resources, and permission within a particular scale. AWS has its identity service in the workforce and customer-facing applications. AWS constantly trying to manage its application (Mete & Yomralioglu, 2021).
Compliance status: AWS service constantly checking the comprehensive view of any compliance status. Not only that but also Monitoring the whole environment with the help of an automatic compliance checkup process.

In this way RG Pvt. Ltd can store the data in a safe, secure area. Implementing the above items or rules RG web service infrastructure will be protected.

Remote access share point for authorized users:

Share point is one of the significant document management platforms which is strictly used in different organizations, It can also produce near about 1 billion in revenue. SharePoint also helps to allow the organization and makes information confidential behind of corporate firewall system.

1.SharePoint intranet is mainly added with the users. The external use of this site can also have enough priority to get the internal information of Real Garden Pvt Ltd.

2. Self-hosted share point is one of the keys used to access internal information without using any virtual private network system.

3. It is also very important to create an application with the help of an application proxy. External and internal URLs will be used here to access the share point. There are few steps added here like internal URL, pre-authenticate URL, translation of the URL.
These are the required process needs to be implemented in RG Pvt Ltd for maintaining the remote access to the shared pointer.

5. After the process, the Sign-On mode and Internal application SPN model are used here to make a delegate login identity. User's domain has been checked continuously and select on-premises user names().

(Source: Kisimov et al., 2020)

Desktop architecture:

Approach to improve the desktop experience for staff:

Virtual desktop is defined as an innovative approach for any company to access the application from anywhere of the company. The desktop cloud can enhance the work from home opportunity. Covid-19 pandemic is gradually increasing the requirement of the virtual desktop category. In this report, few methods will be discussed to improve the desktop experience in the future (Chaignon et al., 2018).

Secure working environment: A hosted desktop solution offers Windows 10 and Windows Server from the different internet-based connected locations. It can make the data or information of the employee more secure. The virtual desktop experience is more comfortable than the office desktop experience.
Reduced cost in virtual desktop: Cloud virtual desktop has their expenditure for actual business. On the other hand, a physical desktop needs a huge amount of hardware, licensing, and management systems.

Consistent productivity: A hosted desktop solution remove the quality of the physical server on an individual site. This virtual desktop platform can also decrease the downtime system. An advance plan is also getting prepared in favor of employees’ satisfaction in RG Pvt. Ltd. Low downtime operation provides efficient operation and generates huge economic revenue (Sen & Skrobot, 2021).

Simplified IT infrastructure: Virtual desktop environments can create simple architecture to connect their 70 stores in one platform. An automation process can increase the quality of any users and running the program insecure manner. A simple and efficient process helps to make the IT team less worried than the previous project. It can also increase productivity within the organization.

Therefore as a researcher, it has been coming out that virtual desktop solution is more efficient for the staff of RG Pvt Ltd.

Amazon workspace vs. Goggle G suits for existing desktop:

Advantages and disadvantages of Amazon workspace and Google G Suite:

Advantages:

a)Amazon workspace is recognized as a virtual private network. Users can also get the advantages of encrypted storage volume from the AWS cloud service. It can also integrate the AWS key management service. Amazon workspace providers can improve the user data and risk service area.

b). Amazon workspace is also very helpful to save the time of operation which multiple computers needed. Amazon workspace is also defined as a cost-effective structure and provides various CPU, memory, and storage configuration.

c). Amazon workspace provides quality cloud infrastructure and manages the global deployment model.

Google G suits advantages:

a). It is very hard for the business owner of the RG Pvt Ltd company to visit multiple places for managing the tools. G Suite admin console helps to solve the issues by managing all devices, security change, and custom domain performance.

b) Google G suit helps to make the data protection capabilities which can preserve the sensitive information stored. Users can access the data as per the requirement.

c). Google G space has enough storage capacity which is restricted by the authenticated user within any organization. The administration head of the organization can send important mail to those people who are bounded within any particular organization.

d) G suit has enough tools like Google hangout chat, Google hangout meet, Google form and google slide. If any employee within the organization can not able to manage the data, the admin can remotely access the data. Then he can make changes to some additional issues.

Disadvantages:

1. When a remote official meeting has happened, G suit had never maintained the picture resolution within the screen. Therefore it can create a barrier within the organization.

2. A single workspace is too difficult for the users’ to manage. As a result, multiple google spaces are required for improving the user access movement.
The disadvantage of Amazon workspace:

a). Though the amazon marketplace is great, it is hard to make a subscription and activate the instance.

b). Tools of the amazon workspace are quite higher than any other software.

c). Experienced users can only identify the correct configuration of the Amazon workspace. Therefore it is very important to use user-friendly software for making the function easier (Damianou et al., 2019).

Analyzing the above advantages and disadvantages of the Google G suite, amazon workspace, the G suit is quite acceptable for employees within the Real garden Pvt. Ltd. Multiple tools are used here to secure the data privacy system. Apart from this thing, remote access to the desktop can be easily done by this software.
Online Blog architecture:

Developing cloud edge solution:

IoT system is one of the useful platforms to connect global users in the market with the help of cloud service. According to the analytics, the business organization has depended on three different resources like Data analytics and cloud computing model (Solozabal, et al., 2018).

The edge computing model is being created with the help of advanced technology and LAN or WAN connection. IoT gateway devices are giving adequate support to improve the cloud computing operation within the system (Dreibholz et al., 2019).

When the edge device is combined with cloud computing technology strength of the local storage and processing capacity will be increased in a rapid manner. Edge computing architecture consists of different materials s which have been discussed in this section. The first thing is distributed computing system, the application process, Different device nodes, Rapid increment of data volume, and increasing traffic. Network connectivity has played a vital role by completing the sliced network and bandwidth management system. These are the required components needs to implement in Regional Garden company to provide better service in favor of customers’ requirement.

Advantages and disadvantages to the regional garden:

Advantages:

Cost reduction: Cloud edge solutions bring the opportunity to reduce the cost structure of any organization or firm. Cloud computing services can only charge the amount at the time of installing the software. RG company should only pay at the server time or space in that use(Cao et al., 2017).
Security: Cloud edge solutions is also become helpful to secure customer information. When a customer placed an order, authenticate user can only access those data or information. Cloud providers are always trying to make software updated. Therefore hackers can not able to access the bank account number or purchasing detail of the consumer (Zhang et al., 2018).

Disadvantages:

Downtime: Cloud edge solutions don’t have any cache memory to store the data when there is any power cut. Sometimes mobiles do have not enough power to complete the order in a cloud secure system. Then RG PVT. Ltd should give additional steps to fix such a problem.
Connection scheduling: Scheduling tasks has become challenging for different nodes. Scheduling tasks should be progressed to execute data processing and maintaining the information in a gentle way.

These benefits and limitations had become faced by the regional garden Pvt. Ltd.

Reference:

MBIS4010 Professional Practice in Information Systems Essay Sample

Assessment Description

This assessment task assesses students’ ability to apply theoretical learning to practical, real world situations. The aim is to help students to understand the benefits of ethical values in their professional life. Modern communication technologies allow for the transmission of opinion to a larger and more diverse audience. To what extent should Australian law limit one person's speech to minimize the impact on another? Prepare a business report on this issue that provides a brief historical background of freedom of speech as a universal human right and outlines some examples of where free speech should be limited. Your essay should be a synthesis of ideas researched from a variety of sources and expressed in your own words. It should be written in clear English and be submitted at the end of week 5 in electronic format as either a Word document of a pdf file. This electronic file will be checked using Turnitin for any evidence of plagiarism. You are expected to use references in the normal Harvard referencing style.

Solution

Introduction

The freedom to hold a personal opinion and impart information, ideas, and knowledge without the interference of any public authority correlates with the concept of freedom of speech (French, 2019). The reinforcement of human rights and laws over the concept of freedom of speech declares the non-violence of rights, and the legislations assure some limitations in the freedom of speech (Bejan, 2019). For Assignment Help However, the universal declaration of human rights regarding the freedom of speech is changing its meaning in the modern communication technology-oriented world where transmission of speech to a larger and diverse audience through electronic mediums has been possible. With this respect, the existing essay will show the responsibility of Australian law to limit the freedom of speech to minimize the adverse impact of an individual's speech over others.

Limiting the concept of freedom of speech

The concept of freedom of speech

Articles 19 and 20 in the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights advocate freedom of opinion and expression (Ag, 2021). The right to speech freedom includes both the mediums such as oral and written communications. Apart from it, the broadcasting, media, commercial advertisement, and public protest also correspond with the idea of freedom of speech. Modern communication processes include information technology where the restrictions in freedom of speech consist of restricted access to several web sites, urging violence and classification of the art materials. Article 19(1) advocates for the right to freedom of opinion without any interference, and article 19(2) protects the freedom of speech in various communication mediums, be it media or face-to-face communication. In the information communication technology-oriented world, the exercise of the right to freedom of speech includes several responsibilities. It includes respecting the reputations or rights of others and protecting national security for keeping the sanctity of morality. However, the Australian constitution advocates for freedom from government restraint rather than individual human rights. The Universal Declaration of human rights corresponds with the specific legislation and political rights where Australia favours the UDHR and affirms fundamental human rights, including the freedom of speech (Aph, 2019). The fundamental right to speak freely is built upon a history of human rights where the milestones have developed the current status of human rights in various countries and its universal approach.

Limitations to the freedom of speech and relevant legislation

Article 20 of ICCPR in Australia has some mandatory restrictions for the freedom of speech and expression, which relates to the country's existing Commonwealth and legal statuses in various stages, reservation rights are being prioritized. The Australian law related to human rights regulates the publication, display or promotion, broadcast, and content containing violence. For example, the law interferes in copyright violation where the written medium of communication is protected with the right to privacy, and this restricts the access of other users to the authentic content. However, the active vigilance of the legislation restricts fraudulent attempts to copy the content of a writerwhich is a significant benefit of the ethics.Therefore, the law protects human rights and limits the freedom of speech in both written and oral communication mediums in electronic or technical mediums (Hallberg and Virkkunen, 2017).

The materials involved in a specific kind of media, be it films, written or news, require to be verified and approved by the legislation containing article 20 in Australia. For example, films containing child pornography and obscenities are banned by the censor board. Obscenity can lead to violation of human rights and spread a wrong message in society. Australian government limits the publication of contents containing child pornography and obscenity to ensure proper use of the right to freedom of speech and to ensure the non-violence of human rightswhich benefits the people in the country to remain obedient to the laws. Another example is commercial advertisement or expression through media. Commercial advertisements are also specific media of communication in the technology-oriented world where freedom of speech to portray the wrong content in the advertisement can lead to violence of commercial expression (Gelber, 2021). Article 20 in Australia regulates the expression or advertisement of businesses that might prove harmful to society.The step is considerably beneficial in restricting the wrong messages to theaudience.However, the imposed censorship ensures proper classification of the entertainment content where the law limits freedom of speech for social good.

Freedom of speech is closely related to political uprights in a nation. An individual may not induce political chaos by bringing controversial statements in public. For example, during an individual's political opinion in social media, the freedom of speech is restricted to some extent as the speech of violence and criminality are abolished by the law. The proper regulation and observation of information contained in social media ensure the resolution of political violence occurring from freedom of speech (Howie, 2018). Article 20 ensures the approval of public protest in electronic media as it can instigate turmoil and conflict in people belonging from diverse regions and distant locations, which may result in widespread anger and chaos. To restrict any wrongful protest due to the freedom of speech, the Government blocks the path of access to information. This helps to keep peace in public and political environment in the country.

Declaration of law related to freedom of speech ensures obliteration of racial discrimination and religious conflicts (Stone, 2017). For example, due to the emergence of modern communication technology, people from different regions of the world have the scope to mingle where the opinions related to racial differences may hurt an individual community, which can lead to violation of human rights. In the case of religion, the diverse religious background of people has different faiths over their religions where unlawful and negative comments regarding each others' religious faith can lead to creating sensitive issues. So, article 20 in Australiabenefits the public bysecuring the racial and religious grounds through enforcing strict laws and punishment for violation of human rights.

Conclusion

The positive aspects related to freedom of speech allow an individual to express their valuable ideas and options to the public through using modern communication systems which results in the preservation of social rights and well-being. On the other hand, the negative aspects such as violation of human rights concerning politics, religion, race, and other factors may result in chaos, conflicts, and even criminalization. Therefore, limitations in the rights to freedom of speech and expression are required in specific cases to maintain proper sanctity in social structure. Article 20 in Australia promotes proper protection of human rights through restricting the freedom of speech where it can create significant issues for society.
 
References

BDA60 Big Data and Analytics Sample

Case Study

Big Retail is an online retail shop in Adelaide, Australia. Its website, at which its users can explore different products and promotions and place orders, has more than 100,000 visitors per month. During checkout, each customer has three options: 1) to login to an existing account; 2) to create a new account if they have not already registered; or 3) to checkout as a guest. Customers’ account information is maintained by both the sales and marketing departments in their separate databases. The sales department maintains records of the transactions in their database. The information technology (IT) department maintains the website.

Every month, the marketing team releases a catalogue and promotions, which are made available on the website and emailed to the registered customers. The website is static; that is, all the customers see the same content, irrespective of their location, login status or purchase history.

Recently, Big Retail has experienced a significant slump in sales, despite its having a cost advantage over its competitors. A significant reduction in the number of visitors to the website and the conversion rate (i.e., the percentage of visitors who ultimately buy something) has also been observed. To regain its market share and increase its sales, the management team at Big Retail has decided to adopt a data-driven strategy. Specifically, the management team wants to use big data analytics to enable a customised customer experience through targeted campaigns, a recommender system and product association.

The first step in moving towards the data-driven approach is to establish a data pipeline. The essential purpose of the data pipeline is to ingest data from various sources, integrate the data and store the data in a ‘data lake’ that can be readily accessed by both the management team and the data scientists.

Task Instructions

Critically analyse the above case study and write a 1,500-word report. In your report, ensure that you:

• Identify the potential data sources that align with the objectives of the organisation’s data-driven strategy. You should consider both the internal and external data sources. For each data source identified, describe its characteristics. Make reasonable assumptions about the fields and format of the data for each of the sources;

• Identify the challenges that will arise in integrating the data from different sources and that must be resolved before the data are stored in the ‘data lake.’ Articulate the steps necessary to address these issues;

• Describe the ‘data lake’ that you designed to store the integrated data and make the data available for efficient retrieval by both the management team and data scientists. The system should be designed using a commercial and/or an open-source database, tools and frameworks. Demonstrate how the ‘data lake’ meets the big data storage and retrieval requirements.

• Provide a schematic of the overall data pipeline. The schematic should clearly depict the data sources, data integration steps, the components of the ‘data lake’ and the interactions among all the entities.